ProNest 2019 Manual [PDF]

Zitiervorschau

   

User Manual

COPYRIGHTS © 2019 Hypertherm Inc. All rights reserved. Information in this document is subject to change without notice. The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement or nondisclosure agreement. The software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of those agreements. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or any means electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording for any purpose other than the purchaser’s personal use without the written permission of Hypertherm Inc.   Hypertherm 22 West Main Street Lockport, NY 14094 U.S.A. www.hyperthermCAM.com   TRADEMARKS Hypertherm and ProNest are trademarks of Hypertherm Inc. and may be registered in the United States and/or other countries. Microsoft, Windows, and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Adobe and Adobe Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. HASP is a registered trademark of Aladdin Knowledge Systems Ltd. in the United States and/or other countries.   Rev-1/2/2019.

ProNest 2019 Manual

Table of Contents 1. WELCOME AND WHAT'S NEW Welcome to ProNest What's new in this release

1 1 2

2. INSTALLATION AND LICENSING Installing ProNest Default installation folders Licensing

13 13 14 16

3. SETTINGS What are ProNest settings? What is a ProNest machine? How are settings saved? Using the settings dialog Creating a new machine Editing a machine's settings Saving your machine settings Managing machines Machine settings Editing process settings Add or Remove Processes Select a Post Processor (CFF) Reuse Existing Settings Drilling process settings Process Parameters settings Interior/Exterior Leads settings Interior Leads: Slots settings Cutting Techniques settings Common Line Cut settings Common Line Cut - Plate Edge settings Common Line Cut - Array settings Common Line Cut - Safety Cuts settings Chaining settings Bridging settings AutoTab settings Dynamic Align settings Properties settings Default Class settings Importing Parts settings Importing Parts (Advanced) settings Bevel settings Bevel (Advanced) settings Standard Plate Sizes settings Torches/Heads settings Tooling settings Turret settings Work Zones settings Nesting settings AutoNest settings Pattern Array Strategies AutoNest Strategies

17 17 18 19 20 22 23 24 25 27 28 29 30 31 32 34 37 41 42 43 46 47 50 52 54 56 60 62 63 64 72 75 77 80 82 85 94 98 101 104 107 109

-i-

ProNest 2019 Manual

AutoNest Strategies - Rectangular Optimization AutoNest Strategies - True Shape Optimization settings Cut Sequence settings Cut Sequence: Interior Profile settings Cut Sequence Rules settings Editing a cut sequence rule Collision Avoidance settings Edge Pierce settings Slug Destroy settings Fly Cut settings Skeleton Cut-Up settings Skeleton Cut-Up - Skeleton Grid settings Skeleton Cut-Up - Cut Sequence settings Crop settings Interior Remnants settings Costing settings Export DXF settings CNC Output settings CNC Output - Post Processor settings CNC Output - Pre-Pierces settings CNC Output - Auto Height Control settings CNC Output - Step and Repeat settings CNC Output - Traverse settings CNC Output - Output Axis settings CNC Output - Subroutines settings CNC Output - Microjoint / Plate Handler settings CNC Output - DXF Output settings Job Storage settings

110 112 115 118 123 125 128 132 138 139 142 144 147 148 150 153 154 158 159 169 170 174 176 177 178 180 182 184 185

4. SETTINGS SPREADSHEETS About spreadsheets Using spreadsheets General spreadsheet format Record matching Units conversion Process Parameters spreadsheets User-defined Process Parameters Drill Process Parameters XLS: Format About Cutting Techniques spreadsheets Using Cutting Techniques spreadsheets Cutting Techniques XLS: Column Headers Cutting Techniques XLS: Commands Cutting Techniques XLS: Walkthrough About Interior and Exterior Leads spreadsheets Leads XLS: Format Costing spreadsheets AutoTab spreadsheets Bevel spreadsheets Collision Avoidance spreadsheets Skeleton Cut-Up spreadsheets Crop spreadsheets Pre-Pierces spreadsheets

186 186 187 188 190 193 194 197 198 199 200 202 209 214 217 218 220 222 225 234 237 240 242 - ii -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Slug Destroy spreadsheets Fly Cut spreadsheets

244 246

5. PREFERENCES What are preferences? General preferences Miscellaneous preferences Regional preferences Settings preferences Check for Updates Work Orders preferences Managing Users and Permissions Naming preferences CAD Font preferences 3D CAD Files preferences Warnings preferences Quoting preferences

248 248 250 254 255 257 258 259 261 263 265 266 274 275

6. JOBS What is a job? Creating jobs Opening jobs Saving jobs Job templates Changing your machine Changing materials in your job Job information History data Production Manager

281 281 282 283 285 286 287 288 289 292 293

7. PART LIST What is the part list? The Part List task pane Part properties What is a PNL? Importing/Exporting a PNL Manually generating a PNL (PNL file format) Exporting a part to DXF file About the Edit Part List window Adding parts to the part list Leads properties Nesting properties Utilization and costing properties Preview About CAD files Adding CAD files to the part list CAD Import properties About part token files Reloading parts Bill of Materials (BOM) Buge text marking Importing raster images CAD Cleanup - Simple CAD Cleanup - 2D CAD

296 296 297 300 303 304 305 310 311 313 315 322 327 329 331 333 335 344 345 346 349 350 356 359 - iii -

ProNest 2019 Manual

DSTV files Rules and tips for using the SOLIDWORKS interface Adding SOLIDWORKS parts and assemblies Importing SOLIDWORKS drill holes Adding Inventor parts Rules and tips for using the Inventor interface What is a VSP part? Adding VSP parts VSP Shape Reference Adding a cut-out Assigning cut processes to VSP parts Adding a pipe part to the part list Adding library parts to the part list Adding assemblies to the part list About quality Use quality from a CAD file Assigning quality to a part Setting up quality colors and names Viewing quality values on a nest

361 363 367 369 376 377 382 383 384 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 397

8. PLATE LIST What is the plate list? About the Edit Plate List window Plate properties Adding custom plates to the plate list Custom remnants Adding inventory plates to the plate list Plate reservations What are Safe Zones?

399 399 400 401 403 405 406 407 408

9. ADVANCED EDIT About Advanced Edit Understanding part geometry Working with part geometry Move or recalculate part home Creating output for a single part Modifying the cut sequence within a single part Change part scale Flip leads Split profile Split entity Close open profiles Saving changes to a part Entity properties Profile properties Start point properties Tab properties Loop properties Bevel side view Adding scribe text to a part Variables in scribe text About loops Default loop settings

410 411 412 414 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 429 431 435 438 439 440 442 446 447

- iv -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Working with loops Editing tabs About Part Cut-Up Using Part Cut-Up About Edit Cut Paths mode Using Edit Cut Paths

448 449 451 453 455 457

10. NESTING What is a nest? Creating a new nest Deleting or clearing a nest Adding parts to the nest manually Removing parts from the nest Moving and rotating parts Nested vs. selected parts Multiple torches Clusters Using Edge Pierce Using AutoTab Cut direction Mirror Duplicate Move All Leads Changing how many times a nest is cut Managing nests using nest tabs Exporting a nest to DXF file Why do parts appear in conflict? Checking nests for conflicts Nest properties Separations task pane Nest Background Image How to start automatic nesting Setting up AutoNest Stopping AutoNest

459 459 460 462 464 469 470 476 477 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 490 491 492 493 499 501 503 504 507

11. MODES OF OPERATION What are modes of operation? Select mode Zoom Pan mode Measure mode Cut Simulation mode Modify Leads mode

508 508 509 511 512 513 514 515

12. LEADS How are leads applied in ProNest? Locking leads on a part Importing a part with pre-drawn leads When are leads moved automatically by ProNest?

517 517 518 520 521

13. ARRAYING PARTS About Array How to array parts Dragging to create an array

523 523 526 529

-v-

ProNest 2019 Manual

Pattern Array CLC Array Chain Array Stopping an array

533 535 537 541

14. CUT SEQUENCE About Cut Sequence mode Modifying the cut sequence of a nest

542 542 544

15. CROP What is a crop? Cropping a nest

546 546 546

16. REPORTS Standard reports Using reports Custom reports Colorized reports Batches Reports options Using destinations Printer report destinations PDF report destinations CSV report destinations XLS report destinations HTML report destinations

548 548 550 552 554 555 557 561 563 565 567 568 569

17. OUTPUT Creating NC output The Output dialog How does NC file naming work? The Output Progress dialog Single part output Additional machine output Undo output

570 570 571 574 577 578 579 583

18. COSTING How are costs calculated? Setting up costing in ProNest How is production time calculated? Part area methods used in costing Viewing final costs What is allocated costing? Allocated area Allocated costing formulas How are utilization figures calculated? Where are utilization figures found?

584 584 588 591 593 595 600 601 607 608 614

19. QUOTING About quoting Setting up quoting Creating a new quote Discounts Markups Quote customers

616 616 617 619 621 623 626

- vi -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Entering your organization's information Main Quote page Quote properties Printing, saving, and sending quotes Quote status Working with line items Line Item properties Quote reports Add secondary operations to a line item Remove a secondary operation from a line item Secondary operations properties Secondary operations library

628 629 631 634 636 638 640 643 645 647 648 652

20. MATERIALS About materials Assigning materials to parts Materials editor Material properties Importing ProNest materials from a spreadsheet About material aliases Setting up material aliases Importing material aliases from a spreadsheet Overview of class Using the class selector Viewing technology in use on a nest Selecting a class for plasma Plasma consumables and performance applications Selecting a class for laser Vaporize Selecting a class for Hypertherm waterjet setups

654 654 655 656 658 659 661 662 666 669 671 674 678 681 687 688 690

21. PART LIBRARY About the Part Library Adding parts to the Part Library Assemblies

692 692 693 694

22. PLATE INVENTORY About the Plate Inventory Viewing inventory plate information Adding plates to the plate inventory Creating an inventory plate from a CAD file Modifying inventory plates Importing a CSV file into the plate inventory Exporting an inventory plate to DXF file About remnants and skeletons Saving remnants and skeletons Nesting on inventory remnants and skeletons Interior remnants

695 695 696 698 700 701 702 705 706 707 710 715

23. PIPE What is a pipe part? Pipe Shape Reference Using the pipe preview Adding a tee

717 717 718 719 720

- vii -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Saving and opening pipe parts Assigning cut processes to pipe parts Pipe settings Angled Pipe Ellipse in Rectangle Flange ID OD Ellipse Offset Cone Offset Pipe Rectangle to Round Reducing Elbow Segmented Elbow Straight Pipe Tee into Partial Pipe Trapezoid to Round Y Joint Conical Tee Cylindrical Tee Rectangular Tee Boot Tee Rectangle to Round Tee Elliptical Tee

721 722 723 727 728 729 730 731 733 735 737 739 741 742 743 746 748 750 752 754 756 758

24. SKELETON CUT UP About Skeleton Cut-Up Modifying skeleton lines

760 760 767

25. BRIDGING About Bridge mode Using Bridge mode Positive vs negative bridging About dynamic align bridging Using dynamic align bridging

769 769 771 773 774 777

26. CHAINING About chaining Using chaining

780 780 781

27. COMMON LINE CUTTING (CLC) About common line cutting (CLC) Pair and quad common line cutting Using CLC Array Dynamic align CLC Breaking CLC parts About advanced common line cutting Working CLC clusters Completing a compound CLC group Plate edge CLC About Edit Cut Paths mode Using Edit Cut Paths

783 783 786 789 790 793 795 796 801 803 806 808

28. COLLISION AVOIDANCE About Collision Avoidance mode Modifying collision avoidance paths About slug destroy

810 810 812 815 - viii -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding or removing slug destroy

817

29. ONECLICK About OneClick OneClick Options

819 819 821

30. NESTING SYSTEM OPTIMIZATION Nesting System Optimization Using Nesting System Optimization

825 825 827

31. BEVEL CUTTING About bevel cutting Bevel types Applying beveled edges Blind beveling Gradual bevel About AutoBevel Naming CAD layers for AutoBevel

828 828 829 831 834 836 837 838

32. WORK ORDERS About work orders Importing work orders into ProNest Mapping material names for work orders Work Orders database editor Adding work order parts to the part list Managing work order allocations

840 840 841 842 843 845 846

33. CUSTOMERS Customers editor Customer properties

848 848 849

34. DRILLING About drilling Setting up the Drill Interface Drawing basic drilled parts in CAD Drawing drilled parts with Blocks Tapping Blind drill holes Countersinking About the tool library Tool Library: Drill Tools Compound tools Missing tools Creating a tool library The Turret task pane Modifying turret layouts for a nest Viewing the drill profile sequence Verifying tool assignments for holes Changing tool assignments for holes Pre-piercing with drill tools Accounting for tooling in costing Tips for getting the drill sequence you want

850 850 851 853 855 858 862 864 871 872 875 880 882 884 886 889 891 893 897 899 902

35. FLY CUT About fly cutting Using fly cutting

904 904 907 - ix -

ProNest 2019 Manual

36. VIEWS How to use grids Using grid filters Color Legend Color Legend Options Using variables Shortcuts and key tips Menu and toolbar legacy reference

909 909 911 914 918 921 923 927

37. CONFIGURATION ARCHIVES What is a configuration archive? The Configuration Archives dialog Creating a new archive Restoring an archive Sending an archive to Technical Support

934 934 935 936 937 938

38. USERS AND PERMISSIONS User account basics Managing Users and Permissions User options

939 939 941 943

39. CONTACT US Locations Technical Support Sales

944 944 946 947

INDEX

948

-x-

ProNest 2019 Manual

1. WELCOME AND WHAT'S NEW Welcome to ProNest ProNest® is Hypertherm’s flagship nesting software, reflecting our commitment to software solutions that are not only powerful, but are also easy to learn and use. ProNest nesting software can quickly be downloaded and authorized via the Internet, and the intuitive interface allows even the most inexperienced user to navigate the application with ease. Operational readiness is typically reached within a few hours - a fraction of what it would with our competitors' software.   ProNest has the power to easily manage the most demanding nesting and programming applications, including plasma, laser, oxyfuel, or waterjet.    l See what's new in this release of ProNest  l Explore ProNest settings  l Explore ProNest preferences  l Explore the part list  l Read about nesting  l Read about materials  l Learn about class and process knowledge

-1-

ProNest 2019 Manual

What's new in this release ProNest 2019 includes powerful new features and enhancements that improve the quality and efficiency of your output, while greatly simplifying the user interface. Click the link at the top to read what's new in this release, or select another link to view enhancements from previous versions.

Current version: ProNest 2019 v13.0  

Previous versions: ProNest 2017 v12.1 ProNest 2017 v12.0 ProNest 2015 v11.1 ProNest 2015 v11.0

ProNest 2019 v13.0 Raster to vector ProNest can import raster image files and convert them to vector part files that can be cut on your machine.   The following image file formats can be imported: PNG, JPG, JPEG, BMP, and GIF.   New settings enable you to fine-tune the image prior to import, to get the best result. Once the image has been converted to a part, it can be nested and output. For images that will be cut more than once, you can easily save a vector version of the part in the part library or save it as a DXF or DWG file using 2D CAD.   Manual Nesting: Smart Drag Manual nesting is now much more fluid and intuitive. With existing parts on the nest, fitting in parts along the contours of other nested parts and the plate edges is much easier.   When dragging a part on the nest, the part will bump up against existing parts or plate edges and then rotate to fit. You can glide the part along edges of neighboring parts to get the best result. This makes it easy to fit parts into empty spaces on the nest, without the need to manually rotate the part to just to right angle.   Benefits include:  l Faster and easier to create tighter nests during manual nesting  l Achieve better plate utilization, especially when nesting around the contours of larger parts   This feature can be quickly turned on or off in the main window.   Ignore leads during nesting You can ignore only certain leads during nesting, based on whether they’re smaller than a user-defined percentage of the part separation.   This is useful in cases where some leads/pierces are insignificant and should not affect the spacing between parts, but others are larger and should not be ignored, in case they cause real conflicts with neighboring parts.   Lead styles

-2-

ProNest 2019 Manual Any lead style is available and can be selected in all areas of ProNest, including the Edit Part List, the main window, and the Leads settings spreadsheet. Previously, custom lead styles had to be applied manually in Advanced Edit.   Fly cutting Designed for laser cutting on thin materials, fly cutting is a method of cutting the aligned edges of different interior profiles together in a straight line. Pierces are made without slowing down or stopping the cutting head.   This technique provides faster cutting with fewer slowdowns required by changes of direction. Mechanical stress on the machine is reduced as the head is not making numerous changes in cut direction (compared with cutting interiors one by one).   Fly cutting straight edges ProNest supports fly cutting for grids of various shapes, including square/rectangular, triangular, hexagonal, octagonal, and mixed.   Fast cutting arcs For grids of aligned circles or slots, a similar fast cutting technique is used. Unlike with straight edges, these interiors are cut one by one, but pierces are still made without slowing down or stopping the cutting head.   Skeleton Cut-Up: Integrate sequence with parts A new setting, Integrate skeleton lines with parts, allows skeleton lines and exterior part profiles to be cut together in groups. All skeleton lines intersecting the exterior profile will be cut first, followed by the exterior profile.   Selecting this setting can reduce part defects due to plate movement and lessen the chance of collisions with tipped-up parts.   Breadcrumbs style folder navigation Several areas in ProNest now use a more modern breadcrumb style folder explorer, making it faster and easier to browse for folders and files.   Pin lead styles When selecting leads, commonly used lead styles can now be pinned to the top of the list, for quick access.   Assembly information  l If a part belongs to a ProNest assembly, the assembly name is now displayed in the Properties pane in the main window.  l Assembly name can now be selected when color-filling parts based on a part property.   Safe zones A default safe zone scheme can now be applied for an entire machine. The default safe zones are applied to all plates, prior to nesting. For machines that have stops or clamps to hold the plate in place, you no longer have to apply a safe zone scheme each time a new nest is created or a plate is added to the plate list.  l You can specify a maximum material thickness to use default safe zones, which is useful for thicker plate that may not require clamps.   Design2Fab Integration Roundtrip Design2Fab integration has been added to ProNest, enabling you to leave a ProNest job, add fittings in Design2Fab and return to the ProNest job with the patterns added to the part list, ready for nesting and NC output. (Introduced in ProNest 2017 version 12.1.3.)   History database performance improvements For ProNest 2019, history data is stored in the main production database, instead of an external History database. History views are now schema-bound, resulting in several benefits:  l Faster queries that run against both production and history data, particularly on databases with lots of history data.  l Prevention of unauthorized or accidental database changes.  l Faster installation of ProNest database. -3-

ProNest 2019 Manual   SOLIDWORKS® Interface For some sheet metal parts, ProNest automatically creates additional bend lines which are placed parallel to and on either side of a main bend line. Previously, these bend lines were always placed on the same layer as the main bend line during import. Now, you can have these bend lines placed on a different layer from the main bend line, in case they should be mapped to a different process or excluded altogether.   Work orders: Re-using nests For cases where the same parts are cut repeatedly, you can now process the same nest over and over using different Work Orders for the parts in the nest. This allows nests that have good utilization and productivity to be re-used as needed.   Production Manager Improvements to the Production Manager module include:  l A new preference allows nesting on remnants before the original nest is completed  l Production Manager editor is now available from the Data tab in ProNest or as a shortcut in the Windows Start menu.  l Production Manager editor has a newer look and feel.  l Production Kiosk time data is shown in the grid view.   Production Kiosk The Production Kiosk (formerly called “Kiosk App”) has a number of improvements:  l Kiosk production data, including machine, operator, start/stop time, and elapsed time, is now available in the ProNest database.  l Multiple machines are supported.  l Current nests in production can be temporarily placed on hold, in case a priority job needs to be cut.  l Multiple instances of the Production Kiosk application can be run from a single PC.  l Plate size and inventory information is displayed for available nests.  l Redesigned user interface for better ease of use.   STRUMIS Nesting System Optimization for STRUMIS now supports the "Must nest all parts" setting. When selected, all optimization results are discarded unless all parts can be nested. (Originally introduced in ProNest 2017 12.1.1).

ProNest 2017 v12.1 Dynamic Align Create a connected column or row of rectangular parts, aligned on one side. Aligned parts can be connected with a common line or bridge. This feature requires the Chain and Bridge Cutting or Common Line Cutting module. Parts can be quickly bumped together manually on the nest into dynamic align columns or rows. Dynamic align parts can also be created during automatic nesting. Common Line Cutting Dynamic align for common line cut parts reduces programming time needed to create CLC nests. Benefits include:  l Manually bump parts together to create finished CLC groups, without creating working CLC clusters.  l Unlike CLC array, dissimilar parts can be combined in dynamic align CLC rows and/or columns.  l Dynamic align CLC parts created during automatic nesting can have sub-columns of parts (rows of smaller parts common line cut in the same column as a larger part). Bridge Cutting Bridge cutting with dynamic align is a special bridging technique designed to do several things:  l Move bridged parts very close together, to maximize material utilization. The kerf typically overlaps partially into previously cut kerf.  l Extend a negative bridge past the aligned part edges. This reduces blemishes left by bridge tabs.

-4-

ProNest 2019 Manual  l Complete the final cut along the alignment edge to drop all parts. The negative bridge is consumed by the kerf on the final cut. This also ensures that parts will drop as the cutting head moves away from them, reducing the chance of collisions. Plate processor machines (such as Peddinghaus) can complete the final cut across multiple parts on the alignment edge.   Negative Bridge Extensions Negative bridges applied at the corners of parts can overlap the part edge. This reduces blemishes on part edges left by bridge tabs.   Common Line Cut Paths Cut rectangular parts by column For plate processor machines (such as Peddinghaus), a new CLC cut path approach designed especially for large grids of CLC parts cuts straight lines spanning multiple parts in continuous passes instead of part-by-part. Sequencing of surrounded CLC parts In CLC groups where parts are surrounded by other parts, the cut sequence now starts with the innermost parts and moves outward. This reduces traverse distance and production time, while ensuring the correct drop order.   Output for Multiple Machines You can create NC output files for one or more additional machines at the same time you create output for the current ProNest machine. This is useful when the current real-world machine is down or unavailable but there are other machines with similar processes that can cut the nest.   Data Sync Export data Data Sync Manager now includes export tasks, which can be configured to send nest history data from ProNest back to the ERP system via XLS, XLSX, CSV, or XML file. Benefits include:  l Create and configure Export tasks  l Customize data reported using SQL query builder  l Schedule export  l Send nest data about work orders, inventory consumed, and remnants/skeletons created  l Browser-based viewer shows import and export logs by date  l View database connection on main screen of Data Sync Manager Import XML Work order and plate inventory import tasks can now use XML files for source data.   STRUMIS Support for StruMIS v10.1 has been added. Previously-created nests can be recalled through StruMIS to be re-nested with part list changes or be filled with additional parts.   Cutting Techniques: Kerf Crossing New cutting techniques control what happens when the cutting head crosses a previously-cut kerf width during common line cutting, bridge cutting, and skeleton cut-up. This can be used for various applications, including disabling automatic height control at kerf crossings.   Class Selection For Hypertherm XPR setups the Class selector now includes a cut quality indicator, showing the predicted cut quality for each choice.   Cut Sequence by Part When Cut Sequence Rules are in use, a new setting allows all cut profiles on a part to be completed before the sequence moves on to the next part. This is useful for machines with multiple cut processes.   SOLIDWORKS Interface: Bevel Detection Identify beveled edges on SOLIDWORKS® parts and automatically assign ProNest beveling to them during import. Single and multi-pass beveling is supported. -5-

ProNest 2019 Manual   Inventor Interface: Bevel Detection Identify beveled edges on Inventor® parts and automatically assign ProNest beveling to them during import. Single-pass beveling is supported.   Drill Machine Interface Several new enhancements are available for drill-capable machines (originally introduced in ProNest v12.0.2). Advanced Edit  l Change drill tool assignment. In Advanced Edit, you can change the drill tool assigned to any hole, regardless of the hole’s size.  l Change profile to any process. Any round interior cut or scribe profile can be converted to a drill hole. Likewise, drill profiles can be converted to the cut, scribe or punch process. Additionally, cut profiles of any shape can be converted to scribes or punches. Scribe profiles can be converted to cut or punch profiles.  l More tool attributes now displayed. Additional tool information is now displayed for a selected drill hole, including tool diameter, pilot tool and whether it is a compound or missing tool. Countersinking ProNest can bring in countersinking information from a CAD drawing, assign countersinking tools from the tool library at the required depth and include countersink instructions in output code. Turret A new setting is available which automatically sorts tools in the turret from smallest to largest, so that the smallest diameter tool hits are sequenced first, followed by the next smallest tool hits, and so on. Reorder stations in the turret Stations can now be reordered in the turret, to control the drill sequence when there are default tools which can’t be moved to different stations. Tool matching If there are multiple tools of the same diameter, a default tool in a station will be selected before any other tool of that diameter.   Assembly From the part list, you can quickly add one or more parts to an existing assembly or create a new assembly from them.   Jobs and Machines Significant speed improvements have been made for starting new jobs, opening existing jobs, changing machines, and saving settings. Loading settings spreadsheets has been optimized, making job and settings-related operations faster than in previous versions.

ProNest 2017 v12.0   Manual Nesting Improvements Several new features make manually nesting parts easier and more efficient:  l Drag Array With drag array, you can quickly place parts in a pattern array inside of a rectangular region on the nest. You can create different array configurations as you drag the mouse around and see the results on the nest instantly.    l Anchored Parts When manually nesting parts, dragging, double-clicking, or pressing ENTER to add a part to the nest can be time consuming if you have many copies of the part to nest. A new setting on the Part List pane called Anchor part to cursor will affix the currently highlighted part to the mouse cursor, enabling you to repeatedly drop and intelligently bump the part with a single click.    l Automatic Bumping A new, more intelligent automatic bumping method is now used during manual nesting. Automatic bumping is no longer limited to a single corner of the nest with only two bump directions in sequential order (for instance, Left then Up). ProNest now tries several bump directions in various different orders and uses the best result based on fit and material utilization. -6-

ProNest 2019 Manual   Automatic nesting improvements  l Single part automatic nesting If you have the Automatic Nesting module, double-clicking a part in the part list or pressing ENTER will place it using automatic nesting so that it fits snugly into an existing empty area of the nest.    l Better nesting of v-shaped parts Using a new diagonal nesting approach, large v-shaped parts (with an acute angle) are now automatically nested with greater plate utilization.   Color By Part Property In the color legend, outline colors and fill colors can now be set separately from one another. Also, parts can be color-filled according to a particular part property. Parts with different values for that property will be filled with different colors. You can also highlight every instance of a specific part on the nest, in order to quickly locate it.   Colorized Reports Several standard reports now show fill colors in part images. These reports also have a color legend/key for your reference. This is particularly useful if you are also using the Color by a Part Property feature in ProNest.   Native 64-bit Support ProNest is now available as either a 32-bit or 64-bit application. The 64-bit version of ProNest software can be run on a 64-bit CPU/Operating System and take advantage of the extra accessible memory. Previously, ProNest was only available as a 32-bit application.   Licensing When multiple ProNest sessions are running on a single PC, only one network license seat is now required for that PC. Previously, a separate network license seat was required for each instance of ProNest that was open on a single PC.   Drill Post Integration For combination plasma or oxyfuel machines that incorporate drilling, tapping, and other spindle operations, all drilling functionality is now fully integrated into the main ProNest interface. The new Drill Machine Interface module is designed to be seamless, intuitive, and easy to use, so that you can efficiently tackle jobs requiring drilling and other vertical machining directly in ProNest.   Compatibility with advanced features  l Bevel and True Bevel™ are compatible with all drill-enabled setups  l True Hole® and any other CFF based performance applications are fully supported.   Output Output all nests at once using the Output dialog.   Turret  l Model your machine’s automatic tool changer directly in the ProNest Settings dialog.  l Full support for station types lets you limit tools to compatible stations.  l A new Turret pane in the main nesting window shows you available stations and tool assignments. Simply drag and drop to reorder tools to get the layout that you want for any nest.   Tool Library A completely redesigned Tool Library editor is available right in the Settings dialog. Add all available drill and other spindle tools that can be used by your machine.  l Data entry is now very easy and handles inch or metric tools. Fractional tool sizes (such as 29/64”) can be entered directly and saved to the library.  l Compound/multi-op tools are now entered on a separate tab in the tool library.

-7-

ProNest 2019 Manual  l Any tool in a compound tool can have a depth value, which can be used to drill blind (non-through) holes.  l Any individual tool in the tool library can now have an associated pilot drill/pre-drill tool. Whenever that individual tool is assigned during import, the pilot tool is automatically assigned along with it.  l Tap tools can have a pilot drill (tap pre-drill), which is automatically assigned whenever the tap tool is assigned.  l Missing Tools can now be quickly converted to individual drill tools in the tool library.   Importing Parts  l Drill tools are assigned to holes when a part is imported.  l After import, you can inspect the tool assigned to each hole in the part from Advanced Edit.  l If multiple tools are within tolerance for a hole, now the closest size tool is assigned.   Nesting  l Reorder tools that are loaded in the turret layout from the main window for any nest.  l Immediate feedback if parts can't be nested due to tooling constraints.  l A new setting called Allow multiple turret layouts for a nest lets you allow/disallow nests that would require turret stations to be reloaded.   Sequencing Drill sequencing settings have moved to the main Settings dialog. After editing drill sequence settings, the results are visible immediately upon exiting settings.   Cut simulation Verify the drill sequence immediately at the profile level using Cut Simulation mode in the main nesting window.   Collision Avoidance The Collision Avoidance module is now compatible with drill-capable machines. Collision avoidance paths are now established after drill sequencing settings are applied, resulting in a much more direct traversals.   Reports A new standard Tooling Layout report shows nest properties, an image of the nest, and details the tool to station assignments required to complete all tooling on the nest.   Costing  l Drilling process settings are now available as a separate tab in the Costing settings page  l Use Activation Cost to set a “Cost per hit” for a tool by material based on the tool’s estimated life expectancy.   Pre-piercing  l User-defined pre-pierce drill tool can be assigned nest-by-nest using the Turret pane.  l Pre-pierced lead-ins are now trimmed so that the start of lead-in begins right at the edge of the pre-pierce hole.   Documentation The ProNest Help has moved from HTML Help format (CHM) to a new, easier-to-use Help system that opens locally using your default web browser.   Modules and Standard Features  l Bridge Cutting and Chain Cutting have been combined into a single optional module. If you own either module, you will now have access to both Chain Cutting and Bridge Cutting.

ProNest 2015 v11.1 -8-

ProNest 2019 Manual   Quoting With the new Quoting feature you can easily create itemized quotes for any ProNest job. Using baseline material and production costs that are calculated by ProNest, quotes can account for secondary operations, markups and discounts to provide itemized (by part) and total prices for a job.  l Secondary operations (such as bending, grinding, welding, painting, shipping, etc.) can be assigned to individual parts in the job.  l Markups can be applied to material or production costs for quotes, parts, or secondary operations, helping you track estimated net profit for a job.  l Discount rates can be applied by customer. You can also set up quantity discounts for any item.  l Costing methods can be set up to match your organization’s needs.  l Customer-facing and internal quotes are available and can be branded with your organization’s logo.   Improved Class Selection After selecting a material type and thickness in ProNest, the available classes can contain a lot of information about consumables and associated cutting parameters as well as performance applications such as True Hole®.   Now when you click the Class box after selecting a Material, a class selector will appear, helping you sort through these choices. Using this selector, you can:  l Compare cut speeds/feedrates of different class choices  l Filter choices by technology and performance applications.   Default Class In the Settings dialog you can assign a default class for any material type and thickness. With a default class set, when you select a material type and thickness in ProNest, that class will automatically be selected as well.   View Technology on the Nest A Technology panel has been added to the main screen, indicating when performance applications (such as True Hole®) or other technologies (Fine Feature, HDi, Moving Pierce, etc.) are currently in use on a nest. You can also quickly identify nested parts that have been beveled.   Waterjet Pierces Support for four new pierce types for waterjet machines is now available. For many waterjet cutting applications, a moving pierce cuts through material more quickly than a standard pierce because the machine motion clears the cut of the abrasive and material debris.   Available waterjet pierce types include: Dynamic, Circle, Wiggle, and Stationary.   Quality Colors Designed primarily for waterjet setups, quality is much more visible throughout ProNest.  l Color parts according to quality values Parts on a nest, in the part list, and in Advanced Edit can be colored according to quality values. This can be helpful when visually verifying the quality of parts. Hovering over a quality value in the Color Legend will highlight it on the nest.    l Quality Colors and Aliases Each quality number can have a color and descriptive name (such as "Coarse", "Fine", etc.) assigned to it. You can change colors and aliases assigned to quality numbers from the main screen or in Preferences.   2D CAD: Color Selection 2D CAD now displays standard index color numbers 1-7 in the drop-down Color list. For waterjet applications where color numbers are used to indicate quality, this makes it much easier to set the color numbers for objects in your drawing.   Material Aliases

-9-

ProNest 2019 Manual ProNest materials can now use an alias - an alternate name by which the material can be identified. This can be useful if outside of ProNest, you name and organize materials differently from the format used in the Process Parameters spreadsheets.   With aliases set up, material information in a part file (BOM), work order, ERP/MRP import file, or PNL can be automatically identified and matched to the right ProNest material during import. Grade mapping is also supported.   Interior Cut-Up Interior cut-up helps eliminate the chance of head-to-part collisions by slicing up interior cutouts into small fragments during cutting so that they fall through the slats of the table.   Interior Cut-Up is designed primarily for laser machines at material thicknesses 0.375 in. (10 mm) and lower.   Display Cut Paths for Collision Avoidance Traverse paths showing full and partial raises of the cutting head can now be viewed without having to enter Collision Avoidance mode.   AutoCrop Improvements AutoCrop using the “Find the best profile crop” method will produce better crop lines that conform more closely to nested parts. The new method also handles cases where multiple crop lines are needed to produce multiple remnants from a single nest.   Change Materials Prior to Output You can now access the Change Materials dialog directly from the CNC Output dialog (on the Tools button). This is useful if you need to make quick last-minute changes to materials, particularly class, without having to un-nest all of those parts in the job.   Improved SOLIDWORKS® Assembly Import When you double-click a SOLIDWORKS assembly in the Edit Part List window, a new assembly explorer view will open in the Part Sources pane.   In the assembly explorer, you can:  l Exclude certain parts when an assembly is added  l Preview each part in the assembly  l Change the configuration used for any part in an assembly   AutoDesk® Inventor® A new preferences page lets you set options for importing Inventor parts. Set the coordinate system name, automatically detect part thickness, import sheet metal parts only, and include or exclude construction geometry using these new preferences.   FabTrol Pro® Support FabTrol Pro, the successor to FabTrol MRP, is now fully supported in ProNest. The FabTrol Pro Interface module enables data exchange between ProNest and FabTrol Pro’s Plate Manager. Remnant plates can be brought into ProNest via Inquiry file for nesting. Remnants created in ProNest, including detailed remnant geometry, can be sent back to FabTrol for future use.   StruM.I.S.® Integration ProNest's StruM.I.S Interface module provides improved job management to companies using both ProNest and StruM.I.S. StruM.I.S users can send parts and plates to ProNest for nesting, ensuring optimal material utilization. Nesting results are immediately available in StruM.I.S via seamless integration.  

ProNest 2015 v11.0   Ribbon

- 10 -

ProNest 2019 Manual ProNest 2015 includes a new ribbon interface, which is designed to help you quickly find the ProNest commands that you need by including bigger, more visible controls with text labels that are organized in logical groups. Benefits include:  l Simplified access making ProNest features easier to find.  l Mode-sensitive ribbon that shows only relevant controls.  l Each control in the ribbon has hint text containing a short description of the item.  l A Quick Access toolbar at the top of the main window contains commonly used items that can be accessed with a single click. A cross reference of ProNest 2012 menus and toolbars is available to help you get familiar with the interface.   Nest Tabs In the main window, each nest now has its own tab which displays nest name and material used. Using tabs, you can:  l Easily navigate the nests in the job.  l Reorder nests by clicking and dragging tabs to the desired location. For instance, if you want to move a nest that is currently nest 3 of 3 so that it is nest 2 of 3, simply drag the nest tab to the desired position.  l Insert a new nest before or after any existing nest in the job.  l Hover over the tab of a non-active nest to show a thumbnail image of that nest.   DXF Export for Parts and Nests Parts and single nests can now be exported directly to DXF file, without installing a special DXF Polyline setup or changing machines.   XLS Settings Spreadsheets For situations where default settings are not able to provide the required flexibility, settings spreadsheets are now available for:  l Skeleton Cut-Up  l Pre-Pierces  l Crop  l Collision Avoidance   Check for Conflicts A new control enables you to check the nests in your job for conflicts. You can repeatedly click the Check for Conflicts button to cycle through all the conflicts that are found.   Job Templates Use any existing job as a template for a new job. If you commonly use old jobs as a starting point when creating a new job, this is a useful feature that simplifies this process.   Recent Jobs In the backstage view of the new ribbon interface (on the File tab), a Recent jobs page has been added. This page contains an expanded list of recent ProNest jobs, as well as recent folder paths for job files.   Plate Inventory: DXF Export Any inventory plate can be quickly exported to a DXF file. This is especially useful for remnant plates with irregular geometry that need to be corrected in a CAD program and re-imported back into inventory.   Clear Nest You can now remove all parts from a nest while leaving the blank plate behind as an empty nest. The empty nest will remain in the main window for future nesting.   CAD Import: Recent Places A new button on the CAD tab of the Edit Part List shows recent folders that CAD files were added from. This can help you quickly find frequently used folders when adding parts.   Machine Manager

- 11 -

ProNest 2019 Manual For users that have several ProNest machines (setups) installed, a new Machine Manager dialog provides a central place where you can:  l View properties and associated files for installed machines  l Edit any machine's settings  l Change machines  l Copy, rename, or delete machines   Shortcuts Extensive keyboard shortcuts and keytips (visible by pressing the ALT key) are now available in major areas in the application.   AutoNest: IntelliChoice Strategy A new method of automatic nesting is now available, designed to make advanced level nesting decisions based on the available parts in the part list. IntelliChoice is a flexible approach that can choose between different nesting strategies, different part sets and different regions of the nest to achieve optimal nesting results.   IntelliChoice can be selected as a standard nesting strategy on the AutoNest settings page or on the AutoNest Setup dialog.   Preferences: Reapplying Leads Using a new preference, you can set a default for modifying leads when changing machines. This eliminates the need to make a selection each time you change the machine for a job. Another newly added preference lets you control whether to be prompted to reapply leads when changing the material of a part in the part list.   News Feed in ProNest News related to ProNest and Hypertherm CAD/CAM software is now available directly in ProNest. A notification button on the status bar indicates when news is available and can be clicked to open a reading pane where you can browse articles.   SQL 2012 Support Microsoft SQL Server 2012 is fully supported in ProNest 2015.   Installation Improvements  l SQL Express LocalDB, a simpler and improved version of SQL Express, is now the default database engine that is installed with ProNest. LocalDB includes a minimal set of files necessary to start the SQL Server Database Engine, while still using the T-SQL language.  l The size of the ProNest setup.exe file has been reduced by about 33% down to about 490 MB. This makes downloading ProNest over the web faster.   Size Format for Parts and Plates You can now change how length and width dimensions for plates and parts are displayed in ProNest. Using the new Size format preference, part and plate dimensions can be shown as either "Length × Width" or "Width × Length".   Modules and Standard Features  l OneClick is now a standard feature available to all ProNest users. OneClick is a powerful production module that automates various tasks in a ProNest job, from automatic nesting to cropping to creating output and printing reports.  l Custom Remnants is now a standard feature. With Custom Remnants, you can enter the dimensions of an irregular plate or remnant and then nest on that plate.  l Variable Multi-Head Cutting is now a standard feature. This allows the number of torches and torch spacing to be adjusted automatically based on the size of the part being nested.  l Advanced Common Line Cutting (CLC) is now included with the basic Common Line Cutting module. Common line cutting at the most advanced level allows any combination of parts to share common lines with one another part or with the plate edge.  l The SmartMarine 3D Interface has been removed.

- 12 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

2. INSTALLATION AND LICENSING System requirements

Installing ProNest Important:

 l Before installing ProNest, be sure that you have logged in as the system administrator. Otherwise, ProNest cannot install properly.  l Do not plug the HASP hardware key (

) into your computer until after you have installed ProNest.

To install ProNest from a download link:  1. Download setup.exe for ProNest. The download link would be provided by Hypertherm.  2. Close all programs.  3. Run the executable file.  4. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation.   To install ProNest from a disc:  1. Close all programs.  2. Insert the disc labeled ProNest into your DVD drive. If Autorun is enabled on your system, the installation starts automatically and you can skip steps 3 and 4.  3. From the Start menu, select Run.  4. Type D:\setup (substitute the appropriate letter of your DVD drive for D).  5. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation.   To view the default installation folders for ProNest files, see Default installation folders.

- 13 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Default installation folders File Settings spreadsheets

Extension .xls, .xlsx

Description

Folder

AutoTab XLS

C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Settings\AutoTab

Bevel XLS

C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Settings\Bevel

Costing XLS

C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Settings\Costing

Cutting Techniques XLS

C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Settings\CuttingTechniques

Lead Styles XLS

C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Settings\LeadStyles

Process Parameters XLS

C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Settings\ProcessParameters

Collision Avoidance XLS

C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Settings\CollisionAvoidance

Crop XLS

C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Settings\Crop

Pre-Pierces XLS

C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Settings\PrePierces

Skeleton Cut-Up XLS

C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Settings\SkeletonCutUp

Interior Cut-Up XLS

C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Settings\InteriorCutUp

Configuration archives

.pn, .pnca

Configuration archive files

C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Configuration Archives

Sample CAD files

.dxf, .dgn, .igs, .nc1  

Sample CAD files installed with ProNest

C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Examples

Macros

.mli, .mtl, .mlo, .mti

Macros

C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\Macros

Plate Inventory tokens

.tok

Remnants, skeletons, certain inventory plates

C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Inventory

- 14 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

File

Extension

Description

Folder

Part Library tokens

.tok

Library parts

C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Inventory

Nest images

.png

Nest image files

C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Nest Images

Safe zones

.sfz

Safe zone schemes

C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019

Machine configuration files

.cfg

ProNest machines and their settings

C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Settings\Machines

CNC decoders

.cif

CNC decoder files

C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\CIF

Post processors

.cff

Post processor files

C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\CFF

Reports

.fr3

Standard and custom reports

C:\ProgramData\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019\Reports (FastReport)

- 15 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Licensing Your copy of ProNest came with a removable HASP hardware key ( be plugged in for ProNest to work.

). This security key contains your license information and must

Important: Be sure to keep your HASP key in a safe place. If lost or stolen, a replacement fee will be required.

Local license If you have a local ProNest license (ProNest will be used on only one PC at a time):  l After installing ProNest, simply plug the HASP key into your computer's USB port. ProNest can now be run on your PC, as long as the HASP key remains plugged in.

Network license If you have purchased a network license, you will need to designate a computer as the network license server. The network license server will use your HASP key to manage the allocation of licenses for all ProNest clients.   Note that the network license server is not required to have ProNest installed on it.   Setting up the network license server If the network license server will have ProNest installed on it, simply install ProNest and then plug your HASP key into the USB port of that PC. Your network license will be ready for use.   If the network license server will not have ProNest installed on it, you should install and run the stand-alone License Manager utility on that PC.   To install License Manager:  1. Close all programs.  2. Insert the DVD labeled ProNest into the DVD drive of the network license server.  3. Browse to D:\Utilities (substitute the appropriate letter of your DVD drive for D).  4. Double-click LicenseMgrSetup.exe.  5. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation. Once installation is complete, plug your HASP key into the USB port of the network license server. Your network license will be ready for use.

- 16 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

3. SETTINGS What are ProNest settings? ProNest settings control almost every aspect of nesting - from importing parts to nesting to generating NC output. They can be configured to automatically adjust for different processes and materials. In this way, a single settings configuration can be used for a wide range of cutting applications.   Settings are represented by a ProNest machine.  To learn more about ProNest machines, see "What is a ProNest machine?" on page 18  

- 17 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

What is a ProNest machine? ProNest's ultimate task is to generate NC output that is tailored to a specific machine controller. ProNest achieves this by using a ProNest machine. A ProNest machine contains all the appropriate settings for generating output that is correct for a specific machine controller.   It also contains settings that control everything from importing parts to automatic nesting to assigning a cut sequence. Tip:

Create a ProNest machine for every different machine controller you need to generate output for. This way, each ProNest machine has settings that match its intended controller. If you ever need to output a job for a different controller, you can simply change machines and generate your output.

To create a new machine, see "Creating a new machine" on page 22. To edit the settings in your current machine, see "Editing a machine's settings" on page 23. To save your machine settings, see "Saving your machine settings" on page 24.   A machine's settings are loaded during the following operations:   New Job Creating a new job will cause ProNest to start with a fresh copy of settings. It will reload settings from the .cfg when you create a new job.   Open Job Contained in every job (.nif) is a copy of settings that existed when the job was last saved. If you open a job and select Restore settings from Job, then the settings found in the job are recreated.   Change Machine Changing the current machine will cause ProNest to discard the current machine settings and then reload all settings from the machine that is selected.   Restore (from the Settings dialog) Restoring your settings will cause ProNest to reload all settings from the .cfg. Note: Once settings have been loaded into memory, all changes are temporary. To make them permanent, you must save your settings.

- 18 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

How are settings saved? Settings are saved in several different files. Together, these files provide all the information ProNest needs to import parts, create nests, and generate output.   Name

ProNest Machine

Post Processor

Settings Spreadsheets

File Extension

Description

.cfg

Most machine settings are stored in the .cfg file (machine configuration file). The name of this file matches exactly with the name of the machine. For example, settings for a machine called 'Demo Plasma Machine' will be stored in a file called 'Demo Plasma Machine.cfg'.     Where are machine configuration files stored? (see "Default installation folders" on page 14)   The location of the Machine folder can be edited in Preferences on the Settings page.

.cff

The post processor (CFF) is a low-level settings file that describes a particular real-world machine controller. Post processors are rarely modified and cannot be modified through ProNest. Most of the post processor contains simple code for generating CNC Output. It also defines many properties of the controller - like the names of available processes.   Where are post processors stored? (see "Default installation folders" on page 14)   The  location of the post processor folder can be edited in Preferences on the Settings page. ProNest settings can be configured to rely on simple spreadsheets. A settings spreadsheet allows certain settings to vary by a variety of conditions. One .xls file, for example, might define lead settings for a variety of different materials and thicknesses. There are several different settings spreadsheet types:    l AutoTab  l Bevel  l Collision Avoidance  l Costing  l Crop

.xls

 l  l  l  l  l  l

Cutting Techniques Lead Styles Microjoint / Plate Handler Process Parameters Skeleton Cut-Up CNC Output - Pre-Pierces

  Where are settings spreadsheets stored? (see "Default installation folders" on page 14)   The location of each of the spreadsheet folders can be edited in Preferences on the Settings page.    

- 19 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Using the settings dialog To open the Settings dialog:  l In the Quick Access toolbar, click Settings. -or 1. On the File menu, click Info.  2. Click Machine, then click Settings. -or l Click the machine in the status bar and then click Settings.

General Layout The settings dialog is split into two main sections: the tree-view and the settings page.  

  There are over 40 different settings pages available through this dialog. To keep them organized, they are presented as items in the treeview on the left-hand side of the dialog. To view and edit the settings for a particular page, find the item in the tree-view and click it.

- 20 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Using the Tree-view Every settings page is listed in the tree-view. Some pages in the tree-view are not always visible because they are contained underneath other pages as sub-items. You can expand the list of sub-items by double-clicking an item.  

  This will expand the tree-view to show all the sub-items directly underneath the item.  

  Double-click the item again to hide the sub-items.

The Buttons There are five buttons at the bottom of the settings dialog:   Button

Action when clicked

Save

Saves all settings changes to the .cfg file.  Until settings are explicitly saved, all changes are temporary. Saves your current settings under a different name.  This will create a new machine and make it your current machine. Restores all settings from the .cfg file.  Use this in case you have made settings changes that you wish to discard. Keeps your settings changes and closes the settings dialog. Discards your settings changes and closes the settings dialog.

Save As... Restore OK Cancel

Note:

If the Settings dialog is opened through Machines manager (Data tab > Machines), clicking OK will permanently store settings changes with the .cfg file.

- 21 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Creating a new machine In ProNest, new machines are created from existing ones.   To create a new machine, simply rename your current machine.  1. From the Settings dialog, click the Save As button.  2. In the Save As dialog, select or type your new machine's name and click OK.   When you are done, you will notice that you are now using your new machine.  The old machine still exists, but is no longer current.  Editing your settings will now affect this new machine only.

- 22 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Editing a machine's settings To edit a machine's settings, open the Settings dialog:  l In the Quick Access toolbar, click Settings. -or 1. On the File menu, click Info.  2. Click Machine then click Settings. -or l Click the machine in the status bar and then click Settings. Once you have opened the Settings dialog, you can make any kind of settings change you want. After you are done making changes, click OK to accept your changes and return to the main window. Click Cancel to discard your changes and return to the main window. Note: All changes you make to a machine's settings are temporary. They only affect your current job. When settings are modified but not saved, an asterisk (*) will appear in front of the machine's name.   For example: *Demo Gas Machine   All temporary settings changes can be lost if you open another job, change your machine, or if you click Restore in the Settings dialog.  If you want to make your settings changes available to all future jobs that use your machine, click Save in the Settings dialog.  This will remove the asterisk from the machine name and will update the .cfg with all of your changes.

- 23 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Saving your machine settings Settings are saved in two different ways:  l With the ProNest machine (.cfg)  l With the job (.nif)

Saving with the ProNest machine To save your temporary settings changes:  l In the Settings dialog, click Save. This will update the current machine's .cfg with your changes. To save your temporary settings changes as a new machine:  1. In the Settings dialog, click Save As.  2. Type or select a machine name in the box and click OK. This will create a new .cfg with the name you specify. If you entered the name of a machine that already exists, a warning message will appear before it is overwritten. Your current machine will also change to this new machine.

Saving with the job Every time a job is saved, the current state of your settings are also saved in the job. This has no effect on the current machine's .cfg.

- 24 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Managing machines For users that have several ProNest machines (.cfg) installed, the Machines dialog provides a central place where you can view and edit installed machines; change the current machine; and copy, rename, or delete machines.

In this article... Open the Machines dialog View machine properties and associated files Edit a machine's settings Change the current machine Copy a machine Rename a machine Delete a machine Pin a machine in the list

Open the Machines dialog

 l On the Data tab, click Machines.

View machine properties and associated files  l In the list on the left, click a machine to select it. Machine properties and associated files such as settings spreadsheets will be displayed.

Edit a machine's settings  1. In the list on the left, select a machine.  2. Click Settings.  3. Use the Settings dialog to make changes.  4. Click OK to permanently store your changes in the CFG file.

Change the current machine  1. In the list on the left, select a machine.  2. Click Make this the current machine. In the list of machines, the current machine is indicated by the checkmark.

Copy a machine  1. Right-click a machine in the list on the left.  2. Select Copy. A duplicate machine file (.cfg) will be created in the Machines folder defined in preferences. The duplicate machine will have the same properties and will point to the same associated files as the original.

- 25 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Rename a machine  1. Right-click a machine in the list on the left.  2. Select Copy.

Delete a machine The machine file (.cfg) will be deleted. However, the machine's associated files will not be deleted.  1. Right-click a machine in the list on the left.  2. Select Delete.

Pin a machine to the list Pinning a machine will keep it at the top of the list. This can be useful for quickly finding commonly-used machines when there are many machines installed.  l Click the pin button for a given machine.

- 26 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Machine settings This is the main settings page. While there are only three editable settings on this page, it serves as a description of the machine's basic configuration. It also provides a controlled means of editing this configuration.

Processes The most important information on this page is in the Processes section at the top. In this section, you can see the name of the post processor (CFF file) and the processes that this machine is using.   The post processor is the core of any ProNest machine. This file is usually tailored to match a specific real-world machine controller and will generally be named accordingly. While most of the contents of a post processor are specific to output, there is some information that helps to configure the settings for any ProNest machine that makes use of it.   One set of information in the post processor is a list of available processes. The processes that a ProNest machine can have is limited to the list of processes described in the post processor. The machine page shows the names of all processes listed in the post processor organized by process class (cut, scribe, and punch). Processes that are used by the ProNest machine will appear as normal text. These processes will also appear in the Settings dialog's tree-view (the expandable/collapsible list of settings pages on the left-hand side of the settings window) as sub-items of the Machine settings page. Processes that are not used will appear disabled and will have the phrase '' next to them. Advanced: The settings in the Processes section are not directly editable on this page. To change the post processor or to modify which processes are used, click Add or Remove Processes.

Machine Settings Physical location It is often advisable to create one ProNest machine for every physical machine you have. This setting is informational only and simply provides an indication of where the real-world machine is located.

Machine home This setting defines the corner of the nesting area where cutting begins. Generally, this should be equivalent to the home position of your real world machine. The Machine home will be displayed in the nesting area as a yellow target symbol.   Choices: Lower Left, Upper Left, Upper Right, Lower Right Note:

When Nesting home is set to "Same as Machine Home", a blue and yellow target symbol ( home and Machine home will be displayed in the nesting area.

How do I get here in ProNest?  n Open Settings

(this page will be displayed by default)

- 27 -

) representing both the Nesting

ProNest 2019 Manual

Editing process settings Each process supported by the machine will have its own settings page directly under the Machine page.  

  In addition to the main settings page for each process, cut and scribe processes will contain one or more settings pages. Expand each process item by double-clicking the process name. This will expand the tree-view to show the settings pages for a particular process.

Settings Tables Use default process parameters only Process Parameters These two settings are repeated on the Process Parameters settings page. For a thorough description of this setting, see "Process Parameters settings" on page 34.   Use default interior leads only Interior Leads These two settings are for cut processes only. They are repeated on the Interior Leads settings page. For a thorough description of this setting, see "Interior/Exterior Leads settings" on page 37.   Use default exterior leads only Exterior Leads These two settings are for cut processes only. They are repeated on the Exterior Leads settings page. For a thorough description of this setting, see "Interior/Exterior Leads settings" on page 37.   Use default AutoTab settings only AutoTab These two settings are for cut processes only. They are repeated on the AutoTab settings page.  For a thorough description of this setting, see "AutoTab settings" on page 56.   Costing This setting is repeated on the Costing settings page.  For a through description of this setting, see "Costing settings" on page 154.   Cutting Techniques This setting is for cut processes only.  It is repeated on the Cutting Techniques settings page.  For a through description of this setting, see "Cutting Techniques settings" on page 42.  

- 28 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Add or Remove Processes The Add or Remove Processes wizard provides a controlled way to change the fundamental configuration of a ProNest machine.   To access this wizard: On the Machine settings page, click Add or Remove Processes.

Wizard Pages The first page of this wizard is called "Select a Post Processor (CFF)." The purpose of this page is to allow changes to the post processor and/or to the processes that should be used by the current ProNest machine. For more information about this page, see "Select a Post Processor (CFF)" on page 30.   The second page of this wizard is called "Reuse Existing Settings." The purpose of this page is to ensure that existing process settings aren't lost simply because changes were made on the previous page: "Select a Post Processor (CFF)." For more information about this page, see "Reuse Existing Settings" on page 31.

Navigation Buttons Along the bottom of the Add or Remove Processes wizard are the following buttons:   Button

Action when clicked

Back Next Finished Cancel Help

Go to the previous wizard page. Go to the next wizard page. Accept your changes and exit the wizard. Discard your changes and exit the wizard. Opens help for the current wizard page.

 

- 29 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Select a Post Processor (CFF) This is the first page in the Add or Remove Processes wizard. The purpose of this page is to allow changes to the post processor and/or to the processes that should be used by the current machine.

Post Processor The post processor is the core of any ProNest machine. This file is usually tailored to match a specific real-world machine controller and will generally be named accordingly. While most of the contents of a post processor are specific to output, there is some information that helps to configure the settings for any ProNest machine that makes use of it.   This section contains a combo box of available post processors found on your computer.   To change your post processor:  l Select the post processor name in the box. Every process supported by the selected post processor is listed in this section. As the post processor changes, the processes listed will update. To add a process to the machine:  l Select the process' associated check box.   To remove a process from the machine:  l Clear the process' associated check box. Important:

Note:

Adding and removing processes from a ProNest machine is considered an advanced type of change. Changes of this nature are usually done once while setting up a machine for the first time. This is because a ProNest machine is intended to mirror a real-world machine and the abilities of a specific real-world machine do not change often. Adding a new process will introduce a new set of process settings that must be edited before any meaningful output can be expected. Likewise, removing a process will destroy its existing settings. Exercise caution when making any changes to the settings on this page and be sure to visit the next page in the wizard: Reuse existing settings.

You must select at least one cut process or the Next and Finished buttons will become disabled.

- 30 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Reuse Existing Settings This is the second page in the Add or Remove Processes wizard. The purpose of this page is to ensure that existing process settings aren't lost simply because changes were made on the previous page: Select a Post Processor (CFF).

Selected Processes All processes that have been selected on the previous wizard page will appear in a box in this section.   For each process, the following options are available:   New process If this is chosen when Finished is clicked, then the process will be given new default settings. These default settings should then be edited to better suit the needs of the new process.   Use settings from existing '' process If this is chosen when Finished is clicked, then the process will inherit all the settings from the existing process.   Example:   Let's say that the settings for a given ProNest machine are perfect, but you need to switch the post processor to something else. Currently, the only cut process defined is called 'Laser'. On the Machine page, you click Add or Remove Processes.  Then, on the first page of this wizard you select the new post processor.   At this point, the list of processes changes and you notice that the new post processor doesn't have a 'Laser' process. Instead, it has a cut process called 'SuperLaser'. So on the first page of the wizard, you select the 'SuperLaser' process and click Finished.   What happens: When you click Finished, ProNest re-configures your machine. The old 'Laser' process is removed - along with all its settings - and a new 'SuperLaser' process is added with default settings. This may be a valid result for some cases, but let's say that your intention was to use your old 'Laser' settings with the new 'SuperLaser' process. How would you transfer these settings?   Transferring settings from one process to another: Instead of clicking Finished on the "Select a Post Processor (CFF)" page, click Next to advance to the "Reuse Existing Settings" page. On this page you can now see what is happening. The 'SuperLaser' process is defined as a 'New process'. Also, there is a warning below the process box telling you that the settings for the 'Laser' process will be deleted.   To use the old 'Laser' settings for your new 'SuperLaser' process do the following:  1. For 'SuperLaser', click where it says 'New process' and a down arrow will appear.  2. Click the down arrow and select Use settings from existing 'Laser' process.   What happens: Now when you click Finished, ProNest copies the 'Laser' settings into your new 'SuperLaser' process before it removes the 'Laser' process.  

- 31 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Drilling process settings If your machine supports drilling, a Drilling process settings page will be directly under the Machine page.  

Settings Tables This setting specifies which settings table is used for process parameters. You can select any settings table from the list, which contains all the XLS files found in the Process Parameters folder (defined in Preferences).   Tip:

To edit or view the spreadsheet, click the Edit button.

To read more about using Process Parameters spreadsheets for drilling, see Drill Process Parameters XLS: Format.

Options Rough cut large drill holes with [cut process] Select this setting to use the cut process to cut out smaller holes inside of larger holes that will be drilled. Cutting a rough hole is a way of removing material from the hole prior to drilling it with a large drill bit. The machine's primary cut process (for instance, plasma or laser) is used to make the rough cut.

Part with drill profile shown in blue. The rough cut (in black) is an interior cut profile drawn inside of the drilled hole. Note:

For rough cuts, the cut profile is only visible in ProNest from Cut Simulation mode.

Minimum hole diameter Drill holes smaller than this diameter will not have rough cuts applied.

Leftover material width Linear distance between the inner cut edge and the outer drilled edge. - 32 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Complete all rough cuts prior to drilling Sequence all rough cuts on the nest (or zone) so that they're cut before drilling any holes on the nest (or zone).  

Example Suppose you have a drawing with a hole that will be drilled with a 40 mm bit.  

  Assume the following:  l The hole is on a CAD layer mapped to the drill process in ProNest.  l There is a 40 mm drill tool available  l Rough cut large drill holes is selected  l Minimum diameter = 28 mm  l Leftover material width = 5 mm   A 30 mm diameter hole will first be cut with the machine's cut process and then the remaining material would be drilled out using the 40 mm bit.  

How do I get here in ProNest?  l Settings

> under Machine, click the Drilling process

- 33 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Process Parameters settings Process Parameter Settings Use default process parameters only If this is selected, then Process Parameters will not be active, because all process parameter settings will come from the Default Settings section. If this is cleared, then the entire Default Settings section will be inactive, because all process parameter settings will come from the spreadsheet specified by Process Parameters.  

Process Parameters This setting specifies which settings table is used for process parameters. You can select any settings table from the list, which contains all the XLS files found in the Process Parameters spreadsheet settings folder (defined in Preferences). Tip:

To edit or view the spreadsheet, click the Edit button.

To read more about using Process Parameters spreadsheets, see "Process Parameters spreadsheets" on page 194.

Default Settings Kerf width This defines the width of the torch. This can be useful for parts that share a common line. With a proper kerf value, ProNest can adjust a common line so that it doesn't infringe on either part.   Units: Distance Range: -10,000.0 to 10,000.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.1 in.  

Feedrate Feedrate to use in CNC output and costing.   Units: Speed Range: 0.0 to 10,000.0 in./min Recommended Value: 100.0 in./min   Note:

For Hypertherm setups, scribe feedrates specified in ProNest and included in NC code are not used by Phoenix.

Part - part separation The minimum separation allowed between two nested parts. Nested parts that are closer together will be shown in conflict.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.5 in.  

- 34 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Part - plate edge separation The minimum separation allowed between a nested part and a plate edge. Nested parts that are closer to the plate edge will be shown in conflict.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.5 in.  

Part - pierce separation The minimum separation allowed between a nested part and the pierce point of another nested part. Nested parts that are closer to a pierce point will be shown in conflict.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.5 in.  

  The following values are calculated and appear for information purposes only:   Pierce - pierce separation value = (2 * Part - pierce separation) – Part - part separation   Pierce - plate edge separation value = Part - pierce separation + Part - plate separation – Part - part separation   How do I get here in ProNest? - 35 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 n Settings

> double-click the cut process > click Process Parameters

- 36 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Interior/Exterior Leads settings Each cut process has one settings page for interior leads and another for exterior leads.

Interior/Exterior Leads Settings Adjust leads to pierce in the center of holes When selected, interior lead-ins will be adjusted so that the pierce occurs at the center of the hole (for the purposes of this setting, a hole can be any shape). Piercing at the center of a hole is useful for plasma applications to reduce the chance that dross will spatter onto the cut line.

A part with interior lead-ins adjusted to pierce at the center of holes   Rules for center piercing  The center piercing technique is applied only for Interior Side Lead-ins with the following properties:  l Style = Arc  l Angle = 180° (unless an Extension is specified, in which case Angle can be any non-zero number between -360 and 360)  

Maximum diameter: x material thickness This setting is only active when Adjust leads to pierce in the center of holes is enabled.   A dependent setting called Maximum diameter: x material thickness lets you set the maximum hole size on which to apply this center-piercing technique. If a hole has a diameter greater than times the material thickness, it will not have its lead-in pierce centered.   Example: Let's say that Adjust leads to pierce in the center of holes is selected and the material thickness multiplier is set to 2x. This means that all holes with a diameter to material thickness ratio of 2:1 or smaller will have center-piercing applied.   If there was a hole with a diameter of 0.5 in. nested on a 0.25 in. thick plate, this hole would have a diameter to material thickness ratio of 2:1 or 2x. Because this does not exceed the maximum diameter to thickness ratio, the hole would have its lead-in adjusted to begin at the hole's center.  

Use default interior/exterior leads only If this is selected, then Interior/Exterior leads will not be active, because all lead settings will come from the Default Settings section. If this is cleared, then the entire Default Settings section will be inactive, because all lead settings will come from the spreadsheet specified by Interior/Exterior leads.  

- 37 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Interior/Exterior Leads This setting specifies which settings table is used for interior/exterior. You can select any settings table from the list, which contains all the XLS files found in the Interior/Exterior Leads spreadsheet settings folder (defined in Preferences).   Tip:

To edit or view the spreadsheet, click the Edit button.

To read more about using Leads spreadsheets, see "About Interior and Exterior Leads spreadsheets " on page 217.

Default Settings Default lead settings can be specified for both corner and side leads. A lead is defined by its style, size, angle, and extension. Lead-outs also have an overtravel setting. These five aspects of a lead are defined here.  

Style The style of a lead defines its basic shape.     Choices for Lead In: (None), Arc, Linear, Spiral, Lock-9, Lock-7, Step, Diagonal Step, T-Lock   Choices for Lead Out: (None), Arc, Linear   To change a lead style:  1. In the Style column, click the box for the lead type you want to change.  2. Click the down arrow and select a new style from the list.  3. Click OK.  

Size For the linear style, Size specifies the length of the lead. For the arc style, Size specifies the radius of the arc. For all other lead styles, Size controls the scale of the lead.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.5 in. for a lead-in, 0.25 in. for a lead-out  

Angle For linear leads, the angle of a lead-in is defined with respect to the first motion after the lead. A 0° lead-in will lead straight into the first cut. Positive lead-in angles are defined clockwise from the 0° position, so a 90° lead-in will cause a sharp left-turn into the first cut. Leadout angles are defined in a similar fashion with a 0° lead-out extending straight out of the last cut. Positive lead-out angles are defined counter-clockwise from the 0° position, so a 90° lead-out will cause a sharp left-turn out of the last cut.   For arc leads, angle defines the distance the lead will extend around a circle. A 90° lead would extend one quarter of the way around, whereas a 180° lead would extend half way around - forming a semicircle.   Units: Degrees Range: -360.0 to 360.0° Recommended Value: 0.0° for corner leads, 180.0° for a side lead-in, 90.0° for a side lead-out   Example:  

- 38 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

The following part has two sets of leads: a pair of linear corner leads (on the exterior profile) and a pair of arc side leads (on the interior profile).

The Angle of both corner leads is set to 0°. The side lead-in has Angle of 180°, the side lead-out has an Angle of 90°.  

Extension The tip of the lead-in (or lead-out) will be extended by this distance.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.0 in.   Example:   The following parts have different Extension values. The arrows along the part profiles indicate cut direction.  

Figure 1

Figure 2

  The part displayed in Figure 1 has two exterior arc-style leads. The Extension for both the lead-in and lead-out is 0.0 in.

  The part displayed in Figure 2 also has two exterior arc-style leads. The lead-in has an Extension of 1.0 in. and the lead-out has an Extension of 0.0 in. Notice that the lead-in for this part is longer than the lead-in of the part from Figure 1.

 

Overtravel This value applies only to the lead-out. If this value is positive (overtravel), then the torch/head will travel past the start point before cutting the lead-out. If this value is negative (undertravel), then the torch/head will begin cutting the lead-out before reaching the start point.   - 39 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Units: Distance Range: -100.0 to 100.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.0 in.   Example:   The following parts have different Over/Under travel values. The arrows along the part profiles indicate cut direction.

Figure 3

Figure 4

Figure 5

  The part displayed in Figure 3 has two exterior, arc-style leads with an Over/Under travel value of 0.0 in. The start point (where the lead-in intersects the part profile) and end point (where the lead-out intersects the part profile) are the same.

  The part displayed in Figure 4 also has two exterior, arc-style leads with a positive Over/Under travel value of 1.0 in. The distance between the start point and end point of this part is 1.0 in. The portion of part profile that is highlighted in yellow represents the overtravel, which will be cut twice by the torch.

  The part displayed in Figure 5 has two exterior, arc-style leads with a negative Over/Under travel value of -1.0 in. This part exhibits undertravel. The lead-out occurs before the torch finishes cutting the entire profile. As a result, the part in Figure 5 will be connected to the plate by a 1.0 in. wide strip of material after it is cut.

Quality Assigns a default quality number to leads. Assigning quality to a lead can be used to apply specific cutting parameters to that motion.   Choices: Inherit, 0 - 255 Inherit Lead will have the same quality as the adjacent entity. 0 - 255 By default, all leads of that type (corner lead-in, side lead-out, etc.) will be assigned the quality number specified.   The quality number can be used as a key into the process parameter table or as a way of outputting specific M-codes based on the quality number.   How do I get here in ProNest?  l Settings

> double-click the cut process > click Interior or Exterior Leads

- 40 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Interior Leads: Slots settings You can control the placement of leads on different types of slots (interior, closed profiles within a part that are oblong in shape). You can also define whether or not certain types of interior profiles should be considered slots.

Slot types ProNest recognizes the following three types of slots:   Rectangle

 

Rounded Corner Rectangle

 

 

Obround

 

  The circular buttons along the part profile represent allowable lead locations for each slot type. A blue button ( ) indicates that a lead location is selected, an empty button ( ) indicates that a location is not selected. By default, all allowable lead locations will be selected.

Allowable lead locations Lead locations on slots must be assigned in sets. You can choose to place leads at the corners, center of longest sides, center of shortest sides, and/or center of arcs, depending on the slot type.   To select lead locations for a slot type:  1. Point to the button where you want to allow leads. That set of allowable lead locations will become highlighted.  2. Click the button. The selected lead locations will appear blue ( ). Leads will be allowed at the selected locations for that slot type.   To clear lead locations for a slot type:  l Click the selected button ( ) that you want to clear. The buttons for that set of locations will become inactive ( ). If no lead locations are selected for a slot type, it will be labeled "Not a slot." In this case, it will be considered a normal interior profile when leads are applied.

Maximum slot width An interior profile whose width (shorter dimension) exceeds this threshold will not be considered a slot, even if it is rectangular, obround, or rectangular with rounded corners.   Note: Using slots can give you faster performance when importing parts and generating paths for collision avoidance. It also gives you increased control over the placement of interior leads. How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> double-click the cut process > double-click Interior Leads

- 41 -

> click Slots

ProNest 2019 Manual

Cutting Techniques settings Disable auto height control for slots smaller than in. Auto height control will be disabled for slots (For purposes of this setting, a slot is defined as a very narrow part of a profile that either cuts into or extends out from the exterior profile.) that are smaller in width than the value (referred to as Slot tolerance).     Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 10.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.0 in.   To edit the slot tolerance:  1. Click the value (it’s a hyperlink).  2. Type the slot tolerance in the box.  3. Click OK.

Cutting techniques (table) This setting specifies which settings table is used for cutting techniques. You can select any settings table from the list, which contains all the XLS files found in the Cutting Techniques spreadsheet settings folder (defined in Preferences).   Tip:

To edit or view the spreadsheet, click the Edit button.

How do I get here in ProNest?  l Settings

> double-click the cut process > click Cutting Techniques

- 42 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Common Line Cut settings Common line cutting is a way of reducing the number of pierces and total cut length while maximizing the number of parts being cut. ProNest handles several different methods of common line cutting: Important: Pre-kerfing is always used for the exterior profiles of common line cut parts. Exterior part geometry is uniformly enlarged by one half the kerf width to account for the kerf. The shared edges of CLC parts are separated by one kerf width. The kerf value from the Process Parameters settings (whether settings table or default settings) is used. Consequently, no kerf codes are present in the finished CLC profile. Pair Two parts are common line cut together.   Quad A part is common line cut with itself into a 2 x 2 grid.   CLC Array A part is common line cut with itself in a grid of rows and columns such that they fill a region up to the size of the plate the parts are being nested on or a smaller, user-defined region.   Dynamic Align CLC Rectangular parts are common line cut together in rows or columns, with their edges aligned on one side. An unlimited number of dissimilar parts can be used.   Advanced CLC Two or more parts are common line cut together. An unlimited number of dissimilar parts can be used. The plate edge may also be used as one of the common lines.

Common Line Cut Settings Minimum shared length The minimum length of a line that must overlap a line in another part for them to be considered "in common."  At least one such line must exist between two parts for those parts to be eligible for becoming a common line part.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 in. Recommended Value: 2.0 in. Used For: All methods of common line cut  

Torch path style There are two torch path styles available for common line cutting.   Choices: Crossing, Not Crossing Used For: All methods of common line cut   Crossing Select this choice when it is possible for the machine to cut over a previously cut kerf width: such as with laser or plasma cutting.   Not Crossing Select this choice when it is not possible for the machine to cut over a previously cut kerf width: such as with oxyfuel cutting.  

Maximum area increase - 43 -

ProNest 2019 Manual This setting is used only when a part is automatically common line cut with itself (like when a single nested part is selected and then Common Line Cut is clicked). The value defines the percentage by which it is allowable for the region of the finished pair CLC part to be bigger than the region of the original part.   Units: Percentage Range: 0 to 1000% Recommended Value: 150% Used For: Pair  

Maximum alignment rotation This setting is used only when a part is automatically common line cut with itself (like when a single nested part is selected and then Common Line Cut is clicked).  The value defines the maximum angle by which to rotate one part of a selected pair to line up common line cuttable entities.  If no entities may be lined up by rotating one of the selected pair of parts by up to this angle, no pair CLC part is created.   Units: Degrees Range: 0 to 360° Recommended Value: 45° Used For: Pair  

Do not try with lines that have tabs Depending on is use, this setting has a slightly different purpose.   Used For: Pair, Advanced CLC, Dynamic Align CLC   When used for Pair: Select this check box to disallow lines with tabs from being considered for the common line. If this check box is cleared, lines with tabs will be considered for the common line. In this case, if a tabbed line is chosen as the common line, any tabs on that line are removed.   When used for Advanced CLC and Dynamic Align CLC: Select this check box to remove all tabs from the finished CLC part. If this checkbox is cleared, then tabs will be maintained on all entities in the finished part except for the common line(s).  

Maintain highest quality on common lines Sometimes, two lines that are common line cut together will have different quality values. Select this check box to maintain the highest quality value belonging to either entity. Clear this check box to maintain the lowest quality value.   Used For: Pair, CLC Array, Advanced CLC, Dynamic Align CLC

Tolerance (screen pixels) End point snap distance When creating a pair CLC part from two parts selected on the screen, if the end points of the common line in each part are closer together than this tolerance, those end points are lined up before creating the common line part.   Units: Screen pixels Range: 0 to 100 Recommended Value: 25 Used For: Pair Note: This tolerance is in screen pixels to allow you to control its accuracy by using an appropriate zoom level on the nest. When you

- 44 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

are zoomed far out, a distance measured on your monitor will represent a larger real-world distance on your nest than if you were zoomed in. As a result, the tolerance is also greater when you are zoomed out. How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> double-click the cut process > click Common Line Cut

- 45 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Common Line Cut - Plate Edge settings Plate Edge Settings Allow common lines with the plate edge Select this check box if you wish to be able to place parts right on the plate edge and have the plate edge count as one or more sides of the part.  Any part sides in common with the plate edge will not be cut.  

Extension Profiles cut in common with the plate edge can start outside (or inside) the plate. A negative extension will shorten the start of the profile and the pierce will occur on the plate. A zero-length extension will cause the pierce to occur on the plate edge. A positive extension will extend the start of the profile and the pierce will occur off the plate.   Units: Distance Range: -100.0 to 100.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.0 in.  

Cut Direction This dictates the cut direction of profiles that are in common with the plate edge and, when no extension is specified, would start right on the plate edge.   Choices: Default, Cut towards the plate edge, Cut away from the plate edge   Default No modification to cut direction is made.  Whatever the torch path direction is when first created is what gets used in the part.   Cut towards the plate edge Any profile that starts at the plate edge will have its cut direction modified so that it will end at the plate edge.   Cut away from the plate edge Any profile that ends at the plate edge will have its cut direction modified so that it will start cutting at the plate edge. Note: In any case where a profile both starts and ends at a plate edge, no modification to torch path direction will be made.  In these cases, the torch path direction already satisfies any of the cut direction choices. How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> double-click the cut process > double-click Common Line Cut

- 46 -

> click Plate Edge

ProNest 2019 Manual

Common Line Cut - Array settings CLC Array Settings Torch path style There are two torch path styles available for common line cutting.   Choices: Crossing, Not Crossing Used For: All methods of common line cut   Crossing Select this choice when it is possible for the machine to cut over a previously cut kerf width: such as with laser, plasma, or waterjet cutting.   Not Crossing Select this choice when it is not possible for the machine to cut over a previously cut kerf width: such as with oxyfuel cutting.   This setting is repeated from the Common Line Cut page. Note: Most automatically generated CLC arrays will use Not Crossing as their torch path style. Certain specific cases of parts (rectangles, triangles, trapezoids, and parallelograms) may use either style.

Insert stop codes Select this check box to insert a stop code at the end of each part so that is may be removed before cutting continues. Note: This setting is active only if Torch path style is set to Not Crossing.

Kerf crossing lead-outs Select this setting to allow lead-outs to cross a previously cut kerf. Note: This setting is active only if Torch path style is set to Not Crossing.

Lead-out percentage If lead-outs are allowed to cross a previously cut kerf, then this setting defines the length of that lead-out. The length is defined as a percentage of the kerf width.   Units: Percentage Range: 0 to 100% Recommended Value: 50% Note: This setting is active only if Kerf crossing lead-outs is selected.

Use alternate CLC array crossing torch paths With this checkbox cleared, the CLC array will be cut one part after the other. When selected, torch paths will be applied based on the geometry of the CLC array and not part by part.

- 47 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: This setting is active only if Torch path style is set to Crossing.

Cut rectangular parts by column This setting applies to grids of rectangular CLC parts with vertically-aligned edges. When selected, vertical column lines are cut in single passes across multiple parts. This setting affects the cut paths for CLC groups created using CLC array, advanced CLC, and dynamic align CLC.   This approach is designed for plate processor machines (such as Peddinghaus) so that the final cut is done across multiple parts on the alignment edge. It can also be used for other machine types, if desired.

Note:

 l This setting is active only if Torch path style is set to Crossing and Use alternate CLC array crossing torch paths is enabled.  l When using Dynamic align CLC, select this setting to complete the final cut across multiple parts on the alignment edge.  l This approach involves finishing CLC parts in columns, which can result in more pierces compared to other CLC cut path methods.

Array Size Limitations When a CLC array is created, the end result is a grid of parts with a certain number of rows and columns. Each cell in this grid is made from one base unit. For some parts, such as rectangles, the base unit consists of one part; for parallelograms a base unit requires two parts, and for triangles a four part base unit is created. Tip:

To preview the base unit before creating a CLC array, use interactive CLC array.

Maximum number of units This setting limits the overall size of CLC arrays. They will not be built with more base units than this maximum.   Units: Base units Range: 0 to 10000  

Maximum rows Defines the maximum number of rows that a single CLC array part can have. - 48 -

ProNest 2019 Manual   Range: 0 to 10000  

Maximum columns Defines the maximum number of columns that a single CLC array part can have.   Range: 0 to 10000  

Maximum width Defines the maximum allowable width of the finished CLC array (excluding lead-ins and lead-outs).   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 in.  

Maximum height Defines the maximum allowable height of the finished CLC array (excluding lead-ins and lead-outs).   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 in.  

Full columns only If this check box is selected, CLC arrays will be created only with completely filled columns. Often, the array could continue in a new column except that there aren't enough parts left to complete that column. If this check box is cleared, CLC arrays will partially fill this last column.   How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> double-click the cut process > double-click Common Line Cut

- 49 -

> click Array

ProNest 2019 Manual

Common Line Cut - Safety Cuts settings Safety cuts are added to common line cut parts to help avoid potential tip up situations as parts are cut out. They also provide a way of piercing a user-specified distance away from a previously cut portion of the CLC part. Safety cuts may be used with all types of common line cutting except for parts paired with the "Old Pair" method. For more information about common line cut methods, see "Common Line Cut settings" on page 43.  

Use safety cuts Select this check box to allow safety cuts to be added to common line cut parts. Important: Safety cuts will be added only during post processing so they will only be visible during cut simulation. They may not be selected or edited.

Note: The following settings are active only if Use safety cuts is selected.

Use values from Process Parameters (*.xls) Select this check box to retrieve the values for Length of safety cuts, Offset for process-on, and Offset for process-off from the Process Parameters XLS file. If this check box is cleared, then these values will come from settings on this page. Note: If a Process Parameters XLS is specified and a material match cannot be found, the values specified on this page will be used.

General tab Length of safety cuts Maximum length to use for safety cuts.  Safety cuts may not cross entity boundaries, so it is possible to have shorter safety cuts created.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.0 in.  

Add safety cuts at all intersections Select this check box to add safety cuts at intersection points within the profile being processed, as well as with subsequent profiles. If this check box is cleared, then safety cuts will be added only at intersection points with subsequent profiles.  

Begin of Profiles tab Add safety cuts to the beginning of profiles Select this setting to add safety cuts at the beginning of subsequent profiles. This has the effect of moving the initial pierce point of the subsequent profile by a length at least equal to the length of the safety cut.  

Offset for process-on Specifies the distance beyond the end of the safety cut at which to pierce. A negative value will cause the pierce point to be within the safety cut. A zero value will pierce exactly at the end of the safety cut. A positive value will cause the pierce to occur beyond the end of the safety cut.   Units: Distance Range: -100.0 to 100.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.0 in. - 50 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: This setting is active only if Add safety cuts to the beginning of profiles is selected.

End of Profiles tab Add safety cuts to the end of profiles Select this setting to add safety cuts at the end of subsequent profiles. This has the effect of moving the final torch off of the subsequent profile by a length at least equal to the length of the safety cut.  

Offset for process-off When cutting a profile, the torch may advance towards an existing safety cut. This setting specifies a distance to stop cutting before the safety cut is reached.   Units: Distance Range: -100.0 to 100.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.0 in. Note: This setting is active only if Add safety cuts to the end of profiles is selected

Advanced tab Minimum profile length When applying safety cuts it is possible to end up with very short profiles. This setting allows you to specify how long these short profiles have to be for them to be cut. In effect, any profiles shorter than this value will be ignored.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 10.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.0 in. How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> double-click the cut process > double-click Common Line Cut

- 51 -

> click Safety Cuts

ProNest 2019 Manual

Chaining settings Chaining parts together allows multiple exterior profiles to be cut with a single pierce. The torch will remain on as it moves from the leadout of one part to the lead-in of the next part. While this reduces the number of pierces needed to cut the parts, it does result in a longer cut length.

Chaining Settings Part-chain separation The minimum separation allowed between a nested part and a nested chain. Parts closer than this distance to a chain will be shown in conflict.   Units: Distance Range:0.0 to 10000.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.01 in.  

Chain overtravel When using non-crossing leads (leads that are applied so that the cutting head doesn't intersect previously cut kerf), there is sometimes a small gap or notch left at the start point after the part is cut, due to the cutting beam lagging behind on the leads. This gap can cause the part not to drop out after it is cut.   On chained parts that use non-crossing leads, the Chain overtravel setting can be used to apply a little bit of overtravel to the leads so that the small gap or notch is eliminated. This value is a measure of how close the kerfed leads need to be for the part to drop. A lower value will result in a longer overtravel length, while a higher value will result in a shorter length. Note that the overtravel length will never exceed the kerf width.   Units:: Percentage Range:: 0 to 100% Recommended Value: 50% Example:   Consider the following part:  

Part with non-crossing leads

  A detail of the same part as it would be cut (kerf is

shown in color). Note the small gap at the start point, which can prevent the part from dropping out.   Applying Chain overtravel will move the end point enough to eliminate the notch on the chained part:

- 52 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 

Overtravel is applied to the non-crossing leads in   The lead-out has been moved just enough to eliminate the chain. the gap, while still not completely crossing the leadin.    

Disable auto height control Select this check box to turn off automatic height control when cutting a chain between parts.  Automatic height control will be reenabled before cutting the next part in the chain. Important: The way any chain controls auto height control is governed by this setting at the time the chain is created. If this setting is modified, existing chains are not modified to match.

Chain Array Chain array creates a nested array of parts chained together either vertically or horizontally. This yields a uniform array of parts, not packed together as closely as with array or pattern array, but with only one pierce per row or column (for the exterior profiles).  

Lead-in extension When a chained array of parts is created, each row or column will have its lead-in extended by this value.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.0 in.  

Allow cut to cross kerf Select this check box to allow chain arrays to be generated such that the chain coming from the lead-out of one part may cross the chain going toward the lead-in of another part. Clear this check box if the chain should not be allowed to cross itself.  

Chain parts in reverse order Select this check box to allow chain arrays to be built from the end of each row or column back toward the beginning.  

Use ‘Not-Crossing’ lead-in/lead-out Select this check box to force chain array to modify the leads such that the kerf is not crossed within the part at the start point. Otherwise, chain array will use the part's existing leads.   How do I get here in ProNest?  l Settings

> double-click the cut process > click Chaining

- 53 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Bridging settings Bridging parts together allows multiple exterior profiles to be cut with a minimal number of pierces. When bridged parts are cut, they remain connected by thin webs of material (bridges). Cutting parts together in this way can reduce the number of pierces needed to cut the parts, but it does result in a longer cut length.

Bridging Settings Bridge width Specifies the width of the bridge between adjacent parts.

A positive value will leave a thin web of material connecting the parts. A zero value means that the torch will travel over the exact same bridge geometry twice: once going to the next part and once returning from it. A negative value will invert the sides of the bridge, effectively cutting the bridge.   Units: Distance Range: -5.0 to 5.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.25in.   See "Positive vs negative bridging" on page 773 for more information.  

Bridge radius Bridges can have a radius where they enter and leave each part. This radius allows for a smoother transition from the part to the bridge. A value of 0.0 indicates that no radius should be used.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 1.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.125 in.  

Maximum corner angle Since bridges will "snap" to corners, this setting helps define exactly what a corner is. For the purposes of "snapping" to corners, angled cuts greater than this value will not be considered corners.   Units: Degrees Range: 0 to 360° Recommended Value: 135°  

Create bridge extensions Negative bridges applied at the corners of parts will overlap the part edge. This will be used during dynamic align for bridges and when bridges are snapped at the corners.

- 54 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Bridge width The overlap distance will match the Bridge width value. Kerf percentage The overlap distance as a percentage of the kerf value.   Recommended value: 75% Note:

 l This setting is only active if a negative Bridge width value is specified.  l For oxyfuel cutting, a smaller extension distance (20% - 30% of kerf) may be needed.

End point snap distance Maximum distance from a corner (see Maximum corner angle above) that a bridge start point can be which would cause it to snap to that corner. Allowing the bridge to snap to a corner can create smoother transitions from the part geometry to the bridge.   Units: Screen pixels Range: 0 to 100 Recommended Value: 8 Note: This tolerance is in screen pixels to allow you to control its accuracy by using an appropriate zoom level on the nest. When you are zoomed far out, a distance measured on your monitor will represent a larger real-world distance on your nest than if you were zoomed in. As a result, the tolerance is also greater when you are zoomed out. How do I get here in ProNest?  l Settings

> double-click the cut process

> click Bridging

- 55 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

AutoTab settings Note:

The settings on this page are used for both AutoTab and manually-applied tabs in Advanced Edit.

AutoTab Settings Use default AutoTab settings only If this is selected, then AutoTab will not be active, because all process parameter settings will come from the Default AutoTab Settings section.  If this is cleared, then the entire Default AutoTab Settings section will be inactive, because all process parameter settings will come from the spreadsheet specified by AutoTab.  

AutoTab This setting specifies which settings table is used for AutoTab. You can select any settings table from the list, which contains all the XLS files found in the AutoTab spreadsheet settings folder (defined in Preferences). Tip:

To edit or view the spreadsheet, click the Edit button.

To read more about using AutoTab spreadsheets, see "AutoTab spreadsheets" on page 222.  

Snap tolerance If the location chosen as the start point of the tab is within this distance from the start point of the chosen entity, the tab start point will be shifted to the beginning of the entity. Similarly, if the tab would end within this distance from the end of the entity, the tab will be shifted so that its end point coincides with the entity end point.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 5.0 in. Recommended Value: 1.0 in. Note: Giving this setting a non-zero value will help prevent tiny motions from being created. This can be beneficial on some machines where tiny motions can be problematic.

Apply only to straight lines Select this setting to restrict AutoTab placement to linear motions only (no arcs). Note:

This setting is overridden if the default AutoTab strategy is set to Center of Line (see below).

Default AutoTab Settings Tab length Length of each tab that will be added during AutoTab. This length represents the distance along the original part geometry that will remain uncut for each tab.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 10.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.5 in.

- 56 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Minimum spacing Defines the minimum amount of profile perimeter that should be cut between tabs. No two tabs will be placed closer than this value along any profile perimeter. Tabs will also not be placed closer than this distance to the start or end point of the profile (the exception to this is the At Corners strategy).   Units: Distance Range: 0.1 to 10000.0 in.  

Strategy Determines which AutoTab strategy will be employed.   Choices: (None), Center of Line, Number of Tabs, At Intervals, At Corners

(None) No tabs will be added during AutoTab.

Center of Line AutoTab will attempt to place tabs only at the center point of lines greater than a specified length.  

Do not consider lines smaller than in. During AutoTab, lines shorter than distance will be ignored.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 in. Recommended Value: 5.0 in. To edit the Minimum line size value:  1. Click the value (it’s a hyperlink).  2. Specify the Minimum line size and click OK.  

Number of Tabs AutoTab will attempt to add a user specified number of tabs to each profile. If possible, ProNest will add undertravel (equal to the tab length) to the lead-out on the profile, forming a "tab" at the start point. This "tab" lead counts towards the Number per profile set below.  

Number per profile Maximum number of tabs to add to each profile during AutoTab. Due to profile perimeter length and other factors, the number of tabs added may be smaller than the amount specified with this setting.

- 57 -

ProNest 2019 Manual   Range: 0 to 100   Tip: If you want only one single tab on a profile, set Strategy to Number of Tabs, and then set Number per profile to 1. This will add undertravel to the lead-out on the profile, which will be locked so that it isn't lost during autonesting, collision avoidance, etc.

If you want to apply this by profile type (for instance on exterior profiles only), this can be done using the AutoTab XLS.

At Intervals AutoTab will attempt to add tabs at a user specified interval around the perimeter of each profile. If possible, ProNest will add undertravel to the lead-out on the profile, forming a "tab" at the start point.  

Distance between tabs Minimum distance between consecutive tabs. This also represents the minimum distance from the start point to the first tab.   Units: Distance Range: 0.1 to 10000.0 in. Important: This value should never be shorter than the Minimum spacing.

At Corners AutoTab will attempt to place tabs to either side of each corner in each profile.  

Distance from corner Minimum distance from each corner that a tab will start or end, depending on which side of a corner it is being added to. A  zero-value will add tabs that start or end at the corner.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 in.  

Maximum corner angle When placing tabs at corners, it is important to define exactly what a "corner" is. Cut angles that are greater than this value will not be considered a corner for the purposes of placing tabs.   Units: Degrees

- 58 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Range: 0 to 180° Recommended Value:90°  

Tab location This setting describes where tabs will be placed relative to each corner.   Choices: Shortest side of corner, Longest side of corner, Both sides of corner   Shortest side of corner A tab will be added to the shorter of the two entities that form each corner.   Longest side of corner A tab will be added to the longer of the two entities that form each corner.   Both sides of corner A tab will be added to both entities that form each corner.  

Immediately after start point Select this check box to add a tab immediately after the start point of each profile. Otherwise, tabs will be added only at true corners.  

Immediately before end point Select this check box to add a tab immediately before the end point of each profile. Otherwise, tabs will be added only at true corners.   How do I get here in ProNest?  l Settings

> double-click the cut process > click AutoTab

- 59 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Dynamic Align settings These settings control dynamic alignment during manual and automatic nesting of rectangular parts.

Alignment style This setting controls what happens when you click CTRL + SHIFT + arrow key to bump and align parts together. It also determines what will happen when dynamic align groups are created during automatic nesting.   Choices: Common line, Bridge

Bridge Settings Alignment edge Select a side to align part edges in a dynamic align bridge. This is the default alignment edge used for manual nesting. It is also the alignment edge that will be used for automatic nesting.   Choices: Left, Top, Right, Bottom

Part separation Distance between parts in a dynamic align bridge.

Distance Dynamic align bridge parts will be separated by this fixed distance. Kerf multiplier Dynamic align bridge parts will be separated by a percentage of the kerf width. This is expressed as a factor of the kerf width. A value of 1.5 would be one and a half times the kerf, 2 would be double the kerf, and so on.   Recommended value: 1.5 Note:

For oxyfuel cutting, a greater separation distance (2x - 2.75x kerf) may be needed.

Alignment edge coverage Threshold for when a part should be eligible for dynamic align bridging. If the side of the part along the alignment edge is less than this percentage of the part's total length or width, it won't be dynamically aligned.   Units: Percentage Recommended value: 50% Example   With Alignment edge set to Left and Alignment edge coverage set to 50%, consider the following part:  

- 60 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

  The portion of the part's left side that lines up with the alignment edge (b) is less than 50% of the part's total height (a). This part will not be eligible for dynamic align bridging.  

Shift leads to end of cut Move the leads on dynamic align bridge parts so that the lead-out is done immediately after the final cut on the alignment edge.  

Only combine parts of the same width during AutoNest Dynamic align bridge rows or columns will consist of parts of the same width. There will be no sub-columns or columns with different part widths. Tolerance If you want to combine parts that aren't exactly the same width, you can enter a tolerance value.

Common Line Cut Settings Alignment edge Select a side to align part edges in a dynamic align CLC group. This is the default alignment edge used for manual nesting. It is also the alignment edge that will be used for automatic nesting.   Choices: Left, Top, Right, Bottom How do I get here in ProNest?  l Settings

> double-click the cut process

> click Dynamic Align

- 61 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Properties settings Properties for the current machine can be viewed and edited on the Properties settings page ( ). Properties appear for informational purposes only and show machine characteristics such as controller model, torch height control, whether the machine is True Hole®enabled or capable of beveling, etc.

Machine Defined properties This section is set by Hypertherm and contains read-only machine properties.  

User Defined properties You can add your own user-defined properties for the current machine in this section. User-defined properties may include information about the machine such as location or operational status.

Add user-defined properties  1. Click New.  2. In the row that is created, type a Name and Value.  3. Click Save to permanently store your changes.

Delete user-defined properties  1. Click a user-defined property in the grid.  2. Click Delete.  3. Click Save to permanently store your changes. How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> click Properties

- 62 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Default Class settings You can set a default class for any material type and thickness. With a default class set, when you select a material type and thickness in ProNest, that class will automatically be selected as well. Note:

Available classes come from the Process Parameters spreadsheet. If a Process Parameters spreadsheet is either not in use or is in use but doesn't contain a Class column, this settings page will be inactive.

Assign default classes for materials in settings In settings, you can easily assign default classes to all of your materials in one place.  1. Open Settings (

) and click Default Class.

The list of available materials comes from the Process Parameters spreadsheet.  2. Click a material to select it.  l Hold CTRL + click to select material rows individually.

 l Hold SHIFT + click to select a range of materials.

 3. In the Class column on the right, select a default class for the selected material. Note that if multiple materials are selected, only classes that they have in common will be listed as available default class choices. The next time that material is selected, the default class will automatically be selected as well.

Setting a default class elsewhere in ProNest A default class value for a given material type and thickness can also be quickly set anywhere material is selected.  1. After setting the material, select the class that you want to use as the default for that type and thickness.  2. Right-click the class value and select Make [class] my default class for [material.]

Default class and unknown materials Default class is used when ProNest encounters an unknown class when opening a job or changing machines. If a material type and thickness are found but the class is unknown, the unknown class will automatically be replaced with the default class (assuming a default class exists for that material).

How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> click Default Class

- 63 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Importing Parts settings Default Values for Importing Parts When parts are added to the part list, they are assigned certain properties like quantity and priority. These properties are found in the Properties section of the Edit Part List window. Each of the settings on this page provides a default value for the drawing properties. Changing a property value in the Edit Part List window has no effect on the setting that provides its default value.

CAD Import tab General

File units This is used when importing CAD or CNC files. The file itself was saved using a particular length unit. The value of this setting should match with the length unit that most of your files are saved with.   Choices: Inch (in.), Millimeter (mm)  

Drawing scale Used only for CAD files. A part can be scaled as it is imported into ProNest.   Units: Percentage (%) Range: 0.1 to 1,000,000% Recommended Value: 100%   To edit the drawing scale:  l Type a value in the box.  l Select the Drawing Scale box and click the down arrow.   When editing the drawing scale, the scale editor will appear:  

  In the editor, you can enter a scale directly in the Scale box.   You can also specify a scale by defining the ratio between a length in the drawing and the corresponding imported length.   Example:   In this example, most CAD files in our CAD folder must be scaled as they are imported into ProNest. For whatever reason, a length of 2.5 in. in each drawing should be imported as 10 in.  

- 64 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

In the scale editor:  1. Type 2.5 in the Drawing box.  2. Type 10 in the Imported box. As values are typed in each box, the value in the Scale box will update to match the ratio implied by the Drawing and Imported values. When complete, the Scale box will contain the value: 400%. Click OK and the Drawing scale field will contain 400%. Now when CAD parts are imported, they will be scaled to 400% of their actual size in the drawing.  

Open profile tolerance This setting specifies the maximum distance allowed for joining line and arc entities. In other words, if Open profile tolerance is set to 0.005 in., gaps that are 0.005 in. or smaller will be closed - helping to prevent open profiles.   Units: Distance Range: 0.001 to 1.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.005 in.   CAD Layers The following settings apply only to CAD files:

Cut all layers with [Cut Process] This setting is automatically named according to the first cut process used by this machine. For example, if the first cut process was called "Laser", then this setting would appear as "Cut all layers with [Laser]". Select this check box if all layers found in a CAD file should be cut by the process shown. Most applications will require that this checkbox be cleared.  

Cut - [Cut Process] Defines the CAD layers that should be mapped to a particular cut process. Each cut process supported by the machine will have its own setting.   Example 1:   If a machine supported both a Gas and a Plasma process, then there would be two rows here: Cut - [Gas] Cut - [Plasma]   Example 2:     If your machine supported a cut process called "Gas" and you wanted to assign "0" and "CUT" CAD layers to that process, you would enter:   Cut - [Gas]

0;CUT

When a CAD file is imported, all geometry on the "0" and "CUT" layers would be mapped to the machine's "Gas" process.  

Scribe - [Scribe Process] Defines the CAD layers that should be mapped to a particular scribe process. Each scribe process supported by the machine will have its - 65 -

ProNest 2019 Manual own setting.   Example:   If a machine supported a single scribe process called "Scribe-G", then there would be one row here: Scribe - [Scribe-G]  

Punch - [Punch Process] Defines the CAD layers that should be mapped to a particular punch process. Each punch process supported by the machine will have its own setting.   Example:   If a machine supported a single punch process called "MyPunch", then there would be one row here: Punch - [MyPunch]  

Turret Defines the CAD layers that should be mapped to the machine's turret process.  

Display Only Defines the CAD layers that should be displayed in ProNest, but should not be cut.  

BOM Defines the CAD layers that contain BOM information.  

Map to CAD color numbers Select this setting to allow importing parts by CAD color number instead of by layer name. Example:   A part file defines a part in one layer: "CUT". The part is a simple rectangle with a hole in it. The exterior profile of the part has a color number of 1, but the interior hole has a color number of 2.   If Map to CAD color numbers is cleared, then a cut process must be mapped to "CUT" in order to import the part properly. Importing the part in this way will cause the same cut process to cut both the interior and exterior profiles.   If Map to CAD color numbers is selected, then one cut process must be mapped to "1" and another (or the same) cut process must also be mapped to "2". Importing the part in this way can result in one process handling the exterior profile while another process handles the interior profile.

Note:

 l If you have more than one CAD layer for a single process, separate the layers with a semicolon (;) and do not include a space (for example, 0;CUT).

- 66 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 l Wildcards (*) can be used for layer names. For instance, BURN* would map to all CAD layers beginning with "BURN" (for example, BURN1, BURN2, BURN3, and so on). Options

Leads origin This determines where the origin of the lead-in/out of the part is, in relation to the drawing being processed. This applies to both interior and exterior leads.   Choices: Lower-Left, Upper-Left, Upper-Right, Lower-Right, Left, Top, Right, Bottom   Upper Left

Upper Right

Lower Right

Lower Left

Top

Right

Bottom

Left

Punch/Scribe first If selected, the machine will complete all punching and scribing on a nest before any cutting is done. If you are cutting with underwater plasma, you should select this option. Normally, when processing very light metal, "Punch/Scribe first" should not be selected to avoid problems with metal movement.  

Reverse direction and kerf Select this to import parts with a reversed cut direction. Interior profiles will be cut clockwise and exterior profiles will be cut counterclockwise. Right-handed kerf compensation is also used.  

Delete overlapped entities When this setting is selected, duplicate or coincident entities (lines or arcs) are automatically deleted as the part is imported.  

Contains multiple parts If there is more than one part on your drawing, select this setting.  

Explode multiple parts Select this setting if there is more than one part on your drawing and you want to separate them as they are imported. Note: This setting is active only when Contains multiple parts is selected.

User drawn leads Select this setting if your part was drawn with its own leads. If this setting is cleared, leads will be added to the part.

- 67 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: To import user-drawn leads, you must also have the Retain existing leads setting selected (on the Nesting tab).

Quality Attaches a quality value to every entity.   Choices: (None), Use CAD Colors, 0..255   (None) - Quality values will not be attached to any entity in the part.   Use CAD Colors - Each entity's color number (from the CAD drawing) will be used as the entity's quality number.   0..255 - All entities will be assigned the same quality value. Advanced: The quality number can be used as a key into the process parameter table or as a way of outputting specific M-codes based on the quality number.

Smooth entities Select this setting to convert curves made from line segments (approximated curves) into true arcs whenever possible.  

Smooth tolerance When converting a set of line segments into a curve, it is important to define how accurate the curve must be. The Smooth tolerance value specifies a maximum distance from the approximated curve in which an arc can be formed. A large tolerance will likely cause more smoothing to occur at the expense of a less accurate curve.   This tolerance value is opposite, but similar, to Arc radius tolerance found on the Importing Parts (Advanced) settings page.   SOLIDWORKS

Configuration name In SOLIDWORKS, configurations allow you to create multiple variations of a part or assembly model within a single document. Configurations provide a convenient way to develop and manage families of models with different dimensions, components, or other parameters.   This setting can be used to specify a default value for the Configuration Name property in the Properties: CAD Import tab of the Edit Part List window.  

Nesting tab Quantity

Required This setting defines the default quantity used when importing parts.   Range: 1 to 10,000 Recommended Value: 1   Attributes

Initial rotation A part can be rotated (counter-clockwise) when it is added to the part list by defining an initial rotation angle. This rotation will become the part's "natural" orientation.   - 68 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Units: Degrees (°) Range: 0 to 360° Recommended Value: 0°  

Grain restraint When editing your part list, you can specify a rotation restriction that will be used when importing parts.   Units: Degrees (°) Range: 0 to 360° Recommended Value: 0°   This setting is commonly used with parts that have grain restrictions (they must run parallel with the grain of the material). The grain restraint angle defines a set of valid part orientations. For example, a value of 180° will limit valid part orientations to 0° and 180°. A value of 360° will restrict rotation completely - allowing only the part's natural orientation. A value of 0° will allow any rotation. Note: The grain restraint angle will not restrict parts that are rotated manually. If a part is rotated manually to an angle that violates the part's rotation restriction, ProNest will display the error message Part orientation violates rotation restriction and will show the part in conflict.

Priority Priority is used to sort parts for automatic nesting. All things being equal, parts with a priority of 1 will nest before parts with a priority of 99.   Range: 1 to 99 Recommended Value: 5 Tip:

A priority value of 99 is reserved for filler (A generally useful part that can be nested on any nest - as long as doing so doesn't prevent non-filler parts from nesting. During automatic nesting, parts with a priority of 99 are used as filler parts) parts.   Filler parts are nested on a plate during automatic nesting only when:  l At least one non-filler part has already been nested on the plate.  l Automatic nesting has already tried to place all other parts with a priority less than 99 on the plate.

Prohibit filling When selected, a part will not be allowed to have smaller parts nested inside of it. As a result, ProNest will not place parts inside the interior profiles of the part during AutoNest. If a smaller part is manually placed inside of the part, the smaller part will appear in conflict on the nest.   A part with Prohibit filling turned on has cross-hatching drawn in its interior profiles.

Mirror A part's mirror value will affect how ProNest will nest the part during automatic nesting, CLC Quad, and CLC Array. When editing your part list, you can specify a mirror value that will be used when importing parts.  

- 69 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Choices: Never, Always, Either   Never - ProNest will never mirror the part. Always - ProNest will always mirror the part. Either - ProNest will decide which part orientation is best: natural or mirrored. Important: For CLC Quad to work with certain parts (triangles, parts with only one square corner) the mirror value must be set to Either.

Cluster ProNest will automatically build clusters of parts that have this property selected.  

Fit ratio This ratio defines the cutoff for desirable clusters created automatically for parts with their Cluster property selected. The main reason to create a cluster is because it uses less space than two of that part placed next to each other. The space used by two parts placed next to each other is used as the 'benchmark'. An improvement is defined as follows:   Improvement = Space used by the cluster / Space used by two parts   If the improvement is better (less) than the fit ratio, then the cluster is added to the Part List as a custom part.   Units: Percentage Range: 50 to 100% Recommended Value: 90%  

Common line cutting ProNest will automatically build CLC clusters of parts that have this property set to anything other than (None).   Choices: (None), Pair, Quad, Both   (None) - CLC clusters will not be built for the part. Pair - If possible, a pair CLC cluster (2 parts) will be built for the part. Quad - If possible, a quad CLC cluster (4 parts) will be built for the part. Both - If possible, will build a pair and a quad CLC cluster.   AutoNest Properties

Allow pattern array Having this setting selected means that a part can be pattern arrayed during AutoNest.  

Allow CLC array Having this setting selected means that a part can be CLC arrayed during AutoNest.  

Allow leads to move Having this setting selected means that a part's leads can be moved during AutoNest.  

Allow dynamic align

- 70 -

ProNest 2019 Manual When selected, a part can be dynamically aligned during AutoNest. Eligible parts will be common line cut or bridged, depending on the Strategy in Dynamic Align settings.   Import Actions

Retain all existing leads When the part is imported, this setting will control whether or not the part's existing leads will be removed and replaced. Select this setting to keep any existing leads where they are. Profiles that do not have leads will still have leads applied. Note: If you are importing a CAD file with existing leads, you must also select the User drawn leads setting (on the CAD Import tab).

Add tabs Select this setting to AutoTab a part as it is imported. AutoTab will be applied to the part, based on your AutoTab settings.  

Slug destroy Select this setting to automatically apply slug destroy to a part as it's imported. Slug destroy will be applied to the interior profiles of the part, based on Slug Destroy settings.  

How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> click Importing Parts

- 71 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Importing Parts (Advanced) settings File/Controller Associations After installation, ProNest can import part information from several different file types. ProNest can be configured to read CNC Output files too. To do this, you have to match a file extension with a controller information file (CIF). The CIF is used to reverse-engineer a CNC output file into part information. Your defined file/controller associations are presented in tabular format.  

Table of File/Controller Associations   There are three buttons to the right of the table: New, Edit, and Delete.

Create a new file/controller association  1. Click New.  2. Type the file extension. For example, to associate CNC files, type "cnc" in the box.  3. Select the controller.  4. Click OK.

Edit an existing file/controller association  1. Select a file/controller association in the table.  2. Click Edit.  3. Edit the file extension or select a different controller.  4. Click OK.

Delete an existing file/controller association  1. Select a file/controller association in the table.  2. Click Delete.  

Importing CAD Files Maximum controller arc radius CNC Controllers may have limitations on the size of allowable radii. You may specify a maximum arc radius if your controller is limited to a certain size. Any arc greater than this value will be broken into line segments.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 75000.0 in. Recommended Value: 75000.0 in.

- 72 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

If Maximum controlled arc radius is set to 0 in., all arc motions will be processed as a set of straight line segments.

Arc radius tolerance When the radius of an arc motion exceeds the Maximum controller arc radius it is processed as a set of line segments. Arc radius tolerance determines the accuracy of this approximation. A large tolerance value will result in fewer line segments as it creates a crude approximation of the arc. A smaller tolerance value will increase the number of line segments, creating a smoother approximation.

Arc radius tolerance   Units: Distance Range: 0.001 to 1.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.01 in.  

Save part file tokens Each time a CAD file is imported, it is processed as if the file had never been imported before. This processing takes time. To improve the speed of importing CAD files you can select the Save part file tokens check box.   When Save part file tokens is selected, ProNest will create an MTC token file (.tok) as each CAD file is processed. This token file represents a "processed" version of the CAD file and will have the same name (except with a .tok extension). Next time the CAD file is imported, ProNest will search for its matching token file. If the CAD file hasn't been modified since the token file was created, ProNest will import from the token file - saving on processing time. Otherwise, the CAD file will be processed and a new token file will be saved. The trade-off with this speed improvement is the extra storage space needed for the token files. In the Part Sources area of the Edit Part List window, a CAD file that has an associated token file is indicated with a includes part file tokens message in the Properties pane.

File selection

Save Advanced Edit tokens If selected, all part changes made in Advanced Edit will be saved to the part's token file. The next time the CAD file is imported, the part's token file will be loaded because Save part file tokens is already selected. The end result is that the part will load with all of the changes made in Advanced Edit. This setting is active only when Save part file tokens is selected.

Use text marker If your cutting machine controller has a special text-marking device you may have to check this option. Contact Hypertherm to determine if you need to use this feature.   For more information on using this feature, see Buge text marking.

Importing CNC Files Tab auto-recognition size This value is used only when computer numerically controlled (CNC) files are added to ProNest's part list. CNC files are reverse-engineered (decoded) from controller instructions to part geometry. During this process, ProNest uses tab auto-recognition size to determine if gaps in a cutting profile are tabs. If a gap is smaller than this value, it will be converted to a tab. Otherwise, it will be interpreted as a break in the profile.   Units: Distance

- 73 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Range: -0.01 to 5.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.01 in.  

Strip stop codes When CNC files are added to the part list, they may contain stop codes. If this setting is selected, these stop codes will be removed when output files are created. How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> double-click Importing Parts

> click Importing Parts (Advanced)

- 74 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Bevel settings Bevel Settings Settings table Most beveling applications require modification of process parameters such as voltage, kerf, current, and feed rate at particular locations in the CNC code. The process parameters used for beveled profiles are stored in the bevel settings table.   To select a settings table: Type or select the name of the settings table in the box.   You can make changes to the selected settings table by clicking the see "About spreadsheets" on page 186.  

button. For more information on this and other settings tables,

Macro folder Macros (special transition loops, lead-ins, and lead-outs) are often required for beveling applications. They are used to represent the required geometry and process parameter changes for beveling a profile or for changing bevel angles within a profile.   All bevel macros exist in a single sub-folder within the Macros folder set in preferences.   To specify this folder:  1. Click the button to open the Browse for Folder dialog. The sub-folders within the Macros folder (specified on the Settings page in Preferences) will be shown.  2. Select a sub-folder containing bevel macros.  3. Click OK.   To browse for the macro folder:  1. Click the

button to open the Browse for Folder dialog.

 2. Browse to the folder containing bevel macros.  3. Click OK. Advanced: A set of standard bevel macros are installed with ProNest. Due to the specific needs of your particular beveling application it is possible that these macros are not adequate. Please contact Hypertherm if custom macros are needed.

Top angle orientation This setting defines how top angles are specified. Some beveling machines use positive angles to define a top angle, but some use negative angles. Negative (-) Top angles will be referred to as negative angles. Positive angles will be used to represent bottom bevels. Positive (+) Top angles will be referred to as positive angles. Negative angles will be used to represent bottom bevels.   This setting is primarily used for output purposes and for pulling the correct information from the bevel settings table.  

- 75 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

AutoBevel Settings When adding CAD parts to your part list, ProNest can automatically bevel parts that contain bevel information. This information is embedded in CAD layer names.

Use AutoBevel Select this setting if you have CAD files with bevel information contained in the CAD layer names.  

Bevel angle - prefix CAD layer names that begin with this prefix will be interpreted as layer names that contain AutoBevel information. By default, the prefix is "BVL". Note: This setting is active only if Use AutoBevel is selected. How do I get here in ProNest?  l Settings

> click Bevel

 

- 76 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Bevel (Advanced) settings Pass profiles are created when using multiple pass beveling. Multiple pass beveling allows more than one contour on entities in the part this may include using two different bevels angles on the same entity or using a bevel angle such that the beveled portion of the entity does not account for the full material thickness.

Pass Profile Sequence Sequence order for pass levels When making pass profiles, up to three types may be created: Top, Bottom, and Land. This setting allows you to choose the order in which they are cut.   To modify the cut order:  1. Select the pass type that you want to move  2. Click on the Up

or Down

button.

While making pass profiles Add leads and loops Select this check box to have loops and leads applied during pass profile creation. Their exact properties will come from the Bevel setting table.  

Add loops to non-beveled corners Select this check box if you wish transition loops to be added to corners of the beveled profiles where the entities to either side are not beveled. Otherwise, transition loops will only be added to beveled corners (A corner where at least one of the entities forming the corner has a non-zero bevel angle) . Note: This setting is active only if Add leads and loops is selected.

AutoLoop threshold Threshold angle used to determine which corners in a profile are candidates for automatically adding transition loops. Corners with an included angle less than this setting's value may have transition loops automatically added to them during pass profile creation.   Units: Degrees Range: 0 to 360° Recommended Value: 135° Note: This setting is active only if Add leads and loops is selected.

Compensate geometry Some beveling machines achieve the correct torch location through varying the kerf and other parameters based on the bevel angle. Others require that the geometry of the profiles themselves be changed.   Select this check box if your bevel machine requires that the profile geometry itself be compensated when beveling. Clear this check box if your bevel machine uses kerf and other process parameters to offset to the correct position when cutting the beveled profiles.  

Pass profile strategy When X, Y, and K cuts are defined for a profile, that profile must be broken into multiple profiles. The Pass profile strategy specifies how the motions derived from the original profile are re-combined into profiles that will be cut. - 77 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Pass Levels When this strategy is used, each of the resulting profiles will be composed entirely of motions of the same type (top, bottom, or land passes). Mixed Levels When this strategy is used, the resulting profiles can contain motions of all types (top, bottom, and land passes). If the original profile was closed, the Mixed Levels strategy will also produce a closed profile that is made up of the last remaining type for each motion in the original profile - as specified in Sequence order for pass levels.

Output Torch height Height of the torch above the plate. This value is used when compensating the geometry of beveled profiles.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in.  

Pre-kerf bevel profiles Select this checkbox to pre-kerf bevel profiles. Kerf commands will be removed from output code for beveled profiles.  

Smooth compensated profiles When pre-kerfed, gradual bevels that consist of many small continuous (non-tangent) motions can become jagged when cut on the machine. Selecting this setting will adjust the entities' end points so that they conform as closely as possible to an arc, without actually changing the number of entities or their shape. This can create a smoother cutting motion by minimizing non-tangency in profiles. Note: This setting is active only if Pre-kerf bevel profiles is selected.

Smooth tolerance Specifies a maximum distance from the approximated curve in which an arc can be formed. A large tolerance will likely cause more smoothing to occur at the expense of a less accurate curve.   Units: Distance Range: 0 to 100 in. Recommended Value: 0.02 in. Note: This setting is active only if Pre-kerf bevel profiles and Smooth compensated profiles are selected.

Smooth max radius The maximum radius of the arc to attempt to smooth profiles to. If the bevel segments follow an arc with a radius greater that this value, they will instead by smoothed to lines.   Units: Distance Range: 0 to 500 in. Recommended Value: 100 in. Note: This setting is active only if Pre-kerf bevel profiles and Smooth compensated profiles are selected.

Use macro extensions - 78 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Bevel macros, which contain lead and loop geometry will have extensions applied. This can reduce the chance of clipping the corners when cutting top bevels and can reduce material utilization by shrinking the part region.  

Extension threshold Threshold angle for corners to apply bevel macro extensions. Corners with angles greater than this value will not have extensions applied.   Units: Angle in degrees Range: 0° to 180° Recommended Value: 135° Note: This setting is active only if Use macro extensions is selected. How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> double-click Bevel

> click Bevel (Advanced)

- 79 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Standard Plate Sizes settings Defined Plate Sizes Every machine has its own list of standard plates sizes defined on this settings page. A machine can have any number of standard plates sizes: there is no upper limit. However, a machine must always have at least one standard plate size.   All standard plate sizes are rectangular and are listed in "Length x Width" format. For example:   120.000 x 60.000 in.

Add a new plate size  1. Click Add.  The "Add Standard Plate Size" dialog will appear.  2. Fill in the values for Length and Width.  3. Click OK.

Edit a plate size  1. Select a plate size in the Defined Plate Sizes box.  2. Click Edit.  The "Add Standard Plate Size" dialog will appear.  3. Change the values for Length and/or Width.  4. Click OK.

Delete a plate size  1. Select a plate size in the Defined Plate Sizes box.  2. Click Remove. Note:

 l The Remove button will be inactive when there is only one defined plate size.  l If you delete a plate size that is marked as the default plate, one of the remaining plates will become the new default plate.

  The Default Plate   Each machine must have a "default plate". It is this plate that is immediately available for nesting whenever you create a new job. Also, it is the default choice for new nests created either through the New Nest Setup dialog (manual nesting) or the AutoNest Setup dialog (automatic nesting). In the Defined Plate Sizes box, the default plate appears with a checkmark next to it.   To set a plate size as the default plate:  1. Select a plate size in the Defined Plate Sizes box.  2. Click Set as Default Plate.

Safe Zones Scheme

- 80 -

ProNest 2019 Manual This is the default safe zone scheme that will be assigned to all plates. You can also create new schemes or edit existing ones in the list.   Safe zones define areas on the nest that ProNest will consider as "unusable". Perhaps these areas are used for clamping, or maybe they define an area that should be left alone. Naturally, these kinds of areas shouldn't have parts nested on them. During any kind of automatic nesting, ProNest will avoid all safe zones. Also, during manual nesting ProNest will show conflicts between parts and safe zones.  

  Sometimes, a particular group of safe zones can be used on several different plate sizes.  This group is called a safe zone scheme.  In ProNest, you can define safe zone schemes and then use (and re-use) them on any custom or inventory plate. Important: The safe zone scheme selected here will be automatically applied to all plates when the current machine is in use.   Whenever ProNest creates a new nest, it will use the safe zone scheme selected here.

Apply default scheme based on plate thickness Select this setting to specify a maximum material thickness to use the default safe zone. This is useful for thicker plate that may not require clamps. Maximum material thickness Plates thicker than this size will not have the default safe zone scheme applied.

- 81 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Torches/Heads settings Torch Settings Number of torches This setting defines the maximum number of torches/heads that are possible. Usually this setting will match the physical limitation of the machine.   Range: 1 to 100 Recommended Value: 1 Important: The remaining torch settings are active only if Number of torches is greater than 1.

Master torch number For multi-torch operations, this setting identifies the master torch.   Range: 1 to Number of torches Recommended Value: 1  

Torch selection The AutoNest Setup dialog will use this value as its default for "Torch selection".   Choices: Fixed, "Fixed, Then One", Variable   When AutoNest is run, ProNest uses Torch selection to select how many torches are used.   Fixed - ProNest will try to nest all parts using the maximum number of torches allowed (specified by Number of torches). Unless each part quantity divides evenly into the number of torches, a small remainder of parts will not be nested.   Fixed, Then One - Similar to Fixed. Whenever a part cannot be nested using the number of torches, it will try to nest the part with only one torch.   Variable: ProNest will first try to nest all parts using the maximum number of torches allowed. If it cannot place the part, it will reduce the number of torches by one and try again. This process is repeated until it has tried with only one torch.  

Minimum torch spacing If parts are automatically nested using multiple torches, the torch spacing will be no less than this value.     Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 10,000.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.0 in. Tip:

Specify a value of 0 to allow any spacing.

Torch spacing type The AutoNest Setup dialog will use this value as its default for "Torch spacing type". The Part List task pane also uses this value to define its own torch settings.   Choices: Equal, Fixed, Variable   When AutoNest is run, ProNest uses Torch spacing type to select the torch spacing. The spacing used by ProNest is always limited by the Minimum torch spacing. - 82 -

ProNest 2019 Manual   Equal: The torch spacing is based on the nest width and the maximum number of torches being used. It is calculated by dividing the nest's width (ProNest y-axis) by the Number of torches.   Fixed: The torch spacing is always the same value (defined by Torch spacing) - regardless of the number of torches used.   Variable: Torch spacing will be adjusted based on the size of the part, so that the minimum part separation between multi-torch parts is used.  

Torch spacing The AutoNest Setup dialog will use this value as its default for 'Torch spacing'. The Part List task pane also uses this value to define its own torch settings.   Units: Distance Range: Minimum torch spacing to 10,000.0 in. Recommended Value: 20.0 in.   Whenever Torch spacing type is set to Fixed, this value defines the torch spacing used. Note: This setting is activated only if Torch spacing type is set to Fixed.

Orientation Multiple torches can extend along either the y-axis (vertical torches) or along the x-axis (horizontal torches).   Choices: Vertical, Horizontal Recommended Value: Vertical  

Punch with multiple torches Multi-torch punching will be enabled. If a multi-torch part contains punch geometry, the punching will be done with multiple torches on the master and slave parts.  

Scribe with multiple torches Multi-torch scribing will be enabled. If a multi-torch part contains scribe geometry, the scribing will be done with multiple torches on the master and slave parts.  

Minimize torch changes If this is selected, ProNest will minimize the number of torch spacing changes during automatic nesting. Rather than calculating a part's spacing, ProNest will nest the part inside or near a previously nested part. Whenever possible, each new part nested will used the same torch spacing as the previously nested part. Note: This setting is used only when Torch selection is set to Variable.

Torch change ratio This setting controls how often torch changes can happen. As the percentage increases, it becomes more likely that a part placed near a previously nested part will share the same torch spacing.   Units: Percentage Range: 0.0 to 100.0%

- 83 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Recommended Value: 50% Note: This setting is activated only if Minimize torch changes is selected.

Invert torch direction for multiple torch nesting By default, the master torch is always positioned closest to the nesting home in ProNest. When this setting is selected, the position of the master torch in relation to the nesting home will be reversed - it will be furthest away from the nesting home.

How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> click Torches or Heads

- 84 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Tooling settings Tool library The XML file containing all available tools in the shop that might be used by the machine.   This file must exist in the Tooling folder specified on the Settings page in Preferences.   To view or edit the tools in the tool library:  l Click the Edit Tool Library button.

Sequence Options Tooling sequence options are used to control the order in which all tooling, as well as cutting, is completed on nests. With tooling sequencing, ProNest generally follows this order for different processes on a nest or within a zone:  1. Punch (most commonly centermark or point marking)  2. Scribe  3. Mark  4. Cut pilot holes (using cut process)  5. Drill  6. Cut interiors  7. Cut exteriors (part drops out) There are some exceptions, such as when parts are nested inside other drilled parts. However, ProNest follows this order when possible.  

General method These methods control how tooling sequence is applied. Note that these take precedence over the values on the Cut Sequence settings page. Some choices will completely override the Cut Sequence settings, while others will simply alter the Cut Sequence.   For the purposes of tooling sequence settings, assume a normal plate orientation where the X axis is horizontal, the Y axis is vertical, and the origin is at the lower left corner of the nest.

The following grid and zone settings can be set for several of the methods listed below. Basically, these enable you to partition the nest into smaller sections for sequencing.   Grids You can overlay a grid onto the nest to create multiple rectangular sections. All tooling is done in a single grid section before moving on to tooled profiles in the next section.

- 85 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

X grid size (1) The interval along the X axis for vertical grid lines. X grid offset (2) A buffer distance to either side of the vertical X grid lines. This is used to accommodate machines where the turret may be offset from the cutting head. Y grid size (3) The interval along the Y axis for horizontal grid lines. Tip: To get the sequence you want, try setting the X and Y grid sizes down to a very small value, such as 0.1 inches (2.5 mm).   Zones X zones function similar to work zones in ProNest. This lets you divide the nest into vertical bands, where all profiles within the zone (whether they are cut, marked, or tooled) are processed before moving on to the next zone.

X zone size (4) Set the interval along the X axis for vertical zone lines on the nest.   Methods: Use nesting sequence

- 86 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Cut Sequence settings will be used to determine the sequencing of all profiles on the nest. This is an advanced option which is not typically used. Left to right Grid sections on the nest are processed moving from the left side of the plate to the right. All tooled profiles on the nest are processed before any cutting.

Note:

With this method, ProNest Cut Sequence settings are overridden and making changes to the sequence in Cut Sequence mode is prohibited.

Bottom to top Grid sections on the nest are processed moving from the bottom side of the plate to the top. All tooled profiles on the nest are processed before any cutting.

Note:

With this method, ProNest Cut Sequence settings are overridden and making changes to the sequence in Cut Sequence mode is prohibited.

Top to bottom Grid sections on the nest are processed moving from the top side of the plate to the bottom. All tooled profiles on the nest are processed before any cutting.

- 87 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Note:

With this method, ProNest Cut Sequence settings are overridden and making changes to the sequence in Cut Sequence mode is prohibited.

Right to left Grid sections on the nest are processed moving from the right side of the plate to the left. All tooled profiles on the nest are processed before any cutting.

Note:

With this method, ProNest Cut Sequence settings are overridden and making changes to the sequence in Cut Sequence mode is prohibited.

By part, then left to right Parts are processed one at a time; all tooling and cutting is completed on a single part before the sequence moves on to the next part. Parts closer to the left side of the plate are processed first. Note:

With this method, ProNest Cut Sequence settings are overridden and making changes to the sequence in Cut Sequence mode is prohibited.

By part, then bottom to top Parts are processed one at a time; all tooling and cutting is completed on a single part before the sequence moves on to the next part. Parts closer to the bottom side of the plate are processed first. Note:

With this method, ProNest Cut Sequence settings are overridden and making changes to the sequence in Cut Sequence mode is prohibited.

X zone, then left to right All grid sections in the zone are processed left to right until the parts enclosed in the zone are cut completely. The sequence then moves on to the next zone. Note:

With this method, ProNest Cut Sequence settings are overridden and making changes to the sequence in Cut Sequence mode is prohibited.

X zone, then bottom to top All grid sections in the zone are processed bottom to top until the parts enclosed in the zone are cut completely. The sequence then moves on to the next zone.

- 88 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Note:

With this method, ProNest Cut Sequence settings are overridden and making changes to the sequence in Cut Sequence mode is prohibited.

Left to right, then cut nest order All grid sections are processed left to right until all tooled profiles are completed. Then, all cut profiles on the nest are cut according to Cut Sequence settings. Bottom to top, then cut nest order All grid sections are processed bottom to top until all tooled profiles are completed. Then, all cut profiles on the nest are cut according to Cut Sequence settings. X zone, left to right, then cut nest order In a given zone, all grid sections are processed left to right until all tooled profiles enclosed in the zone are completed. Then, all cut profiles in that zone are cut according to Cut Sequence settings. The sequence then moves on to the next zone. X zone, bottom to top, then cut nest order In a given zone, all grid sections are processed bottom to top until all tooled profiles enclosed in the zone are completed. Then, all cut profiles in that zone are cut according to Cut Sequence settings. The sequence then moves on to the next zone. X zone, right to left, then cut nest order In a given zone, all grid sections are processed right to left until all tooled profiles enclosed in the zone are completed. Then, all cut profiles in that zone are cut according to Cut Sequence settings. The sequence then moves on to the next zone. Left to right, then cut nest order (1.1 method) This is like Left to right, then cut nest order but sorting of drill profiles is slightly different. The Tool sort option is not considered and taps are generally sequenced better.  

Y direction Limits the vertical direction in which profiles are sequenced within a grid section or zone. One way, up Profiles will be processed from bottom edge of the plate to the top within a given grid section or zone. Once it reaches the top, the turret or cutting head will traverse down to the bottom border to continue the sequence.

A Left to right method with One way up would process tooled holes from bottom to top in a given grid section. One way, down Profiles will be processed from top edge of the plate to the bottom within a given grid section or zone. Once it reaches the bottom, the turret or cutting head will traverse up to the top border to continue the sequence.

- 89 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

A Left to right method with One way down would process tooled holes from top to bottom in a given grid section. Alternating Profiles will be processed in either vertical direction within a given grid section or zone. This option can shorten the total traverse distance.

A Left to right method with Alternating would process tooled holes in a serpentine pattern from one section to the next. Tool sort option These options affect the order in which tools are sequenced on the nest. Turret order The tooling sequence will follow the order in which the tools are loaded in the turret. The tool in the first station will be used first, followed by the tool in the second station, and so on. Sequence number then turret order The part's cut sequence is used to determine which holes should be processed first, followed by the order in which the tool is loaded in the turret. Sequence number, turret order, then compound tool sequence The part's cut sequence is used to determine which holes should be processed first, followed by the order in which the tool is loaded in the turret, and finally the sequence from the compound tool in the tool library. Important:

If you have compound tools in the tool library, you should select the Sequence number, turret order, then compound tool sequence option. This will ensure that the compound tool sequence specified in the tool library is always honored.

Profile sort A reference point on a profile that is used when establishing the sequence for cut profiles on the nest. The sort point is placed in relation to a bounding box around the profile.

- 90 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

1 = Minimum 2 = Mid point 3 = Maximum Note:

 l If Collision Avoidance is enabled, the tooling sequence will not be altered by collision avoidance.  l ProNest Cut Sequence settings are only honored with the following Tooling settings:  l Use nesting sequence  l Left to right, then cut nest order  l Bottom to top, then cut nest order  l X zone, Left to right, then cut nest order  l X zone, bottom to top, then cut nest order  l X zone, right to left, then cut nest order  l Left to right, then cut nest order 1.1 method

Pilot drill options These options inform ProNest how holes (such as taps) that require pilot holes are drawn in the CAD file, to ensure that all the tool hits are sequenced in the correct order. Disable pilot drills In the tool library, if a drill tool contains an associated pilot drill, the pilot drill will be completely ignored when that tool is assigned to a hole. This option typically should not be used if you have pilot drills in the tool library.   This setting should be used when the CAD drawing contains two circles for a single hole: one for the pilot hole and another for the larger finish hole. This will ensure that all smaller holes are drilled prior to the larger ones. Enable pilot drills, sequence them together This sequencing option should be used when the CAD drawing contains one single hole that represents both the pilot and finish drill, and you want to immediately drill out the finish hole after the pilot hole is cut. Enable pilot drills, sequence them separately This sequencing option should be used when the CAD drawing contains one single hole that represents both the pilot and finish drill, and you want to complete all pilot cuts on the nest or zone prior to drilling out any larger finish holes.

Import Options

Tool recognition tolerance When ProNest attempts to match available tools in the tool library to drill geometry in a part drawing file, this is the tolerance that is used. Hole dimensions must be within this tolerance value in order for a tool assignment to be made.   This setting is an equal bilateral tolerance; it is both an upper and lower tolerance value.   In cases where multiple tools fall within the tolerance and qualify to be used on a hole, the tool that is closest in size to the required hole will be used.   - 91 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Example:   Suppose a CAD file contains a part with a hole that is exactly 6.50 mm diameter and the Tool recognition tolerance is set to 0.50 mm. The following tools would not match: 7.5 mm diameter tool 5.5 mm diameter tool These tools would match: 7.0 mm diameter tool 6.5 mm diameter tool 6.0 mm diameter tool Ultimately, the 6.5 mm tool would be assigned, because it is the closest in size to the required 6.5 mm hole.  

Use tooling on cut layers when possible When enabled, if a profile is on a CAD layer that is assigned to the cut process, ProNest will attempt to convert that profile to a tool process, as long as the geometry allows it. Cut layers to ignore Enter any CAD layers assigned to a cut process that you don't want converted to the tool process during import. Layers entered here will be assigned to the cut process when they're imported, even though Use tooling on cut layers when possible is enabled. Note:

If the hole on the cut layer can't be matched to an existing tool in the library, it will remain on the cut process; it will not be tooled.

Restrict part rotation based on tool When enabled, if a part contains a profile that will be processed with a non-round tool that has rotation restrictions, the part's Grain Restraint property will be set to match the rotation restriction of the tools used. Note:

Used only for non-spindle tools such as turret punch.

Coarse tap color The standard color in CAD files that is used to indicate coarse tapped holes.   If a CAD file has a hole that should be tapped, the following must apply:  l On the layer mapped to the Drilling process  l Matches the diameter of tool with a Tap Coarse type in the Tool Library (tool name uses "TC" prefix)  l Is assigned a CAD color that matches this Coarse tap color in ProNest.   See Tapping for more information.  

Fine tap color The standard color in CAD files that is used to indicate fine tapped holes.   If a CAD file has a hole that should be tapped, the following must apply:

- 92 -

ProNest 2019 Manual  l On the layer mapped to the Drilling process  l Matches the diameter of tool with a Tap Fine type in the Tool Library (tool name uses "TF" prefix).  l Is assigned a CAD color that matches this Fine tap color in ProNest.   See Tapping for more information.  

Countersink color The standard color in CAD files that is used to indicate countersunk holes.   If a CAD file has a hole that should be countersunk, the following must apply:  l On the layer mapped to the Drilling process  l Matches the diameter of tool with a Countersink type in the Tool Library (tool name uses "CS" prefix).  l Is assigned a CAD color that matches this Countersink color in ProNest.   See Countersinking for more information.

How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> click Tooling

- 93 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Turret settings This settings page provides a way to model the tool storage unit on your machine's automatic tool changer. In ProNest, this is referred to as the "Turret" though you may have a different style storage unit, such as a carousel or chain style magazine.

Drawing of a turret style tool storage unit with eight stations Initial set up If your machine's default turret configuration isn't set up yet, you can use the grid to enter the number of stations, station type, and default tools loaded in each station.  1. In the Number of Stations box, type in the total number of fixed stations on your tool changer/turret/carousel.  2. In the top row, in the Station column, enter the number or letter of the first station. For instance, you might enter "1" or "101" here.  3. If you've entered a numerical value, you can automatically fill up all the rest of the available stations by clicking Auto assign stations. This will increment the number by one for each successive station until all stations have been filled. Next, you can set station types. Be sure to do this if a station can only accept certain types or sizes of tools.  4. In the first row, enter a Station Type for your the first station.  5. If all stations have the same type, hold SHIFT key and click the last row's Station Type box.  6. Select the type from the drop down list.

Tip: If you make a mistake and need to reset the entire grid, simply set the Number of stations back to 0 and then re-enter the correct number again. Once set up, this Turret configuration settings page serves as the default layout for the Turret pane on the main nesting screen.

Turret properties

Number of stations The total number of stations on your turret/tool changer/carousel. - 94 -

ProNest 2019 Manual   Range: 1 to 1000

Station This is normally a number or letter used to identify a station on the turret.  

Station Type Station type for the turret station. On certain drill machines, not all stations can accept any tool. Station type is used to tell ProNest which tools are compatible with a given station.   Turret stations have a Station Type and drill tools in the tool library also have a Station Type. If a tool and turret station have matching Station Types, the tool is eligible to be loaded in that station. ProNest will not load a tool in a station with a different Station Type.   New station types can be added either on the Turret settings page or the Drill Tools tab of the tool library. The list of station types is synced between these two areas.  

Tool You can set a default tool that will always be loaded in a station. The tool you select will become locked in that station for every nest, even if it isn't needed by any parts on the nest. The list of available tools comes from the tool library.  

Locked tools in the Turret pane are indicated by a lock icon   Setting a locked tool can cause limitations to nesting. If a locked tool isn't needed in a job, the station will still be occupied by the tool. This can cause either more turret reloads for a single nest or it can mean that a part can't be nested at all (if Allow multiple turret layouts on a nest is turned off).   Though it is possible to manually clear a locked default tool in the Turret pane for any nest, this can become time consuming if done often. It is best to specify default tools in Turret settings only if they're frequently used. Otherwise, leave this field blank.  

Allow multiple turret layouts on a nest This setting controls whether or not you want allow the creation of nests that would require the turret to be reloaded when cutting a single nest.   When selected, a single nest can have more than one turret layout.   When cleared, only one turret layout is allowed for a single nest. Parts can be placed on a single nest until all available turret stations are filled up. After that, any parts that would require an additional tool not already in a station could not be placed on that nest. These parts will appear in conflict if you try to nest them.   If a single part contains more drill holes than there are compatible stations in the turret and this setting is disabled, you will not be able to nest that part anywhere.   Example:   Suppose there is a drill machine that can hold four tools at a time in the automatic tool changer; it is a four station turret. A job has parts that will all fit on a single nest, but contain 11 different hole sizes and will require the turret stations to be reloaded several times before the nest is completely cut.  

- 95 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

With Allow multiple turret layouts on a nest enabled ( requires several layouts:   Nest 1: Station

Layout 1

), you could create a nest, either manually or with automatic nesting, that

Layout 2

Layout 3

1

4 mm HSS

7 mm HSS

20mm HSS

2

8 mm HSS

11 mm HSS

26 mm HSS

3

12 mm HSS

17 mm HSS

30 mm HSS

4

15 mm HSS

24 mm HSS

  When the nest is output, a stop code would be inserted after all tool hits in layout 1 are complete, allowing the operator to reload the turret. A second stop code would be inserted after layout 2.   With Allow multiple turret layouts on a nest cleared ( ), you would be allowed to place parts on a single nest until the four stations are filled up. After that, any parts that would require an additional tool not already in a station could not be placed on that nest. A different nest for each turret layout would be needed.   Nest 1: Station

Layout 1

1

4 mm HSS

2

8 mm HSS

3

12 mm HSS

4

15 mm HSS

  Nest 2: Station

Layout 2

1

7 mm HSS

2

11 mm HSS

3

17 mm HSS

4

24 mm HSS

  Nest 3: Station

Layout 3

1

20 mm HSS

2

26 mm HSS

3

30 mm HSS

4

- 96 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

  If a part with five different drill hole sizes is added to the part list, it will be flagged with a warning that is can't be nested.

Sort tools in turret layouts from smallest to largest By default, tools will be automatically sorted in the turret based on their diameter. The smallest tool will be loaded in the first compatible station, the next smallest tool will be loaded in the next station, and so on. As parts are nested, required tools will be re-ordered in the turret as needed, so that the order is always from smallest to largest.   If you are using default tools (the Tool column on this Turret settings page), ProNest will automatically re-sort stations in order to maintain the smallest to largest.   Automatic sorting is used to control the sequencing of drills on the nest. In ProNest, the sequence in which holes on the nest are drilled is partially determined by the turret order. Select this setting to sequence tool hits on a nest by size, beginning with the smallest tool. Note:

Tools and stations can not be dragged and reordered in the turret when this option is selected.

Where is this information stored? The default turret configuration is saved in the ProNest settings, in the machine file (.cfg). Note:

When opening a job that contains drilling, ProNest doesn't respect the Restore settings from job setting for the Turret settings related to configuration (like Number of Stations, Station Name, Station Type, etc.). It always uses the turret settings from the basis machine (.cfg) and not the job (.nif) that is being opened.

Associated warnings Default tools have been removed from the turret Loading a tool library that lacks the default tools specified for the turret causes this message to appear. How do I get here in ProNest?  l Settings

> double-click the Tooling page > click Turret

- 97 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Work Zones settings Some cutting machines cannot reach all areas of a plate without special processing. These cutting machines must divide the plate into smaller units in which to work inside. When one work zone has been processed, the machine moves to a different work zone and processes that until all areas of the nest have been processed.  

  Automatic nesting respects work zone boundaries during automatic nesting. Allowing work zones to overlap will usually yield a better nest than having non-overlapping work zones.

Work Zone Settings Use work zones Select this setting to activate work zones.  

Layout This setting defines the type of work zones that this machine supports.   Choices: Horizontal repositions, Vertical repositions, Reposition in both directions   Horizontal repositions (along x-axis) Select this setting to use work zones that subdivide the length of the plate into multiple work zones.   Vertical repositions (along y-axis) [Not available] Select this setting to use work zones that subdivide the width of the plate into multiple work zones.   Reposition in both directions [Not available] Select this setting to use work zones that  subdivide both the length and width of the plate into work zones.  

Work zone length Length (along the x-axis) of each work zone. This represents the size of the working area available to the controller at any given time.   Units: Distance Range: 0.1 to 10000.0 in.  

Work zone width Width (along the y-axis) of each work zone.   Units: Distance Range: 0.1 to 10000.0 in. Note: This setting is intended to work with the Vertical reposition layout - which is not available.

Horizontal reposition distance Represents the horizontal distance a machine needs to shift to move from one work zone to the next.   Units: Distance - 98 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Range: 0.1 to 10000.0 in.   Examples:  l If this setting has the same value as Work zone length, then the work zones will not overlap.  l If this setting has a value less than Work zone length, the work zones will overlap.  l If this setting has a value greater than Work zone length, unreachable gaps will be created between consecutive work zones.  

Vertical reposition distance Represents the vertical distance a machine needs to shift to move from one work zone to the next.   Units: Distance Range: 0.1 to 10000.0 in.   Examples:  l If this setting has the same value as Work zone width, then the work zones will not overlap.  l If this setting has a value less than Work zone width, the work zones will overlap.  l If this setting has a value greater than Work zone width, unreachable gaps will be created between consecutive work zones.

Note: This setting is intended to work with the Vertical reposition layout - which is not available.

Maximum repositions This setting limits the number of work zones for any given nest.   Range: 0 to 10000 Tip:

Set Maximum repositions to 0 to allow an unlimited number of repositions.

Allow forward and backward repositions Select this setting if your cutting machine can reposition both forward and backwards along the same axis. Clear this setting if your machine can only reposition in one direction.   Effect of "Allow forward and backward repositions" on the active cut sequence rule:   When this setting is selected, the active cut sequence rule will be completed such that:  1. All tasks in Step 1 will be completed as the machine repositions from the first work zone to the last (repositioning in the "positive" direction).  2. Any tasks in Step 2 would then be completed as the machine repositions from the last work zone to the first (repositioning in the "negative" direction).  3. Any tasks in Step 3 would then be completed in the "positive" direction - like Step 1.  4. etc..   When this setting is cleared, each step in the active cut sequence rule will be completed such that:

- 99 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. All tasks in Step 1 will be completed as the machine repositions from the first work zone to the last (repositioning in the "positive" direction).  2. When all tasks in Step 1 is complete, the machine will reposition to the first work zone.  3. Any tasks in Step 2 would then be completed in the "positive" direction.  4. etc...   For more information about cut sequence steps and tasks, see "Cut Sequence Rules settings" on page 125.  

Allow one crop for each Work Zone This setting is available only if you have the Work Zones module. Normally, only one crop is allowed per nest. Select this setting to allow one crop for each work zone.  

How do I access this page?  l Settings

> click Work Zones

- 100 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Nesting settings General Settings Nest resolution This setting controls many aspects of nesting (positioning parts, conflict checking, ...) because it specifies how accurate you want ProNest to be. There is a trade-off between accuracy and speed. Smaller nest resolutions can result in tighter nests and better conflict checking but will cause most operations to run slower.   Units: Distance Range: 0.01 to 1.0 in. (0.254 to 25.4 mm) Recommended Value: 0.1 in. (2.54 mm)  

Nesting home This setting represents the point of origin used for automatic nesting. All nesting strategies will begin nesting from this point. This is also the corner of the plate to which parts will be bumped during manual nesting. The location specified can be interpreted as coordinate (0, 0) and will be displayed in the nesting area with a blue target symbol.   Choices: Lower Left, Upper Left, Upper Right, Lower Right, Same as Machine Home Note:

When Same as Machine Home is selected, a blue and yellow target ( Machine home will be displayed in the nesting area.

) symbol representing both the Nesting Home and

Do not ignore leads Take leads into account when determining part spacing during manual or automatic nesting. This will result in the most space between pierce points and neighboring parts.  

Ignore all leads If this is selected, ProNest will ignore leads when determining part spacing during manual or automatic nesting. This allows ProNest to create a tighter nest but will most likely require movement of the leads to new locations where they avoid neighboring profiles.  

Ignore lead sizes smaller than n% of part separation Leads smaller than a user-defined percentage of the part separation can be ignored during manual and automatic nesting. This is useful in cases where some leads/pierces are insignificant and should not affect the spacing between parts, but others are larger and should not be ignored, in case they cause real conflicts with neighboring parts.   For the purposes of this setting, lead size refers to the perpendicular distance from the part edge to the outermost point on the lead, including any pierce separation.  

Lead size

- 101 -

ProNest 2019 Manual   When lead size is smaller than the specified percentage of the part separation, leads will be ignored, allowing parts to be nested closer together:

Two nested parts, spaced according to the Part Separation (1). Note that because lead size is small enough, the lead (and pierce separation) is ignored during nesting, allowing for a tighter nest.   When lead size is larger than the specified percentage of the part separation, the leads will not be ignored during nesting. This may be the case when cutting thicker material.

Because of the larger lead size, these two parts are spaced farther apart. The lead (and pierce separation) is not ignored during nesting, so that the pierce doesn't interfere with the neighboring part. Reverse cut direction on mirror When a part is mirrored on the nest (either manually or by automatic nesting) one of two things can happen to the cut direction:  1. The cut direction can remain the same. This means that clockwise cuts will remain clockwise. Clear this check box to maintain the same cut direction during mirror operations.  2. The cut direction will reverse. This means that clockwise cuts will change to counter-clockwise cuts. Kerf is adjusted accordingly. Select this check box to reverse the cut direction during mirror operations.

Allow nesting outside the crop If this setting is selected, parts that are nested outside the crop (in the remnant) will not be shown in conflict.  

- 102 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Interactive (Manual) Nesting Nudge distance This setting defines the distance a part moves when it is nudged.   Units: Distance Range: 0.1 to 10000 in. (5.0 to 254000 mm) Recommended Value: 0.1 in. (2.54 mm)   To nudge a selected part:  l Hold the SHIFT key and click one of the bump handles ( ). -or l Hold the SHIFT key and press one of the arrow keys. How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> click Nesting

- 103 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

AutoNest settings Pattern Array Settings Default pattern array strategy When ProNest is started, Pattern Array will use this strategy until a different strategy is selected. All strategies use several techniques to calculate an optimal pattern of the selected part or group (including spacing and orientation). Once the optimal pattern is calculated, ProNest arrays the parts using that pattern.   Choices: Basic, Intermediate, Advanced   The difference between these three choices is speed and utilization. The Basic strategy will be much faster than the Advanced strategy, but it will not attempt nearly as many part orientations. In many cases, the Advanced strategy will find a tighter pattern than the Basic strategy. Advanced: Each of these strategies is defined by a group of settings. To edit these strategies, open the Pattern Array Strategies dialog by clicking on the Edit Strategies button in the "Pattern Array Settings" section.

Treat parts with identical exteriors as the same part During Pattern Array nesting, parts with identical exterior profiles will be treated as though they are the same part (even though their interior profiles may differ). These parts will be arrayed together on the nest.   Recommended Value: On Note:

This setting applies to pattern array as well as to all true shape automatic nesting strategies (IntelliChoice and Strategies 110).

AutoNest Settings Straight edge ratio This is used in estimating the area needed on the last plate of a nest, which tries to create a straight edge of parts for cropping. The higher the estimated utilization, the higher the number. (i.e., Rectangles nest easily and neatly, therefore the straight edge factor would be higher than a nest of odd shaped parts.   Units: Percentage (%) Range: 50 to 100% Recommended Value: 100%  

Only create new nests Select this to have automatic nesting begin on a new nest, instead of beginning on the current nest. ProNest will not fill any existing nests before it starts to create new nests.   When cleared, ProNest will begin AutoNest on the current nest. Note: This setting is available only if you have the Automatic Nesting option.

Strategy Note: These strategies are available only if you have the Automatic Nesting option. - 104 -

ProNest 2019 Manual When ProNest is first started, this value will be used when AutoNest is run. The AutoNest Setup dialog will use this value as its default for "Strategy".   Strategies available:

IntelliChoice This method of automatic nesting is designed to make advanced level nesting decisions based on the available parts in the part list. IntelliChoice is a flexible approach that can choose between different nesting strategies, different part sets and different regions of the nest to achieve optimal nesting results.

Rectangular Rectangular nesting is a nesting strategy where ProNest places an imaginary rectangular border around each part. The parts are then nested in such a way that no part overlaps into the rectangular border of another part.   To create a nest, ProNest simply nests the parts one at a time, in the order they appear in the Part List task pane.

Rectangular Optimization Rectangular optimization uses the same rules as Rectangular nesting for placing parts. The strategy, however, is more complicated and time consuming.   To create a nest, this strategy tries to determine which parts fit together best. Parts that fit together into efficient units (kits) are remembered and used several times. During this strategy, ProNest also looks ahead a few steps for each nested part - to determine if each placement is truly optimal

Strategies 1 - 10 Strategies 1 - 10 are all very similar. They are different from Rectangular nesting in that they use the part's true shape when determining where to place it - instead of using the part's rectangular region. This means that parts can be nested closer together, interlocked with other parts, or be placed inside other parts.   Each of these strategies employs different rules when nesting parts. Some will try fewer part orientations and others will attempt some of the arraying algorithms (pattern array, CLC array). As a strategy tries more possibilities the time needed to create a nest increases.   When deciding which strategy to use, keep in mind that the lower-numbered strategies are faster but not as thorough, whereas the higher-numbered strategies are more thorough but somewhat slower. It may be useful to experiment with several strategies in order to find the one gives you the best results. Advanced: Each of these strategies (except Rectangular and IntelliChoice) is defined by a group of settings. To edit these strategies, open the AutoNest Strategies dialog by clicking on the Edit Strategies button in the "AutoNest Settings" section.

Cut each nest the maximum number of times If this is checked, ProNest will generate a nest and then calculate how many times that nest can be cut with the parts that remain.  

IntelliChoice should include common line cutting When IntelliChoice is the selected strategy, this setting can be selected to try to automatically create CLC arrays during AutoNest. Note:

An individual part's Allow CLC array property must be enabled for the part to be CLC arrayed during automatic nesting.

- 105 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

IntelliChoice should dynamically align parts When IntelliChoice is the selected strategy, rectangular parts will be dynamically aligned with bridging or common line cutting, based on the strategy selected in Dynamic Align settings. Note:

An individual part's Allow dynamic align property must be enabled for the part to be dynamically aligned during automatic nesting.

Moving Leads (AutoNest and Pattern Array) Strategy While parts are nested during automatic nesting or during pattern array, leads will be moved on each nested part to the location specified by this setting.   Choices: Upper Left, Upper Right, Lower Right, Lower Left, Top, Right, Bottom, Left Note: This setting only applies to parts that have their Allow leads to move property selected.

Automatically move leads If this is selected, ProNest will move each part’s leads to the relative location specified by the Moving Leads Strategy setting. Note: This setting only applies to parts that have their Allow leads to move property selected.

Move interior leads If this is checked, ProNest will move interior leads according to the same rules it uses for exterior leads.  Otherwise, interior leads are left alone.  

How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> double-click Nesting

> click AutoNest

 

- 106 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Pattern Array Strategies The Pattern Array Strategies dialog allows you to modify each of the three available strategies: Basic, Intermediate, and Advanced.   To open the Pattern Array Strategies dialog:  1. Go to the AutoNest settings page.  2. Click the Edit Strategies button in the Pattern Array Settings section.   At the top of the dialog is a combo box that displays the current pattern array strategy.   To edit the settings for a particular pattern array strategy:  l In the Strategy box, select either Basic, Intermediate, or Advanced.

Settings Note: The section name will change to match the current pattern array strategy. If Intermediate is selected, then the section would read "Intermediate Settings."

Cluster building technique This setting allows you to choose how good of a pattern you want created. The Basic technique builds a pattern in the least amount of time. Advanced often takes longer, but usually produces a tighter pattern.   Choices: Basic, Intermediate, Advanced   Basic A good technique for simple parts like rectangles.   Intermediate This technique does everything Basic does, plus it will try to optimize the size of the pattern. It will also try to build a "three part" cluster.   Advanced This technique works best for complicated parts. It does everything Intermediate does, but uses more attempts to create a tighter cluster.  

Pattern rotation increment This is the angle by which to rotate the part before attempting to create the pattern. With a smaller angle, more patterns are attempted, which increases the time needed to find a good pattern.   Units: Degrees Range: 0 to 90° Tip:

For circular and rectangular parts, a value of 90° usually suffices, although 45° can help depending on lead placement. For other parts, 45° is generally a good value. Sometimes a value of 15° or even 5° can result in significantly better patterns.

Cluster resolution (% of nest resolution) This setting represents the percentage of the nest resolution to use when creating the pattern. Smaller values will create tighter patterns, but will take longer to create. Values over 100% represent resolutions greater than the nest resolution.   Units: Percentage Range: 20 to 500%   - 107 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Try extra row If this check box is selected, an attempt will be made to squeeze an extra row in the pattern. This will increase the time required to generate the pattern.  

Try extra column If this check box is selected, an attempt will be made to squeeze an extra column in the pattern. This will increase the time required to generate the pattern.  

Try mixed patterns If this check box is selected, ProNest will try to create the optimal combination of two patterns, either side by side or one above the other.  

- 108 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

AutoNest Strategies The AutoNest Strategies dialog allows you to edit the settings that define the behavior of each strategy.   To open the AutoNest Strategies dialog:  1. Go to the AutoNest settings page.  2. Click the Edit Strategies button in the AutoNest Settings section.   On the left-hand side of the AutoNest Strategies dialog is the list of available strategies. If you have purchased the Automatic Nesting module, the Rectangular Optimization option will appear at the top of this list followed by ten strategies called "Strategy 1" through "Strategy 10".   To edit the settings for a strategy:  l Select the strategy on the left that you want to edit. On the right, the settings for that strategy will appear. For more information about editing Rectangular Optimization settings, see "AutoNest Strategies - Rectangular Optimization" on page 110. For more information about editing all other strategies, see "AutoNest Strategies - True Shape" on page 112.

Renaming strategies All of the strategies (with the exception of Rectangular Optimization) can be named to whatever you want.   To rename a strategy:  1. In the list on the left-hand side, select a strategy to rename.  2. After the strategy is selected, click on its name. The name of the strategy will become surrounded by an edit box - indicating that you can change it.  3. Type the new name for the strategy and press ENTER. Tip:

You can also right-click a strategy name to rename it. When you do, select Rename and then provide the new name for the strategy.

Saving and discarding changes All changes made to settings in the AutoNest Strategies dialog are temporary. This includes changing strategy names.   To accept your changes:  l Exit the dialog by clicking OK.   To discard your changes:  l Exit the dialog by clicking Cancel.

- 109 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

AutoNest Strategies - Rectangular Optimization Rectangular optimization is best used with parts that are rectangular in shape.

General Cutoff nest utilization The percentage of the plate that must be used before rectangular optimization is done. The first time a configuration of parts meets or exceeds this value, the nest is considered done. Having a high value leads to nests with high utilization, but they can take longer to produce. Having a low value finishes each nest quickly, but the nests tend to have lower utilizations.   Units: Percentage Range: 0 to 100% Recommended Value: 95%  

Stack cutoff utilization The percentage of the region of each individual horizontal or vertical stack of rectangularly optimized clusters that must be occupied by parts before that stack will be chosen.   Units: Percentage Range: 0 to 100% Recommended Value: 90%  

Cutoff time This is the amount of time spent trying to nest multiple part combinations. Once this time limit is reached, multiple part combinations are "deactivated" and only single part combinations (i.e. the parts in the part bin) are considered. The larger the value, the longer each nest will take but it will result in better nests in some cases.   Units: Time (seconds) Range: 0 to 60 s Recommended Value: 2 s  

Look ahead Number of recursive levels in which to try rectangular optimization within the original available region. The larger this number, the more trials are attempted and the tighter the resulting nest.   Range: 0 to 99 Recommended Value: 99  

Part fit ratio The minimum percentage of a part’s bounding rectangle that must be filled by the exterior profile of the part for the part to be considered rectangular. The higher this number, the fewer parts will qualify as rectangular, but the nests will have much higher utilizations. Low values for this setting will cause more parts to be used for rectangular optimization, but the resulting nests will have much lower utilizations.   Units: Percentage Range: 50 to 100% Recommended Value: 90%  

Build vertical stacks

- 110 -

ProNest 2019 Manual If this check box is selected when a rectangular cluster is placed, ProNest will try to rectangularly optimize in the region directly above it.  

Build horizontal stacks If this check box is selected when a rectangular cluster is placed, ProNest will try to rectangularly optimize in the region directly to the side of it.

Combinations Maximum parts per combination The maximum number of parts that ProNest will include in each combination it builds for rectangular optimization.   Range: 0 to 99 Recommended Value: 6 - 10  

Maximum combinations This setting is the maximum number of combinations that will be created when creating candidate rectangular clusters for rectangular optimization.   Range: 0 to 1000 Recommended Value: 500  

Minimum combination utilization This setting is the minimum percentage that a rectangular cluster must occupy of its bounding rectangle for it to be kept as a viable candidate for rectangular optimization.   Units: Percentage Range: 0 to 100% Recommended Value: 90% Note:

Clicking the Default button on this page will revert back to the last saved AutoNest Strategy settings.

- 111 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

AutoNest Strategies - True Shape Nesting direction This section contains two options: Vertical or Horizontal.   Vertical Nesting will give preference to filling the plate from top to bottom before extending the nest horizontally. In general, this nesting direction will work towards completing the nest in such a way that it can be finished with a vertical crop.   Horizontal Nesting will give preference to filling the plate from side to side first before extending the nest vertically. In general, this nesting direction will work towards completing the nest in such a way that it can be finished with a horizontal crop.

Nesting approaches Rectangular Optimization Select this check box if rectangular optimization should be attempted during automatic nesting.  

Pattern Array Select this check box if pattern array should be used during automatic nesting.  

Pattern Array strategy The name of the pattern array strategy used during automatic nesting will appear to the right of the Pattern Array check box.   Choices: Basic, Intermediate, Advanced   To edit the strategy used:  1. Click on the name of the strategy (its a hyperlink).  2. Select the strategy you want from the list. Note: This setting is active only if Pattern Array is selected.

Fill using Pattern Array Select this check box if ProNest should attempt to fill unused regions of the plate with pattern arrays during automatic nesting. Note: This setting is active only if Pattern Array is selected.

CLC Array Select this check box if CLC array should be used during automatic nesting. Note:

An individual part's Allow CLC array property must be enabled for the part to be CLC arrayed during automatic nesting.

Fill using CLC Array Select this check box if ProNest should attempt to fill unused regions of the plate with CLC arrays during automatic nesting. Note: This setting is active only if CLC Array is selected.

- 112 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Dynamic Align Select this check box if dynamic align should be used during automatic nesting. Rectangular parts will be dynamically aligned with bridging or common line cutting, based on the strategy selected in Dynamic Align settings. Note:

An individual part's Allow dynamic align property must be enabled for the part to be dynamically aligned during automatic nesting.

Profile Nesting Options Maximum part orientations to try This slider controls the maximum number of rotations to try when placing each part. Some parts, like rectangles, don't require many orientations to try and find a good fit on the nest. They can be nested well using Level 1 - with only 90° rotations. Some other parts may need more orientations tried before a good fit can be found. As the levels increase (by moving the slider down), more orientations are tried for each part before moving on. While this can improve the utilization on the nest, it will increase the time needed to place each part.   Choices: Level 1 - 7 Note: As each level is selected, the description to the right of the slider will change.

Try orientations in groups of The number of orientations to try when placing a part during automatic nesting for each attempted rotation angle.   Choices: Two, Four   Two Two orientations for each rotation angle will be tried (the chosen orientation and the chosen orientation + 180 degrees).   Four Four orientations for each rotation angle will be tried (the chosen orientation, plus the chosen orientation rotated 90, 180, and 270 degrees).  

Rotate to minimize part area Select this setting if the parts should be rotated to minimize their bounding rectangles before they are nested.  

Tight fit Select this check box if ProNest should try to "wiggle" parts after they've been nested to get them to fit tighter. This often results in a better nest, but it does take more time.  

Advanced Common Line Cut Select this check box if common line cut parts should be built as the parts are nested. Important: This setting is independent of the CLC Array setting.   The following settings are in a group called Fit Evaluation (a measure of how well a newly nested part is placed) :

Part interlock Every newly nested part interlocks with existing parts on the nest. Sometimes, the amount of interlock is zero - meaning that the new part

- 113 -

ProNest 2019 Manual doesn't really interlock with existing parts. Select this check box to use the amount of part interlock as a measure of how good the fit is.  

Nest interlock Every newly nested part interlocks with the region of the nest that already contains nested parts. Sometimes, the amount of interlock is zero - meaning that the new part doesn't really interlock with existing region of nested parts. Select this check box to use the amount of nest interlock as a measure of how good the fit is.  

Plate usage Nesting a part will sometimes extend the region of already nested parts by some distance along the X axis. The region of nested parts will "grow." Select this check box to use this distance as a measure of how good the fit is.   Note: Clicking the Default button on this page will revert back to the last saved AutoNest Strategy settings.

- 114 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Optimization settings Optimized nesting tries one or more nesting strategies with one or more plate sizes to find the best plate and strategy for the parts remaining in the part list at any given time. The user has full control over the sheet selection methodology and the nesting strategies to use, as well as whether or not costing factors are included when determining the best nesting result.

Optimization Settings Plate selection criteria Algorithm to use when selecting plates to use for each nesting trial.   Choices: (None), Select One Plate Size, Select Best Plate For Each Nest   (None) - Plates will be nested in order. The first plate in the plate list will be optimized first, then the second plate, and so on.   Select One Plate Size - All nests created during optimization will be created from a single plate size.   Select Best Plate For Each Nest - All nesting trials will be performed on all plates in the plate list. The best result will be chosen, then nesting trials with the remaining parts will be performed on the remaining plates and the best result chosen, etc.  

Cut-off utilization When a nesting trial produces a nested utilization equal to or greater than this value, that result is automatically chosen. If no nesting trials exceed this value, then the best overall utilization is chosen.   Units: Percentage (%) Range: 0 to 100% Recommended Value: 95%  

Nesting strategies to use This setting displays the nesting strategies that have been chosen to use for the nesting trials during optimization.  

  To select strategies for optimization:  1. Click on the down-arrow in the Nesting strategies to use box.  2. Select each nesting strategy that should be attempted during optimization.  3. Click OK to accept the selection.  

Use straight crop utilization on last nest

- 115 -

ProNest 2019 Manual During optimization (or any kind of automatic nesting), the last nest is usually different from all previously generated nests. By the time the last nest is generated, the part list has been almost completely depleted and the remaining parts cannot fill an entire nest. When optimization calculates the best nest it uses the nest's utilization as a major determining factor. The last nest - which is usually only partially filled - will have a poor utilization.   If Use straight crop utilization on last nest is selected, the utilization of the last nest will not be calculated with respect to the full plate size. Instead, an imaginary straight crop line will be used and the utilization will be calculate with respect to the used portion of the nest up to the crop line. Calculating the utilization in this way will allow optimization to select the "tightest" nest from the available candidates for the last nest.  

Must nest all priority 1 parts on first nest If this setting is selected, all parts with a priority of 1 will be nested on the first nest. If all of the priority-1 parts don't fit on the first nest, a message will appear indicating there is no optimize solution.  

Must nest all parts If this setting is selected, all optimization results will be discarded unless all parts can be nested.  

Use filler parts when calculating utilization Select this setting if you wish filler parts (a part with a priority of 99) to be included in utilization calculations. Otherwise, these parts are ignored when computing a nest's utilization.  

Include production costs Select this setting if production costs (such as the cost of consumables) should be included when determining the best trial.

Material Costs Include material costs Select this setting if the cost of the material used (for the nested parts) should be included when determining the best trial.     The following settings provide a way to assign importance to trials nested on remnants vs. those nested on full plates. The smaller the percentage multiplier, the smaller the effective material cost will be.   These settings are only active if Include material costs is selected:  

Full Plates: Use a cost factor of % When the cost of a particular full plate is calculated, it is multiplied by this cost factor.   To edit the cost factor:  1. Click on the current value - its a hyperlink.  2. Enter a cost factor in the box.  3. Click OK.  

Cost factors for remnants Remnants can have three different cost factors. These cost factors can be used to adjust the material cost in favor of using remnants. Furthermore, older remnants can be made to appear "cheaper" to use than younger remnants.   The first value defines the base cost factor for remnants:  

- 116 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Remnants: Use a cost factor of %.   All remnants will use this first cost factor unless they qualify for one of the other two cost factors. These other cost factors are used for remnants of at lease a certain age:   If older than days, use a cost factor of %.   To edit any of these values:  1. Click on the current value - its a hyperlink.  2. Enter a new value in the box.  3. Click OK. How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> click Optimization

- 117 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Cut Sequence settings Cut Sequence Settings Type This defines the method used to create a nest's cut sequence. Within the rules for each type, the cut sequence will always start closest to the cut sequence home. It will then gradually move away from the home.   Choices: Vertical, Horizontal, By Number of Torches, By Torch Spacing, By Sequence, By Heat Dissipation, One-Way Vertical, Heat Dissipation By Number of Torches  

Vertical First, the nest is divided into vertical bands (see Cut Sequence Settings: Zone type). The vertical cut sequence type will create a meandering pattern as it cuts up one vertical band and down the next.  

 

Horizontal First, the nest is divided into horizontal bands (see Cut Sequence Settings: Zone type). The horizontal cut sequence type will create a meandering pattern as it cuts across one horizontal band and back the next.  

 

By Number of Torches This is a variation of the Vertical cut sequence type. Parts are added to the cut sequence in groups - based on their number of torches. First, all parts with the highest number of torches are added to the cut sequence - based on the Vertical cut sequence type. Then, all parts with the next highest number of torches are added. This process continues until all parts with one torch are added to the cut sequence.  

By Torch Spacing This is a variation of the Vertical cut sequence type. Parts are added to the cut sequence in groups - based on their torch spacing. First, all parts with the largest torch spacing are added to the cut sequence - based on the Vertical cut sequence type. Then, all parts with the next largest torch spacing are added. This process continues until all parts with one torch are added to the cut sequence.  

By Sequence - 118 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Parts are added to the cut sequence in the same order as they were nested.  

By Heat Dissipation Creating a cut sequence by heat dissipation will distribute the heat input across the nest to avoid overheating. This usually results in a randomized cut sequence. Selecting this type will activate the Heat Dissipation settings.  

One-Way Vertical This is a variation of the Vertical cut sequence type. Instead of alternating the direction by cutting up one vertical band and down the next, One-Way Vertical will only cut upwards through each vertical band.  

 

Heat Dissipation By Number of Torches This is a variation of the By Heat Dissipation cut sequence type. When multiple torches are used on a nest, normal heat dissipation can cause an unacceptable number of torch changes (number and/or spacing). Heat Dissipation By Number of Torches will perform the normal heat dissipation on all parts on the nest that use a particular number of torches and spacing. When all those parts are cut, heat dissipation will be used on the next set of parts sharing the same torch information, and so on...   Selecting this type will activate the Heat Dissipation settings.  

Cut sequence home The Cut sequence home defines the plate corner where the cut sequence will start. Usually, this will be the same as Nesting home found on the Nesting settings page.   Choices: Same as Machine Home, Lower Left, Upper Left, Lower Right, Upper Right  

Sort point All cut sequence types will create a cut sequence that starts cutting parts closest to the cut sequence home and finishes with parts farthest from the home. To think of this another way, parts are sorted by distance from the cut sequence home. For sorting purposes, the distance is measured from the home to a point on the part - the sort point. The sort point can be either the start (pierce) point or the geometric center of the part.   Choices: Start Point, Center Point  

Zone type With Type set to Vertical, Horizontal, or One-Way Vertical, this controls whether zones (bands) should be applied in fixed locations equally across the nest or automatically adjusted based on where parts are nested.   Choices: Variable, Fixed Variable Zone width will be automatically adjusted based on the position of parts on the nest. ProNest will attempt to select zone widths that create the best cut sequence.

- 119 -

ProNest 2019 Manual  

A nest using a Vertical, Variable cut sequence   Fixed The nest will be divided into bands of equal size, based on the number specified in the Zones setting.  

A nest using a Vertical, Fixed cut sequence, with Zones set to 3.  

Use serpentine sequencing within zones With Type set to Vertical, Horizontal, or One-Way Vertical and the Zone type set to Variable, when this setting is selected the cut sequence direction will alternate back and forth within a given zone, following an S-shaped or winding path. In many cases, this can yield shorter traverse motions between cuts.  

A Vertical, Variable cut sequence with Serpentine sequencing  

Zones With Type set to Vertical, Horizontal, or One-Way Vertical and the Zone type set to Fixed, the nest is divided into bands of equal size when creating the cut sequence. The number of bands is defined by Zones. The direction of the bands depends on the cut sequence Type. Most cut sequence types will cut all parts within a zone band before moving on to the next one. - 120 -

ProNest 2019 Manual   Range: 1 to 99 Recommended Value: 20  

Heat Dissipation Creating a cut sequence based on heat dissipation is very different from the other cut sequence types. Before the first part is added to the cut sequence, a grid is generated on the nest. This grid is used to determine which part should be cut next. Each cell in the grid has a heat value. As parts are cut, the corresponding cell's heat value will increase. To create a cut sequence, ProNestcan either randomly cut from the coolest cells in the grid (those with the lowest heat value) or cut at a specific interval between parts.  

Part interval The method in which to apply the apply the heat dissipation cut sequence.   Choices: Random, 2 to 10 If set to a numerical value, ProNest will first establish a normal (non-heat dissipation) cut sequence and then cut every nth part in the sequence. For instance, selecting "3" would cut the first part and then skip forward and cut every 3rd part. A higher number will generally result in more space between parts and less change of heat distortion, but will also result in longer traverse distances. A lower number will increase the chance of cutting in a hotter region of the plate, but will reduce traverse distance.   Selecting "Random" will apply the cut sequence based on the X and Y grid spacing and Minimum distance specified.  

X grid spacing Specifies the heat dissipation grid size along the length of the plate (ProNest's x-axis).   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 10,000.0 in. Recommended Value: 20.0 in. Note:

This setting is activated only when Part interval is set to Random.

Y grid spacing Specifies the heat dissipation grid size along the width of the plate (ProNest's y-axis).   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 10,000.0 in. Recommended Value: 20.0 in. Note:

This setting is activated only when Part interval is set to Random.

Minimum distance Whenever possible, the next part added to the cut sequence will be at least this distance away from the current part.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 10,000.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.0 in. Note:

This setting is activated only when Part interval is set to Random.

- 121 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Note:

Heat Dissipation settings are usually inactive.  To activate them, you must set Type to one of the heat dissipation choices.

How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> click Cut Sequence

- 122 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Cut Sequence: Interior Profile settings This settings page gives you control over the sequencing of interior profiles, including scribes, punches, cuts, and text marking.   The sequence of interior profiles is calculated when:  l A CAD file is loaded  l Parts are bridged or chained together  l Parts are common line cut with one another  l Profiles are re-ordered for collision avoidance Important: Once the interior profiles of a part are sequenced, they are never re-sequenced unless one of the above events occurs.   This means that changes to the Interior Profile settings will not have any immediate effect on any nests in the job.

Strategy This defines the method used to create a part's interior cut sequence.   Choices: Lead to Lead, Center to Center, Vertical, Horizontal, Heat Dissipation Lead to Lead - The next profile to be sequenced will be the one whose start point is closest to the end point of the current profile.   Center to Center -The next profile to be sequenced will be the one whose center point is closest to the center point of the current profile.   Vertical - Interior profiles will be sequenced in a generally upward (or downward) direction.   Horizontal - Interior profiles will be sequenced in a generally left to right (or right to left) direction.   Heat Dissipation - An algorithm which seeks to limit the amount of heat generated in any particular zone will be used to sequence the profiles.  

Find the best strategy Selecting this option will try all strategies (except Heat Dissipation) and use the optimal result for cut sequencing.  

Sequence all True Hole cuts first (by part) When selected, True Hole interiors will be cut before any other cut profiles on a given part. This reduces gas purge time when compared to alternating between cutting True Hole and non-True Hole features on a part.  

Intensity level for this strategy A strategy's intensity level reflects the number of computations when generating cut sequence paths. There is a trade-off between intensity and speed. A lower intensity level will work faster, but will compute fewer sequence paths than a higher intensity level. By default, the intensity level is set to Low.   You can use the slider to set intensity level for a selected strategy.   Choices: Low, Medium-Low, Medium, Medium-High, High

Heat Dissipation Creating a cut sequence based on heat dissipation is very different from the other cut sequence strategies.  Before the first interior profile is added to the cut sequence, a grid is generated on the part.  This grid is used to determine which interior profile should be cut next.  

- 123 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Each cell in the grid has a heat value.  As interior profiles are cut, the corresponding cell's heat value will increase.  To create a cut sequence, ProNest will randomly cut from the coolest cells in the grid (those with the lowest heat value). Note: The Heat Dissipation settings are active only when Strategy is set to "Heat Dissipation."

X grid spacing Specifies the heat dissipation grid size along the length of the part ProNest's x-axis).   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 10,000.0 in. Recommended Value: 24.0 in.  

Y grid spacing Specifies the heat dissipation grid size along the width of the part (ProNest's y-axis).   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 10,000.0 in. Recommended Value: 12.0 in.  

Minimum distance Whenever possible, the next interior profile added to the cut sequence will be at least this distance away from the current interior profile.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 10,000.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.0 in.  

How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> double-click Cut Sequence

> click Interior Profile

- 124 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Cut Sequence Rules settings This settings page displays all the cut sequence rules that are available for the current machine.

Available Rules The list of available rules is at the top of this page. The first rule is always called "Use settings instead of rules". By default, this is the only rule in the list.

Use settings instead of rules By default, this is the Active Rule (the rule used when generating a nest's cut sequence) . The active rule is marked with a checkmark ( ). When this rule is selected, the bottom-half of the settings page displays a section called Cut Sequence Settings. This section contains all the normal settings that help control the cut sequence when a true cut sequence rule is not in use. They are displayed here as "repeated" settings, as each of them already exists on another settings page.   The following settings are displayed in the Cut Sequence Settings section:   From the CNC Output page:

Punch/Scribe first Order punches by process Order scribes by process Order cuts by process Ignore for output

From the CNC Output - Pre-pierces page:

Pre-pierce by part

From the Skeleton Cut Up - Cut Sequence page:

Skeleton Cut Up - Cut sequence order

  While you can edit these repeated setting on this page, you can also jump to the settings page that they belong to.   To jump to a settings page that contains a particular setting:  l Click on the Settings button to the right of the setting in question.  

Creating and using true cut sequence rules True cut sequence rules are far more flexible than using the regular settings. For a full explanation of how a cut sequence rule is built and how it works, see "Editing a cut sequence rule" on page 128.

Creating a new cut sequence rule There are two ways to create a new rule - based on existing cut sequence settings or from scratch.   Creating a rule from your existing settings is the quickest way to create a new rule, as it will already contain tasks and actions. This method will use your existing settings to create a rule, which you can then edit as needed later on.  1. While Use settings instead of rules is selected, click Convert this to a Rule. This button is found in the section header titled: "Cut Sequence Settings".  2. Type a name for your rule in the box and click OK.   To create a new rule from scratch: - 125 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. Click Add. This will open the New Rule dialog.  2. Edit your rule and click OK.

Make any rule the Active Rule  1. In the Available Rules list, select the rule you want to be active.  2. Click Set as Active Rule. Note: When a true cut sequence rule is selected, the bottom-half of the settings page shows a view of the rule. This view matches exactly with the view you see when editing the rule. For a full explanation of how to read and understand a cut sequence rule, see "Editing a cut sequence rule" on page 128.

Integrate skeleton lines with parts Skeleton lines and exterior part profiles will be cut together in groups. All skeleton lines intersecting the exterior profile will be cut first, followed by the exterior profile. The sequence will then move on to the next group of skeleton lines and parts. Selecting this setting can reduce parts defects due to plate movement as well as collisions with tip-ups.

When cleared, all skeleton lines on a nest are sequenced together (according to the Skeleton Cut-Up - Cut sequence order selected). Note:

 l This setting does not affect the drop order of parts on the nest.  l When converted to a Cut Sequence Rule, skeleton lines and exterior profiles will be added in the same task.  l This setting is repeated on the Skeleton Cut-Up: Cut Sequence settings page.

Sequence cuts by part All cut profiles on a part will be completed before the sequence moves on to the next part. Even if cut profiles are contained in different tasks in a cut sequence rule, they will still be processed part-by-part.  

Sequence punches and scribes by part All punch and scribe profiles on a part will be completed before the sequence moves on to the next part.

- 126 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Note:

This setting will override the Punch/scribe first setting.

Sequence pre-pierces by part All pre-pierces on a part will be completed before the sequence moves on to the next part. Note:

This setting will override the Pre-Pierce by part setting.

How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> double-click Cut Sequence

> click Cut Sequence Rules

- 127 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Editing a cut sequence rule As you edit a cut sequence rule, you will be using the New Rule / Edit Rule dialog.   At the top of the dialog is a view of the rule. This view is the same as in the Cut Sequence Rules setting page, only this one is editable. At the bottom of this dialog are two lists of actions. On the left is Unsequenced actions. On the right is a list of actions that are assigned to the selected task in the view above.

The anatomy of a cut sequence rule Cut sequence rules are built on actions. These actions are grouped into tasks. And finally, if you are using Work Zones, tasks are grouped into steps. Most of the time, a machine will not support cut sequence steps.

Actions For the purposes of cut sequencing, an action refers to a specific profile type that can be completed by a single machine process.   Profile type

Description

Completed by Process

Pre-pierce

The pierces on a part are considered separate from the rest of the profile they belong to. Because of this distinction, pre-pierces can be sequenced independently. To make use of pre-pierces, be sure that Use pre-pierces is selected on the CNC Output - Pre-pierces settings page.

Any cut, punch, or drill process

Punch

Anything completed by a punch process (except pre-pierces).

Any punch process

Scribe

Anything completed by a scribe process (except Text Marker).

Any scribe process

Drilling

Anything completed by a drill process (except for pre-pierces).   Any cutting needed by the "Cut pilot holes on large drill holes" feature is automatically done prior to drilling.

Any drill process

Text Marker

Refers to BUGE text marking device

Any cut or scribe process

Exterior profile

The main exterior of a part. When the exterior profile is cut, the entire part will drop (unless it is held in place by tabs, bridges,etc...).

Any cut process

Interior profile

Profiles of this type generally refer to holes, of various shapes, that exist inside the part's exterior profile.

Any cut process

Open profile

When a profile is open, nothing will drop when it is cut. Profiles of Any cut process this type can be sequenced independently from either interior or exterior profiles.

Edge pierce profile

When parts are edge pierced, their exterior profile is attached to the plate edge. These profiles qualify as edge pierce profiles.

Any cut process

CLC edge pierce profile

When parts share common edges with the plate edge, the exterior profile is attached to the plate edge. These profiles qualify as CNC

Any cut process

- 128 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Profile type

Description

Completed by Process

edge pierce profiles. Crop

The cut generally made to separate a nest into a skeleton and a remnant.

Any cut process

Exterior skeleton line

Exterior skeleton lines are those that touch the plate edge.

Any cut process

Interior skeleton line

Interior skeleton lines connect parts only. They do not touch the plate edge.

Any cut process

  Depending on your machine's configuration, several of the profile types can be repeated - once for each process that can complete it. For example, if a machine has a Gas and a Plasma process, then there would be two separate actions for exterior profiles: Exterior profile (Gas) Exterior profile (Plasma) In the above example, you would be able to sequence exteriors cut with gas independent from exteriors cut with plasma.

Tasks For the purposes of cut sequencing, a task refers to a collection of actions. Actions within a task are not ordered in any specific way by the cut sequence rule. However, tasks are ordered within the cut sequence rule. This means that all the actions in the first task will be completed before moving on to the second task, and so on. Tasks are handled in order from top to bottom.   For machines that do not use work zones, a cut sequence rule is truly defined by its tasks. If you need an action (or set of actions) to be cut before or after other actions, put them in a task. Then, you can sequence the task however you want. For example, to be sure that interior profiles are cut before exteriors, create a task and assign the interior profile action to that task. Once that is done, the task can be ordered before the task that contains the exterior profile action. Note:

If Sequence cuts by part is enabled, even if cut profiles are contained in different tasks in a cut sequence rule, they will still be processed part-by-part. The same applies to punch or scribe profiles in different tasks when Sequence punches and scribes by part is enabled.

Steps Lastly, we have the steps. Steps are only needed when using work zones. Otherwise, it is sufficient to define a rule only using tasks and actions. A step refers to a collection of tasks. Tasks within a step are processed in a specific order. Also, steps are ordered within the cut sequence rule.

Why steps? When work zones are used, a nest is generally split into more than one work zone. The machine can then be instructed to reposition from work zone to work zone until everything is cut. Without steps, a machine would have to fully complete the current work zone before repositioning to the next work zone. Sometimes it is useful to complete only certain actions in a work zone, then reposition to the next work zone, and then complete those same actions on the new work zone. After the actions have been completed across the entire nest, the machine can be instructed to make another pass across the nest - only this time, different actions will be processed. Steps allow a nest with repositions to be processed in several passes. For example, the first step in a rule may cut all pre-pierces. Regardless of the actions present in the next step, the machine would be instructed to reposition to all work zones until all pre-pierces are cut. Only then would it move on to any actions in the next step.

- 129 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Editing the rule (Simple view: Actions and Tasks only) When you create a new rule, be sure to give it a name.   To name your rule:  l Type a name in the Name box.   When a new rule is started, it will be given one empty task: Task 1. At the bottom-left of the New Rule dialog, you will see a list of unsequenced actions.   At the top, select Task 1. Notice that the name of the list at the bottom-right will change to "Task 1 actions". This list will always show the actions that have been assigned to the task selected above.

Adding and removing tasks An important aspect of editing a cut sequence rule is adding, arranging, and removing tasks.   To add new tasks:  l Click Add Task. A new empty task will be inserted after the selected task.   To arrange tasks:  1. Select a task to move.  2. Click Move Up and the task will move up one place. OR  2. Click Move Down and the task will move down one place.   To remove a task:  1. Select a task to remove.  2. Click Remove.

Assigning and removing actions The most important aspect of a task is the list of actions it contains.   To assign actions to the selected task:  l Double-click an unsequenced action. OR  l Select any number of unsequenced actions and click

.

  To assign all actions to the selected task:  l Click Tip:

.

Regardless of the selected task, you can drag any action from either of the bottom lists into the desired task in the rule view

- 130 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

at the top. Using this feature, you can select a task that contains an action you want to move. Once selected, you can then drag an action from the list at the bottom-right into the desired task at the top.   To remove actions from the selected task:  l Double-click a task action. OR  l Select any number of task actions and click

.

  To remove all actions from the selected task:  l Click

.

When you are done editing your rule, click OK to save your changes and close the Edit Rule dialog.

How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> double-click Cut Sequence

> click Cut Sequence Rules

- 131 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Collision Avoidance settings Collision Avoidance is intended to eliminate the chance of collisions (a condition where the torch crashes into material that has moved due to previous cutting) with existing material which can significantly reduce production time. Avoidance paths are generated by a combination of:  l moving leads  l routing rapid traverses around potential tip-ups (a small profile that has been cut and is now resting awkwardly on the table causing a portion of the cut-out to rest above the rest of the plate)  l raising the torch - with a full raise Note: Not all cutting machines differentiate between a partial raise and a full raise. The settings on this page allow avoidance paths to be generated automatically before NC output is created. You can also edit the avoidance paths directly on the nest.  l Disable Turn off collision avoidance.  l Use settings table Collision Avoidance will be enabled and applied according to the Collision Avoidance settings table (spreadsheet). Using a spreadsheet for collision avoidance is useful if you want to apply different collision avoidance settings for different materials in a job or apply collision avoidance for certain materials and not others.   In the box, you can select any settings table from the list, which contains all the XLS files found in the Collision Avoidance spreadsheet settings folder (defined in Preferences). Tip:

To edit or view the spreadsheet, click the Edit button.

To read more, see "Collision Avoidance spreadsheets" on page 234.  l Use general settings Collision avoidance will be enabled and applied to all nests according to the general settings specified below. Note: General settings are also used as a fall-back when a Collision Avoidance settings table is in use but no record can be matched in that XLS for a given nest. In this scenario, general settings are used for that nest.

General settings

Sequence the interior profiles for an optimal path Select this setting if generating avoidance paths should re-sequence the interior profiles of each part. Re-sequencing interior profiles may avoid potential collision situations. Tip:

The sequencing method used by collision avoidance is specified by the sequencing settings found on the "Cut Sequence: Interior Profile settings" on page 123 page.

Do not create avoidance paths away from exterior profiles Don’t attempt to create avoidance paths when traversing away from an exterior profile. This setting is used for laser machines only.  

- 132 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Plate Warping tab These settings represents the maximum length allowable for a torch-down avoidance path for cuts and scribes. The primary factor in determining a good value for this setting is the average amount of plate warping present and the relative importance of avoiding tip-ups compared with the speed of cutting. Also keep in mind that an avoidance path may take much longer than a direct full raise path.

Exterior cuts Maximum length allowable for a torch-down avoidance path for exterior cuts.    Units: Distance Range: 0.001 to 10000.0 in.  

Interior cuts Maximum length allowable for a torch-down avoidance path for interior cuts.    Units: Distance Range: 0.001 to 10000.0 in.  

Scribes  Maximum length allowable for a torch-down avoidance path for scribes.   Units: Distance Range: 0.001 to 10000.0 in.  

Tip-Ups tab Ignore tabbed profiles Select this setting if you want to treat tabbed profiles as if they cannot tip up and therefore do not need to be avoided.  

Maximum profile size to avoid This setting determines the largest profile size that collision avoidance will try to avoid. Collision avoidance will try to avoid any profiles with a length or width smaller than this threshold value. Profiles with lengths and widths greater than this threshold value will not be avoided.   Units: Distance Range: 0.001 to 10000.0 in.  

Torch diameter  This setting represents the diameter of the torch head and is used as a safety margin around profiles when creating avoidance paths. It should be treated as the maximum diameter of the torch head that could collide with a tip-up.   Units: Distance Range: 0.001 to 10.0 in.  

Maximum number to avoid This setting determines the maximum number of profiles that should be avoided when traversing between profiles.   Range: 0 to 10 Recommended Value: 3

- 133 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Advanced: This setting has a major impact on the time needed to calculate avoidance paths. Smaller values will cause collision avoidance to run much faster than larger values.

Avoidance ratio This setting is used when determining which type of path is more desirable in a given situation: an avoidance path or a direct full-raise path. A larger avoidance ratio will tend to select a direct full-raise more often than the avoidance path.   Units: Percentage (%) Range: 0 to 100%  

Full raise/lower time This setting represents the average amount of time required to fully retract the cutting head on a full raise and then fully lower the cutting head when it is turned back on.   Units: Time Range: 0.0 to 100.0 s  

Partial raise/lower time This setting represents the average amount of time required to partially retract the torch for a partial raise and then fully lower the torch when it is turned back on.   Units: Time Range: 0.0 to 100.0 s  

Leads Positioning tab Automatically move exterior leads for avoidance Select this setting if generating avoidance paths should automatically move leads on exterior profiles.  By moving leads, it is possible that straight-line paths can be found that do not pass over potential tip-up situations.  

Automatically move interior leads for avoidance Select this setting if generating avoidance paths should automatically move leads on interior profiles.   Note: The following settings are active only when Automatically move exterior/interior leads for avoidance is selected. Don't move leads for the last interior profile (in each part) Select this setting to prevent leads from being moved on the last interior profile of each part. This setting is used for laser machines only and may lead to fewer profile subroutines.  

When moving leads, try: Corners  Select this setting if leads should be placed on profile corners when automatically moving leads for avoidance.  

When moving leads, try: Perimeter points (calculated) Select this setting if leads should be placed on perimeter points (including corners) on the profile when automatically moving leads for avoidance. As you move the slider to the right, the location of perimeter points will change and the number of points to try will increase.  

Snap tolerance - 134 -

ProNest 2019 Manual When moving leads for collision avoidance, this setting is used to determine how close to a corner a selected start point has to be before the leads are adjusted to be exactly at that corner. Making this value large makes it more likely that only corner lead locations will be chosen. Making this value small makes it less likely that a corner lead location will be chosen when moving the leads on any particular profile.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 in.  

Trim leads if they are placed in conflict While avoidance paths are generated, leads are moved. Sometimes they can be moved into conflict. Select this setting if ProNest should try shortening the leads to resolve the conflict.

Holes tab For certain parts, such as flanges, small bolt holes situated near other larger interior features are sometimes sequenced so that tip-ups and torch crashes could occur. The settings below can be used to ensure smaller holes are always cut before nearby larger interiors, reducing the chance of torch crashes. Points to consider:  l For the purposes of these settings, a hole can be any shape - round, elliptical, square, irregular polygon, etc.  l Hole size is measured using diameter (for circles) or length/width (whichever is larger) of the bounding rectangle around a profile.  l If both size values are set to zero, this hole sequencing feature will be disabled.

Small hole size Any hole that is less than or equal to this size will fall within the "Small" range and will be cut before medium size holes or other larger interiors (as long as it is within the Proximity specified below).  

Medium hole size Any hole that is less than or equal to this size, but greater than the small hole size will fall within the "Medium" range and will be cut after small holes but before other larger interiors (as long as it is within the Proximity specified below).  

Proximity The maximum distance that a small or medium hole can be from another larger interior. Holes within this distance will be sequenced first, while holes that are further away will not have their sequence adjusted, regardless of their size.     View example Example:   Consider the following part:

- 135 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

    By default, the interior cut sequence may be applied so that the larger interior profile is cut before all the smaller holes surrounding it.

This could result in a crash as the cutting head traverses between profiles 6, 7, and 8.   Now, let's assume that the Collision Avoidance - Holes settings are as follows:  l Small hole size = 1.5 in.  l Medium hole size = 2 in.  l Proximity = 2 in. This would produce an interior cut sequence like this:

- 136 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Note that because the smaller holes surrounding the larger interior are within both the Small hole size and Proximity thresholds, they will be cut before the larger interior in the center. (The holes at the corners are small enough to qualify to be cut first, but they're outside the Proximity distance.)   With the smaller holes sequenced first, the risk of crashing into a tip-up is significantly reduced.

How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> click Collision Avoidance

- 137 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Edge Pierce settings Edge Piercing is a method of extending a part’s lead-in to the edge of the plate (including a hole in a skeleton).  This allows for faster pierce times, especially on thick material. Edge piercing will not generate edge pierce extensions that are in conflict with other parts, including other edge pierce extensions.

Edge Pierce Settings Maximum length An edge pierce acts as an extension to a part's existing lead-in. This setting defines the upper limit for the length of an edge pierce extension. Only parts that lie within this distance of a plate edge (or skeleton profile) will be considered for edge piercing.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 in.

Move leads (if necessary) Select this setting if you want ProNest to try moving leads during edge piercing. Leads may move to a location from which edge piercing is possible, based on the value of Maximum length. The leads will not be moved into conflict with any other parts or the edge of the plate. If no favorable position is found, the leads will remain in their original location and the part will most likely not be edge pierced. Note: The Plate Edge Threshold settings will be active only when the value of Maximum length is greater than 0.

Plate Edge Threshold Only one of the following settings may be selected at any given time:

Extend past the plate edge Select this setting if you need the edge pierce extensions to extend beyond the edge of the plate or into a skeleton profile.

Stop before the plate edge Select this setting if you need the edge pierce extensions to stop short of the edge of the plate or a skeleton profile.

Distance The distance by which the edge pierce extension will be lengthened (or shortened).   Units: Distance Range: 0 to Maximum length How do I get here in ProNest?  l Settings

> click Edge Pierce

- 138 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Slug Destroy settings With slug destroy, you can apply cut lines within the interior profiles of parts, to prevent cutout tip-ups that result in head-to-part crashes.

Slug Destroy Settings Use default slug destroy settings only If this is selected, then Slug Destroy table will not be active, because all slug destroy settings will come from the Default Slug Destroy Settings section.  If this is cleared, then the entire Default Slug Destroy Settings section will be inactive, because all process parameter settings will come from the spreadsheet specified by Slug Destroy Table.

Slug Destroy table This setting specifies which settings table is used for slug destroy. You can select any settings table from the list, which contains all the XLS files found in the slug destroy spreadsheet settings folder (defined in Preferences). Tip:

To edit or view the spreadsheet, click the Edit button.

See Slug Destroy spreadsheets to learn more.

Slat spacing The physical distance between two adjacent slats on the cutting table. This should be measured from the center of one slat to the center of the slat next to it.  

  All other slug destroy settings are based on this value, whether you are using Slug Destroy table (XLS) or Default slug destroy settings.  

Default Slug Destroy Settings Maximum profile dimension This setting defines the upper size limit for slug destroy interiors. This is expressed a factor of the Slat spacing setting - 2x would be double the slat spacing, 2.5x would be two and a half times the slat spacing, and so on.   Slat spacing is multiplied by this factor to get a distance. If either the length or width of an interior profile is greater than this distance, slug destroy will not be applied.  

- 139 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Recommended value: 2x (Slat spacing × 2)

Edge offset Buffer distance between the edge of the interior profile and the cut-up lines. This is entered a percentage of the Kerf width setting (on the Process Parameters settings page).   Recommended value: 50% (Kerf width × 0.5) Note: Due to kerf offset, slug destroy cut lines are automatically shortened in areas where the kerf on the cut-up lines would cut into the part. Likewise, a radius corner is put on the opposite end of those cuts to compensate for the Kerf Left or Kerf Right offset distance, ensuring that cut-up lines will reach the interior profile.   You can see the compensated slug destroy cuts (as they would be written in output code) by entering Cut Simulation mode.

Minimum profile dimension This is a expressed as a percentage of the Slat spacing setting.   Recommended value: 50% (Slat spacing × 0.5) This setting has two purposes:  l Represents the lower size limit for slug destroy interiors. If both the length and width of an interior profile are less than this value, slug destroy will not be applied. (This allows cut-up lines to be applied on long skinny cutouts where one dimension is below the minimum value.)  l Controls the maximum width of the leftover fragments created by slug destroy cuts.

A good value for this setting will keep the size small enough so that the fragments will fall through the slats of your cutting table.

Maximum material thickness This setting defines the upper material thickness limit for slug destroy interiors. If the material thickness is less than or equal to this value, ProNest will attempt to apply slug destroy. Slug destroy will not be applied to any parts that exceed this thickness.   Recommended value: 0.375 in. (10 mm) Example Top view of a part resting on slats, with Maximum Profile Dimension set to 2x and Minimum Profile Dimension set to 50%.

- 140 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

  Slug destroy is applied as follows:   Slugs

Result

Reason Within the Maximum Profile Dimension, but both length and width are less than the Minimum Profile Dimension Width exceeds Maximum Profile Dimension

     

Both length and width exceed Maximum Profile Dimension.

Both length and width are within Maximum Profile Dimension. Both length and width are within Maximum Profile Dimension.

- 141 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Fly Cut settings  l Disable Turn off fly cutting. Interior profiles will be cut one at a time.  l Use settings table Fly cutting will be enabled and applied according to the Fly Cut settings table (spreadsheet). Using a spreadsheet for fly cutting is useful if you want to apply different fly cutting settings for different materials in a job or apply fly cutting for certain materials and not others.   In the box, you can select any settings table from the list, which contains all the XLS files found in the Fly Cut spreadsheet settings folder (defined in Preferences). Tip:

To edit or view the spreadsheet, click the Edit button.

To read more, see Fly Cut spreadsheets.  l Use general settings Fly cutting will be enabled and applied to all nests according to the general settings specified below. Note: General settings are also used as a fall-back when a Fly Cut settings table is in use but no record can be matched in that XLS for a given nest. In this scenario, general settings are used for that nest.

General settings

Overtravel length Overtravel used on circular and slot-shaped interiors. The start point is shifted back by this distance, to maintain a fluid, straight cutting motion and ensure that the interior is completely cut out.

Max distance between profiles This setting defines the maximum distance between aligned entities for fly cutting. Aligned entities from different interiors will be not be fly cut if the distance between them is greater than this value.   Recommended value: 5 in. (127 mm)

- 142 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Note:

If one line does qualify but another doesn't you will get fly cutting only on the entity that does, the other entities will be cut one by one.

Max profile size This setting defines the upper size limit for fly cut interiors. If the smaller dimension of the interior is greater than this value, fly cutting will not be applied.   Recommended value: 2.5 in. (63.5 mm)

How do I get here in ProNest?  l Settings

> click Fly Cut

- 143 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Skeleton Cut-Up settings Skeleton cut-up allows the user to slice the skeleton into smaller pieces. This is typically done to aid in the movement, storage, or disposal of the skeleton.  l Disable Turn off skeleton cut-up. No cut lines will be applied to the skeleton.  l Use settings table Skeleton cut-up will be enabled and applied according to the Skeleton Cut-Up settings table (spreadsheet). Using a spreadsheet for skeleton cut-up is useful if you want to apply different skeleton cut-up settings for different materials in a job or apply skeleton cut-up for certain materials and not others.   In the box, you can select any settings table from the list, which contains all the XLS files found in the Skeleton Cut-Up spreadsheet settings folder (defined in Preferences). Tip:

To edit or view the spreadsheet, click the Edit button.

To read more about using Skeleton Cut-Up spreadsheets, see Skeleton Cut-Up spreadsheets.  l Use general settings Skeleton cut-up will be enabled and applied to all nests according to the general settings specified below. Note: General settings are also used as a fall-back when a Skeleton Cut-Up settings table is in use but no record can be matched in that XLS for a given nest. In this scenario, general settings are used for that nest.

General settings General tab Minimum skeleton area Leftover plate smaller than this value won't have skeleton cut-up applied and can't be saved as inventory skeleton plates. This mostly applies to situations where there is either a crop or a plate edge CLC part on the nest and one or more small sections of plate remain.   Units: Area

Minimum cut length Minimum acceptable length of a skeleton cut-up line.  All skeleton cut-up lines below this threshold value will be deleted during processing.   Units: Distance Range:0.0 to 100.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.5 in.  

Ignore leads Select this setting if it is acceptable for skeleton cut-up lines to cut through part leads.

Tolerances tab Plate edge tolerance

- 144 -

ProNest 2019 Manual The closest distance to which a skeleton cut-up line may approach the plate edge if no extension values are used.  Non-zero extension values take precedence over this setting.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 10.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.1 in.  

Safe zone tolerance This defines the closest distance to which a skeleton cut-up line may approach a safe zone.  For example, if you wanted a skeleton cut-up line to start or stop no closer than 1 inch from a safe zone, set this value to 1.0 in.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 10.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.1 in.  

Part tolerance This defines the closest distance to which a skeleton cut-up line may approach a part.  For example, if you wanted the skeleton cut-up line to start or stop no closer than 1 inch from a part on the nest, set this value to 1.0 in.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 10.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.1 in.  

Cut Direction tab Horizontal lines Direction which horizontal skeleton cut-up lines will be cut.   Choices: Left to Right, Right to Left, Serpentine   Left to Right All horizontal skeleton cuts will be cut from the left edge of the plate to the right edge of the plate.   Right to Left All horizontal skeleton cuts will be cut from the right edge of the plate to the left edge of the plate.   Serpentine The cut direction of horizontal skeleton cuts will alternate between Left to Right and Right to Left.  

Vertical lines Direction which vertical skeleton cut-up lines will be cut.   Choices: Top to Bottom, Bottom to Top, Serpentine   Top to Bottom All vertical skeleton cuts will be cut from the top edge of the plate to the bottom edge of the plate.   Bottom to Top All vertical skeleton cuts will be cut from the bottom edge of the plate to the top edge of the plate.   Serpentine The cut direction of vertical skeleton cuts will alternate between Top to Bottom and Bottom to Top. - 145 -

ProNest 2019 Manual  

Lines at the plate edge Defines the behavior of skeleton cut lines that touch the plate edge.   Choices: Cut towards the plate edge, Cut away from the plate edge, Default   Cut towards the plate edge The portion of the skeleton cut line that touches the plate edge will be cut so that it starts at a part (if possible) and is cut towards the plate edge.   Cut away from the plate edge The portion of the skeleton cut line that touches the plate edge will be cut so that it starts at the plate edge and is cut towards a part (if possible).   Default No special cut direction will be applied to the segments of skeleton cut lines that touch the plate edge.  The normal cut direction used by the rest of the skeleton cut line will be used.

Extensions tab Top edge Distance to extend the skeleton cut line beyond the top edge of the plate.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 1000.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.0 in.  

Bottom edge Distance to extend the skeleton cut line beyond the bottom edge of the plate.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 1000.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.0 in.  

Left edge Distance to extend the skeleton cut line beyond the left edge of the plate.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 1000.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.0 in.  

Right edge Distance to extend the skeleton cut line beyond the right edge of the plate.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 1000.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.0 in. How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> click Skeleton Cut-Up

- 146 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Skeleton Cut-Up - Skeleton Grid settings Skeleton cuts are defined by a grid that is laid on top of the nest. Grid lines are evenly spaced along the nest’s length and width, so any grid spacing values specified by the user are target length and width values only.

Grid Settings Enable skeleton cut-up This indicates whether Skeleton Cut-Up is active and is repeated from the Skeleton Cut-Up page. Note: The following settings are active only if Enable skeleton cut up is selected.

Use separate grids for exterior and interior skeleton cuts Select this setting if you want to use different grid spacing for interior skeleton cuts (skeleton cuts that both begin and end at a part) and exterior skeleton cuts (skeleton cuts that have at least one end at a plate edge) .  

Exterior skeleton cuts on this nest are shown in blue, interior skeleton cuts are shown in red   If Use separate grids... is cleared, a single skeleton grid will be used to determine where the skeleton is cut. In this case, the following settings are available:

Vertical grid spacing This setting specifies the desired spacing between vertical grid lines. In effect, this determines the maximum length of skeleton pieces.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 in.

Horizontal grid spacing This setting specifies the desired spacing between horizontal grid lines. In effect, this determines the maximum width of skeleton pieces.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 in. Advanced: If Use separate grids... is selected, then two separate skeleton grids will be used to determine where the skeleton is cut. The exterior grid will have is own settings to define horizontal and vertical grid spacing - as will the interior grid. How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> double-click Skeleton Cut-Up

> click Skeleton Grid

- 147 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Skeleton Cut-Up - Cut Sequence settings Advanced Skeleton Cut-Up Settings Enable skeleton cut-up This indicates whether Skeleton Cut-Up is active and is repeated from the Skeleton Cut-Up page. Note: The following settings are active only if Enable skeleton cut-up is selected.

Integrate skeleton lines with parts Skeleton lines and exterior part profiles will be cut together in groups. All skeleton lines intersecting the exterior profile will be cut first, followed by the exterior profile. The sequence will then move on to the next group of skeleton lines and parts. Selecting this setting can reduce part defects due to plate movement as well as collisions with tip-ups.

When cleared, all skeleton lines on a nest are sequenced together (according to the Skeleton Cut-Up - Cut sequence order selected). Note:

 l This setting does not affect the drop order of parts on the nest.  l When converted to a Cut Sequence Rule, skeleton lines and exterior profiles will be added in the same task.  l This setting is repeated on the Cut Sequence Rules settings page.

Cut sequence order Using this list, you can define when skeleton lines are cut in relation to parts.   If you are using a single skeleton grid, you can simply order the cut sequence for parts and skeleton lines. If you are using interior and exterior skeleton grids, you can select the relative order between parts, interior skeleton cuts, and exterior skeleton cuts. For more information about setting up single or double skeleton grids, see "Skeleton Cut-Up - Skeleton Grid settings" on page 147.   To edit the sequence:  1. Select an item in the list that you want to move.  2. Do one of the following:

- 148 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 l Press the up button  l Press the down button

to move the selected item up in the sequence order. to move the selected item down in the sequence order.

Advanced: Cut sequence rules can provide greater flexibility over when skeleton lines are cut. For more information, see "Cut Sequence Rules settings" on page 125.

Note: The following two settings are active only if Use separate grids for exterior and interior skeleton cuts setting is selected. This setting can be found on the Skeleton Grid page.

Exterior cut order Defines the order in which exterior skeleton cuts are made. (None) Exterior skeleton cuts are made in the order in which they were created. Circle the plate (clockwise) Exterior skeleton cuts are made in a clockwise direction around the plate, starting at the machine home. Cut vertical lines first All vertical exterior skeleton cuts are made first, followed by all horizontal exterior skeleton cuts. Cut horizontal lines first All horizontal exterior skeleton cuts are made first, followed by all vertical exterior skeleton cuts.

Traverse along the plate edge between exterior cuts Select this setting if you would like the torch head to follow along the plate edge between exterior skeleton cuts, or to track back down the just cut exterior skeleton cut if cutting the other end of it which touches the plate edge. Tip:

This setting is useful if you are worried about the pieces of the skeleton created by skeleton cut up tipping up as the exterior skeleton lines are cut.  If the torch head were to run into one of these tipped up pieces of plate, a lot of damage could be done to the cutting head or the cutting machine itself.

How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> double-click Skeleton Cut-Up

> click Cut Sequence

- 149 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Crop settings Use settings table Crops will be applied according to the Crop settings table (spreadsheet). Using a spreadsheet for cropping is useful if you want to apply different crop settings for different materials in a job or apply crop for certain materials and not others.   In the box, you can select any settings table from the list, which contains all the XLS files found in the Crop spreadsheet settings folder (defined in Preferences). Tip:

To edit or view the spreadsheet, click the Edit button.

When a Crop settings table is in use but no record can be matched in that XLS for a given nest, AutoCrop will not be applied to that nest. Manual cropping will still be available in this case, however, and will adhere to the default settings listed below.   To read more, see "Crop spreadsheets" on page 240.

Use default settings Crop will be applied to all nests according to the default settings specified below.

Default settings Extension A crop line is always defined with respect to the plate edge.  A crop extension allows the pierce point to move off the plate (a positive extension) or onto the plate (a negative extension).   Units: Distance Range: -10.0 to 10.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.0 in.  

Crop process If you have more than one cut process on your machine, you can select the process that you want to use for cutting crop lines. Automatic The crop process will match the process of the first cut profile on a nest. {Cut process} Crops on all nests will be cut using this process.

Minimum remnant area During AutoCrop, all calculated crop lines will be rejected unless they produce a remnant with at least this much surface area. During manual cropping, if the remnant area is smaller than this value, the crop will not generate a valid remnant.   Units: Area Range: 0.0 to 100000000.0 in.² Recommended Value: 500.0 in.²  

Step 1: Find the best vertical crop When finding a crop line, ProNest will first find the best vertical (straight) crop line.  This step is always checked.

- 150 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Step 2: Find the best L-shape crop If this step is checked, ProNest will try to improve on Step 1.  An L-shaped crop has one (or two) 90-degree turns resulting in an L-shaped remnant.

You can force ProNest to accept the L-shaped crop line only if it beats Step 1 with a better (larger) remnant.  The setting reads: Use only if the remnant area improves by at least x%. This means that the vertical crop from Step 1 will be used unless the remnant calculated in step 2 is at least x% larger.   To edit the L-shape crop improvement:  1. Click the % value (its a hyperlink).  2. Type a value for L-shape crop improvement in the box.  3. Click OK.  

Step 3: Find the best profile crop If this step is checked, ProNest will try to improve on the previous steps.  A profile crop is built by trying to stay as close to the parts as possible.  This method generally creates a remnant with the most area.  The tradeoff, however, is that the crop line usually has significantly more motions.

You can force ProNest to accept the profile crop line only if it beats the previous steps with a better (larger) remnant.  The setting reads: Use only if the remnant area improves by at least x%. This means that the best crop line from the previous steps will be used unless the remnant calculated in step 3 is at least x% larger.  

- 151 -

ProNest 2019 Manual To edit the profile crop improvement:  1. Click the % value (its a hyperlink).  2. Type a value for profile crop improvement in the box.  3. Click OK.

Remnant Webs When ProNest creates a crop line (especially when Step 3 is checked) it can create remnants that have useless, thin spokes of material.   Use the following settings to have ProNest adjust the crop line to remove these webs from the remnant.  

A remnant with several protrusions or "webs." Note that the uppermost web is considered "along plate edge."  

Minimum usable web width ProNest will remove any webs that are thinner than this value.  This does not include webs that share the plate edge.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 in. Recommended Value: 12.0 in.  

Minimum width - along plate edge Webs that share the plate edge are considered separately.  Any such web thinner than this value will be removed.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 in. Recommended Value: 18.0 in.

How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> click Crop

- 152 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Interior Remnants settings Important:

On the Nesting settings page, you must have the Allow nesting outside the crop setting cleared in order to use the interior remnants feature.

Automatically create interior remnants When you enter Interior Remnants mode (on the Nest tab, click Interior Remnants), all cut-outs larger than the minimum size will be automatically selected as interior remnants, while smaller cut-outs will not be selected as remnants.   Clear this setting if you do not want interior remnants to be automatically selected.

Minimum area Cut-outs with an area less than this value will not be considered interior remnants by default.

Minimum side length If the shortest side of a bounding rectangle around the cut-out is less than this value, the cut-out will not be considered an interior remnant by default. This setting is useful for determining whether irregularly-shaped interiors should be saved as remnants.

The side length of this cut-out is shown in red. Though the area of this cut-out may be large enough, its shape makes it impractical to use as a remnant. Setting a good value for minimum side length solves this problem. How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> click Interior Remnants

- 153 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Costing settings The settings on this page are used to calculate Production Cost and Production Time in ProNest.

Machine Settings These settings are not specific to any process. Machine cost, Labor rate, and Labor cost per weight are always included in final production costs for parts and nests. Plate loading cost is always used in final nest-level costs. If you don't want one of these costs to be used, set it to zero.

General tab Machine cost This represents the baseline hourly cost of running your cutting machine, excluding labor costs and process-specific costs associated with cutting or marking (such as consumable wear and gas usage). It may include things like facility overhead, electricity costs, repairs and maintenance, and even equipment depreciation.   Units: Currency Range: 0.00 to 1,000,000,000.00 (Monetary Units)  

Plate loading cost The cost of loading and unloading a single plate of material onto the cutting machine. This cost is applied once per nest in costing calculations, so it should include the total cost of loading a plate and the cost of unloading the leftover skeleton after parts are cut.   Units: Currency Range: 0.00 to 1,000,000,000.00 (Monetary Units) Note:

This value is included in nest-level costs, but is not used for individual part costs (unless you are viewing allocated part costs).

Labor rate The hourly rate you pay for labor for the people involved in the running of your cutting machine.   Units: Currency Range: 0.00 to 1,000,000,000.00 (Monetary Units) Note:

This setting should be set to zero if a Labor cost per weight is specified).

Labor cost per weight The amount you pay the people involved in running the cutting machine per unit weight. The weight used in the calculation is the weight of the cut parts as opposed to the weight of the full sheets.   Units: Currency Range: 0.00 to 1,000,000,000.00 (Monetary Units) Note:

This setting should be set to zero if a Labor rate is specified).

Text marker time Buge text marking can be acccounted for in costing calculations. This is a flat time that is added for each instance of buge text.

- 154 -

ProNest 2019 Manual   Units: Time in seconds Range: 0 to 12,000 s

Traverse tab Full raise/lower time This setting represents the average amount of time required to fully retract the cutting head on a full raise and then fully lower the cutting head when it is turned back on. This setting is used for costing purposes only.   Units: Time Range: 0.0 to 100.0 s Note:

See How is production time calculated? for information on how this setting is used in production time calculations.

Partial raise/lower time This setting represents the average amount of time required to partially retract the torch for a partial raise and then fully lower the torch when it is turned back on. This setting is used for costing purposes only.   Units: Time Range: 0.0 to 100.0 s Note:

Not all cutting machines differentiate between a partial raise and a full raise. If your machine doesn't support partial raises, set this to match the Full raise/lower time.

Rapid rate This setting describes the machine's maximum traverse speed while the torch/head is off. Consult your machine table manufacturer specifications to find out your machine's rapid traverse speed.   The Rapid rate setting is used only for generating costing figures - it is not included in any NC output code. The actual rapid rate used by your real-world machine must be set at the machine itself.   Units: Length per minute Range: 0 to 10,000 in./min (254,000 mm/min) Recommended Value: 600 in./min (15,240 mm/min) Note:

Often there is a discrepancy between the table manufacturer's specification and the actual real-world rapid traverse speed of your machine, due to acceleration and deceleration differences from one machine to another. To get the most accurate value possible, you can use a stopwatch to measure the actual rapid rate of your machine.

X rapid rate and Y rapid rate Some cutting tables have drive mechanisms where X and Y traverse motions have different maximum speeds. These two settings let you enter separate maximum traverse speeds for the X and Y axes. Consult your machine table manufacturer specifications to find out your machine's rapid traverse speed.   The X rapid rate and Y rapid rate settings are used only for generating costing figures - they are not included in any NC output code.   Units: Length per minute Range: 0 to 10,000 in./min (254,000 mm/min)

- 155 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Recommended Value: 600 in./min (15,240 mm/min) Note:

 l These settings are only used for costing calculations if Rapid rate is set to zero.  l For the purposes of this setting, X motions are horizontal on the nest, Y motions are vertical.  l Often there is a discrepancy between the table manufacturer's specification and the actual real-world rapid traverse speed of your machine, due to acceleration and deceleration differences from one machine to another. To get the most accurate value possible, you can use a stopwatch to measure the actual rapid rate of your machine.

Minimum rapid time When separate X and Y rapid rates are used, you can set a minimum traverse time to use in costing calculations. Any X or Y traverse motion that takes a shorter amount of time than the minimum rapid time value will be rounded up to that value.   Units: Time in seconds Range: 0 to 12,000 s

Process Settings Each tab in this section contains costing settings for a specific process supported by your machine.  

Settings table This setting specifies whether to use a settings table (spreadsheet) for costing. You can select any settings table from the list, which contains all the XLS files found in the Costing spreadsheet settings folder (defined in Preferences).   Settings spreadsheets are useful in costing if you want to differentiate your process-specific costs by material type, thickness, and class. Tip:

To edit or view the spreadsheet, click the Edit button.

To read more about using Costing spreadsheets, see "Costing spreadsheets" on page 220.

  The next three settings are used if:  l you are not using a settings table. -or l you are using a settings table, but a material and thickness used in your job cannot be found in the settings table.  

Default activation time The amount of time to turn the process on (can also include the time to turn the process off). For cut processes, this is the total time from the point where the traverse motion stops until the cutting motion begins, which can include pre-heats, pierces, raising/lowering, etc.   Units: Seconds Range: 0.0 to 12000.0 s Recommended Value: 3.0 s Note:

Default activation time is only used for costing calculations if no valid Activation Time can be found in a Costing spreadsheet (settings table) and you do not have a Full or Partial raise/lower time or Pierce Time specified. Refer to "How is production time calculated?" on page 591 for more information.

Default cost per activation The cost incurred in activating a particular process. For cut processes, this would be the cost to turn the process on and fully pierce the - 156 -

ProNest 2019 Manual material (can also include the cost to turn the process off). This should account for the cost of consumables used during an activation, since piercing significantly contributes to consumable wear.   Units: Currency Range: 0.00 to 1,000,000,000.00 (Monetary Units)  

Default operating cost The cost per minute of using the process. This cost should include the cost of the consumables used while running the process, but not during activation (turning the process on and off, piercing, etc.) or rapid motion. For cut processes, this would be the cost per minute while the torch/head is moving during cutting motions.   Units: Currency Range: 0.00 to 1,000,000,000.00 (Monetary Units) Note: This setting is not available for Punch or Drill processes. How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> click Costing

- 157 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Export DXF settings This settings page controls how DXF files are created when a single part or nest is exported to DXF.

General Settings Export folder ProNest will save DXF files in the folder defined here.   Before ProNest creates the DXF file, it will prompt for a file name in the Export dialog. Initially, the folder will be the Default export folder, but the Export dialog allows you to browse to any folder. If the file is saved to a folder other than the default output folder, ProNest will remember the new folder and use it next time DXF files are exported. Note:

If the specified folder does not exist, a yellow warning symbol (

) will appear to the left of the field.

Export polylines Select this setting to export DXF files using polylines. Each profile would be generated as a single polyline entity. Clear this setting to output DXF files as individual DXF entities (arcs and lines).  

Export plate geometry Select this setting to include plate geometry (edges) in the DXF file. Applies to nests only.  

Export safe zones Select this setting to output the safe zone geometry into the DXF file. Applies to nests only.  

Export leads Select this setting to export existing lead-ins and lead-outs on profiles when exporting DXF files. Otherwise, leads are removed.  

Export original layer names whenever possible Select this setting to include the original CAD layer names as the entity layer names in the DXF file. If the profile being exported was not originally a CAD file, then the default layer information will be used (this comes from either the post processor or the Process Parameters settings table).  

Process Settings In this section, you can map the available processes in the your machine to layers that will be created in the CAD file. You can export all geometry to a single layer or specify a different layer for each process.   The Name column on the left shows available processes on your ProNest machine. For each process, you can enter a layer name that will be created in the CAD file. Geometry assigned to that process in ProNest will be placed on the specified layer in the CAD file.   Display only information on parts or nests is not included when DXF files are exported. How do I get here in ProNest?  l Settings

> click Export DXF

  Related articles  n Exporting a part to DXF  n Exporting a nest to DXF file

- 158 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

CNC Output settings Output DLL This setting allows the user to choose which output DLL to use to generate CNC code. The list of DLLs to choose from is populated with the valid output DLLs in the ProNest 2019 folder.   Recommended Value: Standard

Code Format tab Mode Defines how motions are output.   Choices: Absolute, Incremental   Absolute All motions are defined with respect to the initialization (home) point.   Incremental All motions are defined with respect to the controller's current position.  

Precision This setting governs the number of decimal places output for many floating point values in the CNC file, including coordinates, kerf values, and feedrates. The actual number of decimal places is governed by the CFF itself.   Choices: Normal, Extra   Normal Output with reduced precision: usually 2 or 3 decimal places.   Extra Output with enhanced precision: usually 3 or more decimal places.   Example:   If a raw value is 12.34567, it might be output as:   12.35 (Normal precision) 12.346 (Extra precision)  

Units This setting controls the units used to output the CNC file. Generally speaking, if outputting in "Inches", no conversion value is applied to the output coordinates.   Choices: Inches (in.), Millimeters (mm)

Line numbers in CNC Defines how line numbers are added to output files.   Choices: (None), Every Line, Start of Part - 159 -

ProNest 2019 Manual   (None) Line numbers are not added to output.   Example: (None) % G70 G91 G00X0.7Y0.51 G41 M21 G01Y0.75 ...   Every Line Line numbers are added to every line of output. Exceptions include comments and the start/end line - containing a single "%".   Example: Every Line % N1G70 N2G91 N3G00X0.7Y0.51 N4G41 N5M21 N6G01Y0.75 ...   Start of Part Line numbers are inserted before the start of each part or profile - as determined by the CFF.   Example: Start of Part % G70 G91 N1 G00X0.7Y0.51 G41 M21 G01Y0.75 ...  

Line number increment Defines the increment for line numbers added to output files.   Range: 1 to 100 Recommended Value: 1  

- 160 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Example:   Setting the increment to 1 will number the lines 1, 2, 3, ... % N1G70 N2G91 N3G00X0.7Y0.51 N4G41 N5M21 N6G01Y0.75 ...   Setting the increment to 5 will number the lines 5, 10, 15, ... % N5G70 N10G91 N15G00X0.7Y0.51 N20G41 N25M21 N30G01Y0.75 ...

Note:

This setting is active only if Line numbers in CNC is set to something other than "(None)".

Program number This setting allows the user to specify a program number to be inserted into the first CNC file output for each job. The exact way that this setting is used (or whether it is even used at all) is determined entirely by the particular CFF being used.   Range: 0 to 99,999,999 Recommended Value: 0

Show program number in the output dialog In the CNC Output dialog, a box will be displayed where you can specify a program number to be inserted into the first CNC file output for your job.

Output Files tab CNC file extension Defines the file extension for CNC files generated by Output CNC.   Before ProNest begins generating output, it will prompt for a file name in the Output CNC dialog. This dialog provides a default file name that uses the CNC file extension. If multiple nests are output, unique file names will be created automatically.   Example 1: CNC file extension = cnc Output a single nest with the name: MyJob.cnc Output file: MyJob.cnc   Output three nests with the name: MyJob.cnc Output files: MyJob01.cnc, MyJob02.cnc, MyJob03.cnc  

- 161 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Clear this setting and ProNest will generate an output file that has no extension. If multiple nests are output, unique file names will be created automatically.   Example 2: Clear the CNC file extension setting Output a single nest with the name: MyJob Output file: MyJob   Output three nests with the name: MyJob Output files: MyJob.N1, MyJob.N2, MyJob.N3   The N# file extension will ensure unique extensions are applied to all nests.   Example 3: CNC file extension = N# Output a single nest with the name: MyJob Output file: MyJob.N1   Output three nests with the name: My Job Output files: MyJob.N1, MyJob.N2, MyJob.N3  

Default output folder ProNest will save output files in the folder defined here.   Before ProNest begins generating output, it will prompt for a file name in the Output CNC dialog. Initially, the output folder will be the Default output folder, but the Output CNC dialog allows you to browse to any folder. If output is saved to a folder other than the default output folder, ProNest will remember the new folder and use it next time CNC output is generated. Note:

If the specified folder does not exist, a yellow warning symbol (

) will appear to the left of the field.

Use long file names Select this setting to allow ProNest to generate long file names for CNC output files. Clear this setting to limit output file names to 8 characters (commonly known as the DOS 8.3 file naming convention).

Generate token files during output If this setting is selected, a token file version of the nest will be output to the same location as the CNC file.  

Generate data files during output Select this setting to produce a data file along with the output CNC files. Data files contain information about each nest in a human-readable format - such as utilizations and home points - as well as information about the parts contained on each nest.  

Data file location Data files will be placed in the folder specified by this setting. Click the

button to browse for the folder. To clear this setting, click the

button. This will cause ProNest to save the data files in the same folder as the CNC files.

Note:

This setting is activated only when Generate data files during output is selected.

- 162 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Additional machines Default list of additional machines that will be associated with the current ProNest machine. Any machine listed here will appear in the Output dialog by default. See Additional machine output for more information.  

Options tab Include machine parameters in output Check this setting to enable machine parameters (such as kerf and feed rate) to be inserted into the CNC files as they are output. These parameter values may be specified through the Process Parameters page for each process.  

Drill/Punch/Scribe first If this setting is selected, then each nest will be processed in the following order:  1. Complete all punches on the nest  2. Complete all scribe profiles on the nest  3. Complete all cut profiles on the nest If this setting is cleared, then each part on the nest will be fully processed before the next part is started. Profiles within each part are processed in their natural order. Note:

This setting should be selected when cutting with underwater plasma. Normally, very light metal should not have punching or scribing done first - to avoid problems with metal movement.

Advanced: This setting may be overridden through the use of "Cut Sequence Rules settings" on page 125.

Stop before drilling If this setting is selected, code will be inserted to cause the machine to stop before drilling begins. Note:

This setting is activated only when Drill/Punch/Scribe first is selected.

Stop before punching If this setting is selected, code will be inserted to cause the machine to stop before punching begins. Note:

This setting is activated only when Punch/Scribe first is selected.

Stop before scribing If this setting is selected, code will be inserted to cause the machine to stop before scribing begins. Note:

This setting is activated only when Punch/Scribe first is selected.

Stop before cutting If this setting is selected, code will be inserted to cause the machine to stop before cutting begins. Note:

This setting is activated only when Punch/Scribe first is selected.

Order punches by process - 163 -

ProNest 2019 Manual If this setting is selected, all punches will be grouped together by process. For each nest, all punches using a particular process will be done before the next punch process is used. Note:

This setting is activated only when Punch/Scribe first is selected.

Order scribes by process If this setting is selected, all scribes will be grouped together by process. For each nest, all scribes using a particular process will be done before the next scribe process is used. Note:

This setting is activated only when Punch/Scribe first is selected.

Order cuts by process If this setting is selected, all cuts will be grouped together by process. For each nest, all cuts using a particular process will be done before the next cut process is used. Note:

This setting is activated only when Punch/Scribe first is selected.

Return to machine home When this setting is selected, ProNest will return the torch to the machine's home point at the end of each nest. If this setting is cleared, the torch will remain in its position at the end of each nest.  

Adjust machine home to center for circular plates On circular plates, the machine home ( visible in Cut Simulation mode.  

) used in CNC output will be moved to the center of the plate. The adjusted machine home is

Adjust machine home on remnants For remnants that do not have a corner at the machine home ( ) specified on the Machine settings page, the home point can be adjusted to an existing corner on the remnant. This can make it easier to initialize the torch head prior to cutting the nest.   With this setting selected, use the vertical and horizontal settings to control the direction in which the home point should be adjusted. Notes:

 l Adjustments to the machine home are visible in Cut Simulation mode and will be included in CNC output.  l Selecting both Adjust machine home along vertical plate edge and Adjust machine home along horizontal plate edge will move the machine home to the closer of the two intersection points.  l If a circular plate is loaded and the Adjust machine home to center for circular plates setting is cleared, selecting this setting will adjust the machine home to the edge of circular plates as well as remnants.

 

Adjust machine home along vertical plate edge The machine home will be moved vertically from its original position until it intersects the remnant's edge.  

- 164 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Note:

This setting is activated only when Adjust machine home on remnants is selected.

Adjust machine home along horizontal plate edge The machine home will be moved horizontally from its original position until it intersects the remnant's edge.  

Note:

This setting is activated only when Adjust machine home on remnants is selected.

Insert part name as comment Select this setting if a comment should be output in the CNC file before the first profile of each part. This comment typically gives the sequence number of the part and the part name.  

Validate plate size When this setting is selected, the plate size is validated. The procedure for this typically consists of the following actions:  1. Start with the torch head at the machine home  2. Traverse to the opposite corner of the plate  3. Traverse back to the machine home  4. Begin normal processing of the nest  

Enable automatic CNC torch spacing If this setting is selected, ProNest will insert code to automatically change the torch spacing at the cutting machine. Otherwise, ProNest will insert a stop code to allow an operator to manually adjust the torches (quantity and/or spacing) whenever they need to be changed.

- 165 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Important:

Select this setting only if the machine is capable of arranging torches automatically. To facilitate this, a special post processor (CFF) may be required.  Please contact Hypertherm if you require this ability.

Pre-kerf Selecting this setting will remove all kerf left, kerf right, and kerf off commands from the CNC code. ProNest will alter the part geometry to compensate for this change. Example Suppose you have a 10 × 10 inch rectangular part, to be cut from 1.5 inch thick mild steel with plasma at 200 A. The kerf width for this is 0.192 inches.

With this Pre-kerf setting turned off, the NC code for the part would contain the normal kerf commands:  

G91 ... G00X1.7569Y1.0053 ... G43X0.192 G41 M07 G01Y1.5 G01Y10. G01X10. G01Y-10. G01X-10. G01X-0.75 M08 G40 If this Pre-kerf setting is enabled, kerf commands (in this case, G43, G41, and G40) are removed and the part's geometry is adjusted to account for kerfing.

One-half of the kerf width (0.096 inches) is added along the edges of the part.

G91 ... G00X1.6609Y1.0053 ... M07 G01Y1.5

- 166 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

G01Y10.096 G01X10.192 G01Y-10.192 G01X-10.096 G01X-0.75 M08 Note that in ProNest, the adjusted geometry of pre-kerfed parts is only visible in Cut Simulation mode in ProNest.

Note:

If the cutting machine is slow at kerfing the CNC code, you may want to select this setting.

No radius of corners If you are using both Cutting Techniques with Corner Radius (rounding off corners for a smoother motion) and pre-kerfing, parts may be rounded incorrectly in certain instances, depending on your machine setup. When selected, ProNest will not apply any corner rounding cutting techniques to any nested parts. Note:

This setting is activated only when Pre-kerf is selected.

Radius corners before pre-kerfing If you are using both Cutting Techniques with Corner Radius (rounding off corners for a smoother motion) and pre-kerfing, parts may be rounded incorrectly in certain instances.   With this setting selected, corner rounding will be applied to parts before kerf compensation is applied and kerf commands are removed. This may correct problems with rounding on your parts, depending on your setup. Note:

This setting is activated only when Pre-kerf is selected.

Radius corners after pre-kerfing If you are using both Cutting Techniques with Corner Radius (rounding off corners for a smoother motion) and pre-kerfing, parts may be rounded incorrectly in certain instances.   With this setting selected, corner rounding will be applied to parts after kerf compensation is applied and kerf commands are removed. This may correct problems with rounding on your parts, depending on your setup. Note:

This setting is activated only when Pre-kerf is selected.

Ignore for output Processes listed here will not appear in the CNC file. The list of ignored processes will be highlighted and underlined - like a hyperlink.   To edit the list:  1. Click the process list hyperlink.  2. Select the processes you want to ignore during output and click OK. Note:

This setting is ignored if Cut Sequence Rules are used.

- 167 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Single Part Output tab Part home When creating output for a single part, this is the home point (or initialization point) that the cutting head starts at before traversing to the first cut, scribe, or punch on that part.   Choices: Same as Machine Home, Lower Left, Upper Left, Lower Right, Upper Right, Center of Region, CAD Origin The Machine Home is set in the "Machine settings" on page 27 or Output Axis pages of your settings. CAD Origin refers to the point of origin set when the CAD file was created.   All choices (except CAD Origin) are set in terms of the rectangular box surrounding the part (including any leads or extensions).  

 

Generate token files during output  If this setting is selected, an MTC token file version of the part will be output to the same location as the CNC file.   Important: CNC Output settings and the Post Processor (CFF)   Certain CNC Output Settings require specific capabilities to be present in the CFF in order to function properly. While many CFFs are already set up for this functionality, it is possible that you may require changes to your CFF before it will work correctly. Please contact Hypertherm for further assistance if you feel you have one of these CFFs.     The settings which activate functionality resident in the CFF are:    l Include machine parameters in output  l Line numbers in CNC  l Program number  l  l  l  l

Return to machine home Insert part name as comment Validate plate size Enable automatic CNC torch spacing  

  CFFs may override the values of Mode, Precision, and Units. In addition, the CFF may override the settings in the above list. For example, a CFF may be configured to always output in incremental mode or without the ability to output machine parameters in the CNC file.

How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> click CNC Output

- 168 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

CNC Output - Post Processor settings Advanced:

Changing these settings is considered an advanced type of change. Exercise caution when making any changes to the settings on this page.

On this settings page you can edit custom CFF settings (settings specified in the [Custom Settings] section of the current CFF) and save the edited values to the current ProNest machine (CFG) or job. During output, the custom settings values saved on this page will be used when creating output code, instead of the values in the CFF.   When you’ve finished editing values on this page, click Save to permanently store your changes with the ProNest machine. Clicking OK will save the changes with your job but will not save them permanently to the CFG. Note:

This settings page is not a CFF editor and will not change your post processor (CFF) in any way.

How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> double-click CNC Output

> click Post Processor Settings

 

- 169 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

CNC Output - Pre-Pierces settings Piercing can cause a lot of wear on consumables. You can use pre-pierce on cut profiles to reduce consumable wear during pierces. Common scenarios where you'd pre-pierce include:  l Use older, worn consumables for piercing, saving wear and tear on newer cutting consumables  l Pierce with a punch or drill, reducing consumable wear and eliminating slag spatter at the pierce site  l Pierce with a different cut process (such as oxyfuel) and then cut profiles with your normal cut process Before each profile is cut, the machine can be instructed to create a pierce hole that will serve as the starting point when the profile is cut. The settings on this page help to define exactly how these pre-pierces should be made.  Pre-pierces are represented by an action that can be sequenced through Cut Sequence Rules - so it is possible to control exactly when profiles are pre-pierced.  l Disable Turn off pre-piercing. No pre-piercing will be applied to profiles.  l Use settings table Pre-piercing will be enabled and applied according to the Pre-Pierces settings table (spreadsheet). Using a spreadsheet for prepiercing is useful if you want to apply different pre-pierce settings for different materials in a job or apply pre-pierces for certain materials and not others.   In the box, you can select any settings table from the list, which contains all the XLS files found in the Pre-Pierces spreadsheet settings folder (defined in Preferences). Tip:

To edit or view the spreadsheet, click the Edit button.

When a Pre-Pierces settings table is in use but no record can be matched in that XLS for a given nest, pre-piercing will not be applied to that nest. To read more, see "Pre-Pierces spreadsheets" on page 242.  l Use default settings Pre-piercing will be enabled and applied to all nests according to the default settings specified below.

Default settings Style This setting defines the method used to pierce holes. Pre-pierce as Circles All pierce holes are created by piercing and cutting a small circle.  

Pre-pierce as Punch If the machine has a punch, all pierce holes are punched.

- 170 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Torch Blow Through All pierce holes are created simply by piercing each start point. Normal piercing parameters (such as Pierce Time) are used for Torch Blow Through pre-pierces. Pre-pierce as Drill For drill-capable machines, all pierces for cut profiles are drilled.

 

Enable only for materials thicker than in. Pre-piercing can be limited to materials that are thicker than a specific value.  The value is highlighted and underlined - like a hyperlink.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.0 in.   To edit this setting:  1. Click the value (its a hyperlink).  2. Type a value in the Pre-pierce threshold box.  

Process This setting defines the process that will be used to create pierce holes.  When Style is set to Pre-Pierce as Circles or Torch Blow Through, the choices are limited to valid cut processes.  When Style is set to Pre-Pierce as Punch, the choices are limited to valid punch processes.  

Radius This setting defines the radius for circle pierce holes.   Units: Distance Range: 0.01 to 10.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.5 in.   This setting is activated only when Style is set to Pre-Pierce as Circles.  

Pre-pierce by part If this setting is selected, then pre-pierces are done on a part-by-part basis. This means that the profiles for a single part will be pre-

- 171 -

ProNest 2019 Manual pierced and cut before moving on to cut the next part. When this setting is cleared, pre-pierces are done for the entire nest before any profiles are cut.   Important:

This setting is used only if the active Cut Sequence Rule is 'Use settings instead of rules'. A true cut sequence rule would dictate exactly when pre-pierces are to be cut and this setting would be effectively ignored.

Advanced Control By default, when pre-piercing is enabled, pre-pierces are applied to all cuts. However, you can use these advanced controls to disallow pre-piercing in scenarios where there may be a potential conflict with a cut path.   Allow pre-piercing for:  

Interior profiles only Pre-pierces will be applied to interior profiles only - they will not be applied to any exterior profiles. This is designed for users who have to clean the slag after pre-piercing and are only concerned about the pierces on interiors.  

Profiles without lead-ins Select this setting to allow pre-piercing for profiles that do not have lead-ins.  

Profiles whose pre-pierce would interfere with the profile geometry Select this setting to allow pre-pierces that interfere with their own profiles.  

Profiles whose pre-pierce would interfere with another profile Select this setting to allow pre-pierces that interfere with other profiles.  

Profiles that start on the plate edge Select this setting to allow pre-pierces for profiles that share a point with the plate edge.  

Tabs Select this setting to apply pre-pierces to tabs. This applies only to tabs that have lead-ins.  

Tabs without lead-ins Select this box to allow pre-pierces to be placed on tabs that do not have lead-ins. When selected, pre-pierces will be allowed on all tabs.  

Viewing pre-pierces on a part Pre-pierces are applied when the cut sequence is set for a part or nest. You can view pre-pierce geometry in Cut Simulation mode (either from the main nesting window or Advanced Edit).

Part with Pre-pierce as Circles set. Pre-pierce geometry is visible in Cut simulation mode. - 172 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

How are lead-ins shortened for pre-piercing? Lead-ins are automatically shortened by a length equal to the radius (r) of the pre-pierce hole. This is done so that the lead-in starts right at the edge of the hole.

An exterior lead-in with a drilled pre-pierce, where r is the radius of the drill tool   For Pre-pierce as Circles, radius is specified using the Radius setting on this page. For Pre-pierce as Drill, ProNest uses the radius of the pre-pierce drill tool.   With Torch Blow Through and Pre-pierce as Punch pre-pierce styles, lead-ins are shortened by the radius set in the "Pierce Radius" column in the cut Process Parameters spreadsheet. If the column doesn't exist or the value is blank, lead-ins will not be trimmed - they will start at the center of the pre-pierce hole.

How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> double-click CNC Output

> click Pre-Pierces

- 173 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

CNC Output - Auto Height Control settings Auto Height Control Settings Disable for interior profiles smaller than in.² Disabling of auto height control can be limited to interior profiles that are smaller in area than a specific value. Auto height control is disabled for the entire profile (from the end of the lead-in to the end of the lead-out). The value, Auto height control threshold, is highlighted and underlined - like a hyperlink.   Units: Area Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 in.² Recommended Value: 0.0 in.²   To edit the value:  1. Click the value (it’s a hyperlink).  2. Specify the Auto height control threshold. Note: This setting is useful for machines where the cutting head tends to follow the surface of the material being cut. When an interior profile drops out, the cutting head on these machines may dive into the hole - risking damage.

Disable for all lead-outs Select this setting to disable auto height control at the beginning of the lead-out. Note: This setting applies to interior, exterior, and open profiles. However, this setting does not apply to interior profiles that already fit the criterion defined by the Disable for interior profiles smaller than… setting. That setting takes precedence for interior profiles.

Disable no further than in. before the lead-out Disables auto height control the specified distance before the beginning of a lead-out. The value is highlighted and underlined – like a hyperlink.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 10.0 in. Recommended Value: 1.0 in.   This setting is active only if Disable for all lead-outs is selected.   To edit the value:  1. Click the value (it’s a hyperlink).  2. Specify the Disable no further than... value. Notes:

 l For parts with overtravel, auto height control will be disabled at the specified distance from the end of the overtravel.  l For parts with no lead-out, auto height control will be disabled at the specified distance from the torch off point.

Disable for crop lines

- 174 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Select this setting to disable auto height control for crop lines.  

Re-enable before the torch turns off Select this setting to re-enable auto height control immediately before the cutting head turns off at the end of the lead-out. If this setting is not selected, the auto height control will be re-enabled immediately after the cutting head turns off at the end of the lead-out.   This setting is active if...    l The value for Disable for interior profiles smaller than… is set to a non-zero value -or l The Disable for all lead-outs check box is selected -or l The Disable for crop lines check box  is selected.  

Disable for skeleton lines Select this setting to disable auto height control for skeleton cut up lines. Important: The value of this setting is used only at the moment when a nest's skeleton is created.

How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> double-click CNC Output

> click Auto Height Control

- 175 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

CNC Output - Step and Repeat settings Step and Repeat allows the CNC file to be repeated along the length or width of the plate.  This has the same effect as arraying a row or column of parts, except that the CNC file is much smaller.  

Step and Repeat Settings Use step and repeat Select this setting if you wish to use step and repeat mode during output.

Offset Each repeated row or column will be offset this distance from the previous row or column.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 10,000.0 in.

Direction Repeated rows (or columns) will be offset in the direction selected here.   Choices: Left, Up, Right, Down   When repeating horizontally nested parts (rows), this setting should be set to either Up or Down.  Likewise, when repeating vertically nested parts (columns), this setting should be set to Left or Right. Advanced: Since some details of step and repeat are machine specific, please refer to your machine’s programming manual and contact Hypertherm in the event that changes are required to your post processor (CFF).

How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> double-click CNC Output

> click Step and Repeat

- 176 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

CNC Output - Traverse settings Traverse Settings With traverse settings, you can control how the torch/head is raised when traversing away from different types of actions. This enables you to reduce production time and energy consumption when processing your parts. Important: Not all cutting machines differentiate between a partial raise and a full raise. You should make sure that the machine you are generating output for can make both partial and full raises before using these settings. You can set how the torch/head is raised when traversing away from the following types of cuts:    l Exterior profiles  l Interior profiles  l Open profiles  l Skeleton cuts  l Crops  l Pre-pierces   For each action, you can choose:   (Default) - This setting will leave the torch/head in the normal, default position (as set in your part source file) when traversing away from a given action.   Partial Raise -This setting will result in a partial raise of the torch/head when traversing away from a given action.   Full Raise - This setting will result in a full raise of the torch/head when traversing away from a given action. Note: In order to avoid potential collisions, Collision Avoidance generates avoidance paths for certain traverse motions. When Collision Avoidance is turned on, these avoidance paths take precedence over the Traverse Settings on this page. Traverse settings will only have an effect on traverses that are not assigned avoidance paths.

How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> double-click CNC Output

> click Traverse

- 177 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

CNC Output - Output Axis settings The Output Axis settings page allows you to modify your machine home and to define the output axis that will be used to generate CNC files.   This screen shows a simplified view of a rectangular plate.  

  One corner of the plate will be highlighted and will have two arrows coming out of it - representing the output axis. In the center of the plate are 3 buttons which allow you to modify the output axis.

Changing the Machine Home To change your machine home:  1. Hover the mouse over one of the corners of the plate. This will cause the corner to become temporarily highlighted.  2. Click the left mouse button to select the new machine home.   As you change the machine home, the output axis will remain the same.   Example:   With a machine home in the lower-left corner, the arrow pointing up is labeled as the +Y axis and the arrow pointing right is labeled as the +X axis. If the machine home was then changed to the upper-left corner, there would be a down arrow labeled as the -Y axis. Notice that the output axis hasn't changed: up is still +Y and right is still +X.

Changing the Output Axis Some machines have the plate loaded with the long side on the bottom, but as far as the machine is concerned this is the right-hand side of the plate. These machines assume a lower-right machine home. Presenting this vertical plate correctly in ProNest would result in a much smaller view of the nest (because most monitors are wider than they are tall). To provide the best view of the nest and to also allow for correct output you would select a lower left machine home, but rotate the axes 90 degrees clockwise. During output, this has the effect of changing the nest to one with a lower-right machine home and with its long side on the right, rather than the bottom. Note: Changes to the output axis will only affect CNC output. To change your output axis, use the three buttons in the middle of the plate...

- 178 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 l The first button (

) will rotate the output axis clockwise by 90°.

 l The middle button (  l The last button (

) will flip the output axis vertically. ) will flip the output axis horizontally.

  Click Default to restore the default output axis with +Y in the up direction and +X in the right direction.   Example:   With a machine home in the lower-left corner, the arrow pointing up is labeled as the +Y axis and the arrow pointing right is labeled as the +X axis. Click the rotate button once and the up-arrow will become -X while the right-arrow changes to +Y. Click the flip axis vertically button and the up-arrow will become +X while the right-arrow remains the same as +Y.

How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> double-click CNC Output

> click Output Axis

- 179 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

CNC Output - Subroutines settings A subroutine is a basic program unit, usually representing a profile or collection of profiles. Certain types of machines, primarily lasers, allow the use of subroutines to reduce CNC file size. For example, on a nest of 500 identical circles, rather than specifying the geometry for the circle 500 times, a single subroutine could be created, which would then be called 500 times. Important: A specialized section in the post processor governs whether this settings page is available. Usually this section is not used. This section also controls the available choices for Type and Mode, and whether or not Use rotation angle is active. If you need subroutine support, contact Hypertherm.

Subroutine Settings Type Defines the type of subroutines that will be generated.   Choices: (None), Profile, Part, Profile Cluster, Part Cluster, Optimized   (None) No subroutines will be created.   Profile Each subroutine will represent a single profile.   Part Each subroutine will represent a collection of profiles (a part).   Profile Cluster This functionality is not currently implemented.   Part Cluster This functionality is not currently implemented.   Optimized This functionality is not currently implemented. Note: The rest of the settings on this page are activated only if Type is set to something other than (None).

Mode This setting defines the mode that will be used for generating the CNC code for the subroutines.   Choices: Always Absolute, Always Incremental, Same as Main Program   Always Absolute Subroutines will be generated in absolute mode, irrespective of the mode of the main program.   Always Incremental Subroutines will be generated in incremental mode, irrespective of the mode of the main program.   Same As Main Program Subroutines will be generated using the same mode as the main program.  

- 180 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Use rotation angle Select this setting to allow ProNest to use the same subroutine for similar geometry being output at different rotation angles. Otherwise, a different subroutine will be used for each unique rotation of the same geometry.  

Allow nested subroutines Check this setting to allow one subroutine to call another subroutine.  For example, this would allow a part subroutine to be composed of calls to profile subroutines. Important: This functionality is not currently implemented.

Allow subroutined nests Select this setting to generate subroutines for each nest in the job.  These nest subroutines may be output into a single master CNC file. This setting is intended for machines with automatic plate handling systems. Important: This functionality is not currently implemented.

Allow subroutines that contain only collision avoidance motions Select this setting if you are using collision avoidance and want separate profile subroutines generated that contain only the rapid traverses between profiles. Otherwise, the collision avoidance motions will be contained within their respective part or profile subroutines. Note: This setting is intended to reduce the number of subroutines required. A unique subroutine will be generated based on the total geometry of the part or profile - including the avoidance motions. If the avoidance motions are removed from consideration, it becomes more likely that subroutines can be reused.

How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> double-click CNC Output

> click Subroutines

- 181 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

CNC Output - Microjoint / Plate Handler settings Important: A specialized section in the post processor governs whether this settings page is available. Usually this section is not used. If you need microjoint and/or plate handler support, contact Hypertherm.

Microjoint Settings Microjoints are machine-applied tabs. A place holder is inserted into the CNC code which the cutting machine translates into a tab when the CNC code is run. Settings in the settings table determine the size of the tab and the length of the tab lead-in. Not all machines have this capability.  

Settings Table This setting specifies which settings table is used for microjoints. You can select any settings table from the list, which contains all the XLS files found in the Microjoint spreadsheet settings folder (defined in Preferences). Tip:

To edit or view the spreadsheet, click the Edit button.

Use programmed microjoints Select this setting if you want to be able to manually add microjoint tabs to profile geometry.  When adding tabs manually in Advanced Edit, you will be given the option of adding the tab as a microjoint instead of a normal tab. Note: The following two settings are active only if Use programmed microjoints is selected.

Replace every lead-out with a microjoint Select this setting if you want to replace all profile lead-outs with microjoint tabs at output time.  

Use microjoints during AutoTab Select this setting to have ProNest insert microjoint tab placeholders during the AutoTab process (instead of normal tabs). Otherwise, normal tabs will be added. Important: The value of this setting is used only when tabs are added. Changing the value of this setting does not affect parts that already have tabs (or don't have tabs).

Use automatic microjoints Select this setting if you want the machine to automatically insert microjoints where the machine deems appropriate.  Settings from the Microjoint settings table may be used by the machine to make this determination.

Plate Handler Settings An automatic plate handler is a mechanism provided by some machine manufacturers that enables the cutting machine to load its own plates as specified in the CNC code.  Not all machines have this capability.  

Use plate handler Select this setting if your machine is capable of using an automatic plate handler and you wish to make use of this feature. Note: The Settings table setting is active only if Use plate handler is selected.

Settings table

- 182 -

ProNest 2019 Manual This setting specifies which settings table is used for the plate handler. You can select any settings table from the list, which contains all the XLS files found in the Plate Handler spreadsheet settings folder (defined in Preferences). Tip:

To edit or view the spreadsheet, click the Edit button.

How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> double-click CNC Output

> click Microjoint / Plate Handler

- 183 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

CNC Output - DXF Output settings For DXF output, layer and color information is normally stored in the post processor or may be retrieved from Process Parameters (if process parameters are being used). Some of the settings on this page allow this behavior to be overridden. The DXF files produced during output should be readable by ProNest or any CAD system that understands DXF files. Important: A specialized section in the post processor governs whether this settings page is available. It also controls which DXF Output settings are available. Usually this section is not used. If you need DXF Output support, contact Hypertherm.

DXF Output Settings Output polylines Select this setting to output DXF files using polylines. Each profile would be generated as a single polyline entity. Clear this setting to output DXF files as individual DXF entities (arcs and lines).  

Output plate geometry Select this setting to output the plate geometry (edges) into the DXF file. Applies to nests only.  

Output safe zones Select this setting to output the safe zone geometry into the DXF file. Applies to nests only.  

Output leads Select this setting to output existing lead-ins and lead-outs on profiles when outputting DXF files. Otherwise, leads are removed.  

Use quality to output CAD colors Select this setting to interpret the QUALITY attribute of arcs and lines as CAD colors. If this setting is cleared, the default CAD color will be used (this comes from either the post processor or the Process Parameters settings table).

Layer Names Output original layer names whenever possible Select this setting to output the original CAD layer names as the entity layer names in the DXF file. If the profile being output was not originally a CAD file, then the default layer information will be used (this comes from either the post processor or the Process Parameters settings table).

How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> double-click CNC Output

> click DXF Output

- 184 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Job Storage settings This settings page gives you the ability to set job options that are specific to your machine (CFG).

General Settings Default job folder You can set a machine-specific default folder for saving jobs (.nif). This can be useful if you want to save job files to different folders based on the machine used by that job.

Suppress the Save As dialog during a normal save When selected, the Save As dialog will not appear when a new job is saved for the first time. The job will be saved in the Default job folder (also specified on this page) with its default file name, which is defined in the Naming preferences. Note:

Regardless of whether this setting is enabled or not, the Save As dialog will always appear when the Save As button is clicked.

How do I get here in ProNest?  n Settings

> click Job Storage

- 185 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

4. SETTINGS SPREADSHEETS About spreadsheets For situations where default settings are not able to provide the desired result, ProNest uses spreadsheets. With spreadsheets, you can differentiate settings based on keys such as material type, thickness, profile type, profile area, etc. Each row in the spreadsheet defines a unique setting based on these parameters, giving you more comprehensive control over cutting and nesting.   Available settings spreadsheets:  l Process Parameters  l Costing  l Interior Leads  l Exterior Leads  l AutoTab  l Cutting Techniques  l Bevel  l Collision Avoidance  l Crop  l Skeleton Cut-Up  l CNC Output - Pre-Pierces  l Slug Destroy  l Fly Cut  l Drill Parameters  l Microjoint*  l Plate Handler* *Note: The post processor (CFF) must be properly configured to make use of the Microjoint and Plate Handler spreadsheets. If you need to use microjoints and/or a plate handler, please contact Hypertherm. Settings spreadsheets can be created and edited with a spreadsheet application such as Microsoft Excel and are saved with the .xls extension.   Where are settings spreadsheets stored? (see "Default installation folders" on page 14)

Advantages of using spreadsheets ProNest spreadsheets provide a powerful and flexible way to use settings specific to a given material and process. In addition, factors such as part class, profile type, profile area, quality, and condition may be used to further specify a group of settings to use. Spreadsheets give you a great deal of control over how and when settings are applied to parts during processing and nesting.

- 186 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Using spreadsheets You can use spreadsheets for certain process settings, including Process Parameters, Cutting Techniques, AutoTab, and Leads, as well as selected machine settings. When a spreadsheet is used for a given setting, ProNest will attempt to match records in the XLS with the data from the required parts. If a match is found, the settings found in that XLS will be used in part processing and nesting.   To use a settings spreadsheet:  1. In the Settings dialog, navigate to the appropriate settings page.  2. Choose the spreadsheet to use for that setting from the drop down menu. You can assign a different set of spreadsheets for each process that is supported by your ProNest machine. The same spreadsheet can be shared by multiple processes, if necessary. Machine settings that use spreadsheets, such as Costing and Bevel, only require one spreadsheet per machine.

Modifying spreadsheets Settings spreadsheets can be modified using a spreadsheet application (such as Microsoft Excel). Spreadsheets have a very precise format, which is specific to XLS type, that should be followed when making modifications. This is discussed in greater detail later in this section. Tip:

You can easily open and modify a settings spreadsheet from within ProNest:  l From a settings page, click the Edit button.

Saving information After making changes to a spreadsheet, you should save your changes through the spreadsheet application. All information in a spreadsheet is stored in an .xls file, outside of ProNest. Note that settings information within an XLS is not saved with a job. When a job is loaded, the current settings in the spreadsheets are used, and not those that existed when the job was last saved.

Considerations There are several considerations that should be taken into account when using spreadsheets:  l Each key used dramatically increases the number of records required. A large number of records may be needed, particularly when optional keys are used. However, using wildcards can help mitigate this problem.  l Each spreadsheet should contain records that cover all combinations of keys that are required by the application. If all combinations are not explicitly covered, appropriate default records should be defined in the XLS.  l Materials listed in an XLS record must exactly match those in the database, and must be the same as when a given part or plate was originally loaded. Although material names are not case sensitive and white space is not considered, the spelling and punctuation of each material name in the records of the XLS table must be identical to the materials in the database. Otherwise, no record will be matched in the XLS.

- 187 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

General spreadsheet format ProNest spreadsheets have a required format consisting of four components: a units cell, a column header row cell, column headers, and rows of data.   Units cell (A1) Measurement units are specified in cell A1, located in the upper left corner of the table. Allowable values for this cell are "inch" or "mm". If this cell is blank, inch is assumed.   Column header row cell (B1) The row number of the required column headers must be specified in cell B1, which is located to the right of the units cell. Allowable values for this cell are whole numbers greater than or equal to "2". If this cell is blank, a value of "2" is assumed. It can be useful to modify this number if rows of information must be added above the required column header (for things such as translated column-headings or reference information). Note:

For non-English setups, cell B1 must always specify the English column header row. Any non-English column header row appears for informational purposes only.

  Column headers Column headers are located in the row specified in cell B1. Each cell of this row contains a heading that indicates the data stored in that column. For instance, the column header "Material" specifies a column containing the names of different materials.   There are two basic types of column headers: keys and non-keys. Column header keys, such as Material and Thickness, are used to determine when a particular group of settings should be used. The other column headers (non-keys) contain the actual settings data used in part processing and nesting.   In general, existing column headers should not be modified, as they must adhere to a specific format and context. Modifying the information in this row may lead to the inability to use information in that settings table. However, columns may be moved to improve the layout of the table. Advanced: For Process Parameters XLS tables, user-defined column headers may be added, though this would be considered an advanced type of action that requires integration with your CFF. See ""User-defined Process Parameters" on page 197" for more information. Data rows The rows of settings data begin immediately below the column headers. A row of settings data is called a record. Each record contains a complete set of settings values for a given table. Rows may be added or removed and row data may be modified. It is important that the proper type of data is entered into each cell. For instance, numeric data should be entered in the "Thickness" column, and alphanumeric data should be entered into the "Material" column.   Example:  

- 188 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

A

 

1

B

inch

3

C  

 

Part Attributes

2 3

Material

D

Thickness

E  

G  

 

Miscellaneous

Feedrate

F

  Separations

Kerf

Part Sep

Plate Sep

Pierce Sep

4

MS

0.1250

27.0

0.04

0.500

0.500

0.500

5

MS

0.2500

25.5

0.04

0.500

0.500

0.500

6

MS

0.5000

24.0

0.05

0.500

0.500

0.500

7

MS

0.7500

16.0

0.09

1.000

1.000

1.000

Figure 1   The table shown in Figure 1 was taken from a sample Process Parameters XLS. Notice that in this spreadsheet:  l In cell A1, units has been set to "inch".  l In cell B1, the "3" indicates that row 3 contains column headers.  l In row 2, there is a description of the column headers, which has been defined by the user. This row is used for informational purposes and does not define any settings.  l Column headers appear in row 3, as defined in cell B1. "Material" and "Thickness" are keys used in record matching. The other column headers represent different Process Parameters settings.  l Rows 4-7 contain data rows, or records, with settings values. In this example, there is a single material type with four different thickness values. The feedrate, kerf, and separation values vary based on material thickness.

- 189 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Record matching Each record, or data row in a spreadsheet, contains a complete set of settings values. This data is organized using keys, which are found in the column header row of a settings spreadsheet. Keys are used to determine when a given record should be selected.   Material and Thickness are required keys for all XLS spreadsheets. Optional keys can be used to further refine record selection. Optional keys will only be used in record selection if they exist in a given XLS.   Key

Status

Associated XLS

Description

Valid values

Material

Required  

All settings spreadsheets

The name of the material used

Character string  

Thickness

Required  

All settings spreadsheets

The thickness of the material used. Thickness is expressed as a distance in inches or mm.  

Any positive number

Class

Optional  

Leads XLS Process Parameters XLS Cutting Techniques XLS

The part class of a given part. Part class can be used to organize your materials using specialized information such as cutting gas or amperage.  

Character string  

Profile Area

Optional  

Process Parameters XLS Cutting Techniques XLS Lead Styles XLS AutoTab XLS  

The area of a given profile. Area is expressed in linear units squared (in. 2 or mm2).

Any positive number

Profile Type

Optional  

Process Parameters XLS Cutting Techniques XLS AutoTab XLS

The type of a given profile

I,E,O,H,R,C,V,S,X,N,*   (see table below)  

Quality

Optional

Process Parameters XLS AutoTab XLS  

The cut quality assigned to a given entity

Integer from 0 - 255  

Condition

Optional

Process Parameters XLS

The cut condition (used with cutting techniques)  

Character string

Tool Name

Optional

Drill Parameters XLS

Exact match of tool name.

Character string

Note: Keys are not case-sensitive and white spaces are not considered.

How is a record selected?  The basis for selecting a record in a given situation involves matching part data against the information contained in the key columns of a settings spreadsheet. The record whose key data most closely matches that of the required part will be selected. This process is called record matching. The method used for record matching varies based on key type:   - 190 -

ProNest 2019 Manual  l Material An exact match of the material is required to select a record. Note: When entering material names in an XLS, make sure that the names appear exactly as they are defined in the Material Database.  l Thickness Unlike Material, an exact match is not required for this key. A record will be selected if it contains the thickness value that is closest to the required material thickness, as long as that value is less than or equal to the required thickness.   Example: Let's say that the required material thickness is 0.5 inches. Consider the following scenarios:  l If a record exists with a material thickness of 0.5, that record will be selected.  l If a sole record exists with a material thickness of 0.25, it will be selected.  l If two records exist, one with a material thickness of 0.25, and another with a material thickness of 0.125, the record with a material thickness of 0.25 will be selected.  l If two records exist, one with a material thickness of 0.25, and another with a material thickness of 0.51, the record with the material thickness of 0.25 will be selected. (Even though 0.51 is the closer of the two values, it exceeds the required material thickness and will therefore not be selected.)  l Class If this key is used, an exact match of the class is required to select a record.    l Profile Area If this key is used, a record is selected if it contains a profile area greater than or equal to the required area. If more than one record match is found, the record with the closest profile area greater than or equal to the required profile area is selected. Tip:

The column header "Diameter" can be used in an XLS to help in defining "Profile Area." Note that "Diameter" is not itself a key, and is only used to assist in the calculation of Profile Area.

 l Profile Type If this key is used, an exact match of the profile type is required to select a record.   Profile types are represented in the XLS by using the first letter of their name – "I" for interior, "E" for exterior and "O" for open. Combinations are represented by listing the letters separated by commas. For example, interior and exterior are represented together as "I,E".   Valid values for profile type are summarized in the following table:   Profile Type

Valid values

Interior

I

Exterior

E

Open

O

- 191 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 l

 l

 l

Interior and Open

I,O

Exterior and Open

E,O

Interior and Exterior

I,E

Interior, Exterior, and Open

I,E,O

Interior round hole

H

Exterior round profile

R

Crop

C

Vaporize

V

Skeleton Cut-Up (All)

S

Skeleton Cut-Up (Exterior)

X

Skeleton Cut-Up (Interior)

N

All types

*

  Quality If this key is used, an exact match is required to select a record.   Condition If this key is used, an exact match is required to select a record.   Tool Name If this key is used, an exact match is required to select a record.

  If a suitable match is not found in a given XLS during record selection, ProNest will use the default values for that setting.

Wildcards An asterisk (*) can be used as a wildcard character for any required or optional key and will match any value if no other record is matched. Wildcards can be used for any key regardless of its data type. Using wildcards is a good way to designate default conditions for keys, and can help avoid having to add numerous rows to a settings table to cover every possible case. This is especially true when using multiple optional keys such as Class, Profile Type, and Profile Area.    Example: If "*" is used in the Material column of a given record, and the required material is "A36", the record containing the "*" will match unless another record exists that contains a Material value of "A36".

Default records You can use default records to set default settings values in your spreadsheets. Default records can be defined using wildcards to ensure a record match for any combination of required and optional keys. Adding a record that contains a wildcard for every key will ensure a default record match in every scenario. Doing this is similar to using default values from your settings ( ) page. However, if you are using settings spreadsheets, you should set your default settings in the XLS to ensure that all of your settings are correctly applied.

- 192 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Units conversion In some instances, settings values in a spreadsheet will need to be converted by ProNest to different units. This may occur, for instance, if a settings table is in millimeters but CNC output is required in inches. ProNest can convert units on settings spreadsheets, though only certain values will be converted, as summarized in the following table:   Spreadsheet Type

Columns converted

Process Parameters

Thickness Feedrate Part Sep Plate Sep Pierce Sep Kerf Profile Area

Lead Styles

Thickness Corner In Scale Corner In Extension Corner Out Scale Corner Out Extension Corner Out Overtravel Side In Scale Side In Extension Side Out Scale Side Out Extension Side Out Overtravel

Costing

Thickness

Cutting Techniques

Thickness Profile Area

  When converting from U.S. Standard to Metric, values are multiplied by 25.4; when converting Metric to U.S. Standard, values are divided by 25.4. Important: Units conversion is not done on user-defined process parameters.

- 193 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Process Parameters spreadsheets Process Parameters spreadsheets contain settings specific to different material types, thickness ranges, part classes, profile types and sizes. These spreadsheets give you dynamic control over cutting speed, kerf, and cutting parameters to be used in nesting, CNC output, and costing.   Each available process (plasma, gas, etc.) on your machine can have a separate Process Parameters spreadsheet.

Use Process Parameters spreadsheets   1. In Settings

, double-click the cut process, then click Process Parameters

.

 2. In the Process Parameters box, select a spreadsheet.

Process Parameters XLS format Column headers Note: Column headers are not case-sensitive and white spaces are not considered. Allowable column header keys used for record matching:  

 l Material  l Thickness  l Class  l Profile Area  l Profile Type  l Quality  l Condition Process Parameter settings defined in the column header row:

Kerf This defines the width of the torch path. This value is used for kerf commands in output and for pre-kerfing parts in ProNest.   Units: Linear distance

Feedrate Cutting speed. ProNest ultimately uses the value in this column for feedrates in output and costing. Other related columns, such as Base Feedrate or Feedrate Percentage, may appear as well, though these are used only for calculating the value of this Feedrate column.   Units: Speed (in./min or mm/min) Tip: When editing the feedrates in a settings spreadsheet, it is recommended that you modify the Feedrate Percentage column to

- 194 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

get the results you want.

Part Sep Part - part separation. The minimum separation allowed between two nested parts. Nested parts that are closer together will be shown in conflict.   Units: Linear distance

Plate Sep Part - plate edge separation. The minimum separation allowed between a nested part and the plate edge. Nested parts that are too close to the plate edge will be shown in conflict.   Units: Linear distance

Pierce Sep Part - pierce separation. The minimum separation allowed between a nested part and the pierce point of another nested part. Nested parts that are too close to a pierce point will be shown in conflict.   Units: Linear distance

Dynamic Pierce This indicates the number of times to cut a lead-in extension. A value of "1" would result in one back and forth pass along the lead-in extension.   Dynamic Pierce is a method used in waterjet applications for making pierces using lead-in extensions. When dynamic pierce is used, the cutting head moves back and forth along the lead-in extension to penetrate the plate before cutting the lead-in. The lead-in extension must be greater than zero for this to be applied to a given profile.   Data type: Integer

Pierce Radius Used for trimming lead-ins for Pre-Pierces. When using Torch Blow Through and Pre-Pierce as Punch styles, lead-ins are shortened by this distance. See Pre-Pierces for more information.   Units: Linear distance

NC Comments Used to insert a comments in output. Comment will be included in the header of the output file.

Ignore This column is used primarily to control the visibility of material records in ProNest. If a row is set to be ignored, it will be unavailable in ProNest and will not be used during record matching.   Valid values: 0 or blank = Do not ignore, 1 = ignore row Example:  

- 195 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

If you never need to cut aluminum, you may want to hide all aluminum choices so that they never appear in ProNest when you're selecting a material.   For each row where Material = AL, you could set the Ignore value to 1.

Note:

The typical Process Parameters spreadsheet contains many additional columns that are machine-specific and beyond the scope of this Help system. Please contact Hypertherm if you require additional information about your setup.

  Example:   Consider the following excerpt of a Process Parameters spreadsheet:  

  1

A inch

2

B 3

C  

Keys

D  

E  

F  

G  

Miscellaneous

H  

  Separations

3

Material

Thickness Profile Area

Feedrate

Kerf

Part Sep

Plate Sep Pierce Sep

4

MS

0.2500

0.50

27.0

0.04

0.500

0.500

0.500

5

MS

0.2500

2.00

25.5

0.04

0.500

0.500

0.500

6

MS

0.7500

*

24.0

0.05

0.500

0.500

0.500

7

MS

0.1000

*

16.0

0.09

1.000

1.000

1.000

  This table contains a single material with three different thickness values. The optional Profile Area key has been used to further refine record selection. For the purposes of this example, let's say that a required part has a material and thickness of MS 0.2500 in. with a profile area of 1.9 in. 2. The record in row 5 would be selected, and the settings in that row would be applied.

Process Parameters spreadsheets and materials When Process Parameters spreadsheets are in use, when you select a material in a job, the list of available materials shows only the materials found in your Process Parameters spreadsheet. When spreadsheets are not used, the list of available materials comes from your material database.

- 196 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

User-defined Process Parameters Advanced: Adding user-defined process parameters to your spreadsheet and CFF is considered an advanced type of action that is generally not recommended. If done incorrectly, it could negatively affect your output or cause ProNest to work improperly. Exercise caution when making any changes your CFF or to the column headers of your spreadsheets. If you have any questions, please contact Hypertherm for more information. In addition to the standard process parameters described above, user-defined process parameters can be added to a Process Parameters spreadsheet and used for CNC output. To add user-defined process parameters:  1.  2.  3.  4.  5.

Open the Process Parameters spreadsheet with your spreadsheet application. Add a new column. Enter your custom name in the header of that column. Enter data into the appropriate process parameters records. To use this parameter in CNC output, add the name, data type and default value to the [USER DEFINED VARIABLES] section of the CFF used by your machine.

  This parameter can be used in any format section of the CFF and can be output to the CNC file or used in calculations or evaluations. Note that user-defined process parameters are only used for CNC output and not for nesting or costing. Units conversion is not done on user-defined process parameters.

- 197 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Drill Process Parameters XLS: Format Column headers Keys

Tool Name This should exactly match the tool name listed in the Drill Tools tab of the tool library. Compound tool names should not be used here, only individual physical tools. Wildcards (*) are allowed.   In order to ensure that you have accurate machine parameters for drilling, be sure to include settings for each drill tool that exists in the tool library or use wildcards to apply settings to a group of tools. A good practice is to make sure to update the Drill Parameters spreadsheet each time you add a new drill tool to the tool library. Tip: You can quickly get a complete list of drill tools in the tool library as follows:  1. On the Drill Tools tab, press CTRL + A to select all rows.  2. Press CTRL + C to copy the entire grid.  3. Open Microsoft Excel and paste in the entire grid into a new sheet.  4. Copy the contents of the Name column into your settings spreadsheet.

Material Material type from the Process Parameters spreadsheet.

Thickness Thickness from the Process Parameters spreadsheet.

Class Class from the Process Parameters spreadsheet. Note:

Column headers are not case-sensitive and white spaces are not considered.

Drill parameter settings

Parameters This is commonly a concatenated string that contains all the drilling parameters for a given row.   The actual parameter values used vary from one setup and machine manufacturer to another. Depending on your drilling machine, the settings in the Drill Parameters file may include values for things like:  l Spindle speed  l Vertical feedrate  l Depth  l Cycle type such as pecking or boring  l Coolant Please contact Hypertherm if you need assistance with this file.

- 198 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

About Cutting Techniques spreadsheets Cutting techniques are used to specify how parts should be cut based on sections of a part's geometry. Machines can have difficulty cutting certain sections of a part, such as sharp corners and small radii. These sections often do not cut well at the speed and parameter levels that are used in the rest of the profile. With cutting techniques, ProNest will take into account part geometry and apply ramping techniques or make adjustments to other cutting parameters based on the situation. Cutting techniques can give you a great deal of control over how parts are cut and can increase cut quality while minimizing damage to parts and to the cutting head.   Using cutting techniques effectively in ProNest requires the use of a Cutting Techniques spreadsheet. You can specify a different Cutting Techniques XLS for each cut process (such as plasma cutting or oxyfuel cutting) or use the same spreadsheet for all of your cut processes.   To use Cutting Techniques spreadsheets:  l On the settings page for a given process, from the Cutting Techniques box, select a spreadsheet. Note: Using cutting techniques in ProNest is optional. If you don’t want to use cutting techniques for a given process, set the cutting techniques selection box to (none) for that process.

- 199 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Using Cutting Techniques spreadsheets Cutting Techniques spreadsheets contain a list of instructions to be executed in certain situations. These instructions generally modify the state of the machine and can affect things like kerf compensation and cutting speed. There are three central components of a Cutting Techniques XLS: cutting technique types, keys, and commands.

Fundamental concepts Types of cutting techniques A cutting technique type specifies when to use cutting techniques on a given section of a profile, such as a corner, radius (arc), or lead. If a given cutting technique type is defined, when ProNest encounters the part geometry specified by that type (for instance, a lead-in), it will assign the appropriate set of actions to take based on the data contained in the XLS. Cutting technique types are defined in the column header row of the Cutting Techniques spreadsheet.   You can set up a Cutting Techniques XLS to use the following types of techniques:  l Corner Ramp Up  l Corner Ramp Down  l Lead In Ramp Up  l Lead Out Ramp Down  l Radius Ramp Up  l Radius Ramp Down  l Pre Kerf Ramp Down  l Post Kerf Ramp Up  l Corner Radius  l Corner Radius Threshold Angle   Record matching Record matching for Cutting Techniques spreadsheets follows the same criteria as for other ProNest spreadsheets. Keys used for Cutting Techniques XLS record matching include: Material, Thickness, Class, Profile Area, and Profile Type.   Commands Unlike other settings tables, the Cutting Techniques XLS records contain commands. These commands work with a given cutting technique type to tell ProNest what series of actions to take in a given situation. Commands are entered in the data row of the appropriate column in the following format:   Command (value) Generally there is more than one command in a single cell of a given record. Multiple commands are separated by commas.   Example:   Two common cutting technique commands, "Move" and "Feedrate%", might appear in a single data row cell as follows:   Move(0.25), Feedrate%(85)

Note: Though not keys, the Radius and Length commands can be used during record selection when multiple sequences are defined for the same cutting technique type. For more information, refer to "Cutting Techniques XLS: Commands" on page 209.

- 200 -

ProNest 2019 Manual The Base Condition The Base Condition refers to the default cutting condition. This is the condition that will be used when no cutting techniques are in effect. Base Condition data provides a reference point for relative cutting technique values, such as Feedrate% and Kerf%. Base condition data comes from the Process Parameters spreadsheet.

- 201 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Cutting Techniques XLS: Column Headers Cutting Techniques spreadsheets must adhere to a specific format. Column headers should be entered in the column header row as specified. Column headers are not case-sensitive and white spaces are not considered.

Column headers Allowable column header keys:  l Material  l Thickness  l Class  l Profile Area  l Profile Type   Cutting techniques defined in the column header row:

Lead In Ramp Up This describes the sequence of actions to perform on a lead-in.   Example:   Consider the following part, where the cut path is represented by the outer line and cut direction is indicated by the arrows:  

Figure 1 The lead-in of the part in Figure 1 is indicated in red. The dotted blue bracket indicates the portion of the profile to which the Lead In Ramp Up technique will be applied. Note that this technique is applied over the length of the lead-in.    

Corner n Ramp Down  This describes the sequence of actions to take prior to cutting a corner (For the purposes of this setting, a corner is defined as the intersection of two lines, one arc and one line, or two arcs, such that they form an angle that is less than or equal to 90 degrees. In the case of an arc, the tangent to the arc at the intersection point is used to determine the angle.).   Example:  

- 202 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Consider the following part, where the cut path is represented by the outer line and cut direction is indicated by the arrows:  

Figure 2   The corner of the part in Figure 2 is indicated in red. The dotted blue bracket indicates the portion of the profile to which the Corner Ramp Down technique will be applied. The length of the Corner Ramp Down technique is defined by the Move (or Distance) command.     The n variable can be used to specify multiple Corner Ramp Down techniques. Values of n must be consecutive integers. If you use multiples of this type of technique (for example, "Corner 1 Ramp Down", "Corner 2 Ramp Down", etc.), the Length command should be used to determine when a given multiple should be used.   If you do not want to use multiples of this cutting technique, this column header can simply be entered as "Corner Ramp Down".  

Corner n Ramp Up  This describes the sequence of actions to take after cutting a corner (For the purposes of this setting, a corner is defined as the intersection of two lines, or of one arc and one line, such that they form an angle that is less than or equal to 90 degrees. In the case of an arc, the tangent to the arc at the intersection point is used to determine the angle.).   Example:   Consider the following part, where the cut path is represented by the outer line and cut direction is indicated by the arrows:  

Figure 3  

- 203 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

The corner of the part in Figure 3 is indicated in red. The dotted blue bracket indicates the portion of the profile to which the Corner Ramp Up technique will be applied. The length of the Corner Ramp Up technique is defined by the Move (or Distance) command.     The n variable can be used to specify multiple Corner Ramp Up techniques. Values of n must be consecutive integers. If you use multiples of this type of technique (for example, "Corner 1 Ramp Up", "Corner 2 Ramp Up", etc.), the Length command should be used to determine when a given multiple should be used.   If you do not want to use multiples of this cutting technique, this column header can simply be entered as "Corner Ramp Up".  

Radius n Ramp Down  This specifies a sequence of actions to take prior to cutting an arc (radial entity).   Example:   Consider the following part, where the cut path is represented by the outer line and cut direction is indicated by the arrows:  

Figure 4   There are two arcs in the part in Figure 4, which are indicated in red. The dotted blue brackets indicate the portions of the profile to which the Radius Ramp Down technique will be applied. The length of the Radius Ramp Down technique is defined by the Move (or Distance) command.     The n variable can be used to specify multiple Radius Ramp Down techniques. Values of n must be consecutive integers. If you use multiples of this type of technique (for example, "Radius 1 Ramp Down", "Radius 2 Ramp Down", etc.), the Radius command should be used to determine when a given multiple should be used.   If you do not want to use multiples of this cutting technique, this column header can simply be entered as "Radius Ramp Down".  

Radius n Ramp Up  This describes the sequence of actions to perform after cutting an arc (radial entity).  

- 204 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Example:   Consider the following part, where the cut path is represented by the outer line and cut direction is indicated by the arrows:  

Figure 5   There are two arcs in the part in Figure 5, which are indicated in red. The dotted blue brackets indicate the portions of the profile to which the Radius Ramp Up technique will be applied. The length of the Radius Ramp Up technique is defined by the Move (or Distance) command.     The n variable can be used to specify multiple Radius Ramp Up techniques. Values of n must be consecutive integers. If you use multiples of this type of technique (for example, "Radius 1 Ramp Up", "Radius 2 Ramp Up", etc.), the Radius command should be used to determine when a given multiple should be used.   If you do not want to use multiples of this cutting technique, this column header can simply be entered as "Radius Ramp Up". Note: You must use the "Radius" command to indicate the maximum radius to apply the cutting technique to when doing a Radius Ramp Up or Radius Ramp Down. Otherwise, the technique will be applied to all radii.

Lead Out n Ramp Down This describes the sequence of actions to perform prior to cutting a lead-out.   Example:   Consider the following part, where the cut path is represented by the outer line and cut direction is indicated by the arrows:  

- 205 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Figure 6   The lead-out of the part in Figure 6 is indicated in red. The dotted blue bracket indicates the portion of the profile to which the Lead Out Ramp Down technique will be applied. Note that unlike the technique shown in Figure 1, this ramping technique is not applied directly to the lead itself. Instead, it is applied to the portion of the profile that is just ahead of the lead-out.     The n variable can be used to specify multiple Lead Out Ramp Down techniques. Values of n must be consecutive integers. If you use multiples of this type of technique (for example, "Lead Out 1 Ramp Down", "Lead Out 2 Ramp Down", etc.), the Length command should be used to determine when a given multiple should be used.   If you do not want to use multiples of this cutting technique, this column header can simply be entered as "Lead Out Ramp Down". Note:

If there is no lead-out on a part, the Lead Out Ramp Down is applied before the end point of the part as if the lead-out was still there.

 

Pre Kerf Ramp Down When cutting skeleton lines, bridged parts, or CLC parts, this describes the sequence of actions to perform prior to crossing the kerf.

 

Post Kerf Ramp Up When cutting skeleton lines, bridged parts, or CLC parts, this describes the sequence of actions to perform immediately after crossing the kerf.

- 206 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 

Corner Radius Note: This technique is used primarily with laser machines to round off the corners of a profile, resulting in a smoother cutting motion. The Corner Radius describes the radius to apply to corners during rounding. If this column header is absent from your Cutting Techniques XLS, corners will not be rounded. Also, if either entity forming the corner is not long enough to accommodate the radius, that corner will not be rounded.   Expressed as: Linear distance Example:  

Figure 7   The part shown in Figure 7 has three corners that have not yet been rounded.    

Figure 8   In Figure 8, the same part is shown with a Corner Radius value applied to each corner.    

- 207 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Figure 9   A close-up of a rounded corner is shown in Figure 9, with the solid red line depicting the radius of the arc used in rounding. The Corner Radius value specifies the length of this radius.    

Corner Radius Threshold Angle Maximum corner angle that will be converted into a radius. If this value is not specified, a default of 90 degrees is used. The Corner Radius column header must be specified in order to use this technique.   Expressed as: Angle in degrees

Reserve Length This indicates the shortest segment to be created adjacent to a cutting technique.   Expressed as: Linear distance

Base Condition The Base Condition sets the overall conditions present throughout the profile. These conditions come from your Process Parameters spreadsheet. Note: When applying corner or radius ramping techniques to a profile, it is important to remember to return to the normal, base condition after the technique has been applied. For instance, if you have a Corner Ramp Down specified, you should also use a Corner Ramp Up so that the cutting head returns to the base condition after cutting a corner.

- 208 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Cutting Techniques XLS: Commands Commands are entered in the data row of the appropriate column in the following format:   Command (value) Multiple commands in a single cell are separated by commas. Commands are not case-sensitive and white spaces are not considered.   CUTTING TECHNIQUES - COMMANDS Command

Description

Parameter Value

Move

Perform a motion along an entity. This is expressed as a linear distance in units (inches or mm) with one exception; when used with "Lead In Ramp Up", it refers to the percentage of the total length of the lead-in.   The total distance specified by all of the Move commands in a given cutting technique sequence is the total amount of space required to apply that sequence.  

Linear distance in units (or  percentage)

Radius

Maximum radius for which a particular Radius Ramp Up or Radius Ramp Down can be used. If this is not used for a given radius ramping technique, then that particular technique will be applied to all radii.  

Linear distance

Feedrate

Cutting speed to be inserted at a particular point  

Cutting speed (in./min or mm/min)  

Feedrate%

Percentage of the base Feedrate to be inserted at a particular point  

Percentage

Kerf

Kerf compensation value to insert at a particular point  

Kerf compensation value expressed as a linear distance  

Kerf%

Percentage of the base kerf compensation value to insert at a particular point  

Percentage

Condition

This command refers to the cutting condition, which must be specified in your Process Parameters XLS.  

Character string

CFF Section

Section of the CFF file to be output at a particular point. Generally, you will not need to use this command.  

Character string

Dwell

This is the duration of a dwell to be inserted at a particular point. When used, the cutting head will remain stationary for the duration specified.  

Time in seconds

Distance

Similar to the "Move" command. However, this command represents an absolute distance whereas the "Move" command represents a relative distance.

Linear distance

- 209 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Command

Description

Parameter Value

  Distance must be entered in descending order for a ramp down, and in ascending order for a ramp up.   Length

This describes the minimum length to which a cutting technique should be applied.  

Linear distance

Angle

This represents the maximum corner angle for which a corner ramping technique should be used.  

Angle in degrees

Shorthand Commands Due to the fact that individual cutting technique records can become very long, you can use shorthand to specify cutting technique commands. Abbreviated commands can be used interchangeably with their longer counterparts, and are expressed as follows:   Command

Shorthand

Move

Mv

Radius

R

Feedrate

Fr

Feedrate%

Fr%

Kerf

K

Kerf%

K%

Condition

Cond

CFF Section

CS

Dwell

Dw

Distance

Dist

Length

Ln

Angle

An

Command sequences Generally, a given cutting technique involves performing a series of commands. When multiple commands are entered for a given cutting technique, they are executed in the order that they are written (from left to right).   Example:   Consider the following excerpt of a Cutting Techniques XLS:  

- 210 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 

A

1

inch

B 3

2

Keys

3

Material Thickness

4

*

*

C

D

 

  Corner Ramping  

Corner Ramp Down Feedrate%(80), Kerf%(110), Move(0.25),  Feedrate%(70), Kerf%(115), Move(0.25)

Corner Ramp Up Move(0.25), Feedrate%(90), Kerf%(105),  Move(0.25), Feedrate%(100), Kerf%(100)

Figure 1   The spreadsheet in Figure 1 contains two cutting techniques, each with its own sequence of commands to follow. Note: The total length of a given cutting technique can be calculated by totaling all of the Move lengths for that technique. The Corner Ramp Down in this example would be executed as follows:   1. At the point 0.50 in. ahead of the corner, the feedrate would drop to 80% of the base feedrate, and the kerf compensation value would increase to 110% of the base kerf. The cutting head would proceed the next 0.25 in. with these parameters in place.  2. When the cutting head reaches the point 0.25 in. ahead of the corner, the feedrate would drop to 70% of the base feedrate, and the kerf would increase to 115% of the base kerf. The rest of the ramp down would be cut with these parameters (70% and 115%) in place. The Corner Ramp Up would then be executed as follows:  1. From the corner (the intersection point), until the point 0.25 in. after the corner, the feedrate would remain at 70% and the kerf would remain at 115%. (This is because the Move command was specified before the Feedrate% or Kerf% commands for the ramp up technique.)  2. At the point 0.25 in. after the corner, the feedrate would increase to 90% of the base feedrate, and the kerf compensation would decrease to 105% of the base kerf. The cutting head would then proceed the next 0.25 in. using these parameters . At the point 0.50 in. after the corner, the feedrate and kerf would return to their base values.   Let's see how these techniques might look when applied to a sample part. For the part shown in Figure 2, the cut path is represented by the outer line and cut direction is indicated by the arrows:  

- 211 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Figure 2   The solid blue line along the profile represents the total length of the Corner Ramp Down cutting technique, which is 0.50 in. The solid red line represents the total length of the Corner Ramp Up technique, which is also 0.50 in. The numbers indicate different points along the two cutting techniques. Assume that points 2 and 4 are both 0.25 in. from the corner.   The following table details the effects of cutting techniques applied to the part in Figure 2:   Location Between 1 and 2 Between 2 and 3 Between 3 and 4 Between 4 and 5 After 5

Cutting parameters Feedrate% = 80; Kerf% = 110 Feedrate% = 70; Kerf% = 115 Feedrate% = 70; Kerf% = 115 Feedrate% = 90; Kerf% = 105 Feedrate% = 100; Kerf% = 100

 

Commands and technique selection The Radius, Length, and Angle commands are used to select between multiple cutting techniques of the same type (for example, Radius 1 Ramp Down and Radius 2 Ramp Down, etc.).    Radius The Radius command is used to specify the largest radius for which a particular radius ramp up or ramp down will be used. This enables you to set up different radius ramping techniques for each specific radius size, or for ranges of radius sizes. This is entered as a maximum length.   Length The Length command enables you specify different cutting techniques for corners and lead-outs based on the available space in which the cutting technique will be applied. This is entered as a minimum length.   Angle

- 212 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Using the Angle command, you can specify when a given corner ramping technique should be used, based on the angle of the corner. This enables you to set up different corner ramping techniques for ranges of corner angles. This is entered as a maximum angle.   Example:   Consider the following excerpt of a Cutting Techniques XLS, which is using multiple Radius Ramp Down techniques:  

A

 

1

inch

B 3

2

Keys

3

Material Thickness

4

*

*

C

D

 

  Radius Ramping  

Radius 1 Ramp Down Radius(2.99), Feedrate%(90), Move(0.50)

Radius 2 Ramp Down Radius(10), Feedrate%(85), Move(0.25)

  Arcs with a radius of 2.99 in. or less will have the Radius 1 Ramp Down technique applied to them. Arcs with radii greater than 2.99 in. and less than or equal to 10 in. will use the sequence defined in Radius 2 Ramp Down.    

- 213 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Cutting Techniques XLS: Walkthrough Now that we’ve covered all the basics, let’s see how to use a few different sample cutting techniques. For this example, we will only consider a single material, though this discussion is applicable to any number of material records. This walkthrough is intended as an example and does not represent actual cutting techniques to be used in production.   Example:   Assume that a Cutting Techniques spreadsheet is already set up with units defined and Material and Thickness columns inserted in the column header row.   Base Condition The Base Condition is simply the condition to use when no cutting techniques are in effect. For purposes of this example, a column header called "Base Condition" would be inserted with “Base” in the data row of that column.   Lead In Ramp Up Lead In Ramp Up allows parameters to be varied over the length of the lead-in. Let’s assume for this example that it is necessary to start out at 50% of the base feedrate and 110% of the base kerf, move 25% of the total length of the lead-in, then change to 75% of the base feedrate and 105% of the base kerf. After another move of 0.25 in., both the feedrate and kerf should be set to 100% of their base values. This would be entered as follows:   Feedrate%(50), Kerf%(110), Move(0.25), Feedrate%(75), Kerf%(105), Move(0.25), Feedrate%(100), Kerf%(100) Notice that the final Feedrate%(100) and Kerf%(100) are not necessary, as the base conditions are automatically inserted at the end of the lead-in. Note:

Unlike with other cutting techniques, when the Move command is used with Lead In Ramp Up, it refers to the percentage of the total lead length, and not an absolute linear distance.

Radius n Ramp Down Radius Ramp Down enables you to specify parameter changes and special output conditions just prior to an arc motion. For this example, let’s consider 2 ranges of radii:    1. Less than or equal to 5 in.  2. Greater than 5 in. up to and including 10 in.   In this instance, multiple Radius Ramp Down techniques ("Radius 1 Ramp Down" and "Radius 2 Ramp Down") are needed. These two techniques would be entered in separate columns, with the technique name (for example, Radius 1 Ramp Down) entered in the column header row.   For radii less than or equal to 5 in., we need to drop the feedrate to 85%, output the contents of the CFF section “SMALL RADIUS”, move 0.5 in., drop the feedrate to 75%, then move 0.25 in. In the Radius 1 Ramp Down column, we would enter the following:   Radius(5), Feedrate%(85), CFFSection(SMALL RADIUS), Move(0.5), Feedrate%(75), Move(0.25) For radii larger than 5 in. and up to and including 10 in., let’s output the contents of the CFFSection “LARGE RADIUS”, move 0.1 in., drop the feedrate to 90%, then move 0.25 in. In the Radius 2 Ramp Down column, we would enter the following:  

- 214 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Radius(10), CFFSection(LARGE RADIUS), Move(0.1), Feedrate%(90), Move(0.25) Always keep in mind that you must use the “Radius” command to indicate the maximum radius to apply the cutting technique to when doing radius ramp up or radius ramp down. Otherwise, the technique will be applied to all radii. Note:

The CFF section entry is not necessary in most applications. It is used to output specific commands required by certain controls in a variety of situations. Its use in this example is meant to show the power and flexibility of ProNest.

Radius n Ramp Up Radius Ramp Up is used to restore the cutting parameters to their base conditions after cutting an arc motion. For radius ramp up, let’s assume that we always want to come out of a radius the same way, no matter the size. We’ll move 0.25 in. then return to the base condition. For this, we’ll need a column with the header "Radius Ramp Up". In the data row of this column, we would write:   Move(0.25), Condition(BASE) Note:

Because we are coming out of every radial arc the same way, we do not need to define multiple Radius Ramp Up techniques.

Corner n Ramp Down Corner Ramp Down allows cutting parameters to be changed when approaching a corner. Advanced:

The following example makes use of conditions commands. It also makes additions to the Process Parameters XLS that allow many different values to be inserted into the code. Because of this, when a specific condition is encountered, the base values can be changed to reflect chain cutting requirements.

For this example of Corner Ramp Down, we will exclusively use the Move and Condition commands and assume that our CFF is capable of outputting the correct parameters. We will perform three 0.25 in. motions, setting conditions CRD1, CRD2, and CRD3. There will be a dwell of 2 seconds at the corner.   In the Corner Ramp Down column we would type:   Condition(CRD1), Move(0.25), Condition(CRD2), Move(0.25), Condition(CRD3), Move(0.25), Dwell(2) Because we have used the conditions CRD1, CRD2, and CRD3 in this cutting technique, we must make sure that there are records in the Process Parameters XLS table that use those conditions.   Corner n Ramp Up Corner Ramp Up is used to restore cutting conditions to their base values when coming out of a corner. Let’s assume that we will need to return to the base condition after we output the CFF section CORNER and move 0.5 in. As noted earlier, the base condition is simply BASE. In the Corner Ramp Up column we would type:   CFFSection(CORNER), Move(0.5), Condition(BASE) Lead Out n Ramp Down Lead Out Ramp Down is used to alter process parameters just prior to leading out from the profile. For this example, we’ll slow down to 50% of cutting speed at a distance of 0.25 in. from the start of the lead-out. In the Lead Out Ramp Down column, we would enter the following:   Feedrate%(50), Move(0.25)

- 215 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 

- 216 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

About Interior and Exterior Leads spreadsheets Each cut process can have two leads spreadsheets associated with it, one for interior leads and one for exterior leads. These spreadsheets contain the necessary information for adding leads to both the sides and corners of a profile. Lead styles spreadsheets enable you to apply different leads based on the material, thickness or profile area of a given part.   To use Leads spreadsheets:  l On the settings page for a given process, from the Interior Leads or Exterior Leads box, select a spreadsheet.

- 217 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Leads XLS: Format The following table details the required format for a Leads spreadsheet: Category Keys

Leads settings

Column Header

Description

Valid values

Material

The name of the material used This is a required key.  

Character string

Thickness

The thickness of the material used This is a required key.  

Any positive number  

Class  

The class of the material used. Class can be used to organize your Character string materials using specialized information such as cutting gas or amperage.

Tab Lead

Indicates whether or not leads will be used for tabs. This includes Character string both the leads on normal tabs, as well as the "tab" gap that is created during AutoTab by using undertravel at the start point (with Number of Tabs and At Intervals styles).   This is an optional key.   0, n, no, or = row will not be used for tab leads any other character string, such as 1 , y , or yes = row will be used for tab leads * = wildcard

Profile Area

The area of a given profile Area is expressed in linear units squared (in. 2 or mm2). This is an optional key.  

Any positive number

Quality

 

Integer from 0 to 255

CornerIn Name

Lead-in style to use for corners

Character string representing lead-in style: ARC, LINEAR, SPIRAL, TLOCK, LOCK7, LOCK9, STEP, DIAGONAL STEP, or NONE  

CornerIn Scale

Lead-in size to use for corners  

Linear distance

CornerIn Angle

Lead-in angle to use for corners  

Angle in degrees

CornerIn Extension

Extra length to add to beginning of corner lead-ins  

Linear distance

CornerOut Name

Lead-out style to use for corners

Character string representing lead-out style: ARC, LINEAR, or NONE

- 218 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Category

Column Header

Description

Valid values  

Leads settings

CornerOut Scale

Lead-out size to use for corners

Linear distance  

CornerOut Angle

Lead-out angle to use for corners

Angle in degrees  

CornerOut Extension

Extra length to add to beginning of corner lead-outs  

Linear distance

CornerOut Overtravel

Overtravel / Undertravel distance to use for corners  

Length value in linear units. A negative value will result in undertravel, a positive value will result in overtravel.

SideIn Name

Lead-in style to use for sides

Character string representing lead-in style: ARC, LINEAR, SPIRAL, TLOCK, LOCK7, LOCK9, STEP, DIAGONAL STEP, or NONE  

SideIn Scale

Lead-in size to use for sides

Linear distance  

SideIn Angle

Lead-in angle to use for sides

Angle in degrees  

SideIn Extension

Extra length to add to beginning of side lead-ins  

Linear distance

SideOut Name

Lead-out style to use for sides

Character string representing lead-out style: ARC, LINEAR, or NONE  

SideOut Scale

Lead-out size to use for sides

Linear distance  

SideOut Angle

Lead-out angle to use for sides

Angle in degrees  

SideOut Extension

Extra length to use at end of side lead-outs

Linear distance  

SideOut Overtravel

Overtravel / Undertravel distance to use for sides

Length value in linear units. A negative value will result in undertravel, a positive value will result in overtravel.  

Note: Column headers are not case-sensitive and white spaces are not considered.

- 219 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Costing spreadsheets You can assign a different Costing spreadsheet for each process used by your machine. Costing spreadsheets can be used to assign different process-level settings values based on material, thickness, or class. In addition, drill or punch-specific spreadsheets can be used to assign costing values by tool.   To use a Costing spreadsheet:   l On the Costing settings page, select the tab for the appropriate process, then from the Settings table box, select a spreadsheet.   The following table details the required format for a Costing spreadsheet:    Category Keys

Costing settings

Column Header

Description

Valid values

Tool Name

For drill-specific Costing spreadsheets only. Enter a tool name that matches exactly with the name from the tool library.  

Character string 15 character max

Material

The name of the material used

Character string

Thickness

The thickness of the material used  

Any positive number  

Class

The class of the material used. This is an optional key.  

Character string

Activation Time

Process activation time   In order to be used by ProNest, the column header must exist, a record match must be made, and the value must be greater than zero.

Time in seconds > 0  

Cost Per Activation

Cost of each activation.   For drilling or punching, this is the cost per hit.

Monetary units Can be blank

Operating Cost Per Minute

This describes the cost incurred for running a given process for 60 seconds. Not used for drill or punch spreadsheets.  

Monetary units Can be blank

Note: Column headers are not case-sensitive and white spaces are not considered.

How do Costing spreadsheets interact with other ProNest costing settings? If a Costing spreadsheet is in use, the values in the spreadsheet take precedence over default settings from the Costing settings page. Note however, that the default Costing settings serve as a fall-back in case spreadsheet values can't be found.   Activation Time follows this hierarchy:

- 220 -

ProNest 2019 Manual  1. ProNest will try to use the Activation Time from the Costing spreadsheet.  2. If no value can be found, use Raise/Lower Time from the Costing settings page + Pierce Time from Process Parameters XLS  l For full raises, if the sum of the Full Raise/Lower Time + Pierce Time is greater than zero, it will be used as the Activation Time.  l For partial raises, if the sum of the Partial Raise/Lower Time + Pierce Time is greater than zero, it will be used as the Activation Time.  3. If the sum of Raise/Lower Time and Pierce Time is zero or can't be found, the Default Activation Time from the Costing settings page will be used.   Cost Per Activation follows this hierarchy:  1. Try to use the Cost Per Activation from the Costing spreadsheet.  2. If no such column exists or a record can't be matched, use the Default Cost Per Activation from the Costing settings page.   Operating Cost Per Minute follows this hierarchy:  1. Try to use the Operating Cost Per Minute from the Costing spreadsheet.  2. If no such column exists or a record can't be matched, use the Default Operating Cost from the Costing settings page.

Specialized Costing spreadsheets Some Costing spreadsheets contain many columns with a lot of machine-specific data and built-in calculators to determine accurate consumable wear and other costs. Keep in mind that ultimate purpose of any Costing spreadsheet is to provide any of the three settings values (Activation Time, Cost Per Activation, Operating Cost Per Minute) to ProNest for use in costing calculations. All of the other information in those Costing spreadsheets is used to arrive at good values for those three settings.

- 221 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

AutoTab spreadsheets Autotab spreadsheets are used to define when tabs should automatically be added to parts. You can apply tabs to parts based on material, thickness, profile area, profile type, and quality. AutoTab spreadsheets are assigned at the process level.   To use AutoTab spreadsheets:  l On the settings page for a given process, from the AutoTab box, select a spreadsheet.   The following table details the required format for an Auto Tab spreadsheet:  Note: Column headers are not case-sensitive and white spaces are not considered.  

Category

Keys

Column Header

Description

Valid valBlank Required ues allowed?

Material

The name of the material used. This is a required key.

Character string

*

 

Thickness

The thickness of the material used. This is a required key.  

Any positive number  

*

 

Profile Area

The area of a given profile. Area is expressed in linear units squared Any pos(in. 2 or mm2). This is an optional key. itive num  ber  

 

 

Profile Type

The type of a given profile. This is an optional key.

I, E, O, C, V, S, X, N, *   (For details, see "Record matching" on page 190)

 

 

Quality

The cut quality assigned to a given entity. This is an optional key.

Integer from 0 to 255  

 

 

When set to "1", this setting will restrict AutoTab placement to linear motions only (no arcs). When set to "0", tabs will be applied to both lines and arcs.

0 or 1  

 

 

Auto Tab set- Apply Only to Lines tings

- 222 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Category

Column Header

Valid valBlank Required ues allowed?

Description

  Length

This describes the length of each tab that will be added during AutoTab. This length represents the distance along the original part geometry that will remain uncut for each tab.  

Linear distance

 

 

Minimum Distance

This describes the minimum spacing distance between tabs on the same profile. No two tabs will be placed closer than this value along any profile perimeter. Tabs will also not be placed closer than this distance to the start or end point of the profile. (The exception to this is the "At Corners" strategy.)  

Linear distance

 

 

Snap Tolerance

If the location chosen as the start point of the tab is within this dis- Linear distance from the start point of the chosen entity, the tab start point tance will be shifted to the beginning of the entity. Similarly, if the tab would end within this distance from the end of the entity, the tab will be shifted so that its end point coincides with the entity end point.  

 

 

Profile Dimension

If the profile can be rotated so that its length or width is less than or equal to this value, it will be AutoTabbed. Otherwise, the profile will not have tabs applied.  

Linear distance

 

 

Apply Leadouts

Lead-outs will be applied to tabs. Lead-outs will use the properties 0, n, no 1, y, yes from your Leads XLS or settings page.   0, n, or no= do not apply lead-outs 1, y, or yes = apply lead-outs

 

 

Strategies

Strategy

This setting determines which AutoTab strategy that will be employed.   0= None. No tabs will be added during AutoTab. 1 = Center of Line 2 = Number of Tabs 3 = Tabs at Intervals 4 = Tabs at Corners  

0, 1, 2, 3, 4  

 

 

Strategy dependent settings

Center Line Size

This setting applies to Strategy 1: Center of Line. It defines the minimum Linear disline length that is taken into consideration. tance

 

 

 

 

 

 

  Number Per Profile

This setting applies to Strategy 2: Number of Tabs. It defines the maximum number of tabs applied per profile.  

Distance Between Tabs

This setting applies to Strategy 3: Tabs at Intervals. It defines the dis- Linear dis-

- 223 -

Integer from 0 to 100

ProNest 2019 Manual

Category

Column Header

Description

Valid valBlank Required ues allowed?

tance you want between tabs. This should never be less than the Minimum Distance value.  

tance

Corner Type

This setting applies to Strategy 4: Tabs at Corners. It defines the corner type on which to apply tabs.   0 = None 1= Shortest Side 2= Longest Side 3= Both Shortest and Longest Side  

0, 1, 2, 3

 

 

Corner Angle

This setting applies to Strategy 4: Tabs at Corners. It defines the maximum angle to be considered a corner. Corner angles that exceed this value will not be considered a corner during AutoTab.  

Angle in degrees  

 

 

 

 

Distance From Corner This setting applies to Strategy 4: Tabs at Corners. It defines the min- Linear dis-

imum distance from each corner that a tab will start or end, depending on which side of a corner.  

tance  

Near Start Point

This setting applies to Strategy 4: Tabs at Corners. It defines whether to place a tab immediately after a lead-in. Y = Yes N = No  

Y or N

*

 

Near End Point

This setting applies to Strategy 4: Tabs at Corners. It defines whether to place a tab immediately before a lead-out. Y =  Yes N = No  

Y or N

*

 

  Tip: You can set specific leads for tabs using the Tab Lead column in Leads settings spreadsheets. To find out more, see Leads XLS: Format.

- 224 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Bevel spreadsheets Most beveling applications require modification of process parameters such as voltage, kerf, current, and feedrate at particular locations in the NC code. ProNest accomplishes this using Bevel spreadsheets, allowing you to assign specific cutting conditions based on the type of bevel cut, bevel angle, material type, thickness, and class.   Settings used for beveled profiles are stored in the bevel settings spreadsheet. When a beveled edge is applied to a part (using either the manual method or AutoBevel), settings including feedrate, kerf, transition loops, and special cutting compensations are automatically applied to the beveled edge based on the values found in your Bevel spreadsheet. Important:

For beveled entities, the cutting conditions in the Bevel spreadsheet will take precedence over the cutting conditions in a Process Parameters spreadsheet.

Bevel XLS Column Headers Allowable column header keys:

Material The type of material used. This is a required key.  

Thickness The thickness of the material used. This is a required key.  

Class The class of the material used. This is an optional key.  

Bevel Angle This defines the angle of the beveled cut, in relation to the top angle orientation (+/-). If the top angle orientation is set to Positive (+), a positive angle value (e.g. 45°) will be a "V cut". A negative angle (e.g. -45°) will result in an "A cut." When applying a beveled edge manually through Advanced Edit, the list of available bevel angles is limited by the angles listed in the Bevel XLS.   Units: Angle in degrees Note:

The number of records that you have listed will depend upon the type of bevel cuts you are making and the rotary bevel cutting machine that you are using.

Bevel Type This limits record matching by bevel type. When applying a beveled edge manually through Advanced Edit, the list of available bevel types is limited by the types listed in the Bevel XLS.   Valid values: I, V, A, X, Y, K, * Notes:

 l A "Y Bottom" cut is specified using a negative bevel angle value combined with a "Y" bevel type.  l An "A" cut is specified by entering a negative bevel angle combined with an "A" bevel type (this assumes a positive orientation).

Land dimension  - 225 -

ProNest 2019 Manual The thickness of the Land Pass. This is used for record matching with the multi-pass profiles Y, Y-Bottom, and K.  

    Bevel settings defined in column header row:

Kerf This defines the width of the torch path and is used for the purposes of nesting.  

Feedrate Feedrate to use in CNC output.  

Height Torch height. For beveling applications, the torch height is the perpendicular distance from surface of the plate to the tip of the torch.  

 

Dwell This is the duration of a dwell to be inserted at a particular point in the CNC code. When used, the cutting head will remain stationary for the duration specified.   Units: Time in seconds

Loop Macro This specifies the loop macro to use for a given record. Loop macros detail the geometry of the transition loops inserted when entering or exiting a bevel pass.   Valid values: The root name of the macro. (For example, if the macro name is "Side.mtl", you would input "Side" in this field.)

Loop Scale You can adjust the scale of the loop specified in the Loop Macro column.    Units: Percentage expressed as a decimal Default value: 1.0 Examples:

- 226 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 l A value of "0.5" would scale a loop down to 50% of its original size.  l A value of "2.0" would cause the loop to double in size.  l The default value of "1.0" would leave the size of the loop unchanged.

Process Compensation This is an output-related setting used with top cut beveling (such as a "V cut") that allows you to tweak the distance between the top of a beveled edge and the opposite plate edge.   Units: Distance in linear units (positive or negative) The following diagram depicts a side view of a part with a top-cut beveled edge:

The distance between points 1 and 2 can be adjusted using process compensation. A positive value will extend the distance (moving point 2 further away from point 1), and a negative value will reduce the distance (moving point 2 closer to point 1). Important:

In order for this setting to be active, Compensate geometry must be selected on the Bevel - Pass Profiles page of your settings ( ).

Angle Adjustment When fine-tuning a bevel setup, you may find that a given bevel angle in the output code is actually being cut at a slightly different angle by your real-world machine (for example, a 45° bevel cut may be physically cut at 46°).    Using the Angle Adjustment setting, you can alter the angle specified in the output code to compensate for this discrepancy.   Units: Angle in degrees (positive or negative) Example:   An excerpt of NC code for a start transition loop and 30° "V-cut" beveled edge (positive orientation used):   G03X-5.Y5.I-0.J5. G01Y-5. A30. Y-10. Y-5. The 30° degree angle is coded as "A30." If this angle were physically being cut at 28° due to machine inaccuracy, you could add an Angle Adjustment of "2" to compensate. The output code would then appear as:   G03X-5.Y5.I-0.J5. G01Y-5. A32. Y-10. Y-5. As a result of this correction in the NC code, when the part is physically cut, the bevel angle would measure a true 30°.  

- 227 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

(Note that if the angle was originally output as 30° but was physically cut at 32°, you would need to insert an Angle Adjustment of "2" in order to compensate properly.)

Important:

In order for this setting to be active, Compensate geometry must be selected on the Bevel - Pass Profiles page of your settings ( ).

Voltage The voltage value to insert into the NC code prior to cutting the beveled entity. This is used for machines with advanced bevel setups.  

Current The current to insert into the NC code prior to cutting the beveled entity. This is used for machines with advanced bevel setups.     Corner leads:

Corner In Name The style of lead to use on corners when leading in to a beveled edge. This value must match the root name of the lead-in macro that you want to use.   Example:   If there is a lead macro in your Sample Bevel Macros folder named "BevelLead.mli", you would enter "BevelLead" in the cell.  

Corner In Scale You can adjust the scale of the lead-in specified in the Corner In Name column.   Units: Percentage expressed as a decimal Default value: 1.0 Examples:  l A value of "0.5" would scale the lead down to 50% of its original size.  l A value of "2.0" would cause the lead to double in size.  l The default value of "1.0" would leave the size of the lead unchanged.  

Corner In Angle The angle of the lead-in specified in the Corner In Name column.   Units: Degrees Range:-360.0° to 360.0°

Corner In Extension Extra cut length to add at the start of a corner lead-in.  

- 228 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in.

Corner Out Name The style of lead to use on corners when leading out from a beveled edge. This value must match the root name of the lead-out macro that you want to use.   Example:   If there is a lead macro in your Sample Bevel Macros folder named "BevelLead2.mlo", you would enter "BevelLead2" in the cell.  

Corner Out Scale You can adjust the scale of the lead-out specified in the Corner Out Name column.    Units: Percentage expressed as a decimal Default value: 1.0 Examples:  l A value of "0.5" would scale the lead down to 50% of its original size.  l A value of "2.0" would cause the lead to double in size.  l The default value of "1.0" would leave the size of the lead unchanged.

Corner Out Angle The angle of the lead-out specified in the Corner Out Name column.    Units: Degrees Range: -360.0° to 360.0°

Corner Out Extension Extra cut length to add at the end of a corner lead-out.    Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in.

Corner Out Overtravel Overtravel / undertravel distance to apply to a corner lead-out. A negative value will result in undertravel, a positive value will result in overtravel.   Units: Distance   Side leads:

Side In Name The style of lead to use when leading in to a beveled edge with a side lead. This value must match the root name of the lead-in macro that you want to use.  

- 229 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Example:   If there is a lead macro in your Sample Bevel Macros folder named "BevelLead3.mli", you would enter "BevelLead3" in the cell.  

Side In Scale You can adjust the scale of the lead-in specified in the Side In Name column.     Units: Percentage expressed as a decimal Default value: 1.0 Examples:  l A value of "0.5" would scale the lead down to 50% of its original size.  l A value of "2.0" would cause the lead to double in size.  l The default value of "1.0" would leave the size of the lead unchanged.

Side In Angle The angle of the lead-in specified in the Side In Name column.    Units: Degrees Range: -360.0° to 360.0°

Side In Extension Extra cut length to add at the start of a side lead-in.    Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in.

Side Out Name The style of lead to use when leading out from a beveled edge with a side lead. This value must match the root name of the lead-out macro that you want to use.   Example:   If there is a lead macro in your Sample Bevel Macros folder named "BevelLead4.mlo", you would enter "BevelLead4" in the cell.

Side Out Scale You can adjust the scale of the lead-out specified in the Side Out Name column.     Units: Percentage expressed as a decimal Default value: 1.0 Examples:  l A value of "0.5" would scale the lead down to 50% of its original size.  l A value of "2.0" would cause the lead to double in size.

- 230 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 l The default value of "1.0" would leave the size of the lead unchanged.

Side Out Angle The angle of the lead-out specified in the Side Out Name column.   Units: Degrees Range: -360.0° to 360.0°

Side Out Extension Extra cut length to add at the end of a side lead-out.    Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in.

Side Out Overtravel Overtravel / undertravel distance to apply to a side lead-out. A negative value will result in undertravel, a positive value will result in overtravel.   Units: Distance   Blind bevel leads and loops:

Blind In Name The style of lead-in to use for a blind bevel entity. This value must match the root name of the lead-in macro that you want to use for blind beveling.   Example:   If there is a lead macro in your Sample Bevel Macros folder named "BlindLead.mli", you would enter "BlindLead" in the cell.  

Blind In Scale You can adjust the scale of the lead-in specified in the Blind In Name column.   Units: Percentage expressed as a decimal Default value: 1.0 Examples:  l A value of "0.5" would scale the lead down to 50% of its original size.  l A value of "2.0" would cause the lead to double in size.  l The default value of "1.0" would leave the size of the lead unchanged.  

Blind In Angle The angle of the lead-in specified in the Blind In Name column.  

- 231 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Units: Degrees Range: -360.0° to 360.0°

Blind Out Name The style of lead-out to use for a blind bevel entity. This value must match the root name of the lead-out macro that you want to use for blind beveling.    Example:   If there is a lead macro in your Sample Bevel Macros folder named "BlindLead2.mlo", you would enter "BlindLead2" in the cell.  

Blind Out Scale You can adjust the scale of the lead-out specified in the Blind Out Name column.    Units: Percentage expressed as a decimal Default value: 1.0 Examples:  l A value of "0.5" would scale the lead down to 50% of its original size.  l A value of "2.0" would cause the lead to double in size.  l The default value of "1.0" would leave the size of the lead unchanged.

Blind Out Angle The angle of the lead-out specified in the Blind Out Name column.   Units: Degrees Range: -360.0° to 360.0°

Blind Start Loop Macro The loop macro to insert at the start of the blind bevel entity. This value must match the root name of the start loop macro that you want to use for blind beveling.   

Blind Start Loop Scale You can adjust the scale of the loop specified in the Blind Start Loop Macro column.    Units: Percentage expressed as a decimal Default value: 1.0 Examples:  l A value of "0.5" would scale the loop down to 50% of its original size.  l A value of "2.0" would cause the loop to double in size.  l The default value of "1.0" would leave the size of the loop unchanged.

Blind End Loop Macro The loop macro to insert at the end of the blind bevel entity. This value must match the root name of the end loop macro that you want

- 232 -

ProNest 2019 Manual to use for blind beveling.  

Blind End Loop Scale You can adjust the scale of the loop specified in the Blind End Loop Macro column.    Units: Percentage expressed as a decimal Default value: 1.0 Examples:  l A value of "0.5" would scale the loop down to 50% of its original size.  l A value of "2.0" would cause the loop to double in size.  l The default value of "1.0" would leave the size of the loop unchanged.   Multi-pass:

Bridge Macro The transition macro to insert between multi-pass bevel interiors. This can reduce pierces by cutting multiple, successive bevel passes with a continuous cut.   Example:   An interior Y-top bevel might normally be cut with two separate passes, an I-cut and a bevel V-cut, each requiring its own pierce. With Bridge Macro enabled, after piercing and cutting the land pass, the cutting head remains on, transitions to the bevel angle, and then cuts the bevel pass. The result is less piercing and a clean, finished hole.

Note:

Column headers are not case-sensitive and white spaces are not considered.

- 233 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Collision Avoidance spreadsheets Format for Collision Avoidance settings tables:  

Category Keys

Column Header

Valid values

Description

Material

The name of the material used. This is a required key.

Character string

Thickness

The thickness of the material used. This is a required key.  

Any positive number  

General

Enable

 

 

Sequence

Resequence Interior Profiles

Sequence the interior profiles for an optimal path. Select this setting if gen- 0 or 1 erating avoidance paths should re-sequence the interior profiles of each part. Re-sequencing interior profiles may avoid potential collision situations. 0 = Not enabled 1 = Enabled

Plate Warping

Max Head Down Distance for Interiors

Maximum length allowable for a torch-down avoidance path for interior cuts.

Distance

Max Head Down Distance for Exteriors

Maximum length allowable for a torch-down avoidance path for exterior cuts.

Distance

Max Head Down Distance for Scribes

Maximum length allowable for a torch-down avoidance path for scribes.

Distance

Head Diameter

This setting represents the diameter of the torch head and is used as a Distance safety margin around profiles when creating avoidance paths. It should be treated as the maximum diameter of the torch head that could collide with a tip-up.

Max Profile Size

Maximum profile size to avoid. This setting determines the largest profile Distance size that collision avoidance will try to avoid. Collision avoidance will try to avoid any profiles with a length or width smaller than this threshold value. Profiles with lengths and widths greater than this threshold value will not be avoided.

Head Raise Time

Full raise/lower time. This setting represents the average amount of time Time in required to fully retract the cutting head on a full raise and then fully lower seconds the cutting head when it is turned back on.

Head Partial Raise Time

Partial raise/lower time. This setting represents the average amount of time Time in required to partially retract the torch for a partial raise and then fully lower seconds the torch when it is turned back on.

Ignore Tabbed Profiles

Select this setting if you want to treat tabbed profiles as if they cannot tip up and therefore do not need to be avoided.

Tip-Ups

- 234 -

0 or 1

ProNest 2019 Manual

Category

Column Header

Valid values

Description   0 = Do not ignore tabbed profiles 1 = Ignore tabbed profiles

Max Number to Avoid

Maximum number to avoid. This setting determines the maximum number Integer of profiles that should be avoided when traversing between profiles.

Avoidance Ratio

Avoidance ratio. This setting is used when determining which type of path Decimal is more desirable in a given situation: an avoidance path or a direct fullnumber raise path. A larger avoidance ratio will tend to select a direct full-raise more often than the avoidance path.   Percentage expressed as decimal number (e.g. 50% would be entered as 0.50).

Lead Positioning Move Exterior Leads

Holes

Automatically move exterior leads for avoidance. Select this setting if gen-   erating avoidance paths should automatically move leads on exterior profiles. By moving leads, it is possible that straight-line paths can be found that do not pass over potential tip-up situations.

Move Interior Leads

Automatically move interior leads for avoidance. Select this setting if generating avoidance paths should automatically move leads on interior profiles.

Corner Lead Preference

When moving leads, try: Corners. Select this setting if leads should be 0, 1, or 2 placed on profile corners when automatically moving leads for avoidance. 0 = Do not try corners (this is equivalent to Try: Perimeter points but not Corners) 1 = Give special preference to corners (this is equivalent to Try: Perimeter points and Corners) 2 = Try only corners (this is equivalent to Try: Corners but not Perimeter points)

Trim Leads

Trim leads if they are placed in conflict. While avoidance paths are gen0 or 1 erated, leads are moved. Sometimes they can be moved into conflict. Select this setting if ProNest should try shortening the leads to resolve the conflict. 0 = Do not trim leads 1 = Trim leads

Percentage Interval

Used to compute the minimum and maximum interval allowable between Integer prospective lead locations. (related to Try: Perimeter points). from 50 to 1   Range from 50 to 1. Entering "50" would place one perimeter point halfway along the profile (dividing the profile in half). Entering "25" would place three perimeter points on the profile (dividing into 4 equal segments), and so forth.

Small Hole Size

Any hole that is less than or equal to this size will fall within the "Small"   range and will be cut before medium size holes or other larger interiors (as long as it is within the Proximity specified).

- 235 -

 

ProNest 2019 Manual

Category

Laser

Column Header

Valid values

Description

Medium Hole Size

Any hole that is less than or equal to this size, but greater than the small hole size will fall within the "Medium" range and will be cut after small holes but before other larger interiors (as long as it is within the Proximity specified).

 

Proximity

The maximum distance that a small or medium hole can be from another larger interior. Holes within this distance will be sequenced first, while holes that are further away will not have their sequence adjusted, regardless of their size.

Distance

Do Not Create Paths from Exteriors

Don’t create avoidance paths when traversing away from exterior profiles.    

0 or 1

Do Not Move Leads on Last Interiors

Prevent leads from being moved on the last interior profile of each part. This may lead to fewer profile subroutines.  

0 or 1

Note: Column headers are not case-sensitive and white spaces are not considered.

- 236 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Skeleton Cut-Up spreadsheets Skeleton Cut Up spreadsheets must adhere to a specific format.   Category Keys

Column Header

Description

Valid values

Material

The name of the material used. This is a required key.

Character string

Thickness

The thickness of the material used. This is a required key.  

Any positive number  

General

Enable

Apply skeleton cut-up for the XLS record. 0 = do not apply 1 = apply skeleton cut-up

  0 or 1

Tolerances

Safe Zone Tolerance

Safe zone tolerance. This defines the closest distance to which a skeleton cut-up line may approach a safe zone. For example, if you wanted a skeleton cut-up line to start or stop no closer than 1 inch from a safe zone, set this value to 1.0 in.

Distance

Part Tolerance

Part tolerance. This defines the closest distance to which a skeleton cut-up Distance line may approach a part. For example, if you wanted the skeleton cut-up line to start or stop no closer than 1 inch from a part on the nest, set this value to 1.0 in.

Plate Edge Tolerance

Plate edge tolerance. The closest distance to which a skeleton cut-up line may approach the plate edge if no extension values are used. Non-zero extension values take precedence over this setting.

Distance

Ignore Leads

Ignore leads. Select this setting if it is acceptable for skeleton cut-up lines to cut through part leads. 0 = Do not ignore leads 1 = Ignore leads

0 or 1

Min Cut Length

Minimum cut length. Minimum acceptable length of a skeleton cut-up Distance line. All skeleton cut-up lines below this threshold value will be deleted during processing.

Horizontal Line Direction

Horizontal lines. Direction which horizontal skeleton cut-up lines will be cut. 0 = Left to Right 1 = Right to Left 2 = Serpentine

0, 1, or 2

Vertical Line Direction

Lines at the plate edge. Direction which vertical skeleton cut-up lines will be cut. 0 = Top to Bottom 1 = Bottom to Top 2 = Serpentine

0, 1, or 2

Plate Edge Direction

Lines at the plate edge. Defines the behavior of skeleton cut lines that

0, 1, or 2

Cut Direction

- 237 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Category

Column Header

Description

Valid values

touch the plate edge. 0 = Cut towards the plate edge 1 = Cut away from the plate edge 2 = Default Extensions

Grid

Cut Sequence

Top Extension

Top edge. Distance to extend the skeleton cut line beyond the top edge of the plate.

Bottom Extension

Bottom edge. Distance to extend the skeleton cut line beyond the top edge Distance of the plate.

Left Extension

Left edge. Distance to extend the skeleton cut line beyond the top edge of the plate.

Distance

Right Extension

Right edge. Distance to extend the skeleton cut line beyond the top edge of the plate.

Distance

Independent Grids

Use separate grids for exterior and interior skeleton cuts. Select this setting 0 or 1 if you want to use different grid spacing for interior skeleton cuts (skeleton cuts that both begin and end at a part) and exterior skeleton cuts (skeleton cuts that have at least one end at a plate edge). 0 = not enabled 1 = enabled

Horizontal Spacing

Exterior grid: Horizontal grid spacing.

Distance

Vertical Spacing

Exterior grid: Vertical grid spacing.

Distance

Interior Horizontal Spacing

Interior grid: Horizontal grid spacing.

Distance

Interior Vertical Spacing

Interior grid: Vertical grid spacing.

Distance

Traverse Plate Edge

Traverse along the plate edge between exterior cuts. Select this setting if you would like the torch head to follow along the plate edge between exterior skeleton cuts, or to track back down the just cut exterior skeleton cut if cutting the other end of it which touches the plate edge. 0 = not enabled 1 = enabled

0 or 1

Interior Before Parts

Cut sequence order. 0 = Parts will be cut before interior skeleton lines 1 = Interior skeleton lines will be cut before parts

0 or 1

Exterior Before Parts

Cut sequence order. 0 = Parts will be cut before exterior skeleton lines 1 = Exterior skeleton lines will be cut before parts

0 or 1

Exterior Before Interior

Cut sequence order. 0 = Interior skeleton lines will be cut before exterior lines 1 = Exterior skeleton lines will be cut before interior lines

0 or 1

After Nest

Cut sequence order. Only used when Independent Grids is off. 0 = Parts will be cut before skeleton lines 1 = Skeleton lines will be cut before parts

0 or 1

Exterior Cut Order

Exterior cut order. Defines the order in which exterior skeleton cuts are made.

0, 1, 2, or 3

- 238 -

Distance

ProNest 2019 Manual

Category

Column Header

Description

Valid values

0 = (None) 1 = Circle the plate (clockwise) 2 = Cut vertical lines first 3 = Cut horizontal lines first Integrate with parts

Cut sequence order. 0 = Disable "Integrate with parts" sequencing. All skeleton lines on a nest are sequenced together. 1 = Enable "Integrate with parts" sequencing. Skeleton lines and exterior part profiles will be cut together in groups.

Note: Column headers are not case-sensitive and white spaces are not considered.

- 239 -

0 or 1

ProNest 2019 Manual

Crop spreadsheets Material-based crop settings are specified in the Crop settings spreadsheet.   Category Keys

Crop settings

AutoCrop settings

Column Header

Description

Valid values

Material

The name of the material used. This is a required key.

Character string

Thickness

The thickness of the material used. This is a required key.  

Any positive number  

Enable

Enable cropping for the row. If AutoCrop is applied to a nest and it is using a material and thickness row marked "0", a crop line will not be applied.   0 = do not enable 1 = enable

0 or 1

Extension

A crop line is always defined with respect to the plate edge. A crop exten- Distance sion allows the pierce point to move off the plate (a positive extension) or onto the plate (a negative extension).

Nest Outside Crop

If this setting is selected, parts that are nested outside the crop (in the rem- 0 or 1 nant) will not be shown in conflict.   0 = do not enable 1 = enable

Crop Process

If you have more than one cut process on your machine, you can select the process that you want to use for cutting crop lines.   1, 2, 3, etc.

Number representing the cut process

Min Remnant Area

All calculated crop lines will be rejected unless they produce a remnant with at least this much surface area.  

Area in in. 2 or mm2

Allow Vertical Crop

Step 1: Find the best vertical crop. When finding a crop line, ProNest will first find the best vertical (straight) crop line.   0 = do not enable 1 = enable

0 or 1

Allow L Shaped Crop Step 2: Find the best L-shape crop. If this step is selected, ProNest will try 0 or 1 to improve on Step 1. An L-shaped crop has one (or two) 90-degree turns resulting in an L-shaped remnant.   0 = do not enable 1 = enable Min L Shape Improve- You can force ProNest to accept the L-shaped crop line only if it beats ment Step 1 with a better (larger) remnant. The setting reads: Use only if the remnant area improves by at least x%.  

- 240 -

Decimal number

ProNest 2019 Manual

Category

Column Header

Description

Valid values

Percentage expressed as decimal number (e.g. 50% would be entered as 0.50). Allow Profile Crop

Step 3: Find the best profile crop. If this step is checked, ProNest will try 0 or 1 to improve on the previous steps. A profile crop is built by trying to stay as close to the parts as possible. This method generally creates a remnant with the most area. The tradeoff, however, is that the crop line usually has significantly more motions.   0 = do not enable 1 = enable

Min Profile Improve- You can force ProNest to accept the profile crop line only if it beats Step Decimal number ment 1 or 2 with a better (larger) remnant. The setting reads: Use only if the remnant area improves by at least x%.   Percent expressed as decimal number (e.g. 50% would be entered as 0.50). Work Zones Single Crop Per Nest Allow one crop for each nest. This setting is available only if you have the 0 or 1 Work Zones module. Normally, only one crop is allowed per nest and 1 will be selected in the box. To allow one crop for each work zone, select 0.   0 = Work Zone 1 = Nest Remnant Webs

Min Web Width

Minimum usable web width. ProNest will remove any webs thinner than this value. This does not include webs that share the plate edge.

Min Top Web Width

Minimum usable web width - along top of plate edge. Any such web thin- Distance in inches or ner than this value will be removed. mm

Min Bottom Web Width

Minimum usable web width - along bottom of plate edge. Any such web thinner than this value will be removed.

Note: Column headers are not case-sensitive and white spaces are not considered.

- 241 -

Distance in inches or mm

Distance in inches or mm

ProNest 2019 Manual

Pre-Pierces spreadsheets Pre-Pierces spreadsheets must adhere to a specific format.   Category Keys

Column Header

Description

Valid values

Material

The name of the material used. This is a required key.

Character string

Thickness

The thickness of the material used. This is a required key.  

Any positive number  

General

Enable

Apply pre-pierce for the XLS record. 0 = do not apply 1 = apply pre-pierce

0 or 1

Cut Sequence

By Part

Pre-pierce by part. 0 = not enabled 1 = enabled

0 or 1

Process

Process

(Cut process number). 1, 2, 3...

Number representing cut process

Use Profile Process

Process: (Same as profile).

0 or 1

Strategy

Style. 1 = Pre-pierce as Circles 2 = Pre-pierce as Punch 3 = Torch Blow Through 4 = Pre-pierce as Drill

1, 2, or 3

Radius

Radius. This setting defines the radius for circle pierce holes.

Distance

Interiors Only

Interior profiles only. 0 = not enabled 1 = enabled

0 or 1

Profile Without Leadins

Profiles without lead-ins. 0 = not enabled 1 = enabled

0 or 1

Allow PrePiercing For...

Allow Conflict with Current Pro- Profiles whose pre-pierce would interfere with the profile geofile metry. 0 = not enabled 1 = enabled

0 or 1

Allow Conflict with Other Profiles

Profiles whose pre-pierce would interfere with another profile. 0 = not enabled 1 = enabled

0 or 1

Plate Edge

Profiles that start on the plate edge. 0 = not enabled 1 = enabled

0 or 1

Tabs

Tabs.

0 or 1

- 242 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Category

Column Header

Description

Valid values

0 = not enabled 1 = enabled Tabs Without Leadins

Tabs without lead-ins. 0 = not enabled 1 = enabled

 

- 243 -

0 or 1

ProNest 2019 Manual

Slug Destroy spreadsheets Slug Destroy spreadsheets are used to define when the leftover cutouts inside interior profiles should be cut up, based on a part's material type and thickness.   To use slug destroy spreadsheets:  l On the Slug Destroy settings page, for Slug Destroy table, select a spreadsheet.   The required format for a slug destroy spreadsheet is as follows: Note: Column headers are not case-sensitive and white spaces are not considered.

Column headers

Keys  l Material  l Thickness Tip: When setting thickness ranges for slug destroy in the spreadsheet, keep in mind that slug destroy is designed for materials 3/8" (0.375" or 10 mm) or less.

Slug Destroy settings Note: These three spreadsheet settings are based on the Slat spacing setting on the Slug Destroy settings page and on the Kerf width setting on the Process Parameters settings page.

Maximum Profile Dimension This setting defines the upper size limit for slug destroy interiors. This is expressed as a factor of the Slat spacing setting - 2x would be double the slat spacing, 2.5x would be two and a half times the slat spacing, and so on.   Slat spacing is multiplied by this factor to get a distance. If either the length or width of an interior profile is greater than this distance, slug destroy will not be applied.   Recommended value: 2x (Slat spacing × 2) Required column: yes Blank allowed: no

Edge Offset Buffer distance between the edge of the interior profile and the cut-up lines. This is entered as a percentage of the Kerf width setting (on the Process Parameters settings page).   Recommended value: 50% (Kerf width × 0.5) Required column: yes Blank allowed: no

- 244 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: Due to kerf offset, slug destroy cut lines are automatically shortened in areas where the kerf on the cut-up lines would cut into the part. Likewise, a radius corner is put on the opposite end of those cuts to compensate for the Kerf Left or Kerf Right offset distance, ensuring that cut-up lines will reach the interior profile.   You can see the compensated slug destroy cuts (as they would be written in output code) by entering Cut Simulation mode.

Minimum Profile Dimension This is expressed as a percentage of the Slat spacing setting.   Recommended value: 50% (Slat spacing × 0.5) Required column: yes Blank allowed: no This setting has two purposes:  l Represents the lower size limit for slug destroy interiors. If both the length and width of an interior profile are less than this value, slug destroy will not be applied. (This allows cut-up lines to be applied on long skinny cutouts where one dimension is below the minimum value.)  l Controls the maximum width of the leftover fragments created by slug destroy cuts.

A good value for this setting will keep the size small enough so that the fragments will fall through the slats of your cutting table.

- 245 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Fly Cut spreadsheets Fly Cut spreadsheets are used to define when the fly cutting should be applied, based on a part's material type and thickness.   To use Fly Cut spreadsheets:  l On the Fly Cut settings page, for Fly Cut table, select a spreadsheet.   The required format for a interior cut-up spreadsheet is as follows: Note: Column headers are not case-sensitive and white spaces are not considered.

Column headers

Keys  l Material  l Thickness  l Class Tip: When setting thickness ranges for fly cutting in the spreadsheet, keep in mind that fly cutting is designed for materials 3/8" (0.375" or 10 mm) or less.

Fly Cut settings Overtravel Length Overtravel used on circular and slot-shaped interiors. The start point is shifted back by this distance, to maintain a fluid, straight cutting motion and ensure that the interior is completely cut out.   Required column: yes Blank allowed: no

Max Distance This setting defines the maximum distance between aligned entities for fly cutting. Aligned entities from different interiors will be not be fly cut if the distance between them is greater than this value.   Recommended value: 5 in. (127 mm) Required column: yes Blank allowed: no

- 246 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Note:

If one line does qualify but another doesn't you will get fly cutting only on the entity that does, the other entities will be cut one by one.

Max Profile Size This setting defines the upper size limit for fly cut interiors. If the smaller dimension of the interior is greater than this value, fly cutting will not be applied.   Recommended value: 2.5 in. (63.5 mm) Required column: yes Blank allowed: no

- 247 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

5. PREFERENCES What are preferences? Preferences provide a way to customize the general behavior of ProNest. Unlike settings, preferences are not specific to any particular machine and do not have a direct impact on nesting.   To edit ProNest preferences, open the Preferences dialog:  l On the File tab, click Preferences. Once you have opened the Preferences dialog, you can make any kind of preference change you want. After you are done making changes, click OK to accept your changes and return to the main window. Click Cancel to discard your changes and return to the main window. Note: All changes made to preferences take immediate effect except for changes made to preferences on the Settings page. For more details, see the topic on "Settings preferences" on page 257.

The Preferences dialog General Layout The preferences dialog is presented as a collection of pages. Each page can be accessed by clicking the corresponding item on the left pane.  

- 248 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 

The Buttons There are two buttons at the bottom of the preferences dialog:   Button

Action when clicked

OK Cancel

Keeps your changes and closes the preferences dialog. Discards your changes and closes the preferences dialog.

- 249 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

General preferences Options Job Preferences:

When opening jobs, detect modified part files and reload them ProNest jobs contain a record of the original file name and date modified for every part added to the part list. When this preference is selected, ProNest will compare the recorded date with the original file. If the file has been modified since it was added to the job, it will be reloaded.   The following reasons will prevent a part from reloading:  l The part is nested and the nest has a defined cut sequence.  l The part has been nested and is chained or bridged together with other parts, or if it has been common line cut together with other parts.     When a part is reloaded:  l All existing leads will be retained  l All tabs and transition loops will be removed  

Save the part list (*.pnl) and plate list (*.snl) with the job If this preference is selected, a part list file (a part list file (*.pnl) is a tab-delimited text file containing a list of the parts used in the job. The attributes for each part is saved: file name, material and thickness, required quantity, etc.) and a plate list file (a plate list file (*.snl) is a tab-delimited text file containing a list of the plates used in the job. The attributes for each plate is saved: name - if any, material and thickness, required quantity, etc.) will also be saved when the job (*.nif) is saved. These files contain no information about nesting, and are primarily used to quickly import a list of parts and plates into ProNest. They can also be used to integrate ProNest with an MRP/ERP system. Note: Parts that were created with Pipe or VSP will not be saved in the part list file.

Automatically open the Edit Part List window after starting a new job When this preference is selected, the Edit Part List window will be opened automatically after each new job is started.  

When changing machines, how should leads be modified? Set the default action for modifying leads when the machine is changed while a job is open.  

Show the technology panel Display the technology indicator panel on the main nesting screen.     Part List Preferences:

Allow parts in the Part List to be renamed When selected, you can rename an added part in the Edit Part List window by clicking the part name.  

Keep file extension in the part name when parts are added When this preference is selected, parts will retain the file extension from the part's source file when they are added to the part list. When cleared, the file extension will be removed when parts are added. - 250 -

ProNest 2019 Manual  

Always reapply leads when changing materials When changing the material of a part in the part list, you may want the leads to be reapplied using the new material's lead settings. Select this preference to always reapply leads on parts when the material is changed.   When cleared, you will be prompted to either reapply leads or not when changing materials.   This preference applies when changing the material for parts in the part list, but not when changing the material for the entire job (using the Change Materials dialog).     Nesting:

Disable automatic bumping of parts Select this preference to turn off automatic bumping during manual nesting. With automatic bumping disabled, when you click an anchored part or drag and drop a part onto the nest, the part will be placed exactly where you clicked or released the cursor.

  With this preference cleared automatic bumping will be active. The part will be moved from where you clicked or released the cursor towards the Nesting Home (

):

See Adding parts to the nest manually for more information. Note:

When the Automatic Nesting module isn't in use, automatic bumping is always enabled when you manually nest parts by double-clicking in the part list or pressing ENTER.

  CNC Output

After output, save job history data  Select this preference to record historical job information in the ProNest database. Job information will be recorded when output is generated. Information stored includes: part list, plate list, nests, work orders, and inventory data.   For more info, see History data. - 251 -

ProNest 2019 Manual  

After output, change each nest's status to 'Complete' Clearing this preference will set nest status to Pending after output. Typically, this preference should be cleared when using the Production Manager module.  

After output, save the current job ProNest will automatically save the current job after creating CNC output.  

After output, save an image of each nest ProNest will save an image file of each nest after creating CNC output. The image will be saved to the Nest Image folder specified on the Miscellaneous tab of your preferences.   This is useful for viewing nest images in Production Manager.

After output, make remnants immediately available for nesting When enabled, a remnant plate can be nested on when its parent plate still has a Pending status. When cleared, remnants will only be available for nesting if their parent plate has a Complete status. Note:

This preference only has an effect when After output, change each nest's status to Complete is cleared.

After output, save an image of each nest for job history ProNest will save an image file (.png) of each nest for history data after creating CNC output. The image file will be named according to the history tables' NestID for a given nest and will be saved to the History Nest Image folder specified on the Miscellaneous tab of your preferences.   After output, save job history data must be enabled in order to use this preference.  

Close progress window on successful completion Select this preference to hide the Output Progress window after CNC output is successfully created. You will still be able to see any warning or error messages that may occur during output.     Plate Inventory

Allow negative stock quantities Select this preference to permit inventory plates to have negative stock quantities. A negative stock quantity can be used to indicate that an inventory plate is needed for ordering. Important:

Allowing negative stock quantities will remove all user reservations on inventory plates. Any future plate reservations that are made (while this preference in enabled) will be ignored by ProNest.

  Optimization

Disable drawing of trials During Optimization, ProNest will likely try nesting on several plates using various nesting strategies. As each combination (or trial) is attempted, the nesting results are normally displayed in the nesting area and in a progress window. When this preference is cleared, ProNest will not draw the nesting results of each trial. The progress of the optimization will be displayed only in the progress window. Tip:

Selecting this preference will improve the speed of Optimization by not drawing each nesting trial.

  - 252 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Scribe Text

Show abbreviations when adding variables When adding scribe text variables in Advanced Edit, show abbreviated variables by default in the Scribe Text Field dialog.  

Color scheme This preference enables you to change the skin of the application. Skins affect the look and coloring of the entire ProNest graphical user interface.

Mouse Control Selection tolerance This preference determines how accurate you have to be to select parts, profiles, leads, and other items on the nest.  

Corner snap distance This preference determines how accurate you have to be to select part corners.   Both preferences in this section are controlled by a slider that affects a small cross-hair diagram on its right.  

  The orange circle in the cross-hair diagram represents the size of the preference value being edited. Move the slider all the way to the left and the orange circle will shrink to a single point. For the selection tolerance preference, this would mean that selection of anything on the nest would require clicking exactly on that item. Move the slider all the way to the right and the orange circle will grow to a very large size. For the selection tolerance preference, this would mean that selection of anything on the nest would not require much accuracy at all. Tip:

A test area is provided to test your selection tolerance and corner snap distance. Selection of the part in the test area is controlled by the selection tolerance. An will appear on the corner of the part if you click within the corner snap distance from that corner.

How do I get here in ProNest?  l On the File tab, click Preferences

, then click General.

- 253 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Miscellaneous preferences Folders Safe zone file All safe zones schemes are saved in the file specified by this preference.  

Plate Inventory folder (stores remnants and skeletons) Remnants and skeletons saved in your plate inventory are linked to a Token File (*.tok), which defines its geometry. Use this preference to specify the folder where these files should be saved.    

Part Library folder This folder stores token files for library parts and work order parts that were added from the part list.  

Nest Image folder If ProNest is set up to automatically create images of nests that are output, those images will be saved to this folder.  

History Nest Image folder If ProNest is set up to automatically save nest images for job history after output, those images will be saved to this folder.    

Options PNL Delimiter Enter a separator to use for PNL files. When a delimiter is set, only PNLs that use that delimiter can be imported into ProNest. Likewise, when a PNL is exported, it will use the delimiter specified here.   Choices: TAB (this is the default) Comma (,) Semicolon (;) Vertical Bar (|)

How do I get here in ProNest?  l On the File tab, click Preferences

, then click Miscellaneous.

- 254 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Regional preferences Translation and Display Units Language ProNesthas been translated into many languages. To change the current language, select a different language from the Language box. Note: ProNest will switch to the selected language after you click OK.

Display units ProNest can display values in either IPS units (inch, pound, second) or MMKS units (millimeter, kilogram, second).  

Precision: Length This preference defines the number of digits that should appear to the right of the decimal separator for length-type values. This preference is used only for display purposes - meaning that actual values are maintained even if they are not displayed with their full accuracy.  

Precision: Weight This preference defines the number of digits that should appear to the right of the decimal separator for weight-type values. This preference is used only for display purposes - meaning that actual values are maintained even if they are not displayed with their full accuracy.  

Precision: Cost This preference defines the number of digits that should appear to the right of the decimal separator for currency-type values. This preference is used only for display purposes - meaning that actual values are maintained even if they are not displayed with their full accuracy.  

Precision: Volume  This preference defines the number of digits that should appear to the right of the decimal separator for volume-type values. This preference is used only for display purposes - meaning that actual values are maintained even if they are not displayed with their full accuracy. Note:

The preferences that control decimal places are used throughout ProNest. The examples on the right-hand side will show the effect of your changes.

Size format You can customize how length and width dimensions for plates and parts are displayed in ProNest. This preference is used only for display purposes, it doesn't have any impact on the actual dimension values of parts or plates.   Choices: Length × Width or Width × Length Example:   A plate with a Length of 96 in. and a Width of 48 in. can be shown as either "96 × 48" or "48 × 96" using this preference.     - 255 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Material display format You can customize how ProNest displays material names throughout the application. Materials can be formatted to use any arrangement of material name, thickness, grade, and gauge.   Choices: %Name%, %Thickness%, %Grade%, %Gauge% Fields in the material display formula must be surrounded by percent signs (%) in order to be recognized by ProNest. You can use any combination of fields in any order that you want. However, if you are using a field in the material database, it is recommended that you also use it in the material display formula.  

How do I get here in ProNest?  l On the File tab, click Preferences

, then click Regional.

- 256 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Settings preferences Important: Changes made to preferences on this page will not take effect until you restart ProNest.

Machines Machine folder All machines (*.cfg) are saved in the folder specified by this preference.    l For more information about machines, see the topic called "What is a ProNest machine?" on page 18  l For more information about how ProNest machines are saved, see the topic called "How are settings saved?" on page 19  

Post processor folder (CFF) All post processor files (*.cff) are saved in the folder specified by this preference.    l For more information about post processors, see the topic called "Select a Post Processor (CFF)" on page 30.  l For more information about where post processors are saved, see the topic called "How are settings saved?" on page 19  

Primary machine When ProNest is started, a new job is automatically created using the machine specified here.   For more information about ProNest machines, see the topic called "What is a ProNest machine?" on page 18  

Prompt for machine at startup If this preference is selected, the Machine Selection dialog will appear whenever ProNest is started. The machine selected in this dialog will then be used as the primary machine. Note: If this preference is selected, the Primary machine preference will be used as the default selection in the Machine Selection dialog.

Spreadsheet Settings Folders Settings spreadsheets are each saved in a specific folder. These folders may be local to your computer, or may reside somewhere on the network. Point each of these folder locations to correct location for each type of spreadsheet you use.   For more information about spreadsheets, see the topic called "About spreadsheets" on page 186.

How do I get here in ProNest?  l On the File tab, click Preferences

, then click Settings.

- 257 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Check for Updates Using the Check for Updates feature, you can see if software updates or major version upgrades of ProNest are available for download. ProNest must be running and your PC must be connected to the Internet to use this feature.

Updates vs. Version Upgrades Updates are released frequently and typically include new features, enhancements, and bug fixes. A version upgrade refers to a new major version of ProNest. For example, going from ProNest 2019 version 12.0.1 to ProNest 2019 version 12.0.2 would be an update, whereas going from ProNest 2017 to ProNest 2019 would be a version upgrade.

Manually check for updates  1. On the File tab, click Help.  2. Click Check for Updates. If there is an update or version upgrade available, you can click the associated link to open the ProNest download web page.

Automatically check for updates You can configure ProNest to automatically check for updates or version upgrades.  1. On the File tab, click Preferences.  2. Click Updates.  3. Set how often you want ProNest to check for updates.  l Choices: Every day, Once a week, Every other week, Once a month, Never (this will turn off Automatic Check for Updates)  4. If you want ProNest to also notify you when new version upgrades are available, select In addition to updates, also check for version upgrades. When ProNest is running, it will automatically check for updates and upgrades on the schedule that you have assigned. Important:

The Check for Updates feature can always be used to see if a more recent version of ProNest is available. However, downloading an update or version upgrade is only available with an active software subscription.

- 258 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Work Orders preferences Options Unique key You can specify a combination of fields that creates a unique identifier for each Work Order record. This is the criteria used to identify a work order item when updating the Work Orders database in ProNest.   You cannot enter a unique key that includes fields that are blank for existing work orders.  

Part library matching Select whether or not to use the Part Library for your work order parts. If your work orders reference ProNest library parts, you can control how part matching should work.   (None) Do not try to match parts in the work order with ProNest library parts.   Part Name Part Name in work order must match the library part name. If the part specified in the work order cannot be found in the part library, the part will be imported into the database and highlighted with an error. You will not be able to add the work order part to the part list.   Part Name and Revision Part Name and Revision in work order must match both the library part's name and revision. If either the part name or revision specified in the work order cannot be found in library, the part will be imported into the database and highlighted with an error. You will not be able to add the work order part to the part list.  

When a job is saved, release all unnested quantities When selected, work order parts in the part list that have not been nested will be un-allocated from the job when that job is saved. The work order parts will be removed from the part list and will become available in the Work Orders grid in the Edit Part List window.   When cleared, unnested work order parts in the part list will remain allocated to the job when that job is saved.  

Miscellaneous fields You can map miscellaneous fields in the work order to available part property fields in ProNest. In this way, part information such as initial rotation, priority, grain restraint, etc. can be specified in the work order using text fields.   The Misc # field and Caption are used for matching.   For instance, if a work order contains a field called "Rotation Limit" and is mapped to the ProNest part property "Grain Restraint" in preferences, when that work order part is added to the part list, it will automatically use the grain restraint specified in the work order.

Warnings and Errors Controls how warnings and errors will be displayed in the Work Orders grids. Work order parts with a warning will be displayed in the grid with a warning icon ( ), and the associated field highlighted in yellow. Work order parts with an error will be displayed in the grid with an error icon ( ), and the associated field highlighted in red. Any item that is set to (Ignore) will not be flagged in the Work Orders grid.   Any work order that contains warnings can still be added to part list, whereas work orders with an error can not be added until the error condition is fixed.   - 259 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Could not find library part (required) If Part library matching is enabled (set to "Part Name" or "Part Name and Revision") this is required and set to error. Parts that can't be matched will be imported into the Work Orders Database, but highlighted with an error. If Part library matching is set to "(None)" this setting is hidden.  

ProNest material could not be found When the material specified in the work order cannot be found in the ProNest Material Database.  

ProNest customer could not be found When the customer specified in the work order cannot be found in the ProNest Customer Database.  

Revision doesn't match library part When the work order's Part Name matches a library part, but the Revision does not. This preference is active only when Part library matching is set to "Part Name".  

Material doesn't match library part When the work order's Part Name matches a library part, but the Material does not. This preference is active only when Part library matching is set to "Part Name" or "Part Name and Revision".  

Customer doesn't match library part When the work order's Part Name matches a library part, but the Customer does not. This preference is active only when Part library matching is set to "Part Name" or "Part Name and Revision".   How do I get here in ProNest?  l On the File tab, click Preferences

, then click Work Orders.

- 260 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Managing Users and Permissions The Users and Permissions feature lets you create defined roles for users, enabling you to control which areas of ProNest that users can access and change. This is especially useful in scenarios where multiple people access the same computer. When activated, each person logs on to ProNest with their own user name and password.

Account types There are four different types of accounts, each giving the user a different level of control in ProNest:    l System Administrator The system administrator manages all other user accounts, including all other administrators. There can be only one system administrator account. This account has full capabilities and permissions in ProNest. The system administrator is listed as "Administrator" in the log in screen.  l Administrator The administrator can add new users, deactivate existing users, change permissions for users, reset user passwords, etc. This account has full permissions in ProNest.  l Normal The normal account is for users who perform common tasks in ProNest. This account can be configured to have permissions set for access to various database editors and preferences.  l Guest The guest account is primarily for people who need temporary access to ProNest. This account type does not require a user name or password and it gives you the lowest level of access.

Administrative tasks Administrators can manage users and permissions using ProNest preferences:  1. On the File tab, click Preferences.  2. In the left pane, select Users and Permissions. A list of ProNest users will be displayed. You can edit user accounts and permissions from this page. Modifying users and permissions requires administrative privileges.

Turn on or off Users and Permissions in ProNest  l On the Users and Permissions preferences page, simply click ON or OFF. Note that turning off the Users and Permissions feature will not delete any existing user accounts. It will merely disable the feature so that users are not required to log on when ProNest is started. With the feature turned off, user access to ProNest will not be restricted. Note:

When turning on Users and Permissions for the first time, you will be prompted to sign in as the system administrator. Initially, the Administrator password is set to "hypertherm". After signing in as Administrator and turning on Users and Permissions, it is recommended that you reset the Administrator password, as described in User account basics.

- 261 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Add new user  1. Click the +Add new user button.  2. Enter account details for the user. Typically, the full name should match their Windows user name. The email address is used for informational purposes.  3. Select a user account type. "Administrator" will give the user full administrative rights, "Normal" will add an account with configurable permissions.  4. For Permissions, clear a box to restrict access to that database editor.  5. Click OK.

Change permissions for normal users For each Normal user account, you can turn on or off the ability to make changes in the Material, Customer, Plate Inventory, Part Library, Assembly, or Work Orders database editors.  1. Select a user account (on the Users and Permissions preferences page, click the user name).  2. For Permissions, clear the checkboxes next to the database editors to restrict access to them. When a permissions checkbox is cleared, the user will have read-only access in that database editor. They will not be able to make changes (such as adding, editing, or deleting records) within that database editor. Note that database changes that happen during the normal course of using ProNest will not be prohibited for any user.

Reset user passwords If a user forgets their password, you can reset the password as follows:  1. Select a user account (on the Users and Permissions preferences page, click the user name).  2. Select Reset password.  3. Click OK. The password will be reset to the default value shown on screen.

Deactivate user  1. Select a user account (on the Users and Permissions preferences page, click the user name).  2. Set the Status to Inactive.  3. Click OK. Inactive users can be hidden in the Users list by clearing the Show inactive users box.

Allow users to have their password remembered You can configure ProNest so that the "Remember my password" setting appears on the user log in page at startup.  l On the Users and Permissions page in preferences, select Allow "Remember my password". You may want to disable this feature for enhanced privacy and security.

- 262 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Naming preferences Naming preferences let you control how jobs, quotes, and remnant and skeleton inventory plates are automatically named when they are created. You can use variables to name items in numerical order and/or by date. You can also enter a combination of variables and text to create a customized naming convention.

Variables The following variables can be used in naming formulas. Variables must be surrounded by percent signs (%) in order to be recognized by ProNest.   %ID% This will name new items in ascending numerical order. For jobs, if you start new session (close and re-open ProNest), the ID number count will be reset to 1. %JobID% For jobs, this will name new jobs in numerical order, giving a unique number to each job that is started. Starting a new session (close and re-open ProNest) will not cause the ID number will be reset to 1. %TodaysJobID% Similar to %JobID%, except this variable will reset the count to 1 after each day. This is used in combination with %Date% to give a unique name to each job within a given day. %Date% Today's date will be inserted into the item name, in the date format specified. %JobPath% Job file path will be inserted into the item name. %JobName% Job name will be inserted into the item name. This is typically not used for job naming conventions. %NestCutTimes% The number of times a parent nest is cut will be inserted into the remnant or skeleton name. %NestMaterial% The material of the parent nest will be inserted into the remnant or skeleton name. %NestIndex% The index number of the parent nest will be inserted into the remnant or skeleton name. %PlateName% The name of the parent inventory plate will be inserted into the remnant or skeleton name. %Quote ID% A number that increases by 1 for each new quote that is started. Unlike the %ID% variable, this value is never reset. By default, there are several pre-defined formulas for jobs that are already available in the Formula box:    l Job%ID%: The text "Job" will be appended with the ID variable described above.  l %JobID%: The JobID variable described above will be used.  l %TodaysJobID%_%Date%: A unique number will be followed by an underscore (_) and today's date.  

- 263 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Note that you can enter additional text into the formula at any point, as long as it doesn't alter the variable text inside of the percent signs (%).   Example:   If you wanted to append the JobID with location information, you might enter %JobID%_Building12 into the Formula box. As a result, you would get jobs named "01_Building12", "02_Building12", "03_Building12", etc.   As you edit the naming formulas, look at the Examples box to get an idea of how your jobs or plates will be named. Note:

The following characters are invalid for file names and should not be used in the formula:   \ / : * ? " |

Padding When selected, numerical variables (%ID%, %JobID%, and %TodaysJobID%) will be carried out to the specified precision value for decimal places, even if the precision is unnecessary.  

Date format When using the %Date% variable, this controls how date is formatted in the job name.   Choices: mdyy, mdyyyy, mmddyy, mmddyyyy, ddmmyy, ddmmyyyy, yymmdd, yyyymmdd  

For unsaved jobs, use the quote number as the job name When this preference is selected, the quote number will be used as the job name. This only happens if the job (.nif) is not yet saved and the quote number is specified on the Quote page (File > Quote).  

How do I get here in ProNest?  l On the File tab, click Preferences

, then click Naming.

  Related articles  n Creating jobs  n Saving remnants and skeletons  n Creating a new quote

- 264 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

CAD Font preferences CAD drawings that contain text may also contain font information for that text. ProNest supports both native AutoCAD®fonts in SHX format, Windows® system fonts (TrueType, PostScript, OpenType, etc.), or Hypertherm fonts (.fnt) for CAD text.   This ProNest preference page controls which fonts are available when importing CAD drawings with text or adding scribe text in Advanced Edit. You can also specify a default font to use for CAD import or scribe text added in Advanced Edit.

Font Options Font folder Point to the folder that your CAD program uses for CAD fonts. For AutoCAD®, CAD fonts are stored in SHX format. If this preference is left blank or invalid, ProNest will not be able to use CAD fonts when importing CAD files. Note:

The AutoCAD Fonts folder varies based on the version and installed options for AutoCAD.   Some sample locations include:   C:\Program Files\AutoCAD 2010\Fonts C:\Program Files\Autodesk\AutoCAD 2011\Fonts

Hypertherm fonts (.fnt) are also supported CAD fonts. To use these fonts, set Font folder to:   C:\Program Files\Hypertherm CAM\ProNest 2019 If this preference is left blank or invalid, ProNest will not be able to use CAD fonts for scribe text (though Windows fonts are always available).  

Always use default font When selected, the default font specified on this preferences page will be used for all text in CAD files, regardless of the font used in the CAD file. When cleared, the default font will only be used if the CAD font used in the drawing can't be found or there is no font specified in the drawing.    

Default Font Use CAD font You can select a CAD font (.shx or .fnt) to use as the default for text in CAD files. The list of available fonts comes from the folder specified in the Font folder preference.   For Hypertherm fonts (.fnt), choices include: Mtcpro, Mtcmono, NoLift.  

Use system font You can select a system font to use as the default for text in CAD files. These are most commonly TrueType (.ttf), PostScript (.ps) or OpenType (.otf) fonts. The list of available fonts comes from your C:\Windows\Fonts folder.  

How do I get here in ProNest?  l On the File tab, click Preferences

, then click CAD Font.

- 265 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

3D CAD Files preferences SOLIDWORKS These preferences control how ProNest imports SOLIDWORKS® features and geometry.  

Import specific cut faces This preference can be used to specify the particular faces that you want to cut and have ProNest ignore the other faces in the drawing. Only faces that match the Cut face names specified will be included and assigned to the cut process when the part is imported.   If this preference is cleared or the specified cut face name can't be found in the part, ProNest will import the part according to the Top view coordinate system name (see below) or the face with the largest surface area.   Cut face names The names of the faces that should be imported as cut geometry. Multiple names should be separated by a semi-colon (;) with no spaces in between. An asterisk (*) can be used as a wildcard.   Example:   With Import specific cut faces selected and Cut face names set to "Cut*", all faces that begin with "Cut" would be imported.

Top view coordinate system name A coordinate system is a system of planes used to assign Cartesian coordinates to features, parts, and assemblies. Part and assembly documents contain default coordinate systems; other coordinate systems can be defined with reference geometry.   The Top view coordinate system name preference in ProNest can be used to specify the name of a coordinate system in SOLIDWORKS. If this is left blank, the default coordinate system in the drawing will be used during import.   The primary purpose of this preference is to aid in troubleshooting if parts are being brought into ProNest incorrectly flipped or mirrored.   To specify a custom coordinate system in SOLIDWORKS:  1. On the Features tab, click Reference Geometry, then click Coordinate System.

 2. Set the origin by clicking a point on the part that intersects the face that you want to import. Click subsequent edges to set the positive X, Y and Z axes.

- 266 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 l The origin must intersect the face you want to import.  l The XY plane should be parallel to the face you want to import.  l The Z axis should be perpendicular to the face you want to import.

 3. Click the green checkmark to accept your changes.  4. In the node on the right, you can rename the coordinate system as needed.

 5. In ProNest, make sure that you enter the same coordinate system name you use in SOLIDWORKS in the Top view coordinate system name box (File > Preferences > 3D CAD Files).  

Import full flat pattern When selected, ProNest will import geometry for the whole surface that the largest face belongs to. When cleared, ProNest will import only the geometry of the largest face (the default behavior).  

- 267 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Example:   Consider the following part:

  By default, ProNest will import the face with the largest surface area.

With Import full flat pattern selected, the entire surface will be imported:

Bend lines are imported as display only information in ProNest.  

Detect part thickness When this preference is enabled, ProNest will attempt to determine the thickness of the SOLIDWORKS part and assign a ProNest material type and thickness to the part during import.   Part thickness is detected by locating a face that is parallel to the chosen face and is the furthest away in the same solid body. The distance between the two faces is calculated and set as the BOM thickness so that it gets applied when the part is added.   Tolerance The stated thickness must be ±0.001 in. (±0.0254 mm) of a listed ProNest thickness in order for a match to be made.

- 268 -

ProNest 2019 Manual When you select a material type and thickness in the Edit Part List and then import a SOLIDWORKS part, the detected thickness in the part will be used instead of the thickness you selected. If there is BOM information in the SOLIDWORKS file that specifies a material type (and optionally, grade), this BOM information will be used instead of the material selected in ProNest. Note:

This preference only applies to solid parts. Sheet metal parts always have their thickness detected during import.

Ignore parts that do not contain This is used to flag the parts that should be imported into ProNest. If the SOLIDWORKS part does not contain the property name specified in Custom property name, it will not be imported. This can be useful if you have several SOLIDWORKS parts in a drawing and only want certain parts included when the drawing is imported into ProNest.   Custom property name The property name that must exist in order for a part to be imported. For more than one property, separate names with a semicolon (;) with no space in between.

Import sheet metal parts only This is used to specify whether parts being imported are solid parts and/or sheet metal parts. When selected, only sheet metal parts will be imported. When cleared, ProNest will import both solid parts and sheet metal parts.  

Enable bevel detection Identify beveled edges on SOLIDWORKS parts and automatically assign ProNest beveling to them during import. This method doesn't require any bevel layer naming in CAD. Note:

 l Gradual bevel is not supported.  l Bevel detection for sheet metal parts is not supported.

To use automatic bevel detection for 3D CAD parts:  l Select this Enable bevel detection preference.  l On the Bevel page of your ProNest settings (

):

 l Select Use AutoBevel.  l Enter a prefix for bevel layer names. By default, the prefix is "BVL".  l On the Importing Parts page of your ProNest settings (

):

 l Map beveling to the cut process by entering the bevel prefix + wildcard (*). For instance, if the prefix is "BVL" you would enter BVL* for the Cut process.  l Make sure that you set the correct material for the 3D CAD file in ProNest before adding it to the part list.  l Set a Default Class that is bevel-compatible for the materials that you will be using. This way, when a material type and thickness are matched automatically, the correct bevel-compatible class will be assigned as well.  l In SOLIDWORKS, you may need to use a user coordinate system to ensure that the part is imported at the intended orientation.

- 269 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

The origin of the user coordinate system would need to intersect the top face of the bevel part. See Top view coordinate system name for more information.  

Include construction geometry Enables or disables the reading of geometry used only for construction purposes.  

Enable drill detection ProNest will attempt to map drill holes added via the Hole Wizard in SOLIDWORKS to available drill tools in ProNest. See Importing SOLIDWORKS drill holes for more information.  

Default thread style For threaded holes that require tapping, this is the default tap style that will be used when the SOLIDWORKS part is imported. ProNest will attempt to match the threaded hole to an available tap tool that matches this thread style.   Choices: Coarse, Fine Note:

You can override the default thread style by including the word "Coarse" or "Fine" in the feature name for a given hole. See Importing SOLIDWORKS drill holes for more information.

Inventor These preferences control how ProNest imports AutoDesk Inventor® features and geometry.  

Top view coordinate system name The Top view coordinate system name preference in ProNest can be used to specify the name of a coordinate system in Inventor. If this is left blank, the default coordinate system in the drawing will be used during import.   The primary purpose of this preference is to aid in troubleshooting if parts are being brought into ProNest incorrectly flipped or mirrored.   To specify a user coordinate system (UCS) in Inventor:  1. On the 3D Model tab, in the Work Features group, click User Coordinate System.

 2. Set the origin by clicking a point on the part that intersects the face that you want to import. Click subsequent points to set the positive X, Y and Z axes.

- 270 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 l The origin must intersect the face you want to import.  l The XY plane should be parallel to the face you want to import.  l The Z axis should be perpendicular to the face you want to import.

 3. In the node on the right, you can rename the coordinate system as needed.

 4. In ProNest, make sure that you enter the same coordinate system name you use in Inventor in the Top view coordinate system name box (File > Preferences > 3D CAD Files).  

Import sheet metal parts only

- 271 -

ProNest 2019 Manual When selected, only sheet metal parts will be imported. When cleared, ProNest will import both solid parts and sheet metal parts.   This preference is used primarily when importing Inventor assembly files (.iam) to select which parts are included and which are not.  

Detect part thickness When this preference is enabled, ProNest will attempt to determine the thickness of the Inventor part and assign a ProNest material type and thickness to the part during import.   Part thickness is detected by locating a face that is parallel to the chosen face and is the furthest away in the same solid body. The distance between the two faces is calculated and set as the BOM thickness so that it gets applied when the part is added.   Tolerance The stated thickness must be ±0.001 in. (±0.0254 mm) of a listed ProNest thickness in order for a match to be made. When you select a material type and thickness in the Edit Part List and then import an Inventor part, the detected thickness in the part will be used instead of the thickness you selected. If there is BOM information in the Inventor file that specifies a material type (and optionally, grade), this BOM information will be used instead of the material selected in ProNest.  

Include construction geometry Enables or disables the reading of geometry used only for construction purposes.  

Enable bevel detection Identify beveled edges on Inventor parts and automatically assign ProNest beveling to them during import. This method doesn't require any bevel layer naming in CAD. Note:

 l Gradual bevel is not supported.  l Bevel detection for sheet metal parts is not supported.

To use automatic bevel detection for 3D CAD parts:  l Select this Enable bevel detection preference.  l On the Bevel page of your ProNest settings (

):

 l Select Use AutoBevel.  l Enter a prefix for bevel layer names. By default, the prefix is "BVL".  l On the Importing Parts page of your ProNest settings (

):

 l Map beveling to the cut process by entering the bevel prefix + wildcard (*). For instance, if the prefix is "BVL" you would enter BVL* for the Cut process.  l Make sure that you set the correct material for the 3D CAD file in ProNest before adding it to the part list.  l Set a Default Class that is bevel-compatible for the materials that you will be using. This way, when a material type and thickness are matched automatically, the correct bevel-capable class will be assigned as well.  l In Inventor, you may need to use a user coordinate system to ensure that the part is imported at the intended orientation.

- 272 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

The origin of the user coordinate system would need to intersect the top face of the bevel part. See Top view coordinate system name for more information.

- 273 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Warnings preferences Warnings All of these preferences control the visibility of certain warnings in ProNest. By default, all of the preferences in this section are selected meaning that their associated warning dialog would appear. Each of these warning dialogs contains a "Do not show me this again" check box. Selecting this check box would clear the associated preference in this section.

How do I get here in ProNest?  l On the File tab, click Preferences

, then click Warnings.

- 274 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Quoting preferences General The preferences in this section serve as default values when a new quote is created. Note that changing these preferences will not affect existing quotes.  

Expiration days Set a default number of days after the Created date when the quote will expire.  

Tax shipping Set whether or not to tax shipping costs by default.  

Show discount separately When selected, Discount will be displayed in a separate line at the bottom of a quote, below the subtotal.   When cleared, Discount will not be displayed separately in the quote, even though it is still being used in final price calculations.  

Include material costs When cleared, the Include material costs property (File tab > Quote > Properties) will be cleared by default.  

Custom fields These are default captions and values for custom fields. When a new quote is created, these custom fields will be available by default on the quote's Properties page (File tab > Quote > Properties). Note that custom fields will not appear in the actual quote unless a value is entered.   To add a new default custom field:  1. Click the Add button.  2. Enter a Caption.  3. If you want a default value to be inserted each time a new quote is created, enter a Value.

Costing Part area Select a method of computing a part's area that will be used for quoting. This is then used to calculate weight and ultimately the material costs shown in quotes. True Shape The 2-D surface area of the part. If a part has an interior profile, the surface area of the cut-out will not be considered a portion of that part.

- 275 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Rectangular The minimum rectangular space that a part occupies (including cut-outs, part leads, lead extensions, and loops).

  Enclosed The area contained within a part's exterior profile, including cut-outs.

Include scrap in the part area Select this preference if you want scrap attributed to parts when area is calculated for quoting.   Scrap method: Area increase (%) Take the part's area using the method selected above (True Shape, Rectangular, or Enclosed) and increase it by this percentage.   Example   - 276 -

ProNest 2019 Manual If the actual area of a part is 200 in.2 and the Area increase is set to 10%, the part area used in quoting figures would be: 220 in.2 [200 in. 2 + (200 × 10%)] Added margin Only applies when using Rectangular for Part Area. An extra margin or buffer will be added around the rectangular box surrounding a part.

You can enter the width of the margin (d in the illustration) in the lower box.   Units: in. or mm Allocated Scrap Area Use the allocated costing method to attribute scrap to a part's area. Note:

Quote preferences control how costing figures for parts (items) are calculated in quotes. They do not affect area calculations for secondary operations costs or shipping by weight (True Area is always used for secondary operations and shipping).

Company information Enter the default information about your company that you want to appear in the Prepared By section at the top of quotes.

- 277 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

This information will be used by default when new quotes are created. Any changes made here will not affect existing quotes, except for the Logo.  

Logo The Logo set in preferences will be used whenever a new quote is created or an existing quote is opened.   You can click the Browse button and select an image file to add your organization's logo. Allowable image file formats: .bmp .png .gif .jpg .jpeg

Phone The phone number set here will not appear by default in quotes. Instead, the phone number for the Author section on the Prepared By page (File tab > Quote > Prepared by) will appear in the quote.  

PDF Export These preferences are used when a quote is exported to PDF.  

Compressed Output file compression. This reduces file size but increases export time.  

Embedded fonts All fonts used in the report will be contained in the PDF output file so that the file will be displayed correctly when opened on a computer where these fonts are absent. This increases output file size.  

Background Export of graphic image will be assigned to a page into PDF file. This increases output file size.  

Print optimized - 278 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Graphic images are output in high resolution for correct printing. Enabling this option is necessary only when the document contains graphics and printing is necessary. This increases output file size.  

Outline When a report outline is used, this option enables export of the outline to the PDF document.     Document information This information will be embedded in the PDF document (in Document Properties):  l Title  l Author  l Subject  l Producer  l Creator   Authentication and permissions

Owner password Entering an owner password will turn on PDF security permissions. The owner password will be required to change PDF document security settings and permissions.  

User password This password will be required to open the PDF document. (The user password is also known as a Document Open Password.) If no user password is specified, the PDF will not require a password to be opened.   The following options control the PDF security settings and permissions, which restricts what can be done to the PDF document:  l  l  l  l

Print the document Modify the document Copy of text and graphics Add or modify text annotations

Selecting a checkbox will enable the action in the PDF, clearing a checkbox will prohibit the action. Note:

An owner password must be set for these security and permissions options to take effect.

  Viewer preferences

Hide toolbar Hides the toolbar in the PDF viewer.  

Hide menubar Hides the menubar in the PDF viewer.  

Hide window user interface Hides the window controls that are displayed in the background of the PDF viewer.  

Fit window Adjusts the document window to fit snugly around the opening page.

- 279 -

ProNest 2019 Manual  

Center window Positions the window in the center of the screen area.  

Print scaling When selected, in the PDF document print setup screen, Page scaling is set to "Shrink to printable area" by default. When cleared, Page scaling is set to "(None)".   How do I get here in ProNest?  l On the File tab, click Preferences

, then click Quoting.

- 280 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

6. JOBS What is a job? ProNest jobs provide you with an easy and powerful way of organizing your work by storing your settings, part list, plate list, and nesting information in a single file. Jobs have many different uses and applications. You can save unfinished work and return to it at a later time, store completed jobs for archival purposes, modify old jobs, or use multiple jobs to store different settings configurations for a single machine. Jobs are also an important part of organizing production information such as costing and material usage.

Jobs and settings Jobs are designed to work with the ProNest settings files that are installed on your computer. Each job is assigned a single machine (.cfg), which its settings are based on. A job must be able to access its machine file in order to function properly.   As you work on a job, you can customize your settings. When you save a job, your customized settings will be saved in the job file (.nif), separately from the settings saved in the machine. Later, when a job is opened, the settings from that job will be restored.   For a more in-depth look at how ProNest jobs work, follow the links below.  l "Creating jobs" on page 282  l "Saving jobs" on page 285  l "Changing your machine" on page 287  l Job templates  l "Changing materials in your job" on page 288  l "Job information" on page 289  l "Naming preferences" on page 263  l "Job Storage settings" on page 185

- 281 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Creating jobs ProNest always has a current job. When you open ProNest, a job is automatically started for you using the primary machine (.cfg) specified in your Preferences. You can create a new job using the machine of your choice at any time.

Start a new job  1. On the File tab, click New.

 2. In the Description box on the right, type a description for your job.  3. In the Machine box, select a machine for your job. This machine will become the basis for the settings in your job. Generally, you should select the machine that corresponds to the real world machine that you want to generate output for.  4. Select a default Material type and thickness for your job. All parts, plates, and nests in your job will use this material, unless otherwise specified.  5. If you are using a Process Parameters spreadsheet that uses class, select a default Class for your job.  6. Click Create. Once you have entered the job description and machine you will be ready to begin working on your job.   Note that until a job is explicitly saved with its own name, it has not been fully created. To learn more about saving your jobs, see "Saving jobs" on page 285. Tip:

The name of the current job is listed in the title bar at the top of the main ProNest window.

Start a new job from a template  1. On the File tab, click New.  2. Click New from existing.  3. Browse and select the job that you want to use as a template.  4. Click Open.

Set naming convention to use when new jobs are created Job naming preferences let you control how jobs are automatically named when they are created.  1. Open Preferences (on the File tab, select Preferences).  2. In the left pane, select Naming.  3. Using variables and text, enter a job naming formula. To learn more, see "Naming preferences" on page 263.

- 282 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Opening jobs Open a job  1. On the File tab, click Open. The Open dialog will appear. With the Files of type box set to ProNest Job (*.nif), browse to the folder containing the job you want to open.  2. Select the job file you want to open.  3. Click Open.

Open Job dialog in ProNest   On the right-hand side of the Open Job dialog is a box containing job information. This includes:  l The job’s file name and extension  l Description (if any)  l ProNest machine used by the job  l Quote associated with the job (if any)  l Date created  l Date last modified  l Version of ProNest last used to save the job

Restore settings from job Directly below the Job Information box is the Restore settings from job option. This controls how settings are loaded when a job is opened.   When selected:

- 283 -

ProNest 2019 Manual  l A fresh copy of settings from the machine used by the job (as shown in the job information box) is loaded from the CFG file.  l Any job-specific settings saved in the job will be used instead of the settings from the machine (CFG). This tells ProNest to completely restore settings to what they were when the job was saved.   When cleared:  l A fresh copy of settings from the machine used by the job is loaded from the CFG file.  l Any job-specific settings that were saved in the job will not be used. This is typically done when you have edited your machine settings and want to re-output a job using those new settings. When an existing job is opened, ProNest always attempts to load the machine used by that job. This means that ProNest changes from the current machine to the machine used by the job. The only exception is when the machine can't be found, in which case you will be prompted to select a replacement machine.

Open a copy of a job Any existing ProNest job can be opened as a template for a new job.  1. On the File tab, click New.  2. Click New from existing.  3. Select the job file you want to open.  4. Click Open. To learn more, see "Job templates" on page 286.

Opening a PNL You can also use the Open dialog to open a ProNest PNL (Part Nest List) file. This gives you a quick way to create a job around an existing part list. To open a PNL using the Open dialog:  1. On the File tab, click Open.  2. Set the Files of Type box to ProNest Part List (*.pnl) and browse to the folder containing the PNL you want to open.  3. Select the PNL you want to open.  4. Click Open. The contents of the part list will be replaced with parts from the PNL file that was opened. The plate list will be emptied, all existing nests will be deleted, and your current job will be renamed to match the name of the PNL file. Note that your machine and settings configuration will not be affected.

- 284 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Saving jobs Often you will want to save your work so you can return to it at a later time. The exact state of your job can be saved in a job file. ProNest jobs have an .nif extension.

Save a job  1. On the File tab, click Save. If the job hasn't been saved previously, the Save As dialog will appear.  2. Browse to the appropriate folder for your job.  3. In the File name box, type the name for your job file.  4. Click Save. The current job will be saved with the name you specified.

What is saved in a job? Specifically, the job file (.nif) contains:  l Nests. The exact state of all nests in your job are saved.  l Plate List. All of the plates in your plate list are saved.  l Part List. All of the parts that have been added to your part list are saved.  l Settings configuration. This includes your machine and process settings. If you have added any optional modules to ProNest, any changes made with these features will also be saved in your job.

Set default folder for saving jobs  1. Open settings (in the Quick Access toolbar, click Settings

).

 2. In the left pane, click Job Storage.  3. Enter a default job folder. When a job (.nif) that uses that machine is saved, it will be stored in the specified folder by default.

- 285 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Job templates Any existing ProNest job can be used as a template for a new job. Instead of building a new job from scratch, you can take the part list, plate list, nests, and settings from an existing job and use that as a starting point for the new job. This can reduce time spent setting up jobs, especially if they contain commonly-used parts.

Start a new job from a template  1. On the File tab, click New.  2. Click New from existing.  3. Browse and select the job that you want to use as a template.  4. Click Open. -or 1. On the File tab, click New.  2. In the My Templates section, select a job. The list of available jobs reflects the jobs found in the templates folder specified on that page. -or 1. On the File tab, click Recent.  2. Right-click a job and select Open a copy. A new job will be created based on the selected template. The new job will contain the nests, parts, plates, and settings from the original job. The new job will be named based on your Naming preferences.

Impact on inventory Any inventory plates that are used in the original job will be used again for the new job, as long as there is a sufficient quantity in inventory.   Nests that have been output in the original job will not yet be output in the new job. As a result, remnants or skeletons will not yet be saved to inventory. Likewise, inventory plates that are nested on in the new job will not yet be consumed from inventory.

- 286 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Changing your machine Each job is assigned a single machine (.cfg) that serves as the basis for its settings. Changing this machine will cause ProNest to discard the current machine settings and reload new settings from the replacement machine that is selected.

Change the machine for the current job  1. On the File tab, click Info.  2. Click the arrow next to Machine, then click Change Machine.  3. Select a new machine from the list. If needed, the Change Machine dialog will appear.  

  This dialog only appears when you need to map processes and modify existing leads in your job.   In the Process Mappings section, ProNest will automatically map the existing processes in your job to the processes in your replacement machine. If the replacement machine has more than one process per process class (cut, scribe, punch), you can manually select new process mappings for your job.   In the Leads (Part and Crop) section, you can specify whether to modify the leads for existing parts in your job with the leads settings in your replacement machine. Selecting Never will leave existing leads unchanged. Tip: You can set the default action for modifying leads when the machine is changed while a job is open.  1. On the File tab, click Preferences.  2. On the General page, use the When changing machines, how should leads be modified to set a default action.

- 287 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Changing materials in your job Using the Change Material feature, you can substitute a new material in place of an existing material that is used in your job. When a material is changed, all parts, plates and nests that are using the existing material will be reassigned to use the new material specified.   To change a material in your job:  1. On the File tab, click Info, then click Change Materials. All of the current materials used in your job will be listed.  2. For each material you want to reassign, select a new material. If you are using a Process Parameters spreadsheet, the list of available materials comes the spreadsheet. Otherwise, the list will come from the Materials in the database.  3. Click OK.

Changing materials of nested parts When parts are already nested, the Change Materials feature can still be used to change materials used in the job. Most often, this is done in order to change the Class assigned to parts and not the material type and thickness.   Some common scenarios where you may want to do this include:  l Removing True Hole® or other technology  l Changing from one consumable set to another   When the material is changed for nested parts:  l Feedrate, Kerf, and other Process Parameters will be updated with values for the new material.  l Parts will not be moved on the nest. If the separation values of the new material are different, parts may be in conflict on the nest.  l Leads of nested parts are not updated.  l Cut sequence of nests is not reapplied.  l Inventory plates that are in use will not have their material changed.

Considerations  l Changing from a non-True Hole class to a True Hole class will update the Process Parameters used, but won't use True Hole leads.  l Some different classes can't be used together on the same nest, even if the material and thickness is the same. After changing classes of nested parts, it may be a good idea to review your nests to make sure that your material utilization is still acceptable.  l Changing the material type or thickness of parts nested on inventory plates will cause those parts to be in conflict on the nest.

Changing the material of beveled parts Once a part has been beveled and Make Pass Profiles is selected, the material type, thickness, and class should not be modified for that part. Bevel angles, leads, and other settings parameters are applied based on material. Also, bevel consumables are specified using the class name. Changing the material of a beveled part can result in incorrect cutting parameters.   If you need to change the material of a part that is already beveled, you will need to delete the part from the part list, add it again with the new material, and then reapply beveling.

- 288 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Job information This area provides you with general information and four different utilization figures for your current job. To view job information:  l On the File tab, click Info. This section displays the file path, description, number of nests, number of parts, maximum torch spacing, and maximum torches used for your job. You can edit the description of your job in this section.  

Utilization (Averages) This section contains four different utilization percentages: true, crop, rectangular, and plate used. These utilization percentages, which detail material usage for your entire job, reflect the ratio of part surface area to total plate surface area.

True This is the ratio of the true area of all nested parts relative to the total plate area. Note that if a part has an interior profile, the surface area of the cut-out will not be considered a portion of that part.   Example:  

 

Figure 1   The nest shown in Figure 1 has a true utilization of 6.58%. For the purposes of this demonstration, the true area of the part is light blue, the plate area is outlined in red.

Crop If any of the nests in your job have been cropped, ProNest will calculate the crop utilization as the ratio of the true area of all nested parts relative to the plate area up to the crop line. The section of plate that has been cropped off will not be included in the calculated plate area. If your job does not contain any cropped nests, this value will be identical to the true utilization percentage.   Example:  

- 289 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Figure 2   The nest shown in Figure 2 has been cropped. The true area of the part appears light blue, the plate area used for this calculation is outlined in red. The crop utilization for the nest in this job is 48%.

Plate used utilization This percentage can be useful for determining how tightly parts are nested in a job. To generate this value, ProNest places an X,Y point on the part that is furthest away from the nesting home. As the distance between the furthest part and the nesting home increases, the plate used utilization will decrease.   Example:  

Figure 3   The nest in Figure 3 has a plate used utilization of 47%. The part area is light blue, the total plate area is outlined in red.    

- 290 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Figure 4 The nest in Figure 4 has a plate used utilization of 17%. Note that this percentage is lower than the nest in Figure 3 because the parts are further away from the nesting home.

Rectangular utilization ProNest uses the minimum rectangular space that a part occupies (including part leads and lead extensions) when calculating part area. Rectangular utilization is the ratio of the rectangular area of all parts in a job relative to total plate area.   Example:  

Figure 5 The nest in Figure 5 has a rectangular utilization of 11.1%. The rectangular area of the part is light blue in color, the plate area is outlined in red.   Note: The true, crop, rectangular, and plate used utilizations shown in this dialog are averages of all of the nests in your job. You can find utilization values for a single nest by viewing Nest Properties (double-click Nest n of n in the status bar of the main window.

- 291 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

History data The ProNest database can store archival job and nest information, which can be used for reporting and analysis. Important:

It is recommended that you save job history data if you are using Data Sync and need ProNest production data related to work orders or inventory plates. Be sure to activate the preference to save history data before doing any work in ProNest, as archival job data is only recorded when this preference is enabled.

Saving history data  1. On the File tab, click Preferences.  2. On the General page, select After output, save job history data. With this preference enabled, historical job and nest information will be stored in the ProNest database each time you create output for a job.

Viewing history data Unlike other areas of the ProNest database, history data is not viewable from within ProNest. To view history data, you must access the database using SQL Server or some other means.   You can view history data from within SQL Server Management Studio. This is software is free to download and use. If you do not have SQL Server Management Studio installed, you will need to install it before proceeding.

History data and SQL Server During installation, the following history tables are created in the ProNest database (ProNest13):  l history.JobParts  l history.Jobs  l history.NestParts  l history.Nests  l history.PlateInvCreated   In addition, there are four views that contain history data:  l  l  l  l

history.PlatesCreated history.PlatesUsed history.UniqueNestParts history.WorkOrderParts

Saving nest images for job history You can configure ProNest to save images of each nest in history data after output:  1. On the File tab, click Preferences.  2. On the General page, select After output, save an image of each nest for job history. ProNest will save an image file (.png) of each nest for job history after creating NC output. The image file will be named according to the NestID for a given nest (in the history tables) and will be saved to the History Nest Image folder specified on the Miscellaneous tab of your preferences.

- 292 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Production Manager Production Manager is an optional module that enables you to find jobs and nests that are currently in production and view details about each nest, including the amount of available space on the nest and whether it has been cut or not.   Production Manager also provides a way of limiting inventory plate usage, so that inventory plates that are nested on but not yet cut are blocked from being used in another nest/job. Likewise, any remnant or skeleton plates that are created from inventory plates do not appear as available plates for nesting until after the parent plate has been completed.

Open the Production Manager editor You can access ProNest database editors internally from the Data tab in the main ProNest window. Database editors can also be run externally as stand-alone applications.   To access stand-alone Production Manager database editor:  l

Start > Hypertherm CAM > Production Manager.

  To open the Customers editor from within ProNest:  l On the Data tab, click Production Manager.  

The Production Manager editor shows a view of all past and present jobs, as well as the nests that belong to each job. Note:

If you need to make changes to a nest's NC program (before the nest is cut), you can simply "undo output" for the nest or for all nests in the job. This will delete any program(s) associated with that nest/job and release all inventory plates used.

- 293 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Enabling Production Manager  1. In ProNest, on the File tab, click Preferences.  2. On the General tab, clear the After output, change each nest's status to 'Complete' box. Clearing this preference will set nest status to Pending after output.

Status Each nest listed has a status: Pending The NC program has been created for a nest, but the nest has not yet been cut. In Production Nest is being cut, but is not yet complete. When a nest is started in Production Kiosk, the status is automatically set to In Production. Complete When a nest has been cut, it's status can be set to Complete. Any inventory plate the nest is using will be depleted from inventory, while any remnants or skeleton plates saved from the nest will be created in inventory.   Nests that are finished in Production Kiosk will automatically be set to Complete.   When using Production Manager with Data Sync, when nest status changes to Complete, this can trigger a Data Sync Export Task (it is a Nest Cut event). Refer to Data Sync Help for more information.   Jobs also have a status, which can't be edited. If any nest in a job is Pending, the job will be Pending as well. A job will have a Complete status when all of its nests are Complete.

Changing the status of a nest Nest status can be changed using the Change Status toolbar button.  1. On the Nests tab, select the nest you want to change.  2. Click the Change Status button in the toolbar and select a new status.

Free space The amount of free space for each nest is shown in the grid. This allows you to easily identify nests that still have available space and locate the corresponding job so that additional parts can be added, if needed.   The Free space percentage is a rough estimate of the amount of usable space on a nest. ProNest subtracts the area of all nested parts and the separation around them from the total plate area to get this number. The higher the number, the more available space on the nest.

Adding parts to existing nests If a nest is Pending (meaning it is not yet cut) and has enough free space, you can add more parts to it:  1. Open the corresponding job (NIF) for that nest in ProNest.  2. Find the nest.  3. Undo output for that nest (Home tab > Output > Undo Output).  4. Add more parts.  5. Output the nest again.

- 294 -

ProNest 2019 Manual The nest will appear again in Production Manager, with a Pending status.

- 295 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

7. PART LIST What is the part list? The ProNest part list contains all of the parts that you have added to your job. When you import part files into your job from a part source, ProNest processes these files and then adds them to the part list. Added parts contain all of the information from the source file as well as the nesting information that was added when the part was imported.   To learn more about using the part list, see "The Part List task pane" on page 297.

- 296 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

The Part List task pane The Part List task pane contains all of the parts that have been added to your job. It also displays additional part information including quantity, nesting status, revision, and whether the part can be placed on the current nest.

Show or hide the Part List task pane  l On the View tab, select Part List.  

Part List task pane   Characteristics of the part list:  l Beneath each part name, ProNest displays the quantity nested versus the total required quantity of a part (for example, "2 of 4 nested").  l If a part on the nest is selected, the quantity selected will appear in brackets after the nested/required quantity (for example, "1 of 4 nested [1]").  l A vertical gold bar (

) next to a part indicates that the part can be nested on the current nest.

 l A vertical gray bar (

) will appear next to parts that cannot be nested on the current nest.

Certain parts cannot be nested on a given plate. This will occur if the part material and plate material do not match, or if you are using part class and are attempting to nest two or more parts of different classes on the same plate. Tip: By right-clicking a part in the part list you can view or edit part properties, make last minute changes to your part in Advanced Edit, export the part to DXF, output NC code for the part, or delete the part from the part list.

Hide depleted parts Selecting this checkbox will hide parts in your part list that have already been nested; only non-nested parts will be displayed. - 297 -

ProNest 2019 Manual  

Anchor part to cursor When selected, the highlighted part in the part list will be affixed to the mouse cursor.

You can place copies of that part on the nest by simply clicking on the nest. See for Adding parts to the nest manually for more information on nesting using anchored parts.   To remove an anchored part from the cursor:  l Press ESC -or l Right-click an empty area on the nest.

Part List Pane Options You can customize the Part List task pane by clicking Options to reveal a list of modifiable settings.

Select parts to show This setting controls which parts are visible in the part list.   Choices: All parts, Only matching current nest material and class, Only nested on the current nest All parts: All parts in the job will be visible.   Only matching current nest material and class: Parts that cannot be nested on the current nest will not be displayed in the part list.   Only nested on the current nest: Only parts that are nested on the current nest will be displayed in the part list.  

Select how the list is sorted This setting controls the order in which parts appear in the part list.   Choices: Nesting order, Alphabetical order Nesting order: Parts will be listed in the order in which they would be nested. Parts will be listed from largest to smallest, with the largest part appearing at the top. However, if parts in the part list have different priority values, they will be listed according to priority.   Alphabetical order: Parts will be listed alphabetically by part name.  

Show property hints for parts Using your mouse cursor, you can point to a part in the part list to display part details.  

Automatically anchor part to cursor The Anchor part to cursor option on the Part List pane will be enabled automatically whenever you click a different part in the part list.

- 298 -

ProNest 2019 Manual     Any changes that you make to the above Part List settings will be stored when you save your job.  

Part List torch settings Using the Part List, you can modify the torch settings used for manual nesting. By default, the Part List torch settings match your ProNest settings ( ) for torches. Any changes that you make to Part List torch settings will apply only to the parts added manually to nests in your current job.

Number of torches This setting defines the actual number of torches/heads that will be used for manual nesting. The number of available torches is limited by the maximum number of torches listed in your ProNest settings (  

).

Important: The remaining torch settings are only active if Number of Torches is greater than 1.

Torch spacing type This setting defines the torch spacing type for manual nesting.    Choices: Equal, Fixed, Variable   Equal: The torch spacing is based on the nest width and the number of torches being used. It is calculated by dividing the nest's width (ProNest y-axis) by the Number of torches.   Fixed: The torch spacing is always the same value (defined by Torch spacing) - regardless of the number of torches used.   Variable: ProNest will first try to nest all parts using the maximum number of torches allowed. If it cannot place the part, it will reduce the number of torches by one and try again. This process is repeated until it has tried with only one torch.  

Torch spacing Whenever Torch spacing type is set to Fixed, this value defines the torch spacing used for manual nesting.   Units: Distance Range: Minimum torch spacing to 10,000.0 in. Recommended Value: 20.0 in.   This setting is activated only if Torch spacing type is set to Fixed.

- 299 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Part properties To view and edit part properties from the main ProNest window:  l Right-click a part in the Part List task pane and select Properties. The Properties pane will open, showing properties for the part that is currently selected in the part list.   Quantity

Required The required quantity of the selected part can be modified in this box.   Range: 1 to 10,000   Attributes

Name The name of the selected part can be modified in this box. Note:

The Allow parts in the Part List to be renamed preference (File > Preferences > General tab) must be selected in order to edit a part name.

Revision The revision of the selected part can be edited in this box. Revision can be used to keep track of different versions of a part.  

File name The full path of the part's source file.   If the part was loaded from a part file token, this will be indicated by a  

icon.

Size Length × width of the selected part, including leads and extensions.  

Material The material assigned to the selected part. Note: When spreadsheets are used, the list of available materials comes from the materials found in your Process Parameters spreadsheet. When spreadsheets are not used, the list of available materials comes from your material database.

Class The class of the selected part. Class can be used to organize your materials using specialized information such as cutting gas or amperage. Parts with the different classes can't be placed on the same nest.   Available classes come from the Process Parameters spreadsheet. See Overview of class for more information.  

Priority Priority is used to sort parts for automatic nesting. All things being equal, parts with a priority of 1 will nest before parts with a priority of 99.   - 300 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Range: 1 to 99 Recommended Value: 5 Tip:

A priority value of 99 is reserved for filler (A generally useful part that can be nested on any nest - as long as doing so doesn't prevent non-filler parts from nesting. During automatic nesting, parts with a priority of 99 are used as filler parts) parts. Filler parts are nested on a plate during automatic nesting only when:  l At least one non-filler part has already been nested on the plate.  l Automatic nesting has already tried to place all other parts with a priority less than 99 on the plate.

Initial rotation A part can be rotated (counter-clockwise) by defining an initial rotation angle. This rotation will become the part's "natural" orientation. Adjusting this value will not change the position of parts that are already nested.   Units: Degrees (°) Range: 0 to 360° Recommended Value: 0°  

Grain restraint This setting is commonly used with parts that have grain restrictions (they must run parallel with the grain of the material). The grain restraint angle defines a set of valid part orientations. For example, a value of 180° will limit valid part orientations to 0° and 180°. A value of 360° will restrict rotation completely - allowing only the part's natural orientation. A value of 0° will allow any rotation.   Units: Degrees (°) Range: 0 to 360° Recommended Value: 0°   Note: The grain restraint angle will not restrict parts that are rotated manually, except during smart drag with rotation. If a part is rotated manually to an angle that violates the part's rotation restriction, ProNest will display the error message Part orientation violates rotation restriction and will show the part in conflict.

Mirror A part's mirror value will affect how ProNest will nest the part during automatic nesting, CLC Quad, and CLC Array.   Choices: Never, Always, Either   Never - ProNest will never mirror the part. Always - ProNest will always mirror the part. Either - ProNest will decide which part orientation is best: natural or mirrored. Important: For CLC Quad to work with certain parts (triangles, parts with only one square corner) the mirror value must be set to Either.

Prohibit filling When selected, a part will not be allowed to have smaller parts nested inside of it. As a result, ProNest will not place parts inside the interior profiles of the part during AutoNest. If a smaller part is manually placed inside of the part, the smaller part will appear in conflict on the nest.   A part with Prohibit filling turned on has cross-hatching drawn in its interior profiles.

- 301 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Allow fly cutting Select this setting to enable fly cutting for the part. Parts that do not have this property selected will not be fly cut.   AutoNest Properties

Allow pattern array Having this setting selected means that a part can be pattern arrayed during AutoNest.  

Allow CLC array Having this setting selected means that a part can be CLC arrayed during AutoNest.  

Allow leads to move Having this setting selected means that a part's leads can be moved during AutoNest.  

Allow dynamic align When selected, a part can be dynamically aligned during AutoNest. Eligible parts will be common line cut or bridged, depending on the Strategy in Dynamic Align settings page.     Other Properties

Reference You can assign whatever type of reference to a part that you want.  

Due date Use the expanding calendar in this box to assign a due date to a part.  

Customer A customer can be assigned to a part from this box. The list of customers comes from your customer database.  

Remarks Any remarks for a part can be added in this field.  

Misc 1-3 These fields can be used to add miscellaneous information about a part.  

- 302 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

What is a PNL? A PNL (Part Nest List) file is a tab-delimited text file (by default) containing a list of the parts used in a particular job. PNLs contain the attributes for each part, including file name, material, thickness, required quantity, description, and other BOM information, as well as nesting status. PNLs enable you to easily store all of the parts in your job in a single file. Important: Parts that were created with Pipe or VSP will not be saved in the PNL.

PNL and SNL files PNL files work in conjunction with SNL (Sheet Nest List) files. SNL files contain a list of all of the sheets (or plates) in a particular job, and store all sheet information such as plate type, dimensions, material, thickness, weight, and required quantity. Each time a PNL is created, a corresponding SNL of the same name is automatically created and stored with it. Tip:

You can configure ProNest to automatically save PNL and SNL files when a job is saved:  l On the File tab, click Preferences, and then, on the General page, select the Save the part list (*.pnl) and plate list (*.snl) with the Job box.

Using PNLs, you can:  l  l  l  l

Easily store parts and plates from a job Open a part list and/or plate list in different jobs whenever you want Transfer lists of parts between ProNest and other software applications Exchange part and plate information with external manufacturing systems, such as ERP and MRP

- 303 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Importing/Exporting a PNL You can easily create a new PNL in ProNest at any time using the Export PNL feature. Existing PNLs can be opened in ProNest using the Import PNL feature.

Importing a PNL Importing a PNL will bring the list of parts and plates into your current job.  1. On the Home tab, click the arrow next to Edit Part List, then click Import Part List.  2. Browse to the folder containing the PNL you want to open.  3. Select the PNL you want to open.  4. Click Open. The parts and plates contained in the PNL and associated SNL will be added to your current job, appending any parts, plates and nests that already exist in your job. Note that your job name, machine, and settings configuration will not change. Tip:

You can also open a PNL file in ProNest using the Open dialog. This can be useful if you intend to create a new job that is built around an existing PNL. To learn more, see "Opening jobs" on page 283.

Exporting a PNL You can create a PNL containing all of the parts, plates and current nests in your job by exporting your parts list.  1. On the Home tab, click the arrow next to Edit Part List, then click Export Part List.  2. In the File name box, type a name for your PNL.  3. Click Save. Your part list file will be saved in the designated folder. An SNL file of the same name will also be saved in this folder. Important: Parts that were created with Pipe or VSP will not be saved in the PNL. When a part list is exported, ProNest will store the nesting status of all parts and plates in your job. If you have parts in your parts list that are not yet nested and then export a PNL, ProNest will create a main PNL containing all nested and unnested parts in your job, as well as a separate "leftover" PNL file containing only unnested parts. This "leftover" PNL file will have a name that is appended with "_lo", followed by the .pnl extension (for example, "FileName_lo.pnl"). Advanced: You can also create a PNL manually outside of ProNest using a text editor. To learn more, see "Manually generating a PNL (PNL file format)" on page 305.

- 304 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Manually generating a PNL (PNL file format) PNLs and SNLs are tab-delimited (by default) ASCII text files that contain information about a particular job, including lists of parts and sheets. Typically, these files are created in ProNest using the Export Part List feature. However, you can also create or edit a PNL outside of ProNest using a text editor (such as Notepad) or a spreadsheet program (such as Excel). Advanced: Manually creating a PNL or SNL is considered an advanced type of action.

PNL file format The first line of the PNL gives general information about the job, including job description, work order name, customer, and material thickness units. Lines two, three, and four are not used, and should be denoted with a character return. Each of the remaining n lines give information about a part to be nested. Tabs must separate the fields on a given line (although a tab can be replaced by a different delimiter by adjusting the PNL Delimiter on the Miscellanous preferences page). If a text field is blank (only certain fields are allowed to be blank), it must be represented by three spaces. All other fields must contain a valid value. A PNL file name must have the .pnl extension.   The following table details the file format for a PNL file:  

Row/ Column   Line No.

Field

Maximum Field Size

Description

Valid Values

Blank Allowed? (Use 3 spaces for blank fields)

1

A

Job descrip- description of the job tion

60

any text string

yes

1

B

Work order name of the work order name

50

any text string

yes

1

C

Customer

the name of the customer for this job

50

any text string

yes

1

D

Material thickness units

The units used to define/interpret the material thickness. If left blank, inch is assumed.

1

I = inch M = metric

yes

2

-

(not used)

--

--

(character return)

yes

3

-

(not used)

--

--

(character return)

yes

4

-

(not used

--

--

(character return)

yes

n (start- A ing at 5)

Name

the full path of the part file

259

valid path name

no

n

B

File type

the type of file (no longer used). This should be set to 0.

1

0 = token file 1 = nc file

no

n

C

Required

the number of copies of the part to nest

5

0 - 65535

no

n  

D

Nested

the number of copies of the part already nested

5

0 - 65535

no

n

E

Priority

influences the order of nesting

2

0 - 99 (a priority value of 99 is reserved for filler parts)

no

- 305 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Row/ Column   Line No.

Field

n

F

Grain restraint

n

G

n

Maximum Field Size

Description

an angle by which to limit rotation by a multiple of (for things like grain restriction), generally either 0 (no restriction) or 180

Valid Values

Blank Allowed? (Use 3 spaces for blank fields)

20

0.0 - 360.0 (360 will prevent rotano tion by any angle except the initial orientation)  

Initial rota- the initial rotation angle of the part tion

20

0.0 - 360.0

no

H

Units

units used to define/interpret the part

1

I = inch M = metric

no

n

I

Mirror option

determines mirror state of nested copies of 1 the part

0 = never mirrored 1 = always mirrored 2 = either

no

n

J

Autocluster determines if part will be clustered with itself

0 = don't autocluster 1 = try to autocluster

 

n

K

Controller

The name of the controller. If you are 259 importing a CNC file, it's the name of the CIF. If you are importing an MTC token file, BTOKEN. If you are importing a CAD file, CADFILE.

valid controller name = CNC file CADFILE = CAD file BTOKEN = MTC Token file

 

n

L

Inventory ID

The inventory Part ID number (if the part is 10 from the Part Library Database) Zero (0) indicates a non-inventory part.  

0 - 4294967295

no

n

M

Reference (Job ID)

the Job ID number of the part (for the History Database)

60

any text string

yes

n

N

Description the description of the part

80

any text string

yes

n

O

Auto common line cut

determines if a part will be common line cut with itself

1

0 = don't auto CLC 1 = try pair CLC 2 = try quad CLC 3 = try both pair and quad CLC

no

n

P

Material name

name of the material

29

Valid material name

yes

n

Q

Material thickness

thickness of the material

20

0.0 - 100.0

yes

n

R

Due date string

due date string of the part

30

any text string

yes

n

S

Misc 1

miscellaneous text field

60

any text string

yes

n

T

Misc 2

miscellaneous text field

60

any text string

yes

- 306 -

1

ProNest 2019 Manual

Row/ Column   Line No.

Field

Maximum Field Size

Description

Blank Allowed? (Use 3 spaces for blank fields)

Valid Values

n

U

Misc 3

miscellaneous text field

60

any text string

yes

n

V

Auto tab

determines if part will be automatically tabbed using auto tab settings

1

0 = don't auto tab 1 = try auto tab

no

n

W

Due date

due date of the part

20

the integral part of the value is the yes number of days that have passed since 12/30/1899. The fractional part of the value is the time of day, for example: 35065.75 = 1/1/1996 6:00 p.m.

n

X

Customer

the name of the customer for the part (this 50 must exactly match the name of a customer in the database)

any text string

yes

n

Y

Remarks

remarks for the part

60

any text string

yes

n

Z

Part class

part class of the part (used to restrict nest- 50 ing and as an optional key into the process parameters spreadsheet.

any text string

yes

n

AA

CAD File Number  

If this part belongs to a multi-part CAD drawing, it is the number of the part. Note: Any non-zero value for this field should be set only by ProNest when a PNL is exported.

--

0 = part does not belong to a multi-part CAD drawing n = the number of the part in the CAD drawing

no

n

AB

Prohibit filling

Prohibit filling for the part

1

0 = Do not prohibit filling 1 = Prohibit filling

no

n

AC

Grade

Material grade

40

any text string

yes

n

AD

Revision

Part revision

20

any text string

yes

n

AE

Allow CLC Array

The part can be CLC arrayed during AutoNest

1

0 = Do not allow CLC array during yes automatic nesting 1 = Allow CLC array during automatic nesting

    The text of a PNL file should be organized as follows, with tabs separating the fields in a given line:     1

A job description

B work order name

C customer

D material thickness units

- 307 -

E  

F  

ProNest 2019 Manual

 

A

B

C

D

E

F

2

(character return)

 

 

 

 

 

3

(character return)

 

 

 

 

 

4

(character return)

 

 

 

 

 

n 

name

file type (not used)

required

nested

priority

(etc.)

 

SNL File Format The SNL is a tab-delimited text file that contains a list of sheets. Each group of 5 lines defines a particular sheet (1n - 5n, where n is the nth sheet). The fields on a given line must be separated by tabs (although a tab can be replaced by a different delimiter by adjusting the PNL Delimiter on the Miscellanous preferences page). If a text field is blank (only certain fields are allowed to be blank) it must be represented by three spaces. If a blank field is the only field of a given line (2n, 3n, or 4n), no spaces should be used. All other fields must contain a valid value. The SNL file name must be identical to the PNL file it is associated with and must have the .snl extension.   The following table details the file format for an SNL file:   Row/ Line No.

Column

Field

Maximum Field Size

Description

Valid Values

1n

A

Type

the type of sheet

1

0 = rectangle 1 = circle 2 = remnant 3 = skeleton

1n

B

Required

the number of copies of the sheet to nest on

5

0 - 65535

1n

C

Nested

the number of copies of the sheet already nested on

5

0 - 65535

1n

D

Thickness

the material thickness

20

0.0 - 99.0

1n

E

X dimension

the X dimension of the sheet

20

0.0 - 999.0

1n

F

Y dimension

the Y dimension of the sheet

20

0.0 - 999.0

1n

G

Diameter

the diameter of the sheet (for circular sheets)

20

0.0 - 999.0

1n

H

Units

the units used to define/interpret the sheet

1

0 = inch 1 = metric

1n

I

Inventory ID

the inventory ID of the sheet

10

0 - 4294967295

1n

J

Controller

the name of the controller

259

valid controller name = CNC file BTOKEN = MTC token file

1n

K

Weight

the weight of the sheet

20

0.0 - 999999.0

1n

L

Date

the date assigned to the sheet

11

a text string in the following format (can be

- 308 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Row/ Line No.

Column

Field

Maximum Field Size

Description

Valid Values blank): YYYYMMDD YYYY = year MM = month DD = day (for example: 19961117 = November 17, 1996)

1n

M

Priority

influences the order of nesting

2

0 - 99

1n

N

Stack

the number of sheets that can be stacked edge to edge for 2 multiple torch cutting

1 - 99

2n

A

Material

the sheet material

29

any text string (can be just a carriage return)

3n

A

Display name

the name of the sheet to be used in screens, etc.

39

any text string (can be just a carriage return)

4n

A

Sheet description a description of the sheet

79

any text string (can be just a carriage return)

5n

A

Name

the full path of the sheet file

259

valid path name (can be blank)

5n

B

Initial Rotation

the initial rotation angle of the sheet

20

0.0 - 360.0

5n

C

Grade

material grade

40

any text string

  The text of an SNL file should be organized as follows, with tabs separating the fields in a given line:     

A

B

C

D

E

F

1n

type

required

nested

thickness

x dimension

(etc.)

2n

material

 

 

 

 

 

3n

display name

 

 

 

 

 

4n

sheet description

 

 

 

 

 

5n

name

initial rotation angle

grade

 

 

 

- 309 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Exporting a part to DXF file Any part in the ProNest part list can be saved as a DXF file. The DXF file will be saved according to your Export DXF settings.

Export a part to DXF file  1. Right-click a part in the part list and click Export to DXF.  2. Browse to a folder and enter a file name.  3. Click Save. -or 1. Bring a part into Advanced Edit.  2. On the File menu, select Export to DXF.  3. Browse to a folder and enter a file name.  4. Click Save.

Export multiple parts in the part list to DXF file  1. Open the Edit Part List window (on the Home tab, click Edit Part List

).

 2. In the Part List grid, select the parts that you want to export.  l Hold CTRL + click to select parts individually  l Hold SHIFT + click to select a range of parts  l Press CTRL + A to select all parts in the part list.  3. Right-click the selection and click Export to DXF.  4. Browse to a folder to save the files, then click Select Folder. A separate DXF file will be created for each part, with a file name that matches the part name in ProNest.

- 310 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

About the Edit Part List window The editing of a job's part list is done in the Edit Part List window. From this window you can build a part list for your job by importing part source files into ProNest and adding properties to those parts.

Open the Edit Part List

 l On the Home tab, click Edit Part List.  

The Edit Part List window   The Edit Part List window has menus and toolbars along the top and a status bar along the bottom. Note:

2D CAD Program ProNest 2019 includes a 2D CAD editor that provides all of the basic features needed to create or edit a detailed CAD drawing.  l You can open 2D CAD at any time while using ProNest by clicking the Edit Part List window.

button in the toolbar of the

The rest of the window is split into four sections:   Part Sources The upper-left contains ProNest part sources. Each part source appears as a different tab. The CAD and VSP tabs are standard part sources. Other tabs will also appear here, depending on which modules you have purchased. - 311 -

ProNest 2019 Manual   The following part sources are available in ProNest, either as standard features or as part of an optional module:  l

CAD

 l

VSP

 l

Pipe (optional module)

 l

Library

 l

Assemblies

 l

Work Orders (optional module)

  Part List The lower-left contains the job’s part list. All parts that have been added will appear here. The nesting properties for each part in the part list are displayed next to the part name. You can modify these nesting properties by clicking on a field and entering the value you want.   Preview The upper-right contains a tool window called Preview. The currently selected part is displayed here. If the selected part is from one of the part sources, then this preview is showing a pre-processed view of the selected part file. If the selected part is in the part list, then the preview displays the part exactly as it would nest on a plate.   Properties The lower-right contains a tool window called Properties. Properties for the currently selected part source file are displayed here. Changing these values will affect the selected part and any subsequent parts that are added to the part list. If the selected part is from the part list, however, the properties reflect the actual properties of that part only. Tip:

You can configure ProNest to open the Edit Part List window automatically when you start a new job:  l From the main ProNest window, on the File tab, click Preferences, then on the General page under Job Preferences, select "Automatically open the Edit Part List dialog after starting a new job".

- 312 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding parts to the part list Generally, parts are added to the part list using the Edit Part List window.

Open the Edit Part List

 l On the Home tab, click Edit Part List.   When you add parts into ProNest using the Edit Part List window, you can control how properties are applied to the part. There are two basic stages to adding parts to the part list in your job:

Stage 1: Applying part properties This involves changing the CAD Import (for CAD files only), Nesting, and Leads properties that will be applied to the selected part source file. These changes are made to selected parts before they are added to the part list.   To apply part properties:  1. From the Edit Part List window, in the Part Sources explorer, select a part source file by clicking it once.  2. From the Properties task pane (lower-right), using the Nesting, Leads, or CAD Import (if applicable) tabs, make any changes you want to part properties. If no changes are made to the properties of a selected part in the Part Sources explorer, ProNest will apply default properties from your settings when the part is added.   To learn more about applying nesting and leads properties, see "Nesting properties" on page 322 and "Leads properties" on page 315.

Stage 2: Adding the part to the part list The second stage of this procedure involves actually adding the part to the part list. Once you are satisfied with the properties applied to part source file, you will be ready to add the part.   To add a selected part to the part list:  l Click the Add Part button while a part is selected. -or l Double-click a part in the Part Sources explorer. Added parts will appear in the Part List grid (in the lower-left of the Edit Part List window).   Once a part has been added to the part list, it will contain all of the information from the part source file, such as part geometry, as well as CAD Import (for CAD files only), Nesting, and Leads properties that have been applied to the part.   If necessary, parts in the part list can be modified after they have been imported. Modifying parts can be done in a number of places in the Edit Part List window, including the Preview, Part List, and the Properties panes, as well as from the main ProNest window. Tip:

You can view the part attribute, utilization, and costing information for an added part by selecting the part and then clicking the Utilization and Costing tab in the Properties section of the Edit Part List window.

The method for adding parts differs based on the type of part source being added. To learn how to add specific types of parts to the part list, follow the links below:

- 313 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 l "Adding CAD files to the part list" on page 333  l "Adding VSP parts" on page 383  l "Adding a pipe part to the part list" on page 389  l "Adding library parts to the part list" on page 390  l "Adding assemblies to the part list" on page 391

- 314 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Leads properties Before a part is added to the part list, it is important to specify how leads should be applied to that part source file. You can control how leads are assigned to a part using the Leads tab.   To access the Leads tab:  l From the Edit Part List window, in the Properties tool window, click the Leads tab. When you make changes to leads properties, your changes will be applied to the selected part(s) in the Part Sources explorer, as well as any subsequent parts that are added in the current job. You can customize the leads for as many different parts as you want. Leads properties can be customized for each of the following categories of leads:  l  l  l  l

Interior Corner Leads Interior Side Leads Exterior Corner Leads Exterior Side Leads

  If a part doesn't have a certain category of lead (for example, a circular part doesn't have a corner lead), the leads property is ignored for that part.   By default, leads properties reflect the default values specified in your ProNest settings ( List window has no effect on the default values in your settings.  

). Changing a leads property in the Edit Part

Use interior/exterior leads from settings Leads will be applied using the information in your ProNest settings when importing parts.  

Use the custom leads below Leads will be applied using the properties specified below. Note: The following settings are active only when Use the custom leads below is selected.

Locked When locked, lead position on the profile (start/end point) and lead properties (style, size, angle, etc.) will not change during any manual or automatic operation in ProNest. This includes automatic nesting, collision avoidance, manual or automatic move leads, etc.   Locked leads are indicated by a yellow padlock.

To lock the leads on a part:  1. In the Edit Part List window, select an added part in the Part List grid.  2. In the Preview, click the leads that you want to lock. You can click anywhere on the profile to select the leads.  3. In the Properties pane, on the Leads tab, select the Locked checkbox.

- 315 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Note:

You can also lock leads in the main nesting area in Modify Leads mode (by right-clicking) or in Advanced Edit, where you can lock a multiple selection of leads on a part at the same time.

Lock overtravel You can lock only the overtravel/undertravel on leads, while allowing other lead properties (placement, style, size, etc.) to change. This is done primarily when leads use undertravel to form a tab and you want to retain that tab during automatic nesting, collision avoidance, etc.   Locked overtravel is indicated with a white padlock ( ), while leads that are totally locked are marked with a yellow padlock ( ).  

Style The style of a lead defines its basic shape.   Choices for Lead In: (None), Arc, Linear, Spiral, Lock-9, Lock-7, Step, Diagonal Step, T-Lock   Choices for Lead Out: (None), Arc, Linear   To change a lead style:  1. Click the right-hand side of the Style row (where it shows the actual style used).  2. Click the down arrow and select a new style from the list.  3. Click OK. Tip: You can pin (

) commonly used lead styles to the top of the list, for quick access.

Size For the linear style, Size specifies the length of the lead. For the arc style, Size specifies the radius of the arc. For all other lead styles, Size controls the scale of the lead.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.5 in. for a lead-in, 0.25 in. for a lead-out  

Angle For linear leads, the angle of a lead-in is defined with respect to the first motion after the lead. A 0° lead-in will lead straight into the first cut. Positive lead-in angles are defined clockwise from the 0° position, so a 90° lead-in will cause a sharp left-turn into the first cut. Leadout angles are defined in a similar fashion with a 0° lead-out extending straight out of the last cut. Positive lead-out angles are defined counter-clockwise from the 0° position, so a 90° lead-out will cause a sharp left-turn out of the last cut.   For arc leads, angle defines the distance the lead will extend around a circle. A 90° lead would extend one quarter of the way around, whereas a 180° lead would extend half way around - forming a semicircle.   Units: Degrees Range: -360.0 to 360.0° Recommended Value: 0.0° for corner leads, 180.0° for a side lead-in, 90.0° for a side lead-out   Example:

- 316 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

  The following part has two sets of leads: a pair of linear corner leads (on the exterior profile) and a pair of arc side leads (on the interior profile).

The Angle of both corner leads is set to 0°. The side lead-in has Angle of 180°, the side lead-out has an Angle of 90°.  

Extension The tip of the lead-in (or lead-out) will be extended by this distance.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.0 in.   Example:   The following parts have different Extension values. The arrows along the part profiles indicate cut direction.  

Figure 1

Figure 2

  The part displayed in Figure 1 has two exterior arc-style leads. The Extension for both the lead-in and lead-out is 0.0 in.

  The part displayed in Figure 2 also has two exterior arc-style leads. The lead-in has an Extension of 1.0 in. and the lead-out has an Extension of 0.0 in. Notice that the lead-in for this part is longer than the lead-in of the part from Figure 1.

 

Overtravel This value applies only to the lead-out. If this value is positive (overtravel), then the torch/head will travel past the start point before cutting the lead-out. If this value is negative (undertravel), then the torch/head will begin cutting the lead-out before reaching the start point. - 317 -

ProNest 2019 Manual   Units: Distance Range: -100.0 to 100.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.0 in.   Example:   The following parts have different Over/Under travel values. The arrows along the part profiles indicate cut direction.

Figure 3

Figure 4

Figure 5

  The part displayed in Figure 3 has two exterior, arc-style leads with an Over/Under travel value of 0.0 in. The start point (where the lead-in intersects the part profile) and end point (where the lead-out intersects the part profile) are the same.

  The part displayed in Figure 4 also has two exterior, arc-style leads with a positive Over/Under travel value of 1.0 in. The distance between the start point and end point of this part is 1.0 in. The portion of part profile that is highlighted in yellow represents the overtravel, which will be cut twice by the torch.

  The part displayed in Figure 5 has two exterior, arc-style leads with a negative Over/Under travel value of -1.0 in. This part exhibits undertravel. The lead-out occurs before the torch finishes cutting the entire profile. As a result, the part in Figure 5 will be connected to the plate by a 1.0 in. wide strip of material after it is cut.

 

Quality Assigns a quality number to leads. Assigning quality to a lead can be used to apply specific cutting parameters to that motion. Inherit Lead will have the same quality as the adjacent entity. 0..255 Leads will be assigned the quality number specified.   The quality number can be used as a key into the process parameter table or as a way of outputting specific M-codes based on the quality number.  

Pierce The type of pierce at the beginning of the lead-in. Pierce styles other than Standard are used primarily for waterjet applications. For many waterjet cutting applications, a moving pierce cuts through material more quickly than a standard pierce because the machine motion clears the cut of the abrasive and material debris.   Styles: Standard, Dynamic, Circular, Wiggle, Stationary

- 318 -

ProNest 2019 Manual By default, waterjet pierce type is applied automatically (via Process Parameters spreadsheet) based on lead length, material type and thickness, the available space around the pierce site, and pierce duration (ProNest will try to apply the fastest pierce when possible). In this section, pierce type can be edited manually for a lead-in. Standard This is the usual non-moving pierce; no special pierce type will be applied. Dynamic pierce For the dynamic pierce, the waterjet moves along the part lead-in at the pierce Speed for the pierce Time. When the pierce Time elapses, the waterjet changes to the cut speed. Be sure the part has a lead-in that is long enough to allow the waterjet to pierce the workpiece completely before changing to the cut speed.  

  1= Dynamic pierce starts at the beginning of the lead-in. 2= The waterjet changes to the cut speed after the Time elapses. Editable properties include:  l Time: Duration of the pierce  l Speed: Feedrate to use while piercing Circle pierce A circular pierce may take longer than a dynamic or wiggle pierce but not as long as a stationary pierce. Use the circular pierce for small internal features.   For the circular pierce, the waterjet moves at the pierce Speed for the pierce Time in a circular motion. The pierce Displacement is the diameter of the pierce circle. The circle diameter depends in part on the size nozzle being used.  

Circular pierce geometry is shown in blue   1= Circular pierce starts at the beginning of the lead-in, travels to the edge of the pierce circle 2= It travels around the pierce circle until the specified Time elapses. 3= When the pierce time has elapsed, the waterjet returns to the center point. 4= It then cuts the lead-in at the full cut speed.

- 319 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Editable properties include:  l Time: Duration of the pierce  l Displacement: Diameter of the pierce circle  l Speed: Feedrate to use while piercing Wiggle pierce For the wiggle pierce, the waterjet moves back and forth over a linear segment for the pierce Time at the pierce Speed. The pierce Displacement defines the length of the segment. On linear lead-ins, the wiggle segment follows the path of the lead. On arc leadins, the segment is tangent to the lead. When the pierce Time elapses, the waterjet returns to the beginning of the pierce, then changes to the Cut Speed.  

1 = Pierce starts at the beginning of the lead-in, then makes a linear motion for the Displacement length, then cuts back and forth over the wiggle pierce segment. 2 = When the pierce time has elapsed, the waterjet returns to the initial point and cuts the lead-in at the normal cut speed. Use the wiggle pierce for narrow features such as slots, closely nested parts, or when space constraints prevent the use of a circular or dynamic pierce. Use a wiggle pierce for thicker materials where a dynamic pierce may become too long and interfere with internal features.   Editable properties include:  l Time: Duration of the pierce  l Displacement: Length of the linear wiggle pierce segment  l Speed: Feedrate to use while piercing Stationary pierce For the stationary pierce, the waterjet stays at the pierce point until the pierce Time elapses. Use the stationary pierce on thinner materials or small internal part features.   Editable properties include:  l Time: Duration of the pierce Note:

Tip:

 l For Hypertherm setups, the pierce information is included in output code as special controller codes. For other setups, the actual pierce motions are included in code.  l If Wiggle pierce is specified but is too large and would conflict with part geometry, it will be replaced with a smaller Circular pierce.  l If Circular pierce is specified but is too large, it will be replaced with a Stationary pierce.

Clicking Reset with defaults from settings at the bottom of the Leads tab will reset all of the leads properties with the default values from your ProNest settings.

- 320 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Once a part has been added to the part list, the contents of the Leads tab will appear inactive when the added part is selected. However, you can still make changes to the leads of an added part using the Modify Leads button tab for the selected part), Advanced Edit, or from the main ProNest window.

- 321 -

in the Preview (which reactivates the Leads

ProNest 2019 Manual

Nesting properties When parts are added to the part list, they are assigned nesting properties like quantity and priority. Nesting properties can be assigned to parts using the Nesting tab.   To access the Nesting tab:  l From the Edit Part List window, in the Properties pane, click the Nesting tab. When you make changes to nesting properties, your changes will be applied to the selected part(s) in the Part Sources explorer, as well as any subsequent parts that are added in the current job. You can customize the nesting properties for as many different parts as you want.   By default, nesting properties reflect the default values specified in your settings. Changing nesting properties in the Edit Part List will have no effect on the default values in your settings (   Quantity

).

Required This defines the quantity of the selected part.   Range: 1 to 10,000   Attributes

Name The name of the selected part can be modified in this box. Note: The Allow parts in the Part List to be renamed preference (File > Preferences > General tab) must be selected in order to edit a part name.

Revision The revision of the selected part can be edited in this box. Revision can be used to keep track of different versions of a part.  

File name The full path of the part's source file.   If the part was loaded from a part file token, this will be indicated by a  

icon.

Material This defines the material of the selected part. Note: When spreadsheets are used, the list of available materials comes from the materials found in your Process Parameters spreadsheet. When spreadsheets are not used, the list of available materials comes from your material database.

Class The class of the selected part. Class can be used to organize your materials using specialized information such as cutting gas or amperage. Parts with the different classes can't be placed on the same nest.   Available classes come from the Process Parameters spreadsheet. See Overview of class for more information.

- 322 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Setting a default class You can set a default class value for a given material type and thickness:  1. Select a material type and thickness in the Properties: Nesting pane on the Edit Part List window.  2. Select the class that you want to use as the default for that type and thickness.  3. Right-click the class value and select Make [class] my default class for [material.] The next time that material is selected, the default class will automatically be selected as well.  

Initial rotation A part can be rotated (counter-clockwise) when it is added to the part list by defining an initial rotation angle. This rotation will become the part's "natural" orientation.   Units: Degrees (°) Range: 0 to 360° Recommended Value: 0°  

Grain restraint When editing your part list, you can specify a rotation restriction that will be used when importing parts.   Units: Degrees (°) Range: 0 to 360° Recommended Value: 0°   This setting is commonly used with parts that have grain restrictions (they must run parallel with the grain of the material). The grain restraint angle defines a set of valid part orientations. For example, a value of 180° will limit valid part orientations to 0° and 180°. A value of 360° will restrict rotation completely - allowing only the part's natural orientation. A value of 0° will allow any rotation. Note: The grain restraint angle will not restrict parts that are rotated manually, except during smart drag with rotation. If a part is rotated manually to an angle that violates the part's rotation restriction, ProNest will display the error message Part orientation violates rotation restriction and will show the part in conflict.

Priority Priority is used to sort parts for automatic nesting. All things being equal, parts with a priority of 1 will nest before parts with a priority of 99.   Range: 1 to 99 Recommended Value: 5 Tip:

A priority value of 99 is reserved for filler (A generally useful part that can be nested on any nest - as long as doing so doesn't prevent non-filler parts from nesting. During automatic nesting, parts with a priority of 99 are used as filler parts) parts. Filler parts are nested on a plate during automatic nesting only when:  l At least one non-filler part has already been nested on the plate.  l Automatic nesting has already tried to place all other parts with a priority less than 99 on the plate.

Mirror A part's mirror value will affect how ProNest will nest the part during automatic nesting, CLC Quad, and CLC Array. When editing your part list, you can specify a mirror value that will be used when importing parts.

- 323 -

ProNest 2019 Manual   Choices: Never, Always, Either   Never - ProNest will never mirror the part. Always - ProNest will always mirror the part. Either - ProNest will decide which part orientation is best: natural or mirrored. Important: For CLC Quad to work with certain parts (triangles, parts with only one square corner) the mirror value must be set to Either.

Prohibit filling When selected, a part will not be allowed to have smaller parts nested inside of it. As a result, ProNest will not place parts inside the interior profiles of the part during AutoNest. If a smaller part is manually placed inside of the part, the smaller part will appear in conflict on the nest.   A part with Prohibit filling turned on has cross-hatching drawn in its interior profiles.

 

Cluster ProNest will automatically build clusters of parts that have this property selected.  

Fit ratio This ratio defines the cutoff for desirable clusters created automatically for parts with their Cluster property selected. The main reason to create a cluster is because it uses less space than two of that part placed next to each other. The space used by two parts placed next to each other is used as the 'benchmark'. An improvement is defined as follows:   Improvement = Space used by the cluster / Space used by two parts   If the improvement is better (less) than the fit ratio, then the cluster is added to the Part List as a custom part.   Units: Percentage Range: 50 to 100% Recommended Value: 90%  

Common line cutting ProNest will automatically build CLC clusters of parts that have this property set to anything other than (None).   Choices: (None), Pair, Quad, Both   (None) - CLC clusters will not be built for the part. Pair - If possible, a pair CLC cluster (2 parts) will be built for the part. Quad - If possible, a quad CLC cluster (4 parts) will be built for the part. Both - If possible, will build a pair and a quad CLC cluster.

- 324 -

ProNest 2019 Manual  

Allow fly cutting Select this setting to enable fly cutting for the part. Parts that do not have this property selected will not be fly cut.     AutoNest Properties

Allow pattern array Having this setting selected means that a part can be pattern arrayed during AutoNest.  

Allow CLC array Having this setting selected means that a part can be CLC arrayed during AutoNest.  

Allow leads to move Having this setting selected means that a part's leads can be moved during AutoNest.  

Allow dynamic align When selected, a part can be dynamically aligned during AutoNest. Eligible parts will be common line cut or bridged, depending on the Strategy in Dynamic Align settings page.     Import Actions

Retain all existing leads When the part is imported, this setting will control whether or not the part's existing leads will be removed and replaced. Select this setting to keep any existing leads where they are. Profiles that do not have leads will still have leads applied. Note: If you are importing a CAD file with existing leads, you must also select the User drawn leads setting (on the CAD Import tab).

Add tabs Select this setting to AutoTab a part as it's imported. AutoTab will be applied to the part, based on your AutoTab settings.  

Slug destroy Select this setting to automatically apply slug destroy to a part as it's imported. Slug destroy will be applied to the interior profiles of the part, based on your Slug Destroy settings.     Other Properties

Reference You can assign whatever type of reference to a part that you want.  

Due date Use the expanding calendar in this box to assign a due date to a part.  

Customer A customer can be assigned to a part from this box. The list of customers comes from your customer database.

- 325 -

ProNest 2019 Manual  

Remarks Any remarks for a part can be added in this field.  

Misc 1-3 These fields can be used to add miscellaneous information about a part.   Tip:

Clicking Reset with defaults from settings at the bottom of the Properties pane will reset all of the properties on that tab with the default values from your ProNest settings.

Once a part has been added to the part list, you can modify the nesting properties for that part from the Part List grid in the lower-left of the Edit Part List.   Part List Key Warning Initial Rotation (°) Grain Restraint (°) Mirror Cluster Common Line Cutting Allow leads to move Allow pattern array

Prohibit filling Loaded from token file

- 326 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Utilization and costing properties This shows dimension, utilization, and costing figures for the selected part(s) in the part list.

Attributes Length The length of the selected part, measured horizontally along the X-axis. This includes leads and extensions.  

Width The width of the selected part, measured vertically along the Y-axis. This includes leads and extensions.  

Cut length The length of all of that part's profiles that will be cut. This includes leads and extensions.  

Utilization True area The 2-D surface area of the part. If a part has an interior profile, the surface area of the cut-out will not be considered a portion of that part.  

- 327 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 

True weight The mass of the part. This is calculated using density (from Material Database), true area, and material thickness.  

Rectangular area The minimum rectangular space that a part occupies (including cut-outs, part leads, and lead extensions)  

 

Rectangular weight The mass of the part, including all material within the minimum rectangular space. This is calculated using density (from Material Database), rectangular area, and material thickness.  

Costing Production time The process production time for all processes used to produce the selected part. Refer to "How is production time calculated?" on page 591 for more information.  

Production cost Production cost of the selected part. Refer to "How are costs calculated?" on page 584 for more information.  

Material cost Material cost of the selected part. Refer to "How are costs calculated?" on page 584 for more information.  

Total cost Total cost (Material cost + Production cost) of the selected part. Refer to "How are costs calculated?" on page 584 for more information.  

- 328 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Preview You can look at a preview of a selected part in the upper left section of Edit Part List window. After a selected part has been added to the part list, you can use the Preview window to edit the part.   Preview button

Description

Select Mode

After a part has been added to the part list, you can select cutting profiles and review or change the lead-in/out properties for that profile.

Modify Leads

You can select new locations for the lead in/out positions for your part by simply clicking on a new location. This button will be inactive until a part is added to the part list.

Zoom Window

You can zoom in on an area of your part by dragging a box around the area you want to view. Right-click to return to select mode.

Zoom In

Zooms in to next magnification level

Zoom Out

Zooms out to next magnification level

Zoom Extents

Returns to the full view of the part

Maximize

Opens a maximized view of the part

CAD Cleanup (2D CAD)

Opens the 2D CAD program in Cleanup mode, where the selected CAD file can be modified. This is available before a part is added to the part list.   To learn more, see "CAD Cleanup - 2D CAD" on page 359.

CAD Cleanup (Simple)

Opens CAD Cleanup, you can make changes to CAD layers before CAD files are added to the part list. This can be useful if you have CAD files with duplicate or incorrectly named layers and want to quickly clean up these files without using an external CAD editor.   To learn more, see "CAD Cleanup - Simple" on page 356.

Advanced Edit

Opens Advanced Edit, where you can modify part properties. This button will be inactive until a part is added to the part list.   To learn more, see "About Advanced Edit" on page 411.

 

- 329 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Notice that when you select a part in the Part Sources section, the preview will display a pre-processed view of the part. Leads or part properties are not yet applied to the part. However, after a part has been added to the part list, the preview will display a processed view of that part (which will include leads). Tip:

While in Select Mode, you can using your mouse wheel to zoom in or out on a part in the Preview window.

- 330 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

About CAD files In the Edit Part List window, CAD files can be accessed through the Part Sources explorer.  

Part Sources explorer   The CAD tab works like Windows Explorer, allowing you to browse the folders and files on your system. Use the Look in box to help navigate to the folder containing the CAD files you want to add. You can use Favorites ( contain CAD files. Clicking Recent Folders (

) to create a list of frequently used folders that

) will display a list of recently accessed folders for CAD source files.

Files of type You can use the Files of type box to filter for specific file types. The selection in this box will filter the contents of the current folder, only showing the files that match. Selecting All files (*.*) will display all file types in the selected folder. By default the Files of type box will be set to AutoCAD files (*.dwg; *.dxf).   The following types of CAD files can be added to the part list in ProNest:  l AutoCAD files (.dwg; .dxf)  l FastCAM files (.cam)  l IGES files (.igs; .iges)  l EPS files (.eps) (Vector format only)  l DGN files (.dgn)  l DSTV files (.nc; .nc1)  l Raster image files (.bmp, .jpg, .jpeg, .gif, .png)  l Token files (.tok)  l Pro/Engineer files (Pro/Engineer™ Interface module required. Note that files in .prtt or .asm format cannot be imported directly into ProNest. The Pro/E interface can be used to create a .dwg file in Pro/E that can be imported into ProNest. )  l Autodesk Inventor files (.iam; .ipt) (Inventor™ Interface module required)  l SolidWorks files (.sldprt; .sldasm)

- 331 -

ProNest 2019 Manual (Solidworks® Interface module required)  l Solid Edge files (.par; .asm) (Solid Edge® Interface module required)

Filter You can use the Filter box to filter the contents of the current folder by CAD file name. When text is entered into the Filter box, CAD file names that contain some or all of the entered text will be shown, all others will be hidden.

- 332 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding CAD files to the part list CAD files are added to the part list similarly to other files, except that CAD Import properties are applied along with Nesting and Leads properties before CAD files are imported. Adding CAD files is a multi-stage process, as detailed below:

Stage 1: Selecting a CAD file First, you will need to find and select your CAD file:  1. Open the Edit Part List window.  2. Browse to the folder containing your CAD file.  3. Using the Files of Type box, select the type of CAD file that you will be importing.  4. Click the CAD file once to select it. Once selected, you will be ready to apply part properties. Tip:

You can select multiple CAD files in the Part Sources explorer by holding the SHIFT key and clicking part names. This can be useful if you want to apply custom properties to a group of parts before they are added.

Stage 2: Applying CAD Import properties Once a CAD file is selected in the Part Sources explorer, you can begin applying CAD Import properties to the file. With your CAD file selected:  1. In the Properties pane, select the CAD Import tab.  2. Assign general CAD Import properties to your part.  3. Map CAD layers to available processes. This will tell ProNest to associate an available process with a given layer found in the CAD file.  4. Assign other CAD Import properties to your part, as necessary.

Stage 3: Applying Nesting and Leads properties After CAD Import properties and process layer mappings have been assigned, you will be ready to assign Nesting and Leads properties:  1. In the Properties pane, select the Nesting tab.  2. Assign a part quantity.  3. Set the Material type and thickness for the part.  4. Set any other Nesting properties for the part, as needed.  5. Select the Leads tab.  6. If you want to assign leads that differ from the default interior/exterior leads in your settings, you can do so here. Note:

Nesting and Leads properties can also be edited after a part has been added to the part list.

Stage 4: Adding the part to the part list With CAD Import, Nesting, and Leads properties assigned to your CAD file, you will be ready to add the part to the part list:  l With the part selected, click Add Part.

- 333 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Your part will be added to the part list. You can still modify nesting or leads for your part or bring the part into Advanced Edit to make further changes.

- 334 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

CAD Import properties Before CAD files are added to the part list, CAD Import properties for that file should be assigned. This will ensure that drawing details are properly processed as they are brought into ProNest. The changes you make to CAD Import properties will apply to the currently selected CAD file, as well as any subsequent parts that are added to the part list in your job.   CAD Import properties are listed on the CAD Import tab in the Edit Part List window. By default, they will reflect the default values specified in your settings. Changing a property value in the Edit Part List window has no effect on the setting that provides its default value.

General File type This is the type of file that you are importing.    Choices: CAD File, Raster Image File, CNC File, Token File   Advanced:  Importing CNC Files   You can add computer numerically controlled (CNC) files to ProNest using the Edit Part List. During this process, CNC files are reverse-engineered (decoded) from controller instructions to part geometry. You must assign the correct CIF in order to generate accurate part geometry. To add a CNC File to the part list:  1. In the part source explorer, browse to the folder containing the CNC file you wish to open. Make sure that the Files of Type filter is set to All files (*.*).  2. Select the CNC file you want to add by clicking it once.  3. From the CAD Import tab in the Properties section, set File type to CNC file.  4. In the CIF box, select the applicable CNC decoder.  5. Select the File units that were used when the CNC file was saved.  6. Click the Add Part button.

File units This is used when importing CAD or CNC files. The file itself was saved using a particular length unit. The value of this property should match with the length unit that most of your files are saved with.   Choices: Inch (in.), Millimeter (mm)  

Drawing scale Used for CAD files and raster images. A part can be scaled as it is imported into ProNest.   Units: Percentage (%) Range: 0.1 to 1,000,000% Recommended Value: 100%   To edit the drawing scale:  l Type a value in the box.  l Select the Drawing Scale box and click the down arrow.   - 335 -

ProNest 2019 Manual When editing the drawing scale, the scale editor will appear:  

  In the editor, you can enter a scale directly in the Scale box.   You can also specify a scale by defining the ratio between a length in the drawing and the corresponding imported length.   Example:   In this example, most CAD files in our CAD folder must be scaled as they are imported into ProNest. For whatever reason, a length of 2.5 in. in each drawing should be imported as 10 in.   In the scale editor:  1. Type 2.5 in the Drawing box.  2. Type 10 in the Imported box. As values are typed in each box, the value in the Scale box will update to match the ratio implied by the Drawing and Imported values. When complete, the Scale box will contain the value: 400%. Click OK and the Drawing scale field will contain 400%. Now when your CAD part is imported, it will be scaled to 400% of their actual size in the drawing.  

Open profile tolerance This setting specifies the maximum distance allowed for joining line and arc entities. In other words, if Open profile tolerance is set to 0.005 in., gaps that are 0.005 in. or smaller will be closed - helping to prevent open profiles.   Units: Distance Range: 0.001 to 1.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.005 in.

Raster to Vector When a raster image file is selected in the Part Sources pane, the following import settings will become available:  

Preview raster image Select this box to view the source raster image in the Preview pane. Clear the box to view the processed vector version of the image.  

Auto threshold When an image is vectorized, it is first converted to black and white (1-bit image). The lines that remain are then traced into vectors, which become the edges of the part. Threshold controls how the original image is transformed into black and white. Ultimately, this

- 336 -

ProNest 2019 Manual affects how edges are formed for the vector part.   When Auto threshold is selected, ProNest will attempt to automatically find a good value. Threshold If Auto threshold doesn't yield good results, you can manually adjust the threshold by selecting a number from 0 to 255.  

Straighten An averaging routine that straightens profiles in the drawing. Selecting zero will produce profile that looks pixelated, with no straightening. Higher numbers will result in straighter lines, but less definition.   Range: 0 to 15 Recommended value: 1 or 2

Trace type This value should be set depending on how the image is drawn.   Choices: Outline, Center Line For line drawings, select Center Line:

  For filled images, select Outline:

 

Recognize circles Attempt to detect arc shapes in the image and convert to arc entities during import:

- 337 -

ProNest 2019 Manual   When cleared, all shapes in the image will be imported as line entities only:

Angle adjust For lines that are almost square with the rectangular edges of the image file, selecting this setting can align them to be parallel with the edges.  

Part length / Part width The best way to adjust the final part size is by using scale in ProNest and not by adjusting the source image. As a rule, with the Drawing scale set to 100% in ProNest, 1 pixel in the drawing = 1 inch in ProNest.   Use Part length and Part width properties to scale images to the finished size you want. This sets the size of the bounding rectangle around the part.

1 = Part length 2 = Part width   The aspect ratio is automatically maintained, so that the image is not distorted. This means that when you type a value in one box, the other value will automatically be updated. Note: Drawing scale will automatically be updated based on this value.

CAD Layers When importing CAD files, you must make sure that drawing layers or colors in the CAD file are assigned to available processes used by your machine. Typically, each layer name in a CAD file defines a different attribute, such as profiles for cutting, scribing, punching, or dimension information. Using layers in this way allows ProNest to distinguish between the different aspects of a drawing when the part is added. When adding parts, assigning layers to the proper machine processes is critical to creating correct output.  

Cut all layers with [Cut Process] This setting is automatically named according to the cut process used by the machine. For example, if the cut process was called "Plasma", then this setting would appear as "Cut all layers with [Plasma]".Select this check box if all layers found in a CAD file should be cut by the process shown. Most applications will require that this checkbox be cleared.  

Cut - [Cut Process]

- 338 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Defines the CAD layers that should be mapped to a particular cut process. Each cut process supported by the machine will have its own setting.   If a CAD file is selected in the Part Sources section, when you click the down-arrow ( ) in right column of this setting, a list of CAD layer names will appear. If a layer name is found in the selected CAD file it will have a small image of a part next it ( ). If a layer name is defined as a default layer in your settings it will have a small settings image next to it ( ).   Example 1:   If a machine supported both a Gas and a Plasma process, then there would be two rows here: Cut - [Gas] Cut - [Plasma]   Example 2:   If your machine supported a cut process called "Gas" and you wanted to assign "0" and "CUT" CAD layers to that process, you would enter:   Cut - [Gas]

0;CUT

When a CAD file is imported, all geometry on the "0" and "CUT" layers would be mapped to the machine's "Gas" process.  

Scribe - [Scribe Process] Defines the CAD layers that should be mapped to a particular scribe process. Each scribe process supported by the machine will have its own setting.   If a CAD file is selected in the Part Sources section, when you click the down-arrow ( ) in right column of this setting, a list of CAD layer names will appear. If a layer name is found in the selected CAD file it will have a small image of a part next it ( ). If a layer name is defined as a default layer in the your settings it will have a small settings image next to it ( ).   Example:   If a machine supported a single scribe process called "Scribe-G", then there would be one row here: Scribe - [Scribe-G]  

Punch - [Punch Process] Defines the CAD layers that should be mapped to a particular punch process. Each punch process supported by the machine will have its own setting.   If a CAD file is selected in the Part Sources section, when you click the down-arrow ( ) in right column of this setting, a list of CAD layer names will appear. If a layer name is found in the selected CAD file it will have a small image of a part next it ( ). If a layer name is defined as a default layer in the your settings it will have a small settings image next to it ( ).  

- 339 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Example:   If a machine supported a single punch process called "MyPunch", then there would be one row here: Punch - [MyPunch]  

Turret Defines the CAD layers that should be mapped to the machine's turret process  

Display Only Defines the CAD layers that should be displayed in ProNest, but should not be cut.  

BOM Defines the CAD layers that contain BOM information  

Map to CAD color numbers Select this setting to allow importing parts by CAD color number instead of by layer name.   Example:   A part file defines a part in one layer: "CUT". The part is a simple rectangle with a hole in it. The exterior profile of the part has a color number of 1, but the interior hole has a color number of 2.   If Map to CAD color numbers is cleared, then a cut process must be mapped to "CUT" in order to import the part properly. Importing the part in this way will cause the same cut process to cut both the interior and exterior profiles.   If Map to CAD color numbers is selected, then one cut process must be mapped to "1" and another (or the same) cut process must also be mapped to "2". Importing the part in this way can result in one process handling the exterior profile while another process handles the interior profile.

Note:

 l If you have more than one CAD layer for a single process, separate the layers with a semicolon (;) and do not include a space (for example, "0;CUT").  l Process-layer mapping can also be done using the CAD Cleanup feature.

Cut Sequence Strategy This defines the method used to create the part's interior cut sequence. Lead to Lead The next profile to be sequenced will be the one whose start point is closest to the end point of the current profile. Center to Center The next profile to be sequenced will be the one whose center point is closest to the center point of the current profile.  Vertical

- 340 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Interior profiles will be sequenced in a generally upward (or downward) direction. Horizontal Interior profiles will be sequenced in a generally left to right (or right to left) direction.  Find Best Selecting this option will try all strategies (except Heat Dissipation) and use the optimal result for cut sequencing. Heat Dissipation Creating a cut sequence by heat dissipation will distribute the heat input across the part to avoid overheating. This usually results in a randomized cut sequence.

Options Leads origin This determines where the origin of the lead-in/out of the part is, in relation to the drawing being processed. This applies to both interior and exterior leads.   Choices: Lower-Left, Upper-Left, Upper-Right, Lower-Right, Left, Top, Right, Bottom   Upper Left

Upper Right

Lower Right

Lower Left

Top

Right

Bottom

Left

Punch/Scribe first If selected, the machine will complete all punching and scribing on the part before any cutting is done. If you are cutting with underwater plasma,you should select this option. Normally, when processing very light metal, "Punch/Scribe first" should not be selected to avoid problems with metal movement.  

Reverse direction and kerf Select this to import parts with a reversed cut direction. Interior profiles will be cut clockwise and exterior profiles will be cut counterclockwise. Right-handed kerf compensation is also used.  

Delete overlapped entities When this setting is selected, duplicate or coincident entities (lines or arcs) are automatically deleted as the part is imported.  

Contains multiple parts If there is more than one part in your drawing, select this setting.  

Explode multiple parts Select this setting if there is more than one part on your drawing and you want to separate them as they are imported.

- 341 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: This setting is active only when Contains multiple parts is selected.

User drawn leads Select this setting if your part was drawn with its own leads. If this setting is cleared, leads will be added to the part. Note: To import user-drawn leads, you must also have the Retain existing leads setting selected (on the Nesting tab). Refer to Importing a part with pre-drawn leads for more information.

Quality Attaches a quality value to every entity. (None) Quality values will not be attached to any entity in the part. Use CAD Colors Each entity's color number (from the CAD drawing) will be used as the entity's quality number. 0 - 255 All entities will be assigned the same quality value. Advanced: The quality number can be used as a key into the process parameter table or as a way of outputting specific M-codes based on the quality number.

Smooth entities Select this setting to convert curves made from line segments (approximated curves) into true arcs whenever possible.  

Smooth tolerance When converting a set of line segments into a curve, it is important to define how accurate the curve must be. The Smooth tolerance value specifies a maximum distance from the approximated curve in which an arc can be formed. A large tolerance will likely cause more smoothing to occur at the expense of a less accurate curve.   This tolerance value is opposite, but similar, to Arc radius tolerance found on the Importing Parts (Advanced) settings page.  

SOLIDWORKS Configuration name In SOLIDWORKS, configurations allow you to create multiple variations of a part or assembly model within a single document. Configurations provide a convenient way to develop and manage families of models with different dimensions, components, or other parameters.   This property can be used to specify a configuration to use when importing a SOLIDWORKS part or assembly.  l For parts (.sldprt), the configuration name entered here will be used when that part is imported.  l For assemblies, unless otherwise specified in the assembly explorer, the configuration name entered here will be used for the assembly and all sub-parts. If this configuration can't be found in a part or assembly or it is left blank, the default configuration in the assembly or part file will be used instead.  

- 342 -

ProNest 2019 Manual To bring in a specific configuration of a single SOLIDWORKS part:  1. Type in a configuration name in this box.  2. Click the SOLIDWORKS part in the Part Sources explorer. A preview of the part in the specified configuration will appear in the Preview.  3. Click Add Part.  

- 343 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

About part token files When a CAD file is imported, information and geometry in the drawing is processed and temporarily stored in a format that is usable by ProNest. This processing can take some time depending on the complexity of the drawing. To improve the speed of importing CAD files, you can choose to permanently save these ProNest token files (the "processed" versions of the CAD files) and use them whenever the CAD drawings are imported in the future.

Enable saving of part tokens  1. Open the Importing Parts (Advanced) settings page (Settings > Importing Parts > Importing Parts (Advanced)).  2. Select Save part file tokens.  3. Click Save. When "Save part file tokens" is enabled, ProNest will create a token file (.tok) as each CAD file is processed. The token file will be saved in the same location as the CAD file and will have the same file name, except with a .tok extension.

How does this impact importing CAD files? When the "Save part file tokens" is enabled, the next time the CAD file is imported, ProNest will search for its matching token file. If the CAD file hasn't been modified since the token file was created, ProNest will import from the token file - saving on processing time. Otherwise, the CAD file will be processed and a new token file will be saved.   In the Edit Part List window, CAD files that have associated token files are displayed differently than other CAD files.    l When the CAD file is selected in the Part Sources explorer, a File selection includes part file tokens message appears in the Properties pane, indicating that the CAD file has an associated token file. When the part is added, the token file will be used instead of the CAD file (as long as it is more recent than the CAD file).  l If "Save part file tokens" is enabled and no message appears when the part is selected, this indicates that either the CAD file has no associated token file or the CAD file is newer than the associated token file. In either of these cases, the CAD file will be imported and a new token file will be created.

Overriding use of the token file You can force ProNest to import from the CAD file, even though there is a more recent associated token file available. To import from the CAD file:  1. In the Part Sources area, on the CAD tab, select the CAD file by clicking it once.  2. Below the Preview, click the

File selection includes part file tokens message.

 3. Select Use CAD file.  4. Click Add Part. The part will be imported from the CAD file and not the token file.   Of course, you can always turn off "Save part file tokens" setting to disable this behavior entirely and always import from the CAD file.

- 344 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Reloading parts Using Reload, you can re-import any part from its source CAD file. This can be useful if you have updated a CAD file outside of ProNest and want the updates to be carried over into a ProNest job.   Reloading a part is available only for CAD files - not VSP or Pipe parts.

Reload a part  1. Right-click the part in the part list.  2. Select Reload.  3. Select either Modify Leads or Preserve Leads. Modify Leads: Removes current leads from the part and reapplies them based on your ProNest settings. Preserve Leads: Will keep the existing leads in place.   When a part is reloaded, the source CAD file is imported into ProNest again using the same CAD Import and Nesting properties (material, quantity, etc.) that the part was originally imported with. Notes:

 l Reloading nested parts is allowable, but may result in conflicts on the nest if the leads or part geometry have changed.  l Parts cannot be reloaded if they have been common line cut, bridged, or chained together with other parts.  l If any changes were made to the part in Advanced Edit (such as added tabs, loops, scribe text, etc.) those changes will be lost when the part is reloaded.

Automatically reload modified parts when a job is opened You can also configure ProNest to automatically reload all modified parts in a job:  1. On the File menu, select Preferences.  2. On the General tab, select When opening jobs, detect modified part files and reload them. If part source files have been changed outside of ProNest, when the job is opened those parts will be reloaded. Certain conditions apply when using this preference. To learn more, refer to "General preferences" on page 250.

- 345 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Bill of Materials (BOM) The Bill of Material (BOM) layer of a CAD file is an optional drawing layer used to specify part information like material, grade, thickness, and quantity. The BOM layer is added to a CAD file using CAD software and cannot be added using ProNest. If you include BOM information in a CAD file, ProNest will automatically utilize that information as the part is added to your part list.   BOM information must be in the form of text entities on the BOM layer and must contain specific keywords to specify the part properties. Keywords are case sensitive and the spelling must match exactly. Do not include spaces between the keyword and the equals sign (=) or between the equals sign (=) and the property value. Note: When importing a CAD file with a BOM layer, ProNest will search for the keywords MATERIAL, THICKNESS, CLASS, and CUSTOMER in the Material and Customer databases. If there is no match found, the keys will be ignored.

Keyword

Description

Type

QUANTITY

Quantity

Integer (range: 0 - 9999)

PART_NAME

Part name

String (40 characters maximum)

MATERIAL

Material

String (40 characters maximum)

PART_CLASS

Class

String (50 characters maximum)

THICKNESS

Thickness Must be ±0.001 in. (±0.0254 mm) of the listed ProNest thickness.

Float (range: 0 - 9999)

GRADE

Material Grade

String (40 characters maximum)

INIT_ROTATION

Initial Rotation

Float (range: 0 - 360)

ROTATION

Rotation

Float (range: 0 - 360)

PRIORITY

Priority

Integer (range: 0 - 99)

MIRROR

Mirror

Integer (range: 0 - 2) 0 = never mirrored 1 = always mirrored 2 = either

CLUSTER

Auto Cluster

Integer (range: 0 or 1) 0 = don't autocluster 1 = try to autocluster

CLC

Auto Common Line

Integer (range: 0, 1, 2, 3) 0=Do not Auto CLC 1=CLC Pair 2=Quad CLC 3= Both Pair & Quad CLC

REFERENCE

Reference

String (60 characters maximum)

- 346 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Keyword

Description

Type

CUSTOMER

Customer

String (50 characters maximum)

REMARKS

Remarks

String (60 characters maximum)

MISC1

Miscellaneous 1

String (60 characters maximum)

MISC2

Miscellaneous 2

String (60 characters maximum)

MISC3

Miscellaneous 3

String (60 characters maximum)

PROHIBIT_FILLING

Prohibit filling

Integer (range: 0 or 1) 0=Do not prohibit filling 1=Prohibit filling

REVISION

Revision

String (30 characters maximum)

CLCARRAY

Allow CLC Array during AutoNest

Integer (range: 0 or 1) 0=Do not allow 1=Allow

  The keywords in a BOM layer match the part property fields in the Part List section of the Edit Part List window. When a CAD file with a BOM layer is imported into ProNest, those part property fields will automatically be filled with the values found in the BOM for that part.   Example:   The following table displays BOM keywords with sample property values.   BOM Layer Information (KEYWORD=Value)

Result  

QUANTITY=12

12

PART_NAME=My Part

My Part

MATERIAL=SS

SS

PART_CLASS=O2 300 AMP

O2 300 AMP

THICKNESS=0.250

0.250

GRADE=304

304

INIT_ROTATION=0.0

0.0

ROTATION=90.0

90.0

PRIORITY=7

7

- 347 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

BOM Layer Information (KEYWORD=Value)

Result  

MIRROR=0

NO

CLUSTER=0

NO

CLC=1

YES (CLC Pair)

REFERENCE=45678

45678

CUSTOMER=Acme Co.

Acme Co.

REMARKS=My Remarks

My Remarks

MISC1=Notes 1

Notes 1

MISC2=Notes 2

Notes 2

MISC3=Notes 3

Notes 3

PROHIBIT_FILLING=0

NO

REVISION=A

A

CLCARRAY=1

YES

Note:

 l If you are importing a PNL file that references a CAD file with a BOM layer, the BOM information will take precedence over the part information in the PNL.  l You can import a multi-part drawing with BOM information, as long as each part has BOM information. The origin of each text block must be located within the exterior profile of part.

Mapping the BOM layer in ProNest Once you have CAD files set up with BOM information on a dedicated BOM layer, you will need to map the layer name to the BOM process in ProNest settings:  1. Open Importing Parts settings (Settings

> click Importing Parts

).

 2. In the BOM field, add the CAD layers that you use for BOM information. If you use BOM layers in CAD called "BOM" and "INFO", you would enter this in ProNest as:   BOM BOM;INFO

- 348 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Buge text marking For machines with a special text marking device, you can configure ProNest to identify text in a CAD file and automatically convert it to buge marking information when output code is created.

Add a CAD file that contains BUGE text First, ProNest settings must be configured to identify buge text information in CAD files:  1. Open settings (in the Quick Access toolbar, click Settings

).

 2. In the left pane, double-click Importing Parts and then click Importing Parts (Advanced) directly below it.  3. Make sure that the Use text marker setting is selected.  4. Click Save to keep your changes. In the CAD file, buge text is typically placed on a dedicated layer. You will need to map the buge text CAD layer to the Scribe and Display Only processes in ProNest:  1. Open the Edit Part List window (on the Home tab, click Edit Part List

).

 2. Browse to the folder containing your CAD file.  3. Using the Files of Type box, select the type of CAD file that you will be importing.  4. Click the CAD file once to select it.  5. In the Properties pane on the right, select the CAD Import tab.  6. For the Scribe or Mark process, make sure the CAD layer that contains buge text is selected. For example, if you have a plasma machine with a scribe process and your buge text is on a CAD layer called "TEXT", this would appear as follows: Scribe - [Plasma Mark]

TEXT

 7. For the Display Only process, make sure that the CAD layer that contains buge text is also selected. This will ensure that the buge text is visible on the part in ProNest. If your buge text is on a CAD layer called "TEXT", this would appear as follows: Display Only

TEXT

 8. Click Add Part in the toolbar. Buge text position, size and angle will be read in directly from the CAD file. In ProNest, the start location of the Buge text is indicated by the

icon. When output is created for the part, special text marking instructions will be included in the NC code.

Tip: You can account for buge text marking in ProNest costing figures. See Costing settings for more information.

- 349 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Importing raster images ProNest can import raster files and convert them to vectorized part files that can be cut on your machine. In this article... Supported image formats Preparing images prior to import Adjusting raster import settings in ProNest Cleaning up the drawing Adding image to the part list Saving your vector results

Supported image formats The following image file formats can be imported:  l PNG  l JPG, JPEG  l BMP  l GIF

Preparing images prior to import Before importing image files, please consider the following tips.

Larger image files will get better results An image file that is 1600 × 1200 px will have better definition when converted compared to an image that is 160 × 120 px.  

Whether you are drawing the image yourself or are provided with an image from another source, try to get the largest size image possible. You can then use scaling feature in ProNest to get the correct finished size.

Plan how drawing will be cut Make sure that the drawing has a well-defined exterior border and doesn't contain too many nested profiles. During import, ProNest looks for a closed exterior profile and any closed interior profiles, if they exist. - 350 -

ProNest 2019 Manual   An image with too many nested interior profiles can produce a part with interiors that drop out prior to being cut.  

You can avoid these situations by making sure the image only has a single nested "level" of interior profiles:  

Increase contrast and reduce noise Clean images with high contrast and minimal noise work best. Soft blended edges, such as with a photo, may need to be cleaned up prior to import.  

Remove stray lines and marks Stray lines on a drawing may be imported as open profiles, which can be included as errant motions in output code. The best practice is to remove stray marks in the source image. You can also use CAD Cleanup / 2D CAD in ProNest to get rid of any entities you don't want later on.

Adjusting raster import settings in ProNest When an image file is selected in the Part Sources area of the Edit Part List window, raster import options will appear:

- 351 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. Open the Edit Part List (Home tab > Edit Part List

).

 2. Set Files of Type to Raster image files.  3. Browse to the image file you want to import. You can click the view menu to see medium or large thumbnail images.

 4. Click the file once to select it.  5. In the Properties pane on the lower right, click the CAD Import tab.

 6. In the Raster to Vector section, there are several settings (Threshold, Straighten, and so on) that you can adjust prior to adding the part. As you change the values for these settings, your vector results will be displayed in real time in the Preview pane (as long as Preview raster image is off). For a full description of these settings, see CAD Import properties.

Adjust the scale of the drawing The best way to adjust the final part size is by using scale in ProNest and not by adjusting the source image. As a rule, with the Drawing scale set to 100%, 1 pixel in the drawing = 1 inch in ProNest.   To adjust the scale of the drawing:  l In Raster to Vector import properties, use the Part length and Part width properties to scale images to the finished size that you want. This sets the size of the bounding rectangle around the part.

1 = Part length - 352 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

2 = Part width   The aspect ratio is automatically maintained, so that the image is not distorted. This means that when you type a value in one box, the other value will automatically be updated. Note:

Drawing scale will automatically be updated based on this value.

Additional settings that affect raster images The following CAD Import properties (which aren't in the Raster to Vector section) also have an effect on raster images:  l Open profile tolerance  l Smooth entities These two properties work the same way for raster images as they do for CAD drawings. When changing Open profile tolerance or Smooth entities, you will not see the results until after the part is added.

Cleaning up the drawing Once you've gotten your image close to how you want it using the steps outlined above, you can use CAD Cleanup to make additional changes, such as removing stray profiles, closing open profiles, or correcting bad geometry.    1. In the Preview window, click the arrow next to CAD Cleanup.

 2. Select a method of CAD Cleanup:  l CAD Cleanup - 2D CAD Uses 2D CAD to clean up the file. All CAD editing features in 2D CAD are available; you can add, edit, move, and delete objects. You can also save a DXF or DWG version of the part.

- 353 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 l CAD Cleanup -Simple A good option for quick fixes such as moving existing geometry or deleting profiles.

 3. When you've finished making changes, return to the ProNest Edit Part List window.

Adding image to the part list Once the image close to how you need it, you will be ready to import it:  l With the part selected in the Part Sources section, click Add Part. The part will be added to the part list, ready for nesting.

Saving your vector results If you are cutting a raster part more than once, it may be useful to save a processed vector version of the image for later use. This way, you can save all of the changes you have made to the part during the import process, such as scaling, cleaning up stray profiles, smoothing, and so on.

Adding to part library Saving an added raster part to the part library will ensure that all image processing and added leads are preserved.  l Right-click part in the part list and select Add to Library.

- 354 -

ProNest 2019 Manual The next time you need to cut the part, simply add it from the Library tab in the Edit Part List window.

Saving to DXF or DWG  1. In the Part Sources: CAD tab, select the image file.  2. In the Preview, click Cleanup > Use 2D CAD.  3. Make changes as needed.  4. Save as DXF or DWG. Likewise, you can also Export a DXF of a part after it's been added, in order to save a processed version that includes leads.  1. Right-click the part in the part list.  2. Select Export to DXF.

- 355 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

CAD Cleanup - Simple With the Simple CAD Cleanup feature, you can make changes to CAD layers before CAD files are added to the part list. This can be useful if you have CAD files with duplicate or incorrectly named layers and want to quickly clean up these files without using an external CAD editor. Note:

Keep in mind that any changes made to a part using CAD Cleanup will only effect the instance of the part that is being added to the part list, and will not be permanently saved with the source CAD file.

In this article... Open CAD Cleanup Selecting entities and layers Moving entities and layers Creating a new layer Renaming an existing layer Deleting a layer

Open CAD Cleanup  1. From the Edit Part List, select a CAD file from the Part Sources explorer by clicking it once.  2. In the Preview, click Simple CAD Cleanup. The CAD Cleanup window will open, displaying the layers found in the selected CAD file.   Example:  

Figure 1   The sample CAD file MF2.DXF has been brought into CAD Cleanup, as shown in Figure 1. Different CAD layers are indicated in red, yellow, and blue.

Selecting entities and layers You can select any entity or layer in your CAD file.   To select an entity:  1. Click the Entity Select button.

- 356 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 2. Click on the entity. The selected entity will be displayed with a dotted line.   Example:  

Figure 2   An entity along the profile of the red layer is selected.

Tip:

To select multiple entities, hold SHIFT and click the entities you want to select.

To select a layer:  1. Click the Layer Select button.  2. Click anywhere on the CAD layer. The selected layer will be displayed with a dotted line.   Example:  

Figure 3   The entire red layer is selected, as indicated by the dotted line.    

Moving entities and layers Once a layer or entity is selected, it can be moved to a different layer or to a different process.   To move to Layer:

- 357 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. Select the entity or layer you want to move.  2. On the Selections menu, select Move To Layer.  3. From the box, select a layer to move the entity or layer to.  4. Click OK. The selected entity or layer will be moved to the specified layer.   To move to Process:  1. Select the entity or layer you want to move.   2. On the Selections menu, select Move To Process.  3. From the box, select a process to move the entity or layer to.  4. Click OK. The selected entity or layer will be moved to the specified process.

Creating a new layer  1. In the Available Layers section on the right pane, click the New Layer button.  2. Enter a name for your new layer.  3. From the drop-down list, assign a process to your new layer. Once created, you can move existing entities or layers to your new layer.

Renaming an existing layer  1. In the Available Layers section on the right pane, select the layer that you want to rename.  2. Rename the layer, then press ENTER.

Deleting a layer If your CAD file contains extra layers that you want to delete, you can do so using the CAD Cleanup window.  1. Using Layer Select, select the layer you want to delete.  2. On the Layers menu, select Delete Layer. Advanced:

If you have a CAD file with blocks that are assigned to the turret or drilling layer, you can show or hide the block insertion points by selecting Punch Points from the View menu.

- 358 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

CAD Cleanup - 2D CAD 2D CAD is an easy to use CAD application that provides all the basic features needed to create or edit a detailed CAD drawing. In ProNest, the CAD Cleanup feature can be used to make quick changes to the CAD drawing in 2D CAD before it is added to the part list.   Any CAD file type that can be imported into ProNest can also be edited in CAD Cleanup prior to import. This includes:  l AutoCAD files (.dwg; .dxf)  l FastCAM files (.cam)  l IGES files (.igs; .iges)  l EPS files (.eps)  l DGN files (.dgn)  l DSTV files (.nc; .nc1)  l Raster image files (.bmp, .jpg, .jpeg, .gif, .png)  l Autodesk Inventor files (.iam; .ipt) (Inventor™ Interface module required)  l SolidWorks files (.sldprt; .sldasm) (SolidWorks® Interface module required)  l Solid Edge files (.par; .asm) (Solid Edge® Interface module required)

Bring a CAD file into 2D CAD Cleanup  1. Select a CAD file in the Part Sources section of the Edit Part List window.

 2. In the Preview, click

CAD Cleanup > Use 2D CAD. The 2D CAD program will open with your drawing loaded.

 3. In 2D CAD, make the required changes to the CAD file (modifying geometry, changing layer properties, etc.). Refer to 2D CAD Help for assistance.  4. Click the Return to ProNest button.

- 359 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 5. Click Yes to update the CAD file in ProNest with your changes.  a. Selecting the Save to file checkbox ( formats only).

) will permanently save your changes to the CAD file (available for DXF or DWG

 b. Clicking Yes with Save to file cleared will update that instance of the part that is being added to the part list, but will not be permanently save changes in the source CAD file. Note:

 l Using CAD Cleanup, you can edit any type of CAD file that ProNest supports (for example, SOLIDWORKS, Inventor, DSTV, etc.) and update ProNest with your changes. However, saving your CAD Cleanup changes permanently is only available in DXF or DWG file format.  l Token files (.tok), CNC files (.cnc), VSP, or Pipe parts cannot be edited using CAD Cleanup.

- 360 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

DSTV files A DSTV file is a space-delimited, ASCII text file containing geometry and other information for a structural steel part. The DSTV file extensions recognized by ProNest are .nc or .nc1.   DSTV Code Blocs supported by ProNest:  

DSTV Code Bloc

Corresponding ProNest machine process

Signification

ST

Start of piece description. This is the header section that contains part information.   Note: The only fields in the ST bloc that are brought into ProNest are Material, Quantity and Thickness.*  l Material is on line 7  l Quantity is on line 8  l Thickness is on line 15 (and is always in metric)

- 

EN

End of piece description (this is not required)

--

AK

Exterior profiles

Cut

IK

Interior profiles (this does not include interior profiles that qualify as holes or slots)

Cut

BO

Holes and slots

Punch or Cut (depending on how your machine handles holes and slots).

SI

Text (Bloc Numeration)   Note: In ProNest, this bloc is recognized as "NUMBERING" and not "SI". So, if you want to map the SI bloc in a DSTV file to your machine's scribe process, you would enter "NUMBERING" (and not "SI") in the process-layer mappings on the Importing Parts page of your settings.

Scribe or Display Only

KO

Scribing or marking

Scribe

* If no geometry is listed on the AK layer, ProNest can recognize Width, Length, Start Angle, and End Angle information in the ST code bloc.

Mapping DSTV layer names to available processes You can set up ProNest to handle DSTV code bloc layers automatically during import:  1. Open settings (in the Quick Access toolbar, click Settings

).

 2. In the left pane, select the Importing Parts page.

- 361 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

In the CAD Layers section, there are one or more CAD layers mapped to each process supported by your machine (cut, scribe, punch, etc.). The DSTV code bloc names (listed in the table above) will be added to this section.  3. In the column on the right, enter the DSTV code bloc that corresponds to each process. Example:   Machine process

DSTV Code Bloc

Cut

AK;IK

Scribe

NUMBERING;KO

Punch

BO

Display Only

 

Note:

If you have more than one CAD layer/code bloc for a single process, separate the layers/blocs with a semicolon (;) and do not include a space (for example, "0;CUT;AK;IK").

 4. Click Save to permanently store your changes.  5. Click OK. Now, each time you import a DSTV file into the part list, ProNest will automatically map the DSTV layers in the part to available machine processes.

Filtering for DSTV parts In order to view DSTV files in ProNest:  l In the Edit Part List, in the CAD sources section, set Files of type to DSTV files (*.nc;*.nc1). Note:

FabTrol inquiry files, which contain parts and plates for nesting, use DSTV format. When creating a job from a FabTrol inquiry file (File tab > New > New from Inquiry), be sure that CAD layer mappings for that ProNest machine are set up for DSTV import, as described above.

- 362 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Rules and tips for using the SOLIDWORKS interface Rules  l SOLIDWORKS must be installed on the same PC that is running ProNest in order to import SOLIDWORKS parts.  l Parts are imported according to your 3D CAD Files preferences and Importing Parts settings. In 3D CAD Files preferences, you can set things like:  l Coordinate system name  l Automatically detect part thickness  l Which face to import and which faces to ignore  l Whether to import sheet metal parts only  l Automatically detect beveled edges In Importing Parts settings, you can set up:  l Default process - layer mapping (assign SOLIDWORKS layers to available ProNest processes - see below for more details)  l Configuration name to use by default  l Bendlines and Bendtangents can be imported to etch/scribe on the part (see below for more details)

Cut geometry By default, the interior and exterior edges of the face that is brought into ProNest are assigned to the main ProNest cut process.  

- 363 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

The part pictured above contains cut information in the Base feature, which has been extruded to a 3D solid. The outer and inner edges of the Front face of this model will be interpreted by ProNest as cut profiles and mapped to the main cut process (e.g. Plasma, Laser, and so on).

Scribing/marking and punching The best practice for bringing in scribe/mark geometry or punch geometry is to create a separate sketch feature for each process. The sketch feature's name in SOLIDWORKS has to match the layer name assigned to that process in ProNest process layer mapping (Settings > Importing Parts > CAD Import tab).  

- 364 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

  Scribe geometry has been drawn on a sketch called "SCRIBE" in the part shown above. You would then need to enter "SCRIBE" as a layer name in ProNest Importing Parts settings:   Scribe - [Mark] SCRIBE

Note:

Multiple layer names should be separated by a semi-colon (;) with no spaces in between (for instance "SCRIBE;ETCH;MARK"). An asterisk (*) can be used as a wildcard.

Likewise, punch geometry in the SOLIDWORKS part shown above is drawn on a separate sketch called "PUNCH". In order to bring these punches into ProNest, you would need to enter "PUNCH" as a layer name for the punch process in Importing Parts settings.   - 365 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Punch - [P] PUNCH When drawing a punch in SOLIDWORKS, sketch the punch as circle geometry and not as point geometry.

Bendlines If you have a part with bend lines and you want the bends to be scribed/marked when the part is cut, you'd enter "BENDLINES" as a layer name next to the scribe process.   Scribe - [Mark] ETCH;SCRIBE;BENDLINES

Note:

You must put the layer names in ProNest settings ( ) and save it with your machine. Unlike other CAD file types, you can't select layers found in a SOLIDWORKS part in the Edit Part List if they're not already listed in settings.

Multiple cut processes If your machine supports multiple cut processes and you want to assign some edges of a part face to one cut process and other edges to a different cut process, you need to use Hypertherm's ProNest Layering Add-In in SOLIDWORKS. With the layering add-in, you can specify different cut processes for different entities within a single face. For instance, you may want to cut the interiors of a part with plasma, but cut the exterior edges with oxyfuel.   Please contact Hypertherm's CAD/CAM software division for more information on this feature.

- 366 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding SOLIDWORKS parts and assemblies Import a SOLIDWORKS part into ProNest  1. In ProNest, open the Edit Part List window (Home tab >Edit Part List).  2. Set the Files of type to SOLIDWORKS files.  3. In the Properties: CAD Import tab on the lower right, in the Configuration name box you can enter a specific configuration to use. Leaving this blank will bring in the default configuration in the part.

 4. Select your SOLIDWORKS part file (*.sldprt).  5. Click Add Part. After a SOLIDWORKS part is added to the part list, its configuration is shown as a part property of that part. Also, in the Part List in the main window, the configuration used is appended to the part name. For example, a SOLIDWORKS part called "Ring" that was imported with the configuration "Default" would appear as "Ring c.Default").

Import a SOLIDWORKS assembly into ProNest  1. In ProNest, open the Edit Part List window (Home tab >Edit Part List).  2. Set the Files of type to SOLIDWORKS Files.  3. Browse to the folder containing your SOLIDWORKS assembly file (*.sldasm).  4. At this point, you can either:  l Select the assembly file and click Add Part to add the entire assembly to the part list.  l Double-click the file to open the SOLIDWORKS assembly explorer. In the assembly explorer, you can examine and preview all parts in the assembly, choose to import only some parts in the assembly, and select different Configurations for parts. See below for more details.

- 367 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

SOLIDWORKS assembly explorer When you double-click a SOLIDWORKS assembly in the Edit Part List window, an assembly explorer view will open in the Part Sources pane.

SOLIDWORKS assembly explorer in the Edit Part List window   Each part in the assembly is shown as an item in the tree. The checkbox ( the assembly is added.

) next to any part can be cleared to exclude that part when

Quantity For each part, the quantity specified in the assembly is listed here.

Adjusted quantity This is the quantity from the assembly multiplied by the Required Quantity in ProNest (on the Properties: Nesting tab in the Edit Part List window).

Configuration You can select a different configuration for each part in an assembly. The configuration specified in this assembly explorer will take precedence over any configuration name from Properties: CAD Import tab or Importing Parts settings.   Note:

Unless otherwise specified in the assembly explorer, the configuration name on the Properties: CAD Import tab will be used for the assembly and all sub-parts. If this configuration can't be found in any assembly or sub-parts, the default configuration in the assembly or part file will be used instead.

- 368 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Importing SOLIDWORKS drill holes For SOLIDWORKS parts that contain holes that will be drilled, you can set up ProNest to recognize these holes and assign them to the correct tool when the part is imported.   These instructions assume that you are already familiar with the Drill Machine Interface in ProNest. Please refer to About drilling for more information on how drilling works. In this article... Drawing drill holes in SOLIDWORKS Setting up ProNest to bring in drill holes in SOLIDWORKS parts Importing drilled SOLIDWORKS parts

Drawing drill holes in SOLIDWORKS ProNest supports the following drill hole types for SOLIDWORKS parts:  l Straight drill holes  l Threaded holes that require tapping  l Countersunk holes   In order to draw holes that are recognized as drill holes by ProNest, you must use the Hole Wizard in SOLIDWORKS.

The Hole Wizard in SOLIDWORKS 2018   If a hole in a drawing is created as a simple hole (and not with Hole Wizard), ProNest will recognize it as cut geometry by default. For instance, if you were to include a circle on a 2D sketch and then extrude that to create a 3D solid feature, that hole would be interpreted as cut geometry during import.

  In SOLIDWORKS, when adding a hole using the Hole Wizard, select one of the following hole types based on your requirements:

- 369 -

ProNest 2019 Manual  l Hole  l Straight Tap  l Countersink

Straight drill holes For normal drill holes, in the Hole Wizard, for Hole Type, select Hole.

Enter a hole diameter that matches the diameter of the drill tool you want to match. Be sure to set End Condition to Through All, as partial depth holes aren't supported.

Tapped holes Threaded holes that require tapping can be drawn in a few different ways with the SOLIDWORKS Hole Wizard. The easiest way is to select Straight Tap as the Hole Type.

Keep in mind that hole diameter is used to match SOLIDWORKS holes to ProNest tools. The physical hole diameter you get in SOLIDWORKS for a tap hole varies based on how it's added:

- 370 -

ProNest 2019 Manual  l Tap drill diameter - The hole diameter will match the diameter of the standard tap drill (tap pre-drill) for that thread size.  l Cosmetic thread - Both the tap drill and the threaded hole are drawn, but ProNest will use the tap drill diameter during import.  l Remove thread - The hole diameter will match the major thread diameter.   You can use either Tap drill diameter or Cosmetic thread if your ProNest tap tool will match to the tap drill diameter (2).

Side view of a part with major thread diameter (1) and tap drill diameter (2) shown. Select Remove thread if your ProNest tap tool has a diameter equal to the major thread diameter (1) of the hole.

- 371 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

  For example, if your ProNest tap tool for a 1/4-20 hole has a 0.25 in. diameter, you would want to select Remove thread when adding a 1/4-20 tap hole to your drawing.

Differentiating between coarse and fine tap In a drawing you may have threaded holes that are the same diameter, but differ by thread style; they are either coarse or fine. For instance, suppose a drawing has the following threaded holes: 1/4-20 (Coarse) and 1/4-28 (Fine).   You can match these holes to the correct drill tool by including the word "Coarse" or "Fine" in the feature name:

- 372 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

You can set a default thread style (coarse or fine) in 3D CAD Files preferences.

Countersink Countersink holes can be added with any of the three hole types: Hole, Countersink, or Straight Tap. When ProNest detects a countersunk hole, it will try to match it to a countersink tool based on the top diameter of the hole (3).

Side view of a part with top diameter of the countersunk hole (3) shown.   Some countersunk holes require more than two tool hits. For instance, a hole may require tap drill, tap, and countersink tool hits. Unlike holes in other types of CAD files, holes in SOLIDWORKS files can't be matched to compound tools automatically. Instead, you can add these holes as follows:  1. In the Hole Wizard, for Hole Type, select Straight Tap.  2. Set properties for the threaded hole as described in the previous section.  3. Select the Near Side Countersink box.  4. Enter countersink dimensions.  5. Position the hole on the part.  6. If the threads require a thread style that is different from the default style in 3D CAD Files preferences, you can include "Coarse" or "Fine" in the feature name.

Positioning holes When positioning the hole on your part, be sure to place it so that the top of the hole is on the face that will be imported.

- 373 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

User coordinate system The best practice is to assign a user coordinate system in your drawing. This will ensure that the correct face is brought in.  l The origin must intersect the face you want to import.  l Enter a name that matches your ProNest Top view coordinate system name preference.

Limitations for detecting SOLIDWORKS drill holes  l  l  l  l

Only round holes added via Hole Wizard are supported ProNest can't match to a specific compound tool based on feature name Partial-depth (blind) holes are not supported Counterbore holes are not supported

Setting up ProNest to bring in drill holes in SOLIDWORKS parts Generally speaking, a drill-capable ProNest setup must be in use in order to use this feature.

ProNest preferences Several preferences on the 3D CAD Files tab should be set.  1. On the File tab, click Preferences.  2. Click the 3D CAD Files tab.  3. In the SOLIDWORKS section, select Enable drill detection. This preference must be enabled in order to identify drill holes and map them to drill tools in ProNest.  4. In the Top view coordinate system name box, enter the name of the user coordinate system that you use in SOLIDWORKS (as described above).

ProNest settings The following areas of ProNest settings should be configured so that tapped or countersink holes can be brought in. Drill process layer mapping  l On the Settings > Importing Parts page, on the CAD Import tab, in the box next to the Drilling process, type the layer name (s) that you are using for drilling in your CAD drawings. Example

- 374 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

If your ProNest machine supported a tooling process called "Drilling" and you wanted to assign "Drill" and "Tool" CAD layers to that process, you would enter:   Drilling Drill;Tool When a CAD file is imported, all geometry on the "Drill" and "Tool" layers would be brought in as drilled holes. Use CAD Colors  l On the Settings > Importing Parts page, on the CAD Import tab, set Quality to Use CAD Colors.

Pilot drill options  l On the Settings > Tooling page, set Pilot drill options to Enable pilot drill, sequence them separately. This keeps holes that require multiple tool hits in the correct sequence. Tap and countersink colors This is required if you want ProNest to assign holes to tap or countersink tools during import.  l On the Settings > Tooling page, set Coarse tap color, Fine tap color, and Countersink color to each have a unique color index number. Even though SOLIDWORKS doesn't support colors, this is required by ProNest.

Importing drilled SOLIDWORKS parts Drilled SOLIDWORKS parts are imported just like any other SOLIDWORKS part. Follow the instructions in Adding SOLIDWORKS parts and assemblies.   Once parts have been imported, you can confirm that the right tools are assigned:  l Verifying tool assignments for holes  l Changing tool assignments for holes

- 375 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding Inventor parts Import an Inventor part into ProNest  1. In ProNest, open the Edit Part List window (Home tab > Edit Part List).  2. Set the Files of type to Autodesk Inventor Files.  3. Select your Inventor part file (*.ipt). The part will be shown in the Preview.  4. Click Add Part.

Import an Inventor assembly into ProNest  1. In ProNest, open the Edit Part List window (Home tab >Edit Part List).  2. Set the Files of type to Autodesk Inventor Files.  3. Browse to the folder containing your Inventor assembly file (*.iam).  4. At this point, you can either:  l Select the assembly file and click Add Part to add the entire assembly to the part list.  l Double-click the file to open the Inventor assembly explorer. In the assembly explorer, you can examine and preview all parts in the assembly, choose to import only some parts in the assembly. See below for more details.

Inventor assembly explorer When you double-click an Inventor assembly in the Edit Part List window, an assembly explorer view will open in the Part Sources pane. Each part in the assembly is shown as an item in the tree.

The checkbox (

) next to any part can be cleared to exclude that part when the assembly is added.

Quantity For each part, the quantity specified in the assembly is listed here.

Adjusted quantity This is the quantity from the assembly multiplied by the Required Quantity in ProNest (on the Properties: Nesting tab in the Edit Part List window).

Configuration Not used for Inventor parts. - 376 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Rules and tips for using the Inventor interface Rules  l Inventor must be installed on the same PC that is running ProNest in order to import Inventor parts.  l Inventor parts can be imported as single parts (.ipt) or assemblies (.iam).  l ProNest always imports the face with the largest surface area, unless a user coordinate system name is used (see 3D CAD Files preferences). There must be a Flat Pattern for the .ipt file that you want to import.  l Parts are imported according to your 3D CAD Files preferences and Importing Parts settings. In 3D CAD Files preferences, you can set things like:  l Coordinate system name  l Automatically detect part thickness  l Whether to import sheet metal parts only  l Automatically detect beveled edges In Importing Parts settings, you can set up:  l Default process - layer mapping (assign Inventor layers to available ProNest processes - see below for more details)  l Bendlines and Bendtangents can be imported to etch/scribe on the part (see below for more details)  l BOM can be used by making sure that the iProperties of the part is set up properly (see below for more details).

Cut geometry By default, the interior and exterior edges of the face that is brought into ProNest are assigned to the main ProNest cut process.  

- 377 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

  The part pictured above contains cut information in the Base feature, which has been extruded to a 3D solid. The outer and inner edges of the Front face of this model will be interpreted by ProNest as cut profiles and mapped to the main cut process (e.g. Plasma, Laser, and so on).

Scribing/marking and punching The best practice for bringing in scribe/mark geometry or punch geometry is to create a separate sketch feature for each process. The sketch feature's name in Inventor has to match the layer name assigned to that process in ProNest process layer mapping (Settings > Importing Parts > CAD Import tab).  

- 378 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

  Scribe geometry has been drawn on a sketch called "SCRIBE" in the part shown above. You would then need to enter "SCRIBE" as a layer name in ProNest Importing Parts settings:   Scribe - [Mark] SCRIBE

Note:

Multiple layer names should be separated by a semi-colon (;) with no spaces in between (for instance "SCRIBE;ETCH;MARK"). An asterisk (*) can be used as a wildcard.

Likewise, punch geometry in the Inventor part shown above is drawn on a separate sketch called "PUNCH". In order to bring these punches into ProNest, you would need to enter "PUNCH" as a layer name for the punch process in Importing Parts settings.   Punch - [P] PUNCH - 379 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Bendlines If you have a part with bend lines and you want the bends to be scribed/marked when the part is cut, you'd enter "BENDLINES" as a layer name next to the scribe process.   Scribe - [Mark] ETCH;SCRIBE;BENDLINES

Note:

You must put the layer names in ProNest settings ( ) and save it with your machine. Unlike other CAD file types, you can't select layers found in a SOLIDWORKS part in the Edit Part List if they're not already listed in settings.

BOM information The Bill of Material (BOM) layer of a CAD file is an optional drawing layer used to specify part information like material, grade, thickness, and quantity. Inventor has a feature called iProperties which you can use to enter BOM information for a part.   To enter ProNest BOM information in an Inventor part:  

 1. With the part open in Inventor, click

> iProperties.

 2. In the iProperties dialog, click the Custom tab.  3. Enter ProNest BOM fields and values. See Bill of Materials (BOM) for a list of allowable BOM fields.

 4. Click Apply and then save the drawing.   When the Inventor part is imported into ProNest, those BOM properties will be automatically assigned to the part. Note that unlike BOM information in a DWG or DXF file, there is no need to map the BOM layer in Importing Parts settings.   Materials

- 380 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Material name, thickness, class, and grade can be entered as Custom iProperties. They will be recognized by ProNest and assigned during import.   Alternately, you can specify a BOM material with Inventor's Material feature (on the Physical tab of the iProperties dialog). When an Inventor Material is assigned, ProNest will attempt to match it to a material type in ProNest. Be sure to add the Inventor material name to the ProNest material alias list. Inventor Material can be used in conjunction with the Detect part thickness preference to match a materials during import.

- 381 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

What is a VSP part? The Variable Shape Parts (VSP) feature offers an easy way to create custom parts within ProNest, without the need of a CAD file. ProNest provides you with a repository of more than 50 different variable shape parts that are based on commonly used geometric profiles.  

Some of the VSP shapes available in ProNest   A simple interface allows you to specify dimensions for interior and exterior geometries. These simple profiles can also be used in combination with each other to create an endless variety of custom profiles.   To view the VSP repository of parts:  l From the Edit Part List window, in the Part Sources explorer, click the VSP tab.

- 382 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding VSP parts To add VSP parts to your part list:  1. From the Edit Part List window, in the Part Sources section, click the VSP tab.  2. Select the part you want to add by clicking it once.  3. Modify Nesting and Leads properties, as necessary.  4. Click the Add Part button. The VSP Shape Reference will appear. From this dialog you can modify VSP part dimensions, add cut-outs, and assign cut processes.  5. When you are finished modifying your part, click OK. The VSP part will now be added to your part list.

- 383 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

VSP Shape Reference The VSP Shape Reference is used to enter required part information for the VSP part you want to add. Using this dialog, you can input part dimensions, add cut-outs to parts, and assign cut processes to part profiles.   To open the VSP Shape Reference for a part:  1. In the Edit Part List, click the VSP tab.  2. Double-click a VSP part. -orWith a VSP part selected, click the Add Part button. The VSP Shape Reference is organized as follows: Dimensions grid The upper-left section contains a grid where you can input dimensions for the selected VSP part or added cut-out.   Reference diagram The upper-right section contains a diagram of the selected VSP part or added cut-out.   VSP Preview The lower right section contains the VSP Preview, which shows your part exactly as it will appear on the nest. The VSP Preview will be updated as you make changes to part dimensions.   The rest of the VSP Shape Reference contains fields for part name and quantity, as well as buttons for adding cut-outs and assigning cut processes.

Entering part dimensions When you click a field in the Dimensions grid, that field will become active and editable. A hint describing the active field will appear at the bottom of the Dimensions grid. The reference diagram to the right will display the VSP part profile in black. The currently active field will be indicated by a blue line.   To enter dimensions for a VSP part:  1. In the Shape Reference, from the Dimensions grid, click the field you want to change.  2. Input a value for that field.  3. Press ENTER. After dimensions are changed and a part is added to the part list, ProNest will store the modified dimensions for that VSP part. The next time the Shape Reference for that part is opened, it will contain the modified dimensions. Note: If you enter a numerical value in the dimensions grid that is geometrically impossible, an "Invalid Dimensions" message will appear in the VSP Preview.

Example 1:  1. Open the VSP Shape Reference for the VSP part Notched Rectangle.  2. In the Dimensions grid, click Width. The Width field will become active and the reference diagram will change.

- 384 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

The blue line in the reference diagram for Notched Rectangle shows the part's width.  3. In Dimensions grid, in the Width field, type 15.  4. Press ENTER. Notice that the shape of the image shown in reference diagram will not change, whereas the VSP Preview will reflect the changes made to your VSP part.  5. Click Cancel. The VSP Shape Reference will close and ProNest will not store the changes made to Notched Rectangle.   Example 2: In certain instances, you can enter negative dimension values for concave or convex entities to manipulate a VSP part. This is only works with specific types of entities.  

Figure 1   The VSP Preview for Notched Rectangle is shown in Figure 1. All radii for this part have a value of 1. Note that all four arc-shaped entities are concave.  

- 385 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Figure 2   The VSP Preview for a modified Notched Rectangle is shown in Figure 2. This part is identical to the part in Figure 1 except that the value for Radius 2 has been changed to -1. Because this value is negative, the upper arc-shaped entity has become inverted, and is now convex.  

- 386 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding a cut-out Cut-outs can be added to any VSP part that does not already have an interior profile.   To add an interior profile to your part:  1. In the VSP Shape Reference, click the Add Cut Out button. A pop-up dialog will appear prompting you to enter a shape and position for your cut-out. The left column contains a list of 36 different shapes to choose from.  2. Select a shape for your cut-out.  3. Select an Initial start point for your cut-out. This describes where your cut-out will initially be placed on the part.  4. Click OK. Once added, the size, shape, and placement of a cut-out can be modified using the Dimensions grid. Cut-out placement can be adjusted using the X Offset and Y Offset fields. You can view a complete picture of your VSP part and cut-out in the VSP Preview.   You can use the arrows ( ) above the reference diagram to select either the VSP part profile or any added cut-outs. Note that a part or cut-out must be selected in order to be modified. Important: Be sure to adjust your cut-out so that it is not in conflict with the profile of your VSP part. ProNest will not prevent you from adding a cut-out that overlaps with the part profile or another cut-out. To delete a cut out:  1. Select a cut-out using the arrows above the reference diagram.  2. Click the Delete Cut Out button. Note: Any added cut-outs will be applied to your current VSP part only. Unlike VSP part dimensions, added cut-outs are not saved for use with future VSP parts.

- 387 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Assigning cut processes to VSP parts You can select the type of cut processes to use for the interior and exterior profiles of the part. This can be useful for multi-process machines such as those using plasma and hi-definition plasma. The list of available cut processes comes from the cut processes supported by your current ProNest machine.   To assign cut processes for a VSP part:  1. Open the VSP Shape Reference for your part.  2. Click the Cut Process button.  3. Select a cut process from the list of available processes for both interior and exterior profiles.  4. Click OK.

- 388 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding a pipe part to the part list Add a pipe part to your part list  1. From the Edit Part List window, in the Part Sources explorer, click the Pipe tab.  2. Select the pipe part that you want to add by clicking it once.  3. Modify any nesting or lead part properties, as necessary.  4. Click Add Part. The Pipe Shape Reference will open. From this dialog you can modify pipe part dimensions, settings, cut processes, and other properties.  5. When you are finished modifying your part, click OK. The part will be added to your part list.

- 389 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding library parts to the part list Add an library part to the part list  1. From the Edit Part List window, in the Part Sources explorer, click the Library tab.  2. Select the library part you want by clicking it once.  3. Modify any nesting or lead part properties, as necessary.  4. Click Add Part. The library part will be added to your part list.

- 390 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding assemblies to the part list Add an assembly to the part list  1. From the Edit Part List window, in the Part Sources explorer, click the Assemblies tab.  2. Select the assembly you want by clicking it once.  3. Modify any nesting or lead part properties, as necessary. Any changes to properties will be applied to all parts in your assembly.  4. Click Add Part. The parts in your assembly will be added to your part list.

- 391 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

About quality In ProNest, each entity in a part can have a unique quality value. Quality numbers can have an associated color, which can be useful for visually verifying the quality on parts in ProNest. You can also add a descriptive alias to a quality number.   For applications (such as waterjet) where quality is already specified in the CAD file using colors to indicate cut quality, this can be brought in automatically in ProNest when the CAD file is imported. Quality can also be assigned or edited in Advanced Edit, after parts have been imported.

How is quality used to apply cutting parameters? In the Process Parameters spreadsheet, Quality is an allowable key used in record matching. It is also allowed in Interior and Exterior Leads spreadsheets.   To learn more about how quality is used in ProNest, see:  l Using quality from a CAD file  l Assigning quality to a part  l Viewing quality values on a nest  l Setting up quality colors and aliases  l Record matching in settings spreadsheets

- 392 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Use quality from a CAD file Some CAD drawings already contain quality information for individual entities using CAD color numbers. These color numbers can be carried over into ProNest as quality numbers when the part is imported.  1. In the Part Sources pane of the Edit Part List window (Home tab > Edit Part List), click a CAD file once to select it.  2. In the Properties: CAD Import tab on the lower right, set Quality to Use CAD Colors.

 3. Click the Add Part button in the toolbar.   Example:   A CAD file contains an exterior and an interior profile.  

In the CAD editor, the entities on the exterior are assigned a color with an index number of 3 and the entities on the interior are assigned a color with an index value of 4.   When the CAD file is imported (with Quality set to Use CAD Colors), the exterior would have a quality of 3 and the interior would have a quality of 4.

- 393 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Assigning quality to a part Quality can be assigned during CAD import (for CAD files only) or after parts are added.

Assign a single quality to an entire part during import CAD files can have a single quality assigned to all entities in the part. Note that this is not available for VSP or Pipe parts.  1. In the Part Sources pane of the Edit Part List window (Home tab > Edit Part List), click a CAD file once to select it.  2. In the Properties: CAD Import tab on the lower right, select a number for Quality.

 3. Click the Add Part button in the toolbar. Every entity in the part will have the same quality value. Note that part lead-ins and lead-outs get their quality values separately from Leads settings.

Change the quality on added parts You can set the quality on individual part entities in Advanced Edit.  1. Bring the added part into Advanced Edit (right-click the part and select Advanced Edit).  2. In Select Mode ( all entities.

), click an entity to select it. You can use SHIFT + click to select multiple entities, or press CTRL + A to select

 3. In the Properties pane, change the Quality.  4. Click the Apply button.

- 394 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Setting up quality colors and names Each quality number can have a color and alternate name (such as "Coarse", "Fine", etc.) assigned to it. You can change colors and names assigned to quality numbers to suit your needs.

Change the color assigned to a quality number You can quickly change the quality colors for qualities that exist in the current job from the Color Legend:  1. In the main nesting screen, open the Color Legend (View tab > Color Legend).  2. Click the color swatch (

) for the number that you want to change.

 3. Select a new color.  4. Click OK.   In Preferences, you can set the quality colors for all numbers (0 - 255):  1. Open Preferences (File tab > Preferences).  2. On the left side, click Colors.  3. Click the color swatch (

) for the number that you want to change.

 4. Select a new color.  5. Click OK. All entities with that quality number will be displayed in ProNest in the color that you selected.

Effect on importing parts When CAD files are imported in ProNest with a quality, they will be colored according to the ProNest color index that is in Preferences.   If there are different color to number assignments in the CAD editor than what is in ProNest, the part will use the quality number from CAD editor, but will be colored according to the ProNest quality index.   Example:   Let's say that in your CAD program (such as AutoCAD®) Red ( ) has a color index number of 1, but in ProNest you have the quality number 1 set to Blue ( ).   With "Use CAD Colors" enabled, if you import a CAD file containing a profile that is colored Red, it will be brought into ProNest with a quality number of 1, but will be colored in Blue.

Add a name for a quality number You can add a name for any quality number. A quality name typically contains identifying characteristics for that quality. For instance, you might add a cut quality (such as "Coarse" or "Fine") or cut speed (80%, 60%, etc.) as a name.  1. Open Preferences (File tab > Preferences).  2. On the left side, click Colors.  3. For the quality that you want to change, in the Name column, type a name.  4. Click OK The assigned name will appear wherever that quality is listed in ProNest. For instance, "Quality = 1 - Separation Cut". Quality names are saved with your machine (.cfg).

- 395 -

ProNest 2019 Manual   To quickly add or change the quality name of a number:  1. In the main nesting screen, open the Color Legend (View tab > Color Legend).  2. Click the color swatch (

) for the number that you want to change.

 3. Click Edit Name.  4. Enter a new quality name in the box.  5. Click OK.

- 396 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Viewing quality values on a nest Parts on a nest, in the part list, and in Advanced Edit can be colored according to quality values. This can be helpful when visually verifying the quality of a part.

Show quality colors on parts  1. In the main nesting screen, open the Color Legend (View tab > Color Legend).  2. Click the

Outline link.

 3. Select Quality. Quality

Nest showing quality colors   Note that in the Color Legend, only the qualities that are used by parts in the job will be displayed.

Highlight a single quality on a nest You can hover the cursor over a color box in the Color Legend and all entities of that quality will be drawn in bold on the nest.  

- 397 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Quality

Entities with Quality 3 are highlighted on the nest

- 398 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

8. PLATE LIST What is the plate list? The ProNest plate list contains all of the user defined plates and inventory plates that have been added to your job. Unlike Standard Plate Sizes, which are defined in your settings, plates in the plate list can be assigned various plate properties such as material, type, stack quantity, priority, etc. Plates are added to your job's plate list using the Edit Plate List window.

- 399 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

About the Edit Plate List window Plates are added to the plate list using the Edit Plate List window. From this window you can define and add custom plates to your plate list, modify properties of existing plates, and delete plates.

Open the Edit Plate List

 l On the Home tab, click Edit Plate List. Like the main window, the Edit Plate List window has menus and toolbars along the top and a status bar along the bottom. The rest of the window is split into four sections:    Plate Sources The upper-left contains ProNest plate sources. Each plate source appears as a different tab. The User Defined tab is a standard plate source. If you have purchased the Plate Inventory module, the Inventory tab will also appear here.   Plate List The lower-left contains the job’s plate list. All plates that have been added will appear here. The properties for each plate in the plate list are displayed next to the plate name. You can modify these properties by clicking on a field and entering the value you want.   Preview The upper-right contains a tool window called Preview. The currently selected plate is displayed here. You can use the dimensions button ( ) to show or hide dimensions of your plate.   Properties The lower-right contains a tool window called Properties. Properties for the currently selected plate are displayed here. When you change the properties of a selected plate in the Plate Sources explorer, your changes will be made to that plate as well as any subsequent plates that are added in the current job. However if you change properties for a selected plate in the plate list, your changes will be applied to that plate only.

- 400 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Plate properties When plates are added to the plate list, they are assigned properties like quantity and priority. Plate properties can be assigned to plates using the Properties grid in the lower right section of the Edit Plate List window or via the Plate List tool window.   When you change the properties of a selected plate in the Plate Sources explorer, your changes will be made to that plate as well as any subsequent plates that are added in the current job. However if you change properties for a selected plate in the Plate List tool window, your changes will be applied to that plate only.   Quantity

Required  This defines the quantity of the selected plate.  

Stack  Stacks are used with real-world machines that can process multiple plates at the same time. Stack quantity defines the number of plates that will be cut simultaneously. The Required quantity for a plate should always be greater than or equal to that plate's Stack quantity.   Range: 1 to 100 Recommended value: 1 When you nest on a plate that has a Stack quantity greater than one, ProNest will automatically create identical nests for each additional stack specified. When a part is added to the current nest, a copy of that part will also be added to each of the duplicate stack nests.   Example:   Let's say you are using a custom plate with a Stack quantity of 2. In your part list, you have a single part with a Required quantity of 10. During nesting, parts will be added 2 at a time (one part on the current, visible nest and the other on the hidden stack nest). When all 10 parts have been nested, you will only see 5 nested parts on the current nest, though the Part List tool window will indicate "10 of 10 nested".

Advanced: Typically, using stacks requires a special post processor to generate output for your machine. Contact Hypertherm for more information.   Attributes

Material Plate material can be assigned with this setting.  

Safe zone scheme In the Safe zone scheme list, select the safe zone scheme that should be assigned to your plate. You can also create new schemes or edit existing ones in the list.   For more information on safe zone schemes, see "What are Safe Zones?" on page 408  

Priority Priority is used to sort plates for automatic nesting. All things being equal, plates with a priority of 1 will be nested on before plates with a priority of 99.

- 401 -

ProNest 2019 Manual   Range: 1 to 99

Rotation (°) This describes the initial rotation angle of the plate. This setting can be useful for irregularly shaped plates, such as remnants.  

Plate name This defines the name of your plate.     When a plate in the Plate List tool window is selected, the Plate type, Size, Inventory ID and Nested fields will also appear in the Properties section. These fields appear for informational purposes only and cannot be modified.

- 402 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding custom plates to the plate list You can define properties for custom rectangular, circular, or remnant plates and add the plates to the plate list.

Add a custom plate to the plate list  1. In the Edit Plate List window, from the Custom Plates tab, double-click the type of plate you want to add. The Custom Plate dialog will appear.  2. From the Custom Plate dialog, adjust plate details and properties, as necessary. (See below for a description of properties.)  3. Click the Add button. Your custom plate will be added to the plate list.  4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each custom plate you want to add.  5. When you have finished adding plates, click Close.

The Custom Plate dialog Using the Custom Plate dialog, you can define the plate details and properties for the user defined plate you want to add. You can add multiple user defined plates by simply adjusting dimensions and properties and clicking the Add button.

Define your plate Name This defines the name of your plate.  

Type This defines the type and size of your plate. Rectangular and Circular are standard plate types. If you have purchased the Plate Inventory or Custom Remnant option, Remnant can also be selected.   Choices: Rectangular, Circular, Remnant (if applicable) Rectangular Rectangular plates are measured using length x width. You can use the list of standard plate sizes to select a rectangular plate, or type in a custom size using the Length and Width fields.   Circular Circular plates are measured using diameter.   Remnant If you want to add remnant plates, click the Define Remnant button. To learn more, see "Custom remnants" on page 405.  

Material This defines the material of the plate. Parts that have the same material will be able to be nested on this plate. Note: When spreadsheets are used, the list of available materials comes from the materials found in your Process Parameters spreadsheet. When spreadsheets are not used, the list of available materials comes from your material database.

Safe zone scheme In the Safe zone scheme list, select the safe zone scheme that should be assigned to your plate. You can also create new schemes or edit existing ones in the list.

- 403 -

ProNest 2019 Manual   For more information on safe zone schemes, see "What are Safe Zones?" on page 408  

Properties Quantity This defines the quantity of the selected plate.  

Priority Priority is used to sort plates for automatic nesting. All things being equal, plates with a priority of 1 will be nested on before plates with a priority of 99.   Range: 1 to 99

Stack quantity Stacks are used with real-world machines that can process multiple plates at the same time. Stack quantity defines the number of plates that will be cut simultaneously. The required Quantity for a plate should always be greater than or equal to that plate's Stack quantity.   Range: 1 to 100 Recommended value: 1 When you nest on a plate that has a Stack quantity greater than one, ProNest will automatically create identical nests for each additional stack specified. When a part is added to the current nest, a copy of that part will also be added to each of the duplicate stack nests.   Example:   Let's say you are using a custom plate with a Stack quantity of 2. In your part list, you have a single part with a Required quantity of 10. During nesting, parts will be added 2 at a time (one part on the current, visible nest and the other on the hidden stack nest). When all 10 parts have been nested, you will only see 5 nested parts on the current nest, though the Part List task pane will indicate "10 of 10 nested".

Advanced: Typically, using stacks requires a special post processor to generate output for your machine. Contact Hypertherm for more information.

Rotation (°) This describes the initial rotation angle of the plate. This setting can be useful for irregularly shaped plates, such as remnants.  

- 404 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Custom remnants With custom remnants, you can input the dimensions of an irregular plate or remnant into ProNest. After they are created, custom remnants can be used immediately or stored in the Plate Inventory for use at a later time.

Custom remnants are defined based on a series of reference points on the Cartesian (X,Y) plane, which can be specified in either absolute or incremental coordinates. Absolute coordinates are entered relative to the point of origin (0,0); incremental coordinates are entered relative to the last point added.   In ProNest, custom remnants can be created using the AutoNest Setup dialog, the New Nest dialog, the Edit Part List window, or the Plate Inventory editor. If a custom remnant is created using the Plate Inventory editor, that remnant can be stored in the database and used at a later time. Otherwise, custom remnants will be added to the nest or plate list you are currently working on. Tip:

Before you define your custom remnant in ProNest, make sure that you have the dimensions of your physical plate handy.

To define a custom remnant (from the Edit Plate List window):  1. On the Custom Plates tab, double-click Remnant.  2. In the Type box, make sure Remnant is selected.  3. Click Define Remnant.  4. Click Clear All Points.  5. Using your preferred coordinate system (absolute or incremental), click the Add Point button to make 0,0 the start of your remnant.  6. Change the x and y values to define to the next point for your remnant.  7. Click Add Point.  8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until your remnant is complete.

- 405 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding inventory plates to the plate list Add an inventory plate to the plate list  1. In the Edit Plate List window, click the Inventory tab.  2. Select the inventory plate you want to add by clicking it once.  3. Adjust plate properties, if necessary.  4. Click the Add Plate button. Your plate will appear in the plate list.

- 406 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Plate reservations You can reserve inventory plates so that other users cannot access them. When a plate is reserved, ProNest will not allow that plate to be used by any user other than the one who has reserved it.

In this article... Reserve an inventory plate Release an inventory plate View plate reservations

Reserve an inventory plate  1. In the Edit Plate List window, select the Inventory tab.  2. Right-click the inventory plate that you want to reserve.  3. Select Reserve.  4. Enter a quantity to reserve.  5. Click Reserve. The inventory plate will remain reserved until you either release it or use it to generate output.

Release an inventory plate  1. In the Edit Plate List window, select the Inventory tab.  2. Right-click the inventory plate that you want to release.  3. Select Release.  4. Enter a quantity.  5. Click Release. Reserved plates can only be released by the user who made the initial reservation.

View plate reservations  1. In the Edit Plate List window, select the Inventory tab.  2. Right-click the inventory plate that you want to view.  3. Select View Reservations. ProNest will show the user who made the reservation, as well as the quantity and date reserved. Tip:

An alternate way of reserving plates is to first add any inventory plates that you will use to the plate list, and then select Reserve All in the Plate List tool window. This will prevent other users from accessing the inventory plates that you have already added to the plate list.   If the plate list contains reserved inventory plates, you can release all of these plates by selecting Release All in the Plate List tool window.

- 407 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

What are Safe Zones? Safe zones define areas of a plate on which parts should not be nested. Typically these areas are used for clamping. During any kind of automatic nesting, ProNest will avoid all safe zones. Also, during manual nesting ProNest will show conflicts between parts and safe zones.   Sometimes, a particular group of safe zones can be used on several different plate sizes. This group is called a safe zone scheme. In ProNest, you can define safe zone schemes and then use (and re-use) them on any nest. You can add as many different safe zone schemes as you want in ProNest.  

A plate with a safe zone scheme consisting of four safe zones, which appear in yellow. Safe zones must be rectangular in shape and are positioned relative to the plate edges. Creating a new safe zone scheme You can add a new safe zone scheme from the New Safe Zone Scheme dialog, which can be accessed from the New Nest Setup dialog, the AutoNest Setup dialog, or from the Standard Plate Sizes page in your settings.  1. Open Settings.  2. On the Standard Plate Sizes page, in the Safe Zones section, click drop-down arrow on the Scheme box.  3. Select New. The New Safe Zone Scheme dialog contains a field for Scheme Name, a Safe Zones tab, a Repositions tab, and a Preview.  4. In the New Safe Zone Scheme dialog, enter a Scheme Name. You will now be ready to add safe zones to the scheme.  5. On the Safe Zones tab, click the Add button. The Add Safe Zone dialog will appear.  6. Enter your safe zone dimensions in the Length and Width fields.  l Length: Distance along the plate edge

- 408 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 l Width: Distance to extend into the plate

 7. In the Edge list, select the plate edge that you want to place your safe zone on.  8. Use Offset when the safe zone is not at the corner.  l From Edge: Select the plate edge from which to offset the safe zone.  l Distance: Distance between the plate edge (specified in From Edge) and the safe zone.

 9. Click OK. Your safe zone will appear in the Safe Zones tab. At this point, you can either repeat steps 5 - 9 to create additional safe zones for your scheme or use the Repositions tab to duplicate existing safe zones at a regular interval.   When you have finished adjusting your safe zone scheme, click the OK button at the bottom of the New Safe Zone Scheme dialog. ProNest will store your new safe zone scheme.

Set a default safe zone scheme  1. Open Settings.  2. On the Standard Plate Sizes page, in the Safe Zones section, click drop-down arrow on the Scheme box.  3. Select a default scheme from the list. The scheme selected here will be applied to all new nests, whether the nest uses a custom plate in the plate list, an inventory plate, or just a standard plate size.

- 409 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

9. ADVANCED EDIT

- 410 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

About Advanced Edit Advanced Edit is powerful utility that can be used to make advanced changes to parts after they have been added to the part list. With Advanced Edit, you can create output for a single part, manually add beveled edges to a part, change part scale, add scribe text, add loops to corners, and more.   To bring a part into Advanced Edit:  l From the Edit Part List window, select a part in the part list, then click the Advanced Edit button. or  l From the main ProNest window, right click a part in the part list and select Advanced Edit. or  l Right-click a nested part and select Advanced Edit.  

The Advanced Edit window   Like the main window, the Advanced Edit window has menus and toolbars along the top and a status bar along the bottom. There is a main part editing area where part geometry can be viewed and modified. The Properties tool window appears to the side of this area, displaying properties of the selected part geometry. (If you cannot see the properties window, select Properties Toolbar in the View menu.)

- 411 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Understanding part geometry This article provides an overview of part geometry as it relates to ProNest and will help you when working with parts in Advanced Edit.

Profiles A part consists of one or more profiles. A profile is generally classified as either an exterior profile or an interior profile.

 

The outermost profile (1) shown above is the part's exterior profile. The other two profiles (2, 3) are interior profiles, which will be cut out of the part. Note that leads, extensions, and loops on a given profile are considered part of that profile.   In some cases, parts contain a third type of profile called an open profile. An open profile is a profile that doesn't form a closed circuit.

Entities Each profile in a part can be broken down into component linear or arc motions. These motions are called entities. The number of entities in a part depends on the complexity of that part's geometry. For instance, a circular part may consist of only one entity, whereas a part containing a spline would consist of many entities.

 

There are nine entities in the part shown above. Notice that each profile in this part has been broken down into either linear or arc-shaped entities. The circular interior profile (5) is a single arc motion, and therefore contains only one entity. Start points The start point of a given profile refers to the point on that profile where cutting begins. If leads are in use, this is the point where the lead-in intersects the profile.

- 412 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

The part pictured above has three profiles, each with its own start point. Intersection points Any point where two entities meet (except for the start point) is called an intersection point.

Intersection points denote the limits of a given entity. Loops can be applied at the intersection points of a part.

- 413 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Working with part geometry In Advanced Edit you can view, select, and delete profiles, entities, start points, and intersection points.

In this article... Select a profile View profiles one at a time Select an entity Select a start point Select an intersection point Delete part geometry

Select profile To select a single profile:  1. Click the Select Profiles button (

) in the main toolbar.

 2. Click anywhere on the profile.   To select multiple profiles:  1. Click the Select Profiles button (

) in the main toolbar.

 2. Hold the CTRL and click the profiles you want to select.   To select all profiles of a part:  1. Click the Select Profiles button (

) in the main toolbar.

 2. On the Edit menu, click Select All.

View profiles one at a time  1. On the View menu, select View Single Profile.  2. Use the arrows (

) to advance through profiles on the part.

When View Single Profile is enabled, the active profile is displayed on the part and all other profiles are hidden.

Select entity To select a single entity:  l While in Select Mode (

), click anywhere on the entity.

  To select multiple entities:

- 414 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 l While in Select Mode (

), hold SHIFT and click the entities you want to select.

  To select all entities of a part:   1. Select any single entity.  2. On the Edit menu, click Select All.

Select start point (leads) To select a single start point:  l While in Select Mode (

), click the leads or the start point.

  To select multiple start points:  l While in Select Mode (

), hold SHIFT and click the start points you want to select.

   To select all start points on a part:   1. Select any single start point.  2. In the Edit menu, click Select All.   In order to easily view the start points on a part in Advanced Edit, make sure Start Points is checked in the View menu. Start points will be indicated by a square ( ).

Select intersection point To select an intersection point:  l While in Select Mode (

), click the intersection point on a part.

  To select multiple intersection points:   l While in Select Mode (

), hold SHIFT and click the intersection points you want to select.

   To select all intersection points on a part:  1. Select any intersection point.  2. In the Edit menu, click Select All.   In order to easily view the intersection points on a part in Advanced Edit, make sure Intersection Points is checked in the View menu. Intersection points will be indicated by a circle ( ).   Once a profile, entity, start point (leads), or intersection point is selected, its corresponding properties will appear in the Properties tool window. If you cannot see the Properties tool window in Advanced Edit, check Properties Toolbar in the View menu.

Delete part geometry To delete a profile, entity, loop, or pair of leads from a part in Advanced Edit:

- 415 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. Select the part geometry (as described above).  2. Press DELETE.

- 416 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Move or recalculate part home The part home defines the initialization (0,0) point for the part, or the point where the cutting head will move to before the part is cut. Setting the proper part home location lets the machine operator know how to place a plate on a table.   Part home is indicated by a yellow and white target.

Recalculating the part home You can reset the part home automatically to one of six locations.   Choices: Lower Left, Upper Left, Lower Right, Upper Right, Center of Region, CAD Origin   The CAD Origin refers to the point of origin set when the CAD file was created. To recalculate the part home:   1. With the part in Advanced Edit, on the Part menu, select Recalculate Part Home.  2. Select a location and click OK.

Moving the part home You can manually move the part home to a user-defined location.   To move the part home manually:  1. With the part in Advanced Edit, on the Part menu, select Move Part Home.  2. Using the target cursor (

), click the point on the part where you want to place the part home.

A dialog will display the current position, and the new position that you just specified. If you want, you can relocate the new position in terms of X and Y.  3. Click OK.

- 417 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Creating output for a single part You can create machine-ready NC output for a single part using ProNest. Creating single part output is done after a part has been processed and added to the part list.   To create output for a single part:  1. Bring the part into Advanced Edit.  2. Make any needed changes (such as leads positioning) to your part in Advanced Edit.  3. From the File menu, select Output Part. The Output Part dialog will open. The selected part will be listed, with a checkbox next to it.  4. Enter a name for the output file.  5. Select a Home Position for your part. By default, this will match the Part home from your CNC Output settings.  6. Click Output. Your output file will be created in the specified location.

- 418 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Modifying the cut sequence within a single part You can manually change the cut sequence for profiles within a single part using Advanced Edit. This applies only to parts that contain more than one profile.   To modify the cut sequence of part profiles:  1. With the part in Advanced Edit, on the Part menu, select Cut Sequence. The cut sequence number of each profile in the part will appear.

 2. Click each profile that you want to change. -orClick the Clear Cut Sequence toolbar button (

) to remove the entire sequence.

 3. Click each profile in the order that you want them cut.  4. Click Close on the Cut Sequence toolbar.

- 419 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Change part scale From Advanced Edit, you can change part size proportionally using scaling. Note that changing the scale of a part must be done before the part is nested.   To scale a part:  1. Bring the part into Advanced Edit.  2. Click the Scale button.  3. With the cursor, drag a line on your part. The length of this line will be used to calculate the DX (delta or change in x), DY (delta or change in y) and the distance.  4. In the Scale (%) box, enter a percentage to resize your part by. You can also enter a value for DX or DY, and part dimensions will change proportionally.  5. Click OK. Part dimensions will be resized proportionally. Note that this will not affect the size of any leads, extensions, loops, and/or tabs on the part.

- 420 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Flip leads This is useful in special situations where you need to change an interior profile to an exterior profile, or vice versa.  

When leads are flipped, the selected pair of leads (both lead-in and lead-out) is mirrored over the profile that it is on. The start point and any leads properties (style, size, etc.) will remain unchanged.   To flip a pair of leads:  1. With a part in Advanced Edit, select the pair of leads by clicking on them.  2. Click the Flip Leads button.

- 421 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Split profile You can select one or more entities on a single profile and split them off into separate profiles. Splitting a profile into multiple component profiles can be used to apply specific settings to different sides of a part or to control the cut sequence of a part with a beveled edge.   To split a profile:  1. Bring the part into Advanced Edit.  2. While in Select mode ( CTRL + click.

), click the entity that you want to split off into a new profile. You can select multiple entities using

 3. In the Entity menu, select Split Profile. The entity will be split into a separate profile. The part geometry will not change, though the start and end points of the newly-created profile will be considered open profiles.

- 422 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Split entity You can split an entity into multiple component entities. This is used primarily for blind beveling applications where only one section of an entity requires a beveled edge.  

  To split an entity:  1. Bring the part into Advanced Edit.  2. While in Select mode (

), click the entity that you want to split. The selected entity will appear blue.

 3. On the Entity menu, select Split Entity. The Split Entity dialog will appear.  4. Using one of the Split Options (see below), select how you want the entity to be split.  5. Click OK. The entity will be split into two separate entities. The part geometry will not change. Transition loops can be added at the ends of each new entity. Tip: In order to clearly see the limits of an entity, make sure that Intersection Points is checked on the View menu of Advanced Edit. Split Options

Angle value from point This applies to arc-shaped entities only. The greater the angle, the further the split point ( ) will be from the specified point (  

or

Coordinate specification You will only need to modify one value, as X and Y are automatically synched so that split point ( ) remains on the selected entity.  

Distance from point The distance along the entity from the specified point (  

or

) to the split point ( ).

Equal split of selected entity The selected entity will be divided in half.  

- 423 -

).

ProNest 2019 Manual

Close open profiles If you have imported a part with an open profile that forms a gap, you can close the gap using Advanced Edit.  

To be considered an open profile, a gap must exceed the Open profile tolerance specified in the Importing Parts settings page. Important: Closing open profiles with ProNest can be effective when used with relatively small, linear entities. However, the best way of closing an open profile is to fix the part's geometry using an external CAD editor. To close an open profile:  1. Bring the part into Advanced Edit.  2. In the View menu, make sure Open Profiles is selected. Diamond-shaped markers ( ) will indicate the edges of the gap.  3. In the Part menu, select Close Open Profiles.  4. Click inside a diamond marker to indicate where the connecting line should begin.  5. Click the other diamond marker to draw a line.  6. Select the profile type (Exterior, Interior, or Open) that matches the type of profile that is being closed.  7. Select the appropriate kerf value for that profile type.  8. Right-click on the part to close the profile.

- 424 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Saving changes to a part Any changes made to a part in Advanced Edit will not go into effect until those changes are saved.   To save changes to a part:  l On the File menu, select Save Changes. All changes made to that part (such as scaling, added scribe text, modified leads, relocated part home, etc.) will be saved. Note that these changes apply to the specific part in the part list, and not to the part's source file.

Saving Advanced Edit tokens You can make your changes to a part in Advanced Edit permanent by selecting Save Advanced Edit tokens and Save part file tokens in the Importing Parts (Advanced) page of your ProNest settings ( ). This will save all part changes made in Advanced Edit to the part's token file.   The next time the CAD file is imported from the part source, the part's token file will be loaded instead. In this way, changes made to parts in Advanced Edit can be kept after the current job is output. Note: Saving Advanced Edit changes using tokens applies to CAD files only.

- 425 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Entity properties When an entity is selected in Advanced Edit, its properties will be displayed in the Properties toolbar. When modifying the properties of an entity, be sure to click the Apply button after you have finished making your changes.

Geometry Start point The location of the point at the beginning of the selected entity, expressed in terms of X and Y.  

Center point The center point if the selected arc were extended to form a complete circle. This is a location expressed in terms of X, Y and applies to arc-shaped entities only.  

Length For straight entities this is a linear distance; for arc-shaped entities this is the arc length.  

Radius The radius if the selected arc were extended to form a complete circle. This is a distance expressed in linear units and applies to arcshaped entities only.  

Parameters Quality The quality assigned to the selected entity. Assigning quality to an entity can be used to apply specific cutting parameters to that entity.  

Pulse cut Pulse cutting is a special technique used with laser cutting machines. When selected, pulse cut instructions will be inserted into the CNC code for the selected entity.  

Bevel Properties This section is available as part of the Bevel Cutting module.  

Gradual bevel With gradual bevel, you can transition from one bevel angle to another along one or more entities. When this box is checked, you will be prompted to enter a bevel cut type for the Start and End of the selected entity. It is recommended that you use the same cut type for both the Start and End, however you can transition from one bevel type to another (for instance, V to A) depending on your machine's capability.   The most important aspect of gradual bevel is to set a different Angle for the Start and End of the selected entity. When the gradual bevel part is cut, the cutting head will gradually transition from the Start angle to the End angle.  

- 426 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

The beveled edge pictured above is a "V cut" with a Start angle of 15° and an End angle of 45°. (This assumes a positive orientation is used and that the part will be cut in a clockwise direction) Note:

Gradual beveling is possible only with certain types of machines and bevel cutting heads. Please make sure that your machine is capable of making transitional bevel cuts before using this feature.

Start The bevel conditions set at the beginning of the selected entity. The properties in this section will be applied to the entire selected entity (unless gradual bevel is used).  

Cut type  You can specify a type of bevel cut to apply to the selected entity. The list of available bevel cut types is limited by the types listed in your Bevel XLS.   Choices: I (no bevel), V, A, X, Y, Y-Bottom, K See "Bevel types" on page 829 for an overview of different cut types.

Pass For the selected entity, each pass of the cutting head is listed here. For single-pass beveled edges, this will simply be Pass. For multi-pass bevel edges, Top Pass, Land Pass, and/or Bottom Pass will be listed, depending on the Cut type selected.   For each pass, you can specify a bevel Angle. Once a bevel Cut type and Angle are selected, Feedrate, Kerf, Current, and Voltage will automatically use the associated values from your Bevel spreadsheet.  

Angle  This defines the angle of the beveled cut, in relation to the top angle orientation (+/-).    Units: Angle in degrees It is recommended that you use the drop-down list when selecting an angle for a given pass.  

  This list of available bevel angles reflects the angles in your Bevel spreadsheet, which already have associated settings values.

- 427 -

ProNest 2019 Manual  

End This is the bevel cut type and angle that is assigned at the end of the selected entity and is used for the purposes of gradual beveling.  

- 428 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Profile properties When a profile is selected in Advanced Edit, its properties will be displayed in the Properties toolbar. Note:

When modifying the properties of a profile, be sure to click the Apply button after you have finished making your changes.

Region The Min X, Min Y, Max X, and Max Y coordinates describe the minimum rectangular space that the part occupies on the X,Y plane.  

Attributes Process The process assigned to the selected profile. For setups that have more than one cut process (for example, plasma and oxyfuel), you can switch the cut process assigned to the profile.   Drill-enabled setups allow you to change the process for a circular profile between cut (plasma, oxyfuel, and so on) and drilling. See Changing tool assignments for holes for more information.  

Kerf The kerf command assigned to the selected profile (cut processes only)   Choices: Left, Right, Off

Cut Direction Generally, ProNest will process parts so that interior profiles are cut in a counter-clockwise direction and exterior profiles are cut in a clockwise direction.   For cut and scribe processes, you can change the direction in which the selected profile is cut.   Choices: Clockwise, Counterclockwise Tip: To view cut direction in Advanced Edit:  l On the View menu, select Cut Direction.

Tool Name When the profile's process is Drilling, this is the name of the assigned tool. You can change the tool assigned to a hole using this box. See Changing tool assignments for holes for more information.   Single drill tool, no pilot drill Drill tool with a pilot drill Compound tool Missing tool

Description For drilled profiles, the description of the assigned drill tool  

Diameter For drilled profiles, the diameter of the assigned drill tool - 429 -

ProNest 2019 Manual  

Cut Sequence Number Position Location on the profile the cut sequence number will be displayed   Choices: Upper Left, Middle Left, Lower Left, Upper Center, Middle Center, Lower Center, Upper Right, Middle right, Lower Right, Start Point Tip: To view cut sequence in Advanced Edit:  l On the View menu, select Cut Sequence.

Slug Destroy Force slug destroy to be applied to the selected profile, even if it doesn't qualify based on Slug Destroy settings. Clearing this box will remove slug destroy from the profile.   Slug destroy can be applied to interior profiles only. If the interior is too small (based on the Minimum Profile Dimension setting), slug destroy can not be applied.  

- 430 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Start point properties When a profile's start point is selected in Advanced Edit, the X,Y coordinates of the start point and properties of the lead-in and lead-out are displayed in the Properties window. When modifying the properties of a start point, be sure to click the Apply button after you have finished making your changes.

Properties Locked When locked, lead position on the profile (start/end point) and lead properties (style, size, angle, etc.) will not change during any manual or automatic operation in ProNest. This includes automatic nesting, collision avoidance, manual or automatic move leads, etc.   Locked leads are indicated by a padlock.

To lock the leads on a part:  1. In Advanced Edit, select one or more leads (start points) for the profiles in your part. You can use SHIFT + click to select multiple start points.  2. In View menu, make sure that the Properties Toolbar is selected.  3. In the Properties pane, under Start Point properties, select the Locked checkbox.  4. Click Apply.

Lock overtravel You can lock only the overtravel/undertravel on leads, while allowing other lead properties (placement, style, size, etc.) to change. This is done primarily when leads use undertravel to form a tab and you want to retain that tab during automatic nesting, collision avoidance, etc.   Locked overtravel is indicated with a white padlock ( ), while leads that are totally locked are marked with a yellow padlock ( ).  

Style  The style of a lead defines its basic shape.   Choices for Lead In: (None), Arc, Linear, Spiral, Lock-9, Lock-7, Step, Diagonal Step, T-Lock   Choices for Lead Out: (None), Arc, Linear   To change a lead style:  1. Click the right-hand side of the Style row (where it shows the actual style used).  2. Click the down arrow and select a new style from the list.  3. Click OK.  

Size For the linear style, Size specifies the length of the lead. For the arc style, Size specifies the radius of the arc. For all other lead styles, Size controls the scale of the lead.  

- 431 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.5 in. for a lead-in, 0.25 in. for a lead-out  

Angle For linear leads, the angle of a lead-in is defined with respect to the first motion after the lead. A 0° lead-in will lead straight into the first cut. Positive lead-in angles are defined clockwise from the 0° position, so a 90° lead-in will cause a sharp left-turn into the first cut. Leadout angles are defined in a similar fashion with a 0° lead-out extending straight out of the last cut. Positive lead-out angles are defined counter-clockwise from the 0° position, so a 90° lead-out will cause a sharp left-turn out of the last cut.   For arc leads, angle defines the distance the lead will extend around a circle. A 90° lead would extend one quarter of the way around, whereas a 180° lead would extend half way around - forming a semicircle.   Units: Degrees Range: -360.0 to 360.0° Recommended Value: 0.0° for corner leads, 180.0° for a side lead-in, 90.0° for a side lead-out   Example:   The following part has two sets of leads: a pair of linear corner leads (on the exterior profile) and a pair of arc side leads (on the interior profile).

The Angle of both corner leads is set to 0°. The side lead-in has Angle of 180°, the side lead-out has an Angle of 90°.  

Extension The tip of the lead-in (or lead-out) will be extended by this distance.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.0 in.   Example:   The following parts have different Extension values. The arrows along the part profiles indicate cut direction.  

- 432 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Figure 1

Figure 2

  The part displayed in Figure 1 has two exterior arc-style leads. The Extension for both the lead-in and lead-out is 0.0 in.

  The part displayed in Figure 2 also has two exterior arc-style leads. The lead-in has an Extension of 1.0 in. and the lead-out has an Extension of 0.0 in. Notice that the lead-in for this part is longer than the lead-in of the part from Figure 1.

 

Overtravel   This value applies only to the lead-out. If this value is positive (overtravel), then the torch/head will travel past the start point before cutting the lead-out. If this value is negative (undertravel), then the torch/head will begin cutting the lead-out before reaching the start point.   Units: Distance Range: -100.0 to 100.0 in. Recommended Value: 0.0 in.   Example:   The following parts have different Over/Under travel values. The arrows along the part profiles indicate cut direction.

Figure 3

Figure 4

Figure 5

  The part displayed in Figure 3 has two exterior, arc-style leads with an Over/Under travel value of 0.0 in. The start point (where the lead-in intersects the part profile) and end point (where the lead-out intersects the part profile) are the same.

  The part displayed in Figure 4 also has two exterior, arc-style leads with a positive Over/Under travel value of 1.0 in. The distance between the start point and end point of this part is 1.0 in. The portion of part profile that is highlighted in yellow represents the overtravel, which will be cut twice by the torch.

  The part displayed in Figure 5 has two exterior, arc-style leads with a negative Over/Under travel value of -1.0 in. This part exhibits undertravel. The lead-out occurs before the torch finishes cutting the entire profile. As a result, the part in Figure 5 will be connected to the plate by a 1.0 in. wide strip of material after it is cut.

- 433 -

ProNest 2019 Manual  

Quality Assigns a quality number to the selected lead. Assigning quality to a lead can be used to apply specific cutting parameters to that motion.   Choices: Inherit, 1..255 Inherit - Lead will have the same quality as the adjacent entity.   0..255 - The selected lead will be assigned the quality number specified.   The quality number can be used as a key into the process parameter table or as a way of outputting specific M-codes based on the quality number.  

Pierce Style See Leads properties for a detailed description

- 434 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Tab properties Length The distance between the limits ( ) of the tab. Tab length represents the distance along the original part geometry that will remain uncut.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 10.0 in.  

 

Microjoint When selected, the tab will be a microjoint. When cleared, it will be processed as a normal tab.   Microjoints are machine-applied tabs. A place holder is inserted into the CNC code which the cutting machine translates into a tab when the CNC code is run. Note:

This setting will only have an effect on machines with microjoint support.

  Lead-In/Lead-Out By default, tab leads are applied based on Leads settings. If you are using a leads spreadsheet, you can use the Tab Lead column to apply tab-specific leads. See Leads XLS: Format for more information.  

Style The style of a lead defines its basic shape. If set to a value other than (None), a lead-in or lead-out will be placed at then end of the tab where the profile begins again. Available tab styles are based on the tab macros (*.mti) present in your Macros folder.   Default Choices : (None), Arc, Linear   Note:

 l By default, tab macros are stored in the root Macros folder specified on the Settings page in Preferences (go to File > Preferences, then click Settings in the left pane).  l If you are using a bevel setup, tab macros are stored in the Macros folder specified on the Bevel settings page.

Size For the linear style, this specifies the length of the tab lead. For the arc style, this specifies the radius of the arc.   Units: Distance

- 435 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in.  

 

Angle The angle of a tab lead is defined with respect to the motion on the profile next to the lead. A 0° lead will go straight into or out of the profile, while a 90° lead will be perpendicular to the adjacent motion.   Units: Degrees Range: -360.0 to 360.0°

A 90° tab lead-in, with no lead-out Important:

Setting the angle to 180° or more may result in a lead-in/out that cuts into your part. Use caution when setting the tab lead-in angle.

Extension The tip of the tab lead-in or lead-out will be extended by this distance.   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 100.0 in.  

Quality Assigns a default quality number to manually-added tabs. Assigning quality to a tab can be used to apply specific cutting parameters to that motion. Inherit Tab will have the same quality as the next adjacent entity. 0 - 255 Tab will be assigned the quality number specified.   The quality number can be used as a key into the process parameter table or as a way of outputting specific M-codes based on the quality number.   - 436 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Dwell Time in seconds that the cutting head will dwell when cutting resumes after tab. Note:

This field is used for plasma setups and only appears if the selected lead style (macro) supports it.

Pierce time The time in seconds that the cutting head should remain stationary while piercing the beginning of the lead-in. Note:

This field is used for plasma setups and only appears if the selected lead style (macro) supports it.

Pierce percentage The height of the pierce. This a expressed as a percentage of the cut height. Note:

This field is used for plasma setups and only appears if the selected lead style (macro) supports it.

Transfer height The height at which the arc is transferred. This expressed as a percentage of the cut height. Note:

This field is used for plasma setups and only appears if the selected lead style (macro) supports it.

- 437 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Loop properties Loop style The style of a loop defines its basic shape. Available loop styles are based on the loop macros (*.mtl) present in your Macros folder.   Standard Choices for Loop Style: (None), cone, diamond, half-cone, side   Notes:

 l By default, loop macros are stored in the root Macros folder specified on the Settings page in Preferences (go to File > Preferences, then click Settings in the left pane).  l If you are using a bevel setup, loop macros are stored in the Macros folder specified on the Bevel settings page.

Size The scale of the loop   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 1000.0 in.  

Dwell Time in seconds that the cutting head will dwell at the intersection point

Quality Assigns a default quality number to loops. Assigning quality to a loop can be used to apply specific cutting parameters to that motion.   Choices: Inherit, 1..255 Inherit - Loop will have the same quality as the next adjacent entity.   0..255 - Loop will be assigned the quality number specified.   The quality number can be used as a key into the process parameter table or as a way of outputting specific M-codes based on the quality number.  

- 438 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Bevel side view The Bevel Side View tool window displays a cross section of the selected entity. This is used to preview beveled edges. In order to view this tool window, Bevel Side View must be selected on the View menu of Advanced Edit.   Consider the following 3-D illustration of a rectangular part with one "V" Cut beveled edge:

If the beveled entity on this part were selected in Advanced Edit, a cross section of the entity would appear in the bevel side view as follows:  

 

Gradual Bevel When a gradual bevel is applied to an entity, the bevel angle is different at various points along that entity.  l You can use the slider in the Bevel Side View tool window to view the progression of the gradual bevel.  l Start Cut Angle (  l End Cut Angle (

) will display the bevel side view at the beginning of the selected entity. ) will display the bevel side view at the end of the selected entity.

- 439 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding scribe text to a part In Advanced Edit, you can add scribe text to a part. Scribe text is assigned to the Scribe Process of your machine.

Apply scribe text  1. In Advanced Edit, click the Scribe Text button.  2. Using the cursor (

), click the point on the part where the scribe text should be placed.

By default, the text will be the name of the source file for that part (for example, "Rectangle.vsp").  3. In the Properties pane, you can change the text, font, size, angle, and assigned process of the scribe text.  l To add scribe text variables, click the browse button (

) in the Text box. For more info, see Variables in scribe text.

 l The list of available fonts comes from your CAD Font preferences.  4. When you're finished, right-click anywhere in the display area to exit Scribe Text mode. The scribe text will be added to the part. Note: If you cannot see the Properties toolbar in Advanced Edit, go to the View menu and select Properties Toolbar.

Changing existing scribe text Scribe text can be selected and modified:  1. In Advanced Edit, click the Scribe Text button.  2. Using the cursor (

), click the text that you want to modify.

 3. Make your changes in the selected text. You can reposition the text or modify its contents in the Properties pane.  4. When you're finished, right-click anywhere in the display area to exit Scribe Text mode.   Note: If you select existing scribe text while in Entity Select mode (the default mode in Advanced Edit), you will only be selecting the individual entities in the text, and will not be able to use the scribe text Properties pane.

Moving scribe text Scribe text can easily be repositioned using the mouse cursor.  1. In Advanced Edit, click the Scribe Text button.  2. Using the cursor (

), click and drag the text that you want to move.

- 440 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 3. Right-click anywhere in the display area to exit Scribe Text mode.

Deleting scribe text  1. In Advanced Edit, click the Scribe Text button.  2. Using the cursor (

), click the text that you want to delete.

 3. Press the DELETE key.  4. Right-click anywhere in the display area to exit Scribe Text mode.

- 441 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Variables in scribe text Variables can be used in scribe text, providing a convenient way of adding standard information (such as heat number, part name, material, etc.) to your parts for marking. Variables, which act as placeholders for actual values, can be added in Advanced Edit in ProNest or included as text in the CAD file.  

In ProNest, the part's scribe text variables will appear on the part during nesting. When the part is cut, the actual value of the variable will be scribed. You can view the part as it will be cut in Cut Simulation mode.

Add a text variable in Advanced Edit  1. In Advanced Edit, click the Scribe Text button.  2. Using the cursor (

), click an area on the part to place the text.

 3. In the Properties pane, in the Text box, click the browse button (

) to open the Edit Field dialog.

By default, the part's name will be used.  4. Enter any combination of text and variables. You can double-click a variable in the list to add it to the formula.  l Unlike other variables in ProNest, which are surrounded by percent signs (%), scribe text variables must be surrounded by dollar signs ($).  l Abbreviations can be used for displaying variables if there is limited space on the part. Abbreviations only affect how the variable is displayed in ProNest, they do not have any effect on how the text will actually be scribed.  5. Click OK.  6. Right-click anywhere in the display area to exit Scribe Text mode.

Add a text variable in CAD drawing When you insert text into a CAD drawing, you can add scribe text variables that will be recognized by ProNest when the part is imported. Be sure to surround the ProNest variable name with dollar signs and curly brackets, as follows: {$variable$} Refer to the table below for a list of available scribe text variables.

View actual value of scribe text variable To view how the variable text on the part would be scribed by your machine, use Cut Simulation mode:  l In either Advanced Edit or the main nesting window, click the Cut Simulation toolbar button.

- 442 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

List of available scribe text variables Variable

Abbreviation

Comment

PartName

PN

 

Customer

Cust

This must be a valid customer listed in your Customer Database

Revision

RV

 

SequenceNo

Sq

The part's cut sequence number on the nest

QtyRequired

Req

 

QtyNested

Nst

 

Material

Mat

 

Thickness

Thk

 

Grade

Gr

 

InventoryPlateName

Inv

If the part is nested on an inventory plate, the plate name will be scribed

StockNo

STNo

If the part is nested on an inventory plate, the plate's stock number will be scribed

HeatNo

HTNo

If the part is nested on an inventory plate, the plate's heat number will be scribed

Class

CL

 

NestNumber

NN

 

PartNestInstanceNumber

NI

Used for serialization. On a given nest, parts will be numbered in the order that they're cut. Numbering resets going from one nest to another.

PartJobInstanceNumber

JI

Used for serialization. Nested parts will be numbered in the order that they're cut, but numbering will continue from one nest to another.   Note: If a nest is cut more than once (as with Cut Number of Times), there will be a gap in the numerical sequence following that nest.

Remarks

Rem

 

Misc1

M1

 

Misc2

M2

 

Misc3

M3

 

JobFilename

JFN

The file name of the job associated with that nest/part will be scribed

JobId

JId

This is the Reference property of a part.

- 443 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Variable

Abbreviation

Comment   Note: This is not related to the JobID field in the ProNest database, which is used to track jobs.

Reference

Ref

This is the Reference property of a part. Identical to JobId.

JobDescription

JDesc

The description of the job associated with that nest/part will be scribed

WorkOrderNo

WONo

For work order parts, the work order number will be scribed

PONumber

PONo

For work order parts, the purchase order number will be scribed

Example variable expressions You can create scribe text and use the variables listed above in mathematical equations. This may be useful for applying serial numbers or other data to parts or plates.   Surround mathematical equations with square brackets. For instance: {$PartName$ [$NestNumber$+100]} Several examples to help you get started:   Example 1 Every part on a nest is scribed with part name, followed by the letter N, and then nest number, where the number starts at 30000: {$PartName$ N[30000+$NestNumber$]} Result for a part named "ArcTrap" that is nested on Nest 1: ArcTrap N30001 The same part nested on Nest 2 would read: ArcTrap N30002   Example 2 Every part on a nest is inscribed with a sequence number. The first digit is the nest number and the last digits represent the cut sequence order on that nest: {[$NestNumber$*1000+$SequenceNo$]} Result for parts on Nest 1:

- 444 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

  Example 3 Nested parts are scribed with the heat number of the inventory plate that they are nested on, part name, and quantity nested out of the total required quantity. {$HeatNo$ $PartName$ $PartJobInstanceNumber$/$QtyRequired$} Result:

- 445 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

About loops Generally, loops are used either to ensure a precise corner on a part or for parts with beveled edges. A loop can be applied at any intersection point (any point where two entities meet, excluding the start point) on a part.  

A part with three loops added at the corners   Loops are added to a part in one of two ways: manually (using Advanced Edit) or automatically (using Bevel spreadsheets). Manually added loops are generally used in scenarios where you want to ensure a sharp corner on a non-beveled part; eliminating rounding at the corners of the part.   For beveling applications, loop placement is typically done automatically using Bevel spreadsheets. However, you can also manually add transition loops between beveled entities on a part-by-part basis.

Loop macros The number and type of available loops in ProNest is limited by the loop macros (*.mtl) that are present in your Macros folder. A loop macro contains the geometric information needed by ProNest to create a given loop. Notes:

 l By default, loop macros are stored in the root Macros folder specified on the Settings page in Preferences (go to File > Preferences, then click Settings in the left pane).  l If you are using a bevel setup, loop macros are stored in the Macros folder specified on the Bevel settings page.

- 446 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Default loop settings These settings define the initial loop properties that will be used when adding loops to a part in Advanced Edit. Default loop settings can be accessed from the Edit menu of Advanced Edit. Note that default loop settings do not appear in the ProNest settings (

) tree.

Loop style The style of a loop defines its basic shape. Available loop styles are based on the loop macros (*.mtl) present in your Macros folder.   Standard Choices for Loop Style: (None), cone, diamond, half-cone, side   Notes:

 l By default, loop macros are stored in the root Macros folder specified on the Settings page in Preferences (go to File > Preferences, then click Settings in the left pane).  l If you are using a bevel setup, loop macros are stored in the Macros folder specified on the Bevel settings page.

Size The scale of the loop   Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 1000.0 in.

Dwell Time in seconds that the cutting head will dwell at the intersection point

Quality Assigns a default quality number to loops. Assigning quality to a loop can be used to apply specific cutting parameters to that motion.   Choices: Inherit, 1..255 Inherit - Loop will have the same quality as the next adjacent entity.   0..255 - Loop will be assigned the quality number specified.   The quality number can be used as a key into the process parameter table or as a way of outputting specific M-codes based on the quality number.

- 447 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Working with loops With Advanced Edit, you can manually add a loop to a part. Manually added loops are typically used for intersecting non-bevel entities where you want to ensure a precise corner. Loops that have been added to a part manually or using Bevel spreadsheets can be modified or deleted using Advanced Edit.

In this article... Add loops Modify loops Delete loops

Add loops To manually add a loop to a profile:  1. Bring the part into Advanced Edit.  2. Click the Modify Loops button.  3. Using the wrench cursor (

), click the intersection point where you want to apply the loop.

The loop will be applied based on your Default loop settings. Note:

This method of adding loops is advisable for non-bevel loops. Typically, transition loops between beveled entities should be added automatically using a Bevel spreadsheet.

Modify loops To modify an existing loop:  1. With the part in Advanced Edit, make sure that you are in Select mode.  2. On the View menu, make sure that Properties Toolbar is checked.  3. Click the loop that you want to modify. The selected loop will turn blue.  4. Using the Properties toolbar, change loop properties as necessary.  5. Click Apply.

Delete loops To delete a loop:  1. With the part in Advanced Edit, make sure that you are in Select mode.  2. Right-click the loop and select Delete.

- 448 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Editing tabs With Advanced Edit, you can manually add a tab (a gap in a profile that is used to hold a part in place during cutting) to a part. Tabs that have been added to a part manually or using AutoTab can be modified or deleted using Advanced Edit.

In this article... Add tabs Modify tabs Delete tabs Limitations

Add tabs To manually add a tab to a profile:  1. Bring the part into Advanced Edit.  2. Click the Modify Tabs button.  3. Using the wrench cursor (

), click the location on the profile where you want to apply the tab.

Modify tabs Once a tab has been added you can modify the properties of that tab.   To modify an existing tab:  1. With the part in Advanced Edit, make sure that you are in Select mode.  2. On the View menu, make sure that Properties Toolbar is checked.  3. Click the tab that you want to modify. The selected tab will turn blue.  4. Using the Properties toolbar, change tab properties as necessary.  5. Click Apply.

Delete tabs To delete a tab:  1. With the part in Advanced Edit, make sure that you are in Select mode.  2. Right-click the tab and select Delete.

Limitations Tabs can't span multiple entities in a profile. The entity must be long enough to fit the tab length within it.   If the Tab Length fits within the entity, the tab can be applied:

- 449 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Tab Length (cd) is shorter than entity length (ab); tab is applied successfully.   When Tab Length is longer than entity length, tab cannot be placed.

On the left side of this profile, entity length (ab) is too small for the tab (cd).   Attempting to manually apply a tab to this type of profile may result in the following error: Tab lead exceeds available length   Likewise, AutoTab will not add tabs to these areas of a profile.

- 450 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

About Part Cut-Up With the Part Cut-Up feature, you can divide a part into smaller segments. This can be useful if you have a large part that will not fit onto a plate and want to break the part into smaller sections that can be nested and cut. Typically, after the sections of the part have been nested, output, and cut, they are then assembled to form the larger, original part.  

Part Cut-Up can be applied to a part after it has been added to the part list. Nested parts must be un-nested before Part Cut-Up can be applied.   To enter Part Cut-Up mode:  1. In the Edit Part List window, select a part in the part list.  2. In the Preview window, click the Advanced Edit button.  3. From the Part menu, select Part Cut-Up. The Part Cut-Up toolbar will appear. The green grid lines ( applied based on your Part Cut-Up settings.

) show where the part will be divided. Initially these lines are

Part Cut-Up toolbar The Part Cut-Up toolbar will become active upon entering Part Cut-Up mode. Like all other toolbars in ProNest, this toolbar can be freefloating or docked. The toolbar contains the following functions:    Toolbar button

Name

Description

Edit Lines  

From Edit Lines mode, you can add, move, or delete cut-up lines.  

Preview  

Preview mode will show the part as it would appear after being cut.  

Add Horizontal Line

You can add a horizontal cut-up line to the grid. Horizontal lines are specified in terms of where they intersect the Y-axis.  

Add Vertical Line

You can add a vertical cut-up line to the grid. Vertical lines are specified in terms of where they intersect the X-axis.  

Clear

If this is clicked when the Edit Lines button is selected, all of the cut-up lines will deleted.  

- 451 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Toolbar button

Name Calculate New Lines

Description

This will open the Part Cut-Up settings page, where you can make adjustments to Part Cut-Up settings and apply those changes to the current part.

- 452 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Using Part Cut-Up Upon entering Part Cut-Up mode, a grid of cut-up lines is automatically applied to a part. The cut-up grid can be adjusted in a number of ways.

In this article... Add cut-up lines Move cut-up lines Delete cut-up lines Accept your changes Save your changes

Add cut-up lines To manually add a cut-up line:  1. Click either the Add Horizontal Line button ( want to add.

) or Add Vertical Line button (

), depending on the type of line you

 2. In the Offset box, specify the point along the X or Y axis where you want to place the line.  3. Click OK.   To automatically add a entire cut-up grid:  1. Delete the existing grid by clicking the Clear button.  2. Click the Calculate New Lines button.  3. Adjust your Part Cut-Up settings, as necessary.  4. Click OK. New part cut-up lines will be applied according to your settings.

Move cut-up lines To move an existing cut-up line:  l Click and drag the line using the cursor (

).

Delete cut-up lines To delete a cut-up line:  l With the Edit Lines button (

) selected, right-click a line and select Delete Line.

  To delete an entire cut-up grid:

- 453 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 l With the Edit Lines button (

) selected, click the Clear button.

Accept your changes Once cut-up lines are in the correct position, click Close on the part cut up toolbar and then click Yes to accept the part cut up lines. The part will then be segmented into smaller parts. Each of these new, smaller parts will be displayed individually in the Advanced Edit window. You can use the arrows (

) to scroll through the newly-created parts in Advanced Edit.

Save your changes To save your changes:  l From the File menu, select Save Changes. or  l Click Return to Nesting and click Save when prompted to save your changes. When you return to the main ProNest window all of the parts created will be added to the part list, ready to be nested.

- 454 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

About Edit Cut Paths mode Using the Edit Cut Path feature in Advanced Edit, you can modify the cut path and direction defined for CLC parts.   To enter Edit Cut Paths mode for a CLC part:  1. Right-click a CLC part and select Advanced Edit. The CLC part will be brought into Advanced Edit.  2. Once in Advanced Edit, click the Edit Cut Paths button. This will display the automatically generated cut paths, which can be modified.

Edit Cut Path toolbar There are several tools on the Edit Cut Path toolbar that can be useful when editing the cut path.   Edit Cut Path Toolbar Button

Name

Description

Previous  Decision  Point

Backs up the cut path to the previous intersection. If there is no previous intersection, the cut path is deleted.  

Previous  Motion

Backs up the cut path one motion. Many times, there is no active intersection after this kind of back up. Previous Motion can back up until the selected cut path is deleted.  

Next  Motion

Advances the cut path forward one motion. This is enabled only when the direction is established and the cut path is not terminated at an intersection. This is usually available after Previous Motion is selected.  

Next  Decision  Point

Advances the cut path forward until the next intersection that has two or more choices. This button is only enabled when the direction is established and the cut path is not terminated at an intersection. This usually available after Previous Motion is selected.  

Reverse  Cut Direction

This will reverse the cut path direction for selected cut paths. If there is an active decision point, that point will change.  

Calculate  Calculates the cut path for any remaining cuts. If this is clicked before any cut paths are generated, it will calNew  culate the cut paths for all the common line cuts. If this button is clicked after several cut paths have been crePaths

ated, it will fill in the cut path for the rest of the cuts.  

- 455 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Edit Cut Path Toolbar Button

Name

Description

Delete All This will delete all of the cut paths assigned to your part.

 

- 456 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Using Edit Cut Paths The cut paths of CLC parts can be modified by bringing a CLC part into Advanced Edit and selecting Edit Cut Paths in the Part menu.

In this article... Selecting cut paths Deleting cut paths Defining a new cut path

Selecting cut paths You can select a single cut path, multiple cut paths, or all cut paths for your CLC part.   To select a single cut path:  l Click anywhere on the path. When a cut path is selected it will turn blue in color, as depicted below:

  To select multiple cut paths:   l Hold SHIFT and click multiple cut paths.   To select all cut paths:  l On the Edit menu, click Select All. You can use the navigational arrows (

) to select different cut paths on your part.

Deleting cut paths You can delete a selected cut path or delete all cut paths (both selected and non-selected) for your CLC part.   To delete a selected cut path:  l Right click on the selected cut path and select Delete.   To delete all cut paths:  l Click the Delete All button. All cut paths on your part will be deleted.

- 457 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Defining a new cut path The first step to defining a new cut path is to delete the existing paths. Once paths are deleted, you can click on the part profile where you want to begin the new cut path. Directional arrows will appear on the part.  

  Moving the mouse pointer over one of the directional arrows will show the start point and cut path up to the next decision point. You can click on one of the directional arrows to choose a cut path direction.   After an initial cut path direction is chosen, ProNest will advance the cut path forward to the next intersection, where you will need to specify the next direction that the cut path should take.

As you progress, two or more directional arrows will appear at each decision point until the cut path is complete. When a cut path is completed, it will remain active until another action is taken. Note: You can also use the Cut Path Editing window to define cut paths. This window can be opened by selecting Cut Path Editing on the View menu.

- 458 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

10. NESTING What is a nest? Nests are comprised of parts that have been positioned on a plate in a particular orientation. In order to create output for a nest in ProNest, a nest must have at least one part added to it.  

A nest with 24 parts nested   Creating a nest is a fundamental operation in ProNest. Nesting can be done manually, where parts are added to the plate one at a time. A part or group of parts can also be arrayed onto a nest. If you have purchased an Automatic Nesting module, nesting can also be done automatically.   Nests are created and modified from the main ProNest window, after parts have been added to the part list. The first phase of nesting involves adding parts to your nest. Once the parts are nested, many features used to modify the nest will become available. Parts on the nest can be moved, rotated, clustered, tabbed, duplicated, and mirrored; cut direction can be changed; and leads can be adjusted. The plate can be cropped and the cutting sequence can be changed. When all modifications have been made, the nest can be saved with your job and then output as a CNC file.

- 459 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Creating a new nest In the main ProNest window, there is always a default plate to begin nesting on. You can begin nesting on this plate immediately without explicitly creating a new nest. However, you can create a new nest at any time using the plate of your choice.

Create a new nest  1. On the Home tab, click New Nest. -orClick the New Nest tab.  2. Select the plate and safe zone scheme (if applicable) that you want to use.  3. Click OK. New nests are always created as the last nest at the end of the nest order in the job.

Insert a nest With insert nest, you can create a new nest and specify where it should be inserted in the nest order in the job. For instance, if there are 5 nests in the job, you could insert a nest between nests 2 and 3. The inserted nest would become nest 3 in the job.  1. Right-click the nest tab (

) to the right of where you want to insert the nest.

 2. Select Insert. The Insert Nest dialog will appear.  3. Select the plate and safe zone scheme (if applicable) that you want to use.  4. Click OK.

The New Nest / Insert Nest dialog

Use a plate from the Plate List

- 460 -

ProNest 2019 Manual If you have added plates to your plate list, you can use one of those plates for your new nest. If there are no plates in your plate list, this will be inactive.

Use a custom plate You can define a custom plate type, size and material for your new nest.   Choices: Rectangular, Circular, Remnant Rectangular Rectangular plates are measured using length x width. You can use the list of standard plate sizes to select a rectangular plate, or type in a custom size using the Length and Width fields.   Circular Circular plates are measured using diameter.   Remnant If you want to add remnant plates, they can be defined using the Define Remnant button. To learn more, see "Custom remnants" on page 405.   The list of available materials reflects the materials of parts in your job.

Safe zone scheme You can apply a safe zone scheme to your new nest. Note:

 l Selecting Reset will use default plate and nest values from your settings.  l The dimensions button (

) can be used to show or hide plate dimensions.

- 461 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Deleting or clearing a nest You can delete a nest from the main ProNest window at any time. When a nest is deleted, the parts on that nest will be returned to the part list and will become available for nesting. Also, if the nest used a plate from the plate list, that plate will be returned to the plate list.   Alternately, clearing a nest will remove all parts from that nest but will keep the blank plate as an empty nest.

In this article... Delete a single nest Delete all nests in your job Delete all nests of a single material Delete all empty nests Clear a single nest

Delete a single nest  1. Use the nest navigation tabs (

) to select the nest you want to delete.

 2. On the Home tab, in the Nests group, click Delete Nest. -or l Right-click the nest navigation tab (

) and select Delete Nest.

-or l Press CTRL + DELETE.

Delete all nests in your job  l On the Home tab, in the Nests group, click Delete All Nests.

Delete all nests of a single material  1. On the Home tab, in the Nests group, click the arrow next to Delete All Nests. A list of materials used by all nests in your job will appear.  2. Select Delete All [material ] Nests for the material that you want to delete nests by.  3. Click OK. All nests in your job that are using the selected material will be deleted. Note: ProNest always has a current nest – even if you delete all nests or if you delete the only nest in the job. If you delete the last remaining nest in the job (referred to as Nest 1 of 1), the end result will be similar to selecting all the parts on this nest and then deleting them. Similarly, if you delete all nests, the end result will be similar to deleting every nest past the first nest and then clearing the first nest.

Delete all empty nests

- 462 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. On the Home tab, in the Nests group, click the arrow next to Delete All Nests. A list of materials used by all nests in your job will appear.  2. Select Delete All Empty Nests. Nests that do not have contain parts will be deleted.

Clear a single nest Remove all parts from the current nest, but keep the empty plate.  1. Use the nest navigation tabs to select the nest you want to clear.  2. On the Home tab, in the Nests group, click Clear Nest.

- 463 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding parts to the nest manually With manual nesting, parts are added from the part list to the nest one at a time. There are several different ways to manually nest parts:

Nesting with anchored parts One quick way to manually nest a part is with the “Anchor part to cursor” option.  1. Make sure Anchor part to cursor is enabled on the Part List pane.

With this option enabled, the highlighted part in the part list will be affixed to the mouse cursor. If Drag Rotation is ON in the status bar ()  2. Simply click an empty area of the nest to place the part. The part will be dropped and bumped towards the corner of the plate that is designated as the Nesting Home in settings.  

  Clicking again will nest more copies of the part. Tip:

 l Holding the CTRL key as you nest using Anchor part to cursor will place the part at the location you click on the nest – it will not be bumped towards the corner of the plate.  l To turn off part bumping, select the Disable automatic bumping of parts option in General Preferences.

To manually rotate anchored parts prior to placing them on the nest:

- 464 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. Press CTRL to open the rotate menu for an anchored part.

 2. Click the buttons to rotate the part. -or l Press Q, W, E, and S keyboard shortcuts to rotate anchored parts. Each copy of the part will be dropped and bumped at the new orientation.   To remove an anchored part from the cursor:  l Press ESC -or l Right-click an empty area on the nest. Note:

You can also start a drag array with an anchored part by simply clicking and dragging on the nest. See Dragging to create an array to learn more.

Drag and drop You can also manually nest parts by dragging them from the part list onto the nest.  1. Click a part in the part list and drag it over the nest.

 2. Release the mouse button. The part will be bumped towards the corner of the plate. Tip:

 l Holding the CTRL key as you drag and drop will place the part at the location you release the mouse button on the nest – it will not be bumped towards the corner of the plate.  l To turn off part bumping, select the Disable automatic bumping of parts option in General Preferences.

Control how parts bump and rotate during dragging (Smart Drag) - 465 -

ProNest 2019 Manual You can change the way parts bump and rotate while being dragged on a nest. There are three states to choose from in the status bar of the main window:  

Smart Drag: On, Rotation: On With Smart Drag enabled, parts will bump up against neighboring parts or the plate edges as they are dragged around on a nest or moved as anchored parts. With Rotation enabled, the part will automatically rotate to fit into the empty spaces on the nest. With this method, parts slide along the edges of other parts without coming into conflict.

You can use this to get a tight fit during manual nesting.

- 466 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Note:

Any part with a Grain restraint set will not auto-rotate as it is dragged.

Smart Drag: On, Rotation: Off During dragging, parts will bump up against neighboring parts or the plate edges, but will not automatically rotate to fit against other contours.  

This is a good option for any parts that you don't want to rotate freely, such as rectangular parts. Smart Drag: Off This disables both bumping and automatic rotation during dragging.  

- 467 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

  To change how parts bump and rotate during dragging:  l Click the Smart Drag button in the status bar. -or l Press F6.

Manual nesting with double-click or ENTER ProNest can also manually nest parts, while also rotating them so that they fit snugly into existing empty areas of the nest:  l Double-click a part in the part list. -or l Highlight a part in the part list, then press the ENTER key. With these methods, the part can be nested at various orientations close to other parts, interlocked with other parts, or placed inside other parts automatically. Note:

If the Automatic Nesting module is not authorized, these methods of manual nesting will use the drop and bump method.

Once parts have been nested, you can move them around freely on the nest.

- 468 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Removing parts from the nest Parts can be removed from a nest in several ways.   To remove a part from the nest:  l With the part selected, press the DELETE key. or  l Click and drag the part from the nest back onto the Part List task pane. or  l Right-click the part and select Delete. When a part is removed from the nest, it is returned to the part list.

- 469 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Moving and rotating parts Once parts are selected, they can be moved and rotated into any position.   To move a selected part:  l Drag a part from one location on the nest to another.

Using the bump handles Parts can be moved in a variety of ways using the bump handles. Bump handles ( ) are located on the sides of the selection box.

As you point to each bump handle, the pointer will change to an arrow indicating the bump direction.    l Normal bump: Click a bump handle. This moves a part until it comes in contact with either another part or the plate edge and will leave the part a normal separation distance from other parts or from the plate edge.  l Nudge: While holding SHIFT, click a bump handle. The part will move a small distance in the specified direction. The distance is defined in settings.  l Zero separation bump: While holding CTRL, click a bump handle. This works similar to normal bump except that it will leave the part in contact with the other part or with the plate edge (with no separation). This is useful for building working CLC clusters for advanced common line cutting.  l Dynamic align bump: While holding SHIFT + CTRL, click a bump handle. This is used to align rectangular parts on one side and join them with CLC or bridging. Tip:

You can also use the arrow keys to bump parts. Pressing the UP ARROW key, for example, acts just like clicking the top bump handle. Like the bump handles, the arrow keys can be combined with SHIFT and CTRL to perform nudges and zero separation bumps.

Using the rotate handles Rotate handles ( ) are located in the corners of the selection box. As you point to each of these handles, the pointer will change to indicate a specific rotate function.   Rotate Left (upper-left)   Click this handle to rotate the part counterclockwise by a fixed amount (the Rotation Increment angle defined on the Parts tab).

Free rotate (upper-right) Drag this handle to rotate the part freely.

- 470 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 

 

Rotate to next 90 (lower-left)   Click this handle to rotate the part counterclockwise to the next 90° rotation. 90° rotations are all based on the part’s neutral orientation (not its current rotation).

Rotate long side (lower-right) Click this handle to rotate the part counter-clockwise to the next 90° rotation for the part’s longest side. A righttriangle part would rotate to positions that place its hypotenuse at 90°, 180°, 270°, and 360° orientations.

Using the rotate controls in the ribbon With parts selected on a nest, on the Parts tab in the ribbon, in the Arrange group, you can rotate the selection left or right at a specified angle.

The angle specified in the Rotation Increment box determines the amount of rotation applied to a part selection when either the Rotate Left or Rotate Right buttons are clicked.   To rotate a part selection by the "Rotation Increment" angle:  l Click Rotate Left  l Click Rotate Right

. This will rotate the part counter-clockwise. .  This will rotate the part clockwise.

 l Click the upper-left rotate handle .  This will rotate the part counter-clockwise. Tip:

You can also press Q, W,E, and S keyboard shortcuts to rotate selected parts.

Rotating anchored parts manually To rotate anchored parts prior to placing them on the nest:  1. Press CTRL to open the rotate menu for an anchored part.

 2. Click the buttons to rotate the part. Each copy of the part will be dropped and bumped at the new orientation.    l You can also press Q, W, E, and S keyboard shortcuts to rotate anchored parts.

Control how parts bump and rotate during dragging (Smart Drag)

- 471 -

ProNest 2019 Manual You can change the way parts bump and rotate while being dragged on a nest. There are three states to choose from in the status bar of the main window:  

Smart Drag: On, Rotation: On With Smart Drag enabled, parts will bump up against neighboring parts or the plate edges as they are dragged around on a nest or moved as anchored parts. With Rotation enabled, the part will automatically rotate to fit into the empty spaces on the nest. With this method, parts slide along the edges of other parts without coming into conflict.

You can use this to get a tight fit during manual nesting.

- 472 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Note:

Any part with a Grain restraint set will not auto-rotate as it is dragged.

Smart Drag: On, Rotation: Off During dragging, parts will bump up against neighboring parts or the plate edges, but will not automatically rotate to fit against other contours.  

This is a good option for any parts that you don't want to rotate freely, such as rectangular parts. Smart Drag: Off This disables both bumping and automatic rotation during dragging.  

- 473 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

  To change how parts bump and rotate during dragging:  l Click the Smart Drag button in the status bar. -or l Press F6.

View current rotation angle of a nested part  1. Click a part on the nest to select it.  2. Right-click the selected part.  3. Select Properties for [part name}. In the Part Properties window, the Angle is the current rotation angle of that instance of the part on the nest.

- 474 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

  This angle is relative to the part's Initial Rotation angle.

Undo or redo a move When moving and rotating selected parts on the current nest, you can undo the last move that was made.   To undo a move:  l On the Parts tab, click Undo. -or l Press CTRL + Z. After a move is undone, it can be redone by selecting Redo from the Parts tab or by pressing CTRL+ Y.

- 475 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Nested vs. selected parts By default, a nested part that is to be cut will appear green (though this color may vary depending on what you have set in the Color Legend). A selected part will appear blue with circular and square handles surrounding it.    

Nested part

Selected part

  Technically, if a part has been added to the nest, but is currently selected, it will not be considered nested. Parts can be selected while in Select Parts mode.

Select a part on a nest  l Click the part. Tip: Sometimes clicking a part to select it can cause the part to move slightly on the nest. You can hold CTRL when clicking to select a part to ensure that it doesn't move at all.

Clear the selection of a part on a nest  l Click anywhere in the nesting area away from the part. The part will appear green and will now be considered part of the nest.

- 476 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Multiple torches By default, multi-torch parts are nested according to the settings values found on the Torches (or Heads) page of your ProNest settings ( ). It is important that these settings values reflect the capabilities of your real-world machine.

In this article... About multi-torch nesting Manual nesting with multiple torches AutoNest with multiple torches Change the number of torches and spacing for a nested part How do multiple torches affect output?

About multi-torch nesting When multi-torch parts are added to a nest, you will notice that there is one master part and a pre-defined number of subordinate parts. 

The master part is darker in color than the subordinate parts. The master part is always positioned closest to the Nesting Home ( cified on the Nesting settings page.

) spe-

Manual nesting with multiple torches  l Simply drag the part onto the nest. or  l Double-click the part in the part list. You can make last minute changes to torch settings (Number of Torches, Torch spacing type, and Torch spacing) used during manual nesting by clicking Options on the Part List task pane and adjusting settings as necessary.  

- 477 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

The Part List task pane   Any changes made to torch settings from the Part List task pane will apply only during manual nesting.

AutoNest with multiple torches  l On the Home tab, click the yellow Set Up Then Start AutoNest button (

) then click OK.

or  l On the Home tab, click the green AutoNest button.   You can make last minute changes to the torch settings (Number of Torches, Torch spacing type, Torch selection, and Torch spacing) used during automatic nesting using the yellow AutoNest button:  1. On the Home tab, click the yellow Set Up Then Start AutoNest button. The AutoNest Setup dialog will appear.  2. In the Torch Settings section, adjust settings as needed.  3. Click OK to start automatic nesting. Any changes made to torch settings from the AutoNest Setup dialog will apply only during automatic nesting.

Change the number of torches and spacing for a nested part  1. Select one or more parts on the nest.  2. On the Parts tab, in the Number of Torches box (

), select the number of torches from the list.

 3. If you want, you can also change the torch spacing for the selection using the adjacent Torch Spacing box. You can select a value from the list or type a custom value in the box.

- 478 -

ProNest 2019 Manual  l Equal Spacing: The torch spacing is based on the nest width and the maximum number of torches being used.  l Minimum Spacing: The torch spacing will use the Minimum torch spacing specified in your settings.

How do multiple torches affect output? When output is created for a nest with multiple torches, a stop code and comments are included in the code. This tells the operator which torch settings to use, allowing him or her to set up the machine properly.

- 479 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Clusters Two or more parts can be grouped together into a cluster. A cluster maintains the orientation of its parts with respect to each other while allowing you to work with the cluster as if it were a single part. This is typically used when parts are arranged in a way that is generally useful. Clustering a group of parts makes the cluster available in the part list as a "Custom Part." The custom part can then be used as if it were a regular part.

Clustering To create a cluster of parts:  1. On the nest, select the parts that you want to include in the cluster. You can select a group of parts on a nest by dragging a selection box around them, or by clicking each part while holding the SHIFT key.  2. On the Parts tab, in the Arrange group, click Cluster. A cluster is treated as an individual part; it can be bumped, rotated, arrayed, duplicated, etc. Once a cluster is created, it is added to the part list and can be used in interactive or automatic nesting. Note: Autocluster You can build a cluster of like parts automatically from the Edit Part List window. With a part selected in the part list, select the Cluster checkbox in the Nesting properties section. When you return to the main ProNest window, a cluster will be created and added to the part list.

Unclustering A cluster can be broken up so that its component parts are no longer grouped together.   To uncluster a group of parts:  1. Select the cluster that you want to break apart.  2. On the Parts tab, in the Arrange group, click the arrow next to Cluster and then click Uncluster. After unclustering, individual parts can again be selected individually, though the cluster still exists in the part list and can be added to the plate at any time.

- 480 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Using Edge Pierce Edge piercing is a method of extending a selected part's lead-in so that it connects it to the edge of the plate. This allows for faster pierce times, especially when cutting thick material.

ProNest will not generate edge pierce extensions that are in conflict with other parts or other edge pierce extensions. Edge pierces are applied based on the settings values found in the Edge Pierce page of your settings (

).

Apply an edge pierce  1. Select a part.  2. On the Parts tab, in the Edit group, click Edge Pierces and then click Edge Pierce.

Remove edge pierces  1. Select a part with an edge pierce.  2. On the Parts tab, in the Edit group, click Edge Pierces and then click Remove Edge Pierces.

- 481 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Using AutoTab You can AutoTab one or more nested parts. You can also AutoTab parts automatically as they are imported into ProNest. Tabs hold material in place during cutting, reducing the chance of tip-ups or parts dropping out.  

The two interior profiles have tabs added, which will hold the cut-outs in place after they are cut. The white lock icons ( ) indicate that undertravel on the leads are locked. This ensures that the "tab" that is created by the lead undertravel remains in place during nesting. Automatically apply AutoTabs to a nested part  1. Select one or more nested parts.  2. On the Parts tab, click the arrow next to Tabs, then click AutoTab. Tabs will be applied based on your AutoTab settings.

Remove tabs from a part  1. Select one or more parts containing tabs.  2. On the Part menu, click the arrow next to Tabs, then click Remove Tabs. All tabs will be removed, whether they were added by AutoTab or manually added in Advanced Edit.

Automatically apply AutoTabs during import Tabs can be applied to a part before it is added to the part list:  1. In the Edit Part List window, select the part in the Part Sources area.  2. In the Properties pane (lower-right), on the Nesting tab, select Add tabs. When the part is added, tabs will be applied based on your AutoTab settings.

- 482 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Cut direction Generally, ProNest will process parts so that interior profiles are cut in a counter-clockwise direction and exterior profiles are cut in a clockwise direction. You can change the direction in which a part is cut after it has been nested. Tip:

Before changing the cut direction of a part, it may be useful to activate the cut direction view in order to see changes to your parts.

View the cut direction of a part:  l On the View tab, click Nest Image Objects and then select Cut Direction. Arrows will appear along the profiles of your nested parts, indicating cut direction.  

Change the cut direction of a part:  1. Select a part.  2. On the Parts tab, in the Edit group, click Reverse Cut Direction.

Change the cut direction of a single profile within a part:  1. Bring the part into Advanced Edit (right-click the part and select Advanced Edit).  2. On the Edit menu, click Select Profiles.  3. Select the profile that you want to change by clicking it. The selected profile will appear blue.  4. In the Properties window, set the Cut Direction to either Clockwise or Counterclockwise.  5. Click Apply.  6. Click Return to Nesting.  7. When prompted, click Save to keep your changes.

- 483 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Mirror You can convert a part to a mirror image of itself.    

Part mirrored on a vertical axis, which runs through the center of the part.

  Part mirrored over horizontal axis, which runs through the center of the

part.

Mirror a part  1. Select a part.  2. On the Parts tab, in the Arrange group, click the arrow next to Mirror.  3. Select either Horizontal or Vertical. Notes:

 l On the Nesting page of your ProNest settings, there is a check box called Reverse cut direction on mirror. When this check box is selected, the cut direction of a part will be reversed when the part is mirrored. This means that clockwise cuts will change to counter-clockwise cuts, and vice versa. When this box is not selected, the mirrored part will retain the same cut direction as the original.  l If a nested part's Mirror value is set to Always or Never and it is then mirrored on the nest, a "Part violates its mirror property" error message ( ) will be displayed. This is designed to prevent mirroring of parts that should not be flipped over. However, if you still want to mirror the part, set its Mirror value to "Either" and you will not see the error. You can also turn off mirror error checking entirely by going to File tab > Preferences > Warnings.

- 484 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Duplicate You can create a duplicate of a nested part, as long as there is a sufficient quantity of that part in the part list.

Duplicate a part  1. Select a part.  2. On the Parts tab, in the Arrange group, click Duplicate.   The original part will remain nested. A copy of the part will be anchored to the cursor at the same orientation as the original. Note:

Duplicating a part has the side effect of turning on the Anchor part to cursor option in the Part List pane.

Cancel duplicate With a duplicate part anchored to the cursor, you can cancel the duplicate operation:  l Press ESC. -or l Right-click on an empty area of the nest.

- 485 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Move All Leads You can have the leads of selected parts automatically moved.

Move all leads on selected parts  1. Select one or more parts on the nest.  2. On the Parts tab, click Move All Leads.  3. The Automatic Move Leads dialog will appear. You can specify how to move your leads here.  4. Click OK.  

Automatic Move Leads settings Move leads to The location on the part where leads will be moved.   Upper Left

Upper Right

Lower Right

Lower Left

Top

Right

Bottom

Left

Move interior leads When selected, interior leads on the part will also be moved to the location specified in Move leads to.

Last cut on interior of plate Leads will be moved such that parts that fall within the Plate edge tolerance specified will have their leads moved away from the plate edge, towards the interior portion of the plate. This will override the Move leads to setting for these parts. This is useful as a general way to move part leads away from the plate edge on a nest.

Plate edge tolerance The closest distance to which exterior leads may approach the plate edge (if no extension values are used). Non-zero extension values take precedence over this setting. If Automatic Move Leads would place leads closer to the plate edge than the value specified, those leads will not be automatically moved.

- 486 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Changing how many times a nest is cut You can specify the number of times a particular nest is cut. This is useful if you want to duplicate an existing nest and have a remaining quantity of parts. By default, a nest is cut only once unless otherwise specified.

Change the number of times a nest is cut  1. On the status bar, click Cut: n times. By default, number that appears will be the maximum number of times that nest could be cut, based on the remaining quantity of parts.  2. Change this number if needed.  3. Click OK. Notice that in the Navigation toolbar, the current nest will be listed with the number of times it is to be cut indicated in parentheses.   Example:   Let's say the first of three nests in a job needs to be cut five times. This would appear in the status bar as follows:   Nest: 1 of 3    Cut: 5 times  

Points to consider When a nest is cut more than once:  n A single CNC file is still created for the nest.  n There is no indication in the CNC output code that the nest should be cut more than once.  n Reports are typically used to determine how many times to cut a CNC file. The nest or job reports contain Cut Number of Times information for a given nest.  n For automatic nesting, you can configure ProNest to always cut each nest the maximum number of times (On the AutoNest settings page, select Cut each nest the maximum number of times).

- 487 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Managing nests using nest tabs In the main ProNest window, each nest has a tab at the bottom of the screen.  

You can click any nest tab to make that nest current. The navigation arrows on the left ( tabs.

) can be used to page through nest

View a thumbnail image of other nests  l Hover the cursor over inactive nest tabs (

)

Inserting a nest Create a new nest after the last nest in the job:  l Click the New Nest tab.   Insert a new nest before an existing nest in a job:  l Right-click an existing nest tab and select Insert Nest.

Reorder nests in the current job  l Click and drag a nest's tab to a new location on the navigation bar. The arrow indicators (

) will show the insertion point.

Move parts from one nest to another nest You can move nested parts from one nest to another while keeping the parts in the same orientation. - 488 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Note that both nests must use the same material in order to do this.  1. Select one or more parts on the first nest. You can select all parts on a nest by pressing CTRL + A.  2. Click the tab for the nest that you want to move the parts to.

- 489 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Exporting a nest to DXF file A single nest can be saved as a DXF file. The DXF file of the nest will be saved according to your Export DXF settings.

Export a single nest to DXF file  1. In the main window, make sure that the current nest is the one you want to export.  2. On the Nest tab, click Export to DXF.  3. Browse to a folder and enter a file name.  4. Click Save. -or 1. Right-click a nest tab.  2. Select Export to DXF.  3. Browse to a folder and enter a file name.  4. Click Save.

- 490 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Why do parts appear in conflict? A part appearing in conflict on a nest indicates that the part's profile is in violation of some limiting parameter. A typical case might be when a part is nested too close to another part, encroaching on the Part-part separation value specified in the Process Parameters settings page.   When a part is shown in conflict on a nest, the part will appear red.  

The part shown here appears in conflict because its profile overlaps the plate edge

These parts do not overlap, but are nested too close together - creating a conflict Note:

Parts in conflict will appear in the color assigned in the Color Legend pane on the main window. By default, the assigned color is red.

A part may appear in conflict for one of several reasons:  l A part is nested in violation of the separation values in your Process Parameters settings (Part-part, Part-plate edge, Part-pierce, Pierce-pierce, Pierce-plate edge)  l A part encroaches on a safe zone  l A part intersects a crop line  l A part is manually rotated to an angle that violates the part's grain restraint  l A part is manually mirrored in violation of the part's mirror property  l There is a class mismatch on the nest  l "When opening a job, detect modified part files and reload them" is selected in Preferences, but the applicable nested parts cannot be reloaded due to an existing chain, CLC, bridge, etc  l Multi-torch parts are already nested and then Torch spacing or Number or torches settings are changed so that the parts violate these new parameters  l A part is nested outside of a given work zone  l Part contains drilling but there are not enough compatible turret stations  l Part contains missing tools

Effect on nesting and output ProNest will not prevent you from nesting and creating output with parts that are in conflict. Please be aware that outputting and then cutting a nest with parts that are in conflict may result in damaged parts.

- 491 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Checking nests for conflicts You can check the nests in the current job to see if there are any parts nested in conflict:  1. On the Home tab, in the Verify group, click Check for Conflict.  2. Click Check for Conflict repeatedly to cycle through the nests that contain conflicts.   You can also find conflicts using the status bar (at the bottom of the main window):   No conflicts exist on nests in the current job. There are conflicts in the current job. You can also click this button repeatedly to cycle through nests with conflicts.

- 492 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Nest properties You can view information about the current nest from the main ProNest window, including plate dimensions, number of parts nested, and nest-level utilization and costing figures.

View properties for the current nest  l On the status bar of the main window, click Nest n of n.   General

Dimension The plate dimension, expressed as length × width. In ProNest, length is measured horizontally along the X-axis; width is expressed vertically along the Y-axis.  

Material The material assigned to the current plate.  

Times cut Number of times the current nest is to be cut  

Technology Indicates which performance applications or technology is in use on the nest. If beveled edges have been applied to a part on the nest, "Bevel Cut" will appear here.  

Number of parts This refers to the number of parts on the current nest. Remember, if a part is selected while on a nest, it is not technically considered to be nested.     Utilization

Length used   This refers to the distance along the X-axis between the nesting home and the furthest nested part.   Example:  

- 493 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Figure 1   The length used for this nest is indicated by the horizontal blue line.  

Width used This refers to the distance along the Y-axis between the nesting home and the furthest nested part.   Example:  

Figure 2   The width used for this nest is indicated by the vertical blue line.  

True utilization This is the ratio of the true area of all nested parts relative to the total plate area. Note that if a part has an interior profile, the surface area of the cut-out will not be considered a portion of that part.  

- 494 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Example:  

 

Figure 3   The nest shown in Figure 3 has a true utilization of 6.58%. For the purposes of this demonstration, the true area of the part is light blue, the plate area is outlined in red.  

Crop utilization If the current nest has been cropped, ProNest will calculate the crop utilization as the ratio of the true area of all nested parts relative to the plate area up to the crop line. The remnant (the section of plate that has been cropped off) will not be included in the calculated plate area. If your nest is not cropped, this value will be identical to the true utilization percentage.   Example:  

Figure 4   The nest shown in Figure 4 has been cropped. The true area of the part appears light blue, the plate area used for this calculation is outlined in red. The crop utilization for this nest is 48%.  

- 495 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Plate used utilization This percentage can be useful for determining how tightly parts are nested. To generate this value, ProNest draws a bounding rectangle around all parts on the nest (including leads), with one corner of the rectangle at the nesting home ( ). The area of this rectangle is the plate used.   The true area of all nested parts is then divided by the plate used area to get the plate used utilization percentage:   Plate used utilization % = (True area of all nested parts ÷ Plate used area) × 100   Example:  

Figure 3   The nest in Figure 3 has a plate used utilization of 30%. The part area is light blue, the plate used area is outlined in red.    

Figure 4   The nest in Figure 4 has a plate used utilization of 20%. Note that this percentage is lower than the nest in Figure 3 because the parts are more loosely spaced.    

Rectangular utilization - 496 -

ProNest 2019 Manual ProNest uses the minimum rectangular space that a part occupies (including part leads and lead extensions) when calculating part area. Rectangular utilization is the ratio of the rectangular area of all nested parts relative to total plate area.   Example:  

Figure 7   The nest in Figure 7 has a rectangular utilization of 11.1%. The rectangular area of the part is light blue in color, the plate area is outlined in red.     Costing

Material Cost This is the material cost for the current nest.   A nest's material cost is the sum of the material costs of each part on the nest. True area is used to get this material cost.   For more information, see "How are costs calculated?" on page 584.  

Production Cost This is the production cost for the current nest.   A nest's production cost includes the production cost of all nested parts, as well as additional nest-level factors, such as:  l Plate Loading Cost (from Costing settings)  l Additional cutting if parts are bridged or chained  l Additional cutting from crop lines or skeleton cut-up  l Reduced cutting if parts are common line cut  l Rapid motions between the machine home and nested parts  l Rapid motions between nested parts  l Additional cutting from edge pierces   For more information, see "How are costs calculated?" on page 584.  

Total Cost - 497 -

ProNest 2019 Manual This is the total cost for the current nest. For more information, see "How are costs calculated?" on page 584.  

Production Time The total production time for the current nest. For more information, see "How is production time calculated?" on page 591.

- 498 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Separations task pane In ProNest, the Part, Pierce, and Plate separation values used for nesting are taken from the Process Parameters settings page. The Separations task pane enables you to view and edit separation values for each material in your job directly from the main ProNest window, without modifying your settings. Changes made to separation values in the Separations task pane apply to materials in that job only they have no effect on your machine settings.  

The Separations task pane View separation values in your job  l In the main ProNest window, on the View tab, select Separations.   The Part to part, Part to pierce, and Part to plate separations for each material in your job are listed in the Separations window. By default, the separations listed will match the values found in your Process Parameters settings.

Change separation values for a material in your job  1. In the Separations task pane, find the material that you want to edit separation values for.  2. In the column on the right, type in a new separation value for Part (Part - part), Pierce (Part - pierce), or Plate (Part - plate).  3. Press ENTER. Entering a separation value that differs from the one found in your settings will cause the new value to become highlighted in yellow.

Effect on nesting  l All materials in your job will use the separation values specified in the Separations task pane. Parts placed on the nest will automatically use the separation values in the Separations window.  l Parts that are already nested when their separation values are changed will not be repositioned on the nest. If the position of the nested part violates the new separation value entered, the part will be shown in conflict.

- 499 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Revert to separation values in your settings If a separation value in your job has been edited in the Separations task pane, but you want to go back to using the separation values found in your settings:  1. In the Separations task pane, click the edited separation value that you want to change.  2. Click the Revert button (

).

The default separation value for that material will be listed.  3. Click Revert to match settings. Important:

Any changes made to separation values in the Separations task pane are not saved in the job (.nif).

- 500 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Nest Background Image With Nest Background Image, you can superimpose a digital photo of your plate onto the ProNest work area. This is ideal for waterjet applications where the source material has surface defects and you want to see exactly where those defects are during nesting.   To use this feature, simply take a digital picture of your plate and assign that image to a nest, as described below:

Taking the photograph When taking a photo of your plate, make sure that camera is centered and squared to the plate.  

  Proper positioning of the camera will ensure an accurate 2-D image of the plate.

Uploading the image to your computer Once you have taken the photo of your plate, upload the image to your computer. Digital photos must be saved as a JPEG Image File (*.jpg, *.jpeg) or Bitmap (*.bmp) in order to be used as a background image.

Setting the background image for a nest After the photo of your plate is uploaded to your computer, you will be ready to add it as a nest background image.   To set a background image for your current nest:  1. Make sure that the dimensions of the current nest in ProNest match those of your physical plate.  2. Right-click the nest navigation tab.  3. Select Background Image.  4. Click Load and then browse to the folder containing your image.  5. Select the image and click Open. The Nest Background Image dialog will display your image.

- 501 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 6. Click Define Corner Point and then using the cursor, click on an actual corner of your plate as it appears in your photo.

 7. Set the Corner point location to match the corner point that you defined in the previous step (choices: Lower Left, Upper Left, Lower Right , or Upper Right).  8. Click Define Measurement Line.  9. On your image, drag the yellow line over a measured physical distance on the plate. Typically, one of the plate's edges can be used for this measurement.

 10. In the Measured distance box, specify the length of the measurement line that you defined in the previous step.  11. Click OK. Your background image will appear on the current nest. You can now add parts to the nest as normal.  

Note:

 l The nest background image should be used as a reference for the current nest only. Though nests with a background image can be saved with your job, they cannot be stored as plates in the plate inventory for later use.  l Nest Background Image is only available with waterjet setups.

- 502 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

How to start automatic nesting After you have developed a list of parts and plates, you will be ready to begin automatic nesting. Unlike interactive nesting, which involves manually placing parts on a nest, you can use the AutoNest function to nest parts automatically. ProNest will nest the parts based on the AutoNest strategies defined in your settings.   There are two different ways of starting AutoNest in ProNest:  l On the Home tab, click the arrow next to AutoNest and then click Set Up Then Start. -or l On the Home tab, click the arrow next to AutoNest and then click AutoNest.

The Start AutoNest button: Yellow vs. Green The yellow AutoNest button is slightly different from the green button.   The yellow button opens the AutoNest Setup dialog. Using this dialog, you can make last-minute changes to things like:  l The selected nesting strategy  l Where automatic nesting should begin (on a new nests only or on the current nest).  l The types and sizes of plates to use   The green button will simply go ahead and begin automatic nesting using the last settings specified in the AutoNest Setup dialog. In effect, clicking the green button is equivalent to opening the AutoNest Setup dialog and clicking OK. Tip:

In ProNest, you can utilize both automatic and interactive nesting on the same job. Place a few parts on the plate manually in the manner desired then click AutoNest to complete the plate. Likewise, you can AutoNest first and then manually rearrange nested parts to enhance the utilization of the plate.

- 503 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Setting up AutoNest When you click the Set Up Then Start AutoNest ( ) for automatic nesting, you will be prompted with the AutoNest Setup dialog before nesting begins. Using this dialog, you can make last-minute changes to things like nesting strategy, where nesting should begin, and the types and sizes of plates to use.

The AutoNest Setup dialog The any modifications made to AutoNest settings from this dialog will apply only to the nesting done in the current AutoNest session.   AutoNest Settings

Strategy You can select which AutoNest strategy to use for the nests created during automatic nesting. For an in-depth discussion of strategies, refer to "AutoNest settings" on page 104.  

Only create new nests Select this to have automatic nesting begin on a new nest, instead of beginning on the current nest. ProNest will not fill any existing nests before it starts to create new nests.   When cleared, ProNest will begin AutoNest on the current nest. Note:

This setting will be automatically cleared if Do not create new nests is selected.

  How should ProNest create new nests?

Do not create new nests Selecting this radio button will limit automatic nesting to existing nests in your job. ProNest will not create new nests during AutoNest.  

Use a plate from the Plate List  If you have added plates to your plate list, you can use one of those plates for your new nest. If there are no plates in your plate list, this will be inactive.  

Use a custom plate You can define a custom plate type and size to use for the new nests that will be created during automatic nesting. The number of new nests that will be created is limited by the Quantity entered.   Choices: Rectangular, Circular, Remnant Rectangular Rectangular plates are measured using length x width. You can use the list of standard plate sizes to select a rectangular plate, or type in a custom size using the Length and Width fields.   Circular Circular plates are measured using diameter.   Remnant If you want to add remnant plates, they can be defined using the Define Remnant button. To learn more, see "Custom remnants" on page 405.   - 504 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Safe zone scheme If you are using a custom plate, you can apply a safe zone scheme for that plate.     Torch Settings

Number of torches  This setting defines the maximum number of torches/heads that will be used during AutoNest. Usually this setting will match the physical limitation of the machine.   Range: 1 to 100 Recommended Value: 1  

Torch selection  When AutoNest is run, ProNest uses Torch selection to select how many torches are used.   Choices: Fixed, "Fixed, Then One", Variable   Fixed - ProNest will try to nest all parts using the maximum number of torches allowed (specified by Number of torches). Unless each part quantity divides evenly into the number of torches, a small remainder of parts will not be nested.   Fixed, Then One - Similar to Fixed. Whenever a part cannot be nested using the number of torches, it will try to nest the part with only one torch.   Variable: ProNest will first try to nest all parts using the maximum number of torches allowed. If it cannot place the part, it will reduce the number of torches by one and try again. This process is repeated until it has tried with only one torch.  

Torch spacing type  When AutoNest is run, ProNest uses Torch spacing type to select the torch spacing. The spacing used by is always limited by the Minimum torch spacing specified in your default settings.   Choices: Equal, Fixed, Variable   Equal: The torch spacing is based on the nest width and the maximum number of torches being used. It is calculated by dividing the nest's width (ProNest y-axis) by the Number of torches.   Fixed: The torch spacing is always the same value (defined by Torch spacing) - regardless of the number of torches used.   Variable: Torch spacing will be adjusted based on the size of the part, so that the minimum part separation between multi-torch parts is used. This option is available as part of the Variable Multi-Head Cutting module.  

Torch spacing  Whenever Torch spacing type is set to Fixed, this value defines the torch spacing used.   Units: Distance Range: Minimum torch spacing to 10,000.0 in. Recommended Value: 20.0 in.   Note: This setting is activated only if Torch spacing type is set to Fixed.

- 505 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Notes:

 l Selecting Default will use default plate and nest values from your settings.  l The dimensions button (

) can be used to show or hide plate dimensions.

- 506 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Stopping AutoNest You can stop automatic nesting that is in progress. When AutoNest is stopped, parts that are already nested will stay on the nest; any parts that have not yet been nested will remain in the part list.

Stop AutoNest  l In the status bar, click the Stop button.

- 507 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

11. MODES OF OPERATION What are modes of operation? ProNest has many different modes of operation, each with its own function. Click the following links to explore modes of operation:  l "Select mode" on page 509  l "Zoom" on page 511  l "Measure mode" on page 513  l "Cut Simulation mode" on page 514  l "Modify Leads mode" on page 515  l "Pan mode" on page 512

- 508 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Select mode Select mode is the default mode of operation in ProNest. Select mode is used while manually nesting parts; selecting, moving and rotating nested parts; and generally as the base mode of operation on the main ProNest window. Often, you will enter Select mode as a way of exiting another mode of operation.   To enter Select mode:  l On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select Parts. Once you have added parts to the nest, you are free to modify the nest in any way. You can delete parts from the nest, add more parts, rotate and move parts around, and perform more advanced functions such as clustering. This section of the guide will showcase several ways of working with parts on a nest.

Selecting parts Nested parts cannot be moved or rotated until they are selected.   To select a single part:  l Click anywhere inside the part.   To select all parts on the nest:  l On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select All. -or l Press CTRL + A   To select multiple parts:  l Hold SHIFT as you click on each part.   To area-select multiple parts:  l Right-click and drag a rectangular area to surround the parts that should be selected. As you drag, the selection area will be drawn as a box with dotted lines. Tip:

The direction of an area-select drag changes how parts are selected. If the selection area is created by dragging to the right, then parts will be selected only if they are fully contained by the selection area. If the selection area is created by dragging to the left, then parts will be selected if they are fully contained by the selection area or if they come in contact with the border of the selection area.

When a part (or group of parts) is selected, it will turn blue and will be surrounded by a selection box. The selection box surrounds the entire selection and features bump and rotate handles. These handles provide specialized ways to move and rotate the selection. See "Moving and rotating selected parts" for more information about using the selection box handles.  

- 509 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Unselecting parts When parts are selected, they are not truly nested. It is more correct to think of selected parts as a floating group of parts. To nest a selection, unselect it.   To unselect all parts:  l Click anywhere in the nesting area that is not inside any part.   To remove a single part from the selection:  l Hold SHIFT and select the part you want to unselect. All other parts in the selection will remain selected. Note: As you select and unselect nested parts, you may have noticed changes in the Part List. Sometimes the reported nested quantity appears like this: 2 of 5 nested [1] This means that 2 out of 5 parts are nested and that 1 part is selected. If the selected part were then unselected, the quantities would appear like this: 3 of 5 nested

Removing a part from the nest A nested part can be removed from the nest, returning it to the part list. This causes the part’s available quantity to rise as its nested quantity decreases.   To remove a selected part from the nest:  l Press DELETE. -or l Drag the part from the nesting area into the Part List task pane.

- 510 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Zoom With ProNest, you can zoom in and out on a nest in a number of different ways. Zoom functions are found on the View tab in the Zoom group and in selected modes.  

Zoom Function

Ribbon Control

Usage

Zoom Window

After selecting Zoom Window, you can use your mouse to drag a box around the area of the nest that you want to magnify.

Zoom Real Time

After selecting Zoom Real Time, click an area of the nest and drag the pointer up or down to zoom in or out.

Zoom In

This will zoom in to next magnification level.   Keyboard shortcut: PAGE UP

Zoom Out

This will zoom out to next magnification level.   Keyboard shortcut: PAGE DOWN

Zoom Selection

With one or more parts selected on your nest, Zoom Selection will zoom to a view of the selected part(s).

Zoom Extents

This will return to a view of the entire nest.   Keyboard shortcut: SHIFT + Z

Zoom Work Zone

Tip:

n/a

If work zones are in use, this will zoom to a view of the currently active work zone.

You can also easily zoom in and out at any desired location on your nest using the mouse wheel. Rotating the mouse wheel forward will zoom in, rotating it backward will zoom out. Another way of doing this is to position the mouse cursor on an area of the nest and press the PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN key.

- 511 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Pan mode You can use Pan mode to grab and drag an entire nest.

Pan on the nest  l Using the mouse wheel, click and drag in the nesting area.

-or l On the View tab, click Pan. Using the hand cursor, you can click and drag anywhere in the nesting area.

Exit Pan mode  l Right-click anywhere on the nest.

- 512 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Measure mode In measure mode, you can measure distances on your nest using your mouse. The accuracy of the measurement is limited by the distance represented by one pixel on the screen and by how accurately you select the measurement points.

Enter measure mode

 l On the Home tab, in the Verify group, click Measure. ProNest will display cross-hairs across the nesting area and the mouse cursor will change to a measuring tape.

Make a measurement  1. While in measure mode, click and drag a measurement line anywhere on the nest.  2. Release the mouse button. The cursor will automatically “snap” to the edges of nested parts to make measuring from a part edge more exact. Your measurement will be displayed in the bottom left of the status bar. For each measurement, the distance, the DX (delta, or change in X) and the DY (delta, or change in Y) are displayed. Note: Holding the SHIFT key while making a measurement will cause the measurement line to “snap to” the nearest horizontal, vertical, or 45 degree line.

Exit measure mode  l Click Select Parts. -or l Right-click anywhere on the nest. -or l Press ESC. Tip:

It is often helpful to zoom in on the area being measured.

- 513 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Cut Simulation mode Before generating output, it is often convenient to see how a nest will be cut. Cut Simulation mode presents an animation that approximates how a nest would be cut by your machine. ProNest allows simple control over the simulation, similar to playing a movie.

View cut simulation for the current nest

 l On the Home tab, in the Verify group, click Cut Simulation. When you enter Cut Simulation mode, the parts on the nest will be drawn in the Uncut color from the Color Legend. Also, the Cut Simulation controls will appear in the ribbon.

Play the simulation  l On the Cut Simulation tab, click Play. When cut simulation starts, a small image of a cutting head will appear at the machine home of the nest. The cutting head will then move around the nest, cutting, scribing, and punching the nest in the same order as CNC output would instruct the machine.

Pause the simulation  l On the Cut Simulation tab, click Pause.

Stop the simulation  l On the Cut Simulation tab, click Stop.

Quit cut simulation and return to normal nesting  l On the Cut Simulation tab, click Close Cut Simulation. Tips:

 l The speed of the cut simulation can be controlled by moving the Speed slider. Move the slider to the left for a slower simulation. Move the slider to the right for a faster simulation.  l You can advance or rewind the simulation by clicking on any profile in the nest.  l You can also view the cut simulation for a single part from Advanced Edit (Part menu > Cut Simulation).

- 514 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Modify Leads mode After a part has been added to the Part List, you can modify its leads through the Preview window of the Edit Part List window or through Advanced Edit. You can also modify a nested part's leads from the main ProNest window.

Enter Modify Leads mode

 l On the Nest tab, click Leads.

Move the position of a lead on a profile Using the wrench ( ) you can click any location along a given profile and the lead will be moved there.   When leads are moved between a side location and a corner location, ProNest will apply the lead style as specified in your settings. Tips:

 l If you need to zoom in or out on a profile while in Modify Leads mode, it is best to use your mouse wheel or the Page Up and Page Down keys to do so. This type of zooming will not cancel Modify Leads mode.  l While in Modify Leads mode, you can right-click on the lead of a nested part to view or modify the properties (style, size, angle, etc.) of that lead.

View or change the properties of leads  1. In Modify Leads mode, use the wrench (

) to right-click the leads that you want to modify.

The Modify Leads dialog will open, displaying the properties for the selected lead.  2. Change the properties (Style, Size, Angle, etc.) for the leads.  3. Click Apply and then click OK to keep your changes.

Lock the leads on a profile This will lock the position and properties of the lead on that profile. Once leads are locked, they will not be moved or altered during any manual or automatic operation in ProNest.  1. In Modify Leads mode, use the wrench (

) to right-click the leads that you want to modify.

The Modify Leads dialog will open, displaying the properties for the selected lead.  2. Select the Locked checkbox.  3. Click Apply and then click OK to keep your changes. The selected leads will be locked. Locked leads are indicated by a padlock.

- 515 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Exit Modify Leads mode  1. On the Leads tab, click Close. -or 2. Press ESC. Note: Since moving leads will cause ProNest to generate a new cut sequence, it is best to move leads prior to setting a cut sequence.

- 516 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

12. LEADS How are leads applied in ProNest? Leads are initially applied to parts in ProNest when the part files are added to the part list. The style of lead that is applied depends on the geometry of the part. There are several styles of leads that can be used, but the most common are linear leads and arc leads.  

Linear leads

Arc leads

  Typically, linear leads are applied at the corner of a profile, so that the lead-in forms a straight line into the cut profile. In cases where there is no corner to place the lead, arc style leads are applied on the side of a profile, to gradually get the cutting head moving in the direction of the cut profile.

Which settings control how leads are applied?  l When a part is imported, leads are applied based on your Interior and Exterior Leads settings or the custom leads properties that you specify in the Edit Part List window.  l Interior/Exterior Leads settings  l Leads properties (in the Edit Part List window)  l On the Importing Parts settings page, the Leads origin setting is used to specify where on a part the leads will be placed (Bottom, Left, Top, Right, etc.).  l You can also import a part with pre-drawn leads.

Changing leads in ProNest  l  l  l  l

When are leads moved automatically by ProNest? Manually change lead position and properties in Modify Leads mode Locking leads on a part to prevent leads from being moved or properties from being changed Use Move All Leads to reposition leads on nested parts

- 517 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Locking leads on a part When locked, lead position on the profile (start/end point) and lead properties (style, size, angle, etc.) will not change during any manual or automatic operation in ProNest. This includes automatic nesting, collision avoidance, manual or automatic move leads, etc.   Locked leads are indicated by a yellow padlock.

Lock leads on a part  1. In the Edit Part List window, select an added part in the Part List grid.  2. In the Preview, click the leads that you want to lock. You can click anywhere on the profile to select the leads.  3. In the Properties pane, on the Leads tab, select the Locked checkbox.

Note:

You can also lock leads in the main nesting area in Modify Leads mode (by right-clicking) or in Advanced Edit, where you can lock a multiple selection of leads on a part at the same time.

Lock all leads on a part For parts that have more than one profile, you can lock a multiple selection of leads on a single part at the same time.  1. In the Edit Part List window, select an added part in the Part List grid.  2. Click the Advanced Edit button.  3. In Advanced Edit, select a lead location/start point on your part by clicking it.

(In the View menu, Start Points ( ) is selected to clearly show the lead locations on the part)  4. Press CTRL + A to select all leads on the part.

 5. In the Properties pane, under Start Point properties, select the Locked checkbox.  6. Click Apply. All leads on the part will be locked.

- 518 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Save locked leads permanently You may want to permanently lock lead properties and position on a part so that they're always the same whenever that CAD file is imported into ProNest. You can do this as follows:  1. Open the Importing Parts (Advanced) settings page (Settings

> Importing Parts > Importing Parts [Advanced]).

 2. Select both Save part file tokens and Save Advanced Edit tokens.  3. Click Save to keep your settings changes.  4. Open the Edit Part List window (Home tab > Edit Part List).  5. Add the part to the part list.  6. Bring the added part into Advanced Edit (with the part selected in the part list, click the Advanced Edit button  7. Make your modifications to the leads, as necessary. You can use the Modify Leads button ( file.

).

) to move the leads on the pro-

 8. With the leads that you want to lock selected, in the Properties Toolbar, select the Locked checkbox.  9. Exit Advanced Edit, making sure to save changes to the part. Each time that CAD file is imported into ProNest, the leads will be locked with the position and properties that you specified.

Locking overtravel/undertravel only You can lock only the overtravel/undertravel on leads, while allowing other lead properties (placement, style, size, etc.) to change. This is done primarily when leads use undertravel to form a tab and you want to retain that tab during automatic nesting, collision avoidance, etc.  1. In the Edit Part List window, select an added part in the Part List grid.  2. In the Preview, click the leads that you want to lock. You can click anywhere on the profile to select the leads.  3. In the Properties pane, on the Leads tab, select the Lock Overtravel checkbox.

Note:

If AutoTab is applied with the Number of Tabs or At Intervals strategies, undertravel on lead-outs will automatically be locked on those profiles.

- 519 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Importing a part with pre-drawn leads To import a CAD file with pre-drawn (or user-drawn) leads:  l The part has to be drawn in a way that ProNest can recognize the geometry as a lead.  l ProNest must be set to recognize the leads on import.

Drawing leads in the CAD File The leads in the CAD file must be drawn at the intersection point of two line or arc segments. A user drawn lead drawn in the middle of a line or arc segment will not be recognized as a lead, but instead as an open profile.

Setting ProNest to recognize the leads In the Edit Part List window, there are two options to set before you add the part:  1. On the Properties: CAD Import tab (on the lower right below the Preview), select the User drawn leads checkbox. This will enable ProNest to identify the user-drawn leads during import.  2. On the Properties: Nesting tab (on the lower right below the Preview), under Import Actions, select the Retain all existing leads checkbox. With this setting selected, ProNest will not apply new leads based on the material type and thickness of the part during import.

- 520 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

When are leads moved automatically by ProNest? When a part is imported into ProNest, leads are applied based on your Interior and Exterior Leads settings pages or the custom leads properties that you specify in the Edit Part List window.   Once a part has been added to the part list, there are several different operations in ProNest that may cause the leads on that part to automatically move:

Reload  l If a part is reloaded in the part list (right-click and select Reload and Modify Leads), leads will be reapplied.

Changing material or class  l When using Interior/Exterior Leads settings spreadsheets, changing the material of a part will cause leads to be reapplied based on the new material that is selected.

Change machine  l When changing the machine of a job, leads on parts in the job may be adjusted if the new machine has leads settings that are different from the previous machine.

Reverse cut direction  l Reversing the cut direction of an entire part or single profile (from Advanced Edit) will most often swap the position of the lead-in and lead-out.

Common line cutting  l Applying common line cutting will remove leads on the part and reapply them to the entire CLC group.

Bridging  l Bridging parts together will reduce the number of pierces (and therefore leads) that are necessary. A bridged group of parts only requires a single lead-in/lead-out.

Move All Leads  l When you select a nested part and select Move All Leads (on the Parts tab), leads will be repositioned on the part according to the specified settings.

Automatically move leads during AutoNest or pattern array  l On the AutoNest settings page, if Automatically move leads is selected, leads may be moved during automatic nesting or pattern array.

Collision avoidance  l On the Collision Avoidance settings page, if Automatically move exterior leads for avoidance and Automatically move interior leads for avoidance are selected, leads may be repositioned in order to generate optimal torch paths for avoidance.

Part cut up  l Applying Part cut up in Advanced Edit will apply new leads to the component parts that are created.

- 521 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Preventing leads from moving during... All operations:  l Lock the leads to keep lead position and properties during all operations.   AutoNest or pattern array:  l On the AutoNest settings page, clear the Automatically move leads setting.  l You can also prevent leads from moving during autonest/pattern array on a part by part basis:  1. In the Edit Part List window, select the added part.  2. In Nesting properties, in the AutoNest Properties section, clear the Allow leads to move setting. When that part is automatically nested its leads will not move.   Reload:  l When you right-click the part in the part list, select Reload > Preserve Leads.   Collision avoidance:  l On the Collision Avoidance settings page, clear the Automatically move exterior leads for avoidance and Automatically move interior leads for avoidance settings.   Change the current machine in a job:  1. Go to File tab > Preferences.  2. On the General page, set When changing machines, how should leads be modified? to Never.   Change material of a part in the part list:  1. Go to File tab > Preferences.  2. On the General page, clear the Always reapply leads when changing materials preference.

- 522 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

13. ARRAYING PARTS About Array Using the array feature, you can automatically place multiple copies of a part or group of parts onto a plate, in a specific arrangement. Arrayed parts are placed as close as possible to one another, based on the part separation value in your settings, in order to maximize material utilization.   In the following diagram, a single part has been arrayed on a plate:  

    Example 1:   Parts are arrayed based on the orientation of the master part.  

Figure 1  

- 523 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

The nest in Figure 1 contains a rectangular part that is positioned diagonally on the plate. For the purposes of arraying, this is the master part.    

Figure 2   Figure 2 shows the nest in Figure 1 after the rectangular part has been arrayed. Notice that the position of the arrayed parts are that same as the master part.   Example 2:   Groups of dissimilar parts can also be arrayed.  

Figure 3

- 524 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

  The nest in Figure 3 contains three master parts, which are all currently selected.    

Figure 4   Figure 4 shows the same nest in Figure 3 after the selected parts have been arrayed.

- 525 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

How to array parts Arrays can be applied either automatically or interactively on a nest.

Automatically array parts  1. Drag one or more copies of the part onto the nest. For best results, place the parts close to the Nesting Home (

).

 2. Make sure that the parts you want to array are selected.  3. On the Parts tab, in the Array group, click the arrow next to Array (

) and select Automatic.

The required quantity of your parts will be arrayed on the nest.

Interactively array parts Interactive arraying involves an intermediate step where you can define the array grid that is used.  1. Drag one copy of the part onto the plate.  2. Make sure that the part is selected.  3. On the Parts tab, in the Array group, click the arrow next to Array (

), then click Interactive.

The Array dialog will open.  4. In the Rows and Columns boxes, enter the number of rows and columns that you want the Array Grid to use.  5. In the Row spacing and Column spacing boxes, define the dimensions to use for the rows and columns in the Array Grid.  6. Click OK. The required quantity of your parts will be arrayed on the nest.  

Array Grid Rows The number of rows in the array grid   Example:  

An array grid with 3 rows

- 526 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Columns The number of columns in the array grid   Example:  

An array grid with 5 columns Row spacing This defines the spacing of rows in the array grid. Row spacing is expressed as a distance along the Y-axis.   Example:  

The row spacing would be a negative number in this example, because it is measured along the Y-axis in the negative direction.  

Column spacing This defines the spacing of columns in array grid. Column spacing is expressed as a distance along the X-axis.   Example:  

- 527 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

The column spacing would be a positive number in this example, because it is measured along the X-axis in the positive direction.   By default, the values for rows and columns will be adjusted to best fit your parts. However, you can change these values to whatever you want.

- 528 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Dragging to create an array With drag array, you can quickly place parts in a pattern array inside of a rectangular region on the nest. You can create different array configurations as you drag the mouse around and see the results on the nest instantly. This provides fast manual nesting with greater control over the size and direction of the array.

Nest selected parts with drag array  1. Select one or more parts on the nest.  l Hold SHIFT + click to select multiple parts one by one.  l Right-click and drag the selection box to select a group of parts.  2. Click the yellow handle on top of the selection and drag in the direction that you want to place the parts.

 3. Simply drag the cursor around the nest to create various pattern array configurations. As you drag, the selected part or parts will be pattern arrayed within the dotted rectangle. A number indicator tells you the total quantity of parts in that array.*    4. Release the mouse button to nest the parts. Tip: Before releasing the mouse button, you can press ESC to cancel the array.

Nest anchored part with drag array You can also quickly start a drag array with an anchored part.  1. In the main window, on the Part List pane, make sure Anchor part to cursor is selected.  2. The highlighted part in the Part List will be anchored to the mouse cursor. - 529 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 3. Click and drag on an empty area of the nest to begin the array.  4. While holding down the mouse button, simply move the cursor around the nest to create various pattern array configurations. As you drag, the anchored part will be pattern arrayed within the dotted rectangle.

 5. Release the mouse button to nest the parts.   *Number indicator If a nest is cut more than once, the number indicator will show the parts in that array followed by the total number of parts in parentheses. For instance, if there are 4 parts on the nest in an array box and the nest is cut twice, the number indicator would appear as “4 (8)”.

Also, if multiple torches are in use, the number indicator will reflect the total number of parts in the array box, including master and subordinate parts.

Controlling the direction of the array During a drag array, the array’s origin point is set at the corner of the nest that is opposite to the direction you drag. For instance, consider the following selected part:

- 530 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

If you click the yellow handle ( right corner of the nest.

) and drag down and to the left, the selected part will be placed in a pattern array starting at the upper

Holding the CTRL key while dragging will anchor the array’s origin to the location of the selected part, instead of one of the plate’s corners.

- 531 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

- 532 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Pattern Array Pattern array is designed to maximize plate usage when arraying parts. With pattern array, ProNest automatically determines the spacing and orientation to use for a selected part or group of parts to maximize the number of that part that can be nested in the available plate area. Pattern array can be applied to a single part or a group of parts.   There are three different levels of pattern array nesting: basic, intermediate, and advanced. The basic level uses the fewest options and is the fastest; the advanced level uses the most options and is the slowest. The intermediate level is a balance between speed and thoroughness. Generally, the advanced level offers the best result.

Nest a part using pattern array  1. Place a part on the nest. For best results, place the part close to the Nesting Home (

).

 2. Make sure the part is selected.  3. On the Parts tab, in the Array group, click the arrow next to Pattern Array ( or Advanced.

) and select an array level of Basic, Intermediate,

The required quantity of your part will be nested with pattern array.   Example: The following example shows the difference between basic arraying and pattern array.   Consider the following nests, which are using the same size plate:  

Figure 1   Let's say that the selected part in Figure 1 has a required quantity of 15. For the purposes of pattern array, this is considered the master part.    

- 533 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Figure 2   The nest in Figure 2 shows the master part with basic arraying applied. Note that only 12 parts have been nested. All parts follow the same orientation as the master part.    

Figure 3   The nest in Figure 3 shows the same master part with pattern array applied (at the advanced level). Notice that all 15 parts have been nested. The orientation of the parts has been changed so that they fit together better, creating a tighter nest.

- 534 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

CLC Array The CLC Array feature enables you to array and create common line parts at the same time. This will reduce your scrap and cut time, while preserving consumables. CLC array is part of the Common Line Cutting module.  

A nest with CLC Array applied to a triangular-shaped part   CLC Array can only be used with parts whose sides can have common lines. You can apply CLC Array either automatically or interactively.

Automatic CLC Array To automatically apply CLC Array to a part:  1. Drag one copy of the part onto the plate. This part should be located in the corner of your plate that has been designated as your nesting home (

).

 2. Make sure that the part is selected.  3. On the Parts tab, in the Common Line Cut group, click the arrow next to Array (

) and click Automatic.

The required quantity of your part will be nested using CLC Array.

Interactive CLC Array Interactive CLC Array involves an intermediate step where you can define the CLC Array grid that is used.   To interactively apply CLC Array to a part:  1. Drag one copy of the part onto the plate. This part should be located in the corner of your plate that has been designated as your nesting home.  2. Make sure that the part is selected.  3. On the Parts tab, in the Common Line Cut group, click the arrow next to Array ( dialog will open.

) and click Set Up Then Start. The CLC Array

 4. Enter the number of rows and columns that you want the CLC Array grid to use. Rows and columns are defined in terms of CLC units, which are set up in your settings.  5. Click OK. Your part will be nested using CLC Array.

- 535 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: All forms of CLC will pre-kerf your parts according to the value set in your Common Line Cut settings page. You may also use the checkbox on this page of your settings so that ProNest uses the kerf value from your Process Parameters.

- 536 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Chain Array Chain array gives you a way of automatically chaining parts together in an array. Parts can be chained together in either vertical columns or horizontal rows on the nest.

With chain array, parts are not fitted together as closely as with basic arraying or pattern array. However, chain array yields a uniform arrangement of parts that requires only one pierce per row or column (for the exterior profiles). Chain array is available as part of the Chain Cutting optional module.

Using Chain Array To chain array a part:  1. Drag one copy of the part onto the plate. This part should be located in the corner of your plate that has been designated as your nesting home (

).

 2. Make sure that the part is selected.  3. On the Parts tab, in the Array group, click Chain Array. The Chain Array dialog will appear.  4. Adjust the array grid and chain array settings, as necessary. (See below for a description of chain array settings.)  5. Click OK. Your part will be added to the nest in a chain array.

The Chain Array dialog Each time you apply chain array on a nest, you will be prompted to configure the array with the chain array dialog. By default, the array grid values will be adjusted to best fit your parts. However, you can change these values to whatever you want.  

Vertical The chain will be created in vertical columns on the nest.

Horizontal The chain will be created in horizontal rows across the nest.

- 537 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Rows The number of rows in the array grid   Example:  

A Chain Array grid with 3 rows  

Column The number of columns in the array grid   Example:  

A Chain Array grid with 5 columns  

Row Spacing This defines the width of a row in the array grid. Row spacing is expressed as a distance along the Y-axis.  

- 538 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Example:  

The row spacing would be a negative number in this example, because it is measured along the Y-axis in the negative direction.  

Column spacing This defines the width of a column in array grid. Column spacing is expressed as a distance along the X-axis.   Example:  

The column spacing would be a positive number in this example, because it is measured along the X-axis in the positive direction.  

Show/hide advanced settings Using the Advanced settings button, you can make quick adjustments to your Chaining settings before chain array is applied. Any changes made to these settings will be applied to the current chain only, and will not be saved permanently in your settings. For a detailed description of these settings, see Chaining settings. Note: If you are trying to apply a Chain Array to a part, but your chain is not configured properly, an error icon ( ) will appear and the OK button will be disabled. The values in the Chain Array dialog and the geometry of the part must meet a certain criteria

- 539 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

before Chain Array can be applied. Possible reasons for a conflict may include:  n The position of the leads on your part are preventing the application of the chain. Try adjusting the position of the leads on your part.  n The chain cannot be created without crossing the cut path. Try selecting Allow cut to cross kerf in the advanced settings.  n The chain cannot be created using the existing cut sequence order. Try selecting Chain parts in reverse order in the advanced settings.

- 540 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Stopping an array You can stop any array that is in progress:  l In the status bar, click Stop.

- 541 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

14. CUT SEQUENCE About Cut Sequence mode When you nest parts in ProNest, the program generates a cutting sequence for those parts based on your current settings. The cut sequence determines the order in which individual parts on a nest will be cut. Cut sequence is generated whether parts have been nested manually or automatically.   You can view or modify the cut sequence for your current nest by entering Cut Sequence mode.

Enter Cut Sequence mode  l On the Nest tab, in the Modify group, click Cut Sequence. The parts on your nest will appear numbered by cut sequence.  

Note:

The part sequence numbers show the order in which exterior profiles are cut. This represents the order in which the parts will drop out.

  In cases where nested parts are grouped together (such as with bridging, chaining, or common line cutting), normal cut sequence numbers are appended with sub-sequence numbers which indicate the cut order of parts within that group.  

- 542 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

On this nest, the chained parts have cut sequence numbers of 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, and 1-4. The group of chained parts will be cut first on the nest, starting with the bottom-most part in the chain.   Once you are in Cut Sequence mode, you can modify the cut sequence for your nest, or delete the current sequence entirely and define a new sequence manually.

The Cut Sequence tab The Cut Sequence tab will become active upon entering Cut Sequence mode. The Cut Sequence tab contains the following functions:   Ribbon control

Name

Description

Toggle

This is an indicator signaling that you can add or remove parts from the cut sequence by clicking them. If you click on a sequenced part, it will become unsequenced. If an unsequenced part is clicked, it will be added to the cut sequence.

Finish: Insert Unsequenced Parts Before

This enables you to move or insert the unsequenced part into the cut sequence before parts that have already been sequenced.

Finish: Append Unsequenced Parts to End

This appends the unsequenced parts on the current nest to the end of the cut sequence.

Clear From

This will clear the cut sequence from a user-defined point onward.

Clear

This will clear the entire cut sequence for the current nest.

Calculate

This will open the Cut Sequence settings page, where you can make adjustments to your cut sequence settings and apply your changes to the current nest.

- 543 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Modifying the cut sequence of a nest The cut sequence of a nest can be modified in a number of different ways. You should be in Cut Sequence mode to modify the cut sequence of a nest.

Enter Cut Sequence mode

 l On the Nest tab, click Cut Sequence.

In this article... Change the cut sequence of a few parts on the nest Calculate a new cut sequence Place parts in a specific spot in the cut sequence Move parts to the end of the cut sequence Reassign the cut sequence of an entire nest Reassign the cut sequence from a user-defined point onward Exit Cut Sequence mode

Change the cut sequence of a few parts on the nest  1. On the Nest tab, click Cut Sequence (

). You will enter Cut Sequence Mode.

 2. Click each part that you want to change the cut sequence for. The parts will become unsequenced.  3. Click on those parts again in the order that you want to assign the new cut sequence.

Calculate a new cut sequence   1. Click the Recalculate button.  2. Adjust your Cut Sequence settings, as necessary.  3. Click OK.

Place parts in a specific spot in the cut sequence  1. Click each part that you want to insert in the proper order. These parts will become unsequenced. The order in which the parts are clicked will be the order that they are added during insertion.  2. Click Finish, then click Insert Unsequenced Parts Before.  3. Click the sequenced part that your selected parts should immediately precede. The sequence numbers of all parts will be adjusted to show the new order.

Move parts to the end of the cut sequence  1. Click each part that you want to insert in the proper order. These parts will become unsequenced. The order in which the parts are clicked will be the order that they are added at the end.

- 544 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 2. Click Finish, then click Append Unsequenced Part to End button. Your parts will be shifted to the end of the cut sequence.

Reassign the cut sequence of an entire nest  1. Click Clear.  2. Click on each part in the order that you want them to be cut. -or 3. Click Recalculate to apply the cut sequence automatically.

Reassign the cut sequence from a user-defined point onward  1. Click Clear (

) , then click Clear From.

 2. Click on the sequenced part where you want to break the current cut sequence. Parts with sequence numbers lower than this part will remain sequenced. All parts after this point (included the selected part) will become unsequenced.  3. Click on each unsequenced part in the order that you want them to be cut.

Exit Cut Sequence mode  l Click Close on the Cut Sequence tab. -or l Press ESC. ProNest will automatically sequence any remaining unsequenced parts and return to the Nest tab.

- 545 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

15. CROP What is a crop? In ProNest, cropping is used to cut away a usable portion of the plate from the skeleton that is created after parts are cut. The portion of plate that is cropped from a nest is called a remnant. Cropping can help you to maximize material usage by saving portions of plates that might otherwise be scrapped. Crops can be applied automatically to a nest using the AutoCrop feature. You can also manually apply a crop to a plate after your parts have been nested.    

A nest with two parts nested. Note that a sub  stantial portion of the plate has not been nested on.

The same nest with a crop applied. The remnant, or cropped portion of plate, appears gray. This remnant can be cataloged and used at a later date.

How do crops affect output? When a crop is defined for a nest, the default output sequence would place the crop at the end of the CNC file, causing the crop to be cut after all parts are cut. However, you can change how crops are added to output by modifying your cut sequence rules.

Cropping a nest When you crop a nest, data from the Crop page of your settings (such as a crop's Extension) will affect how the crop is applied. Typically, crops are applied after all of your parts have been nested.   Crops can be applied either manually or automatically. When applied automatically, ProNest uses the data found in the Crop page of your settings to find the best remnant that can be generated from the current nest and then applies automatic crop lines accordingly. Before using Auto Crop on your nests, you should make sure that your "Crop settings" on page 150 are configured properly.

Automatic cropping (AutoCrop) To apply an automatic crop to your current nest:  l On the Nest tab, click AutoCrop.   To apply an automatic crop to all nests in your job:  l On the Nest tab, click the arrow next to AutoCrop and then click AutoCrop All Nests.

- 546 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Manual cropping

 1. On the Nest tab, click Crop. You will enter Crop mode, where you can define the path for a crop on the current nest.  2. Using the cross-hair cursor, click anywhere in the area outside of the plate edge. This will define where your crop should begin.  3. Click a series of points on your nest to define the cut path.  4. Click Close Crop or press ESC to finish the crop and exit the mode. ProNest will automatically trim or extend the last crop line to the plate edge, if necessary. Tips:

 l You can click and drag while applying a crop line in order to see where each section of the crop will be cut.  l Holding down the SHIFT key while clicking and dragging will cause the crop line to snap to the nearest 45° angle.  l While defining a crop, you can delete the most recent section of the crop by pressing the BACKSPACE key.

Deleting crops To delete a crop from your current nest  l On the Nest tab, click Delete Crop.   To delete all crops in your job:  l On the Nest tab, click Delete Crops from All Nests. Important: ProNest will not prevent you from defining a crop line that extends through a nested part. When applying crop lines, please be sure that there is no conflict with the part profiles on your nest.

- 547 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

16. REPORTS Standard reports Reports provide detailed information about various different aspects of your job, including production times and costs, utilization figures, part and plate information, customer information, and printable part labels. ProNest can produce a variety of reports, as detailed in the following table:   Standard reports

Description

Nest Plot

This report shows an image of each nest, the plate size, material information, and the cut sequence number for each part.  

Nest Plot (Color)

Identical to the Nest Plot report, but parts are always drawn color-filled when using Fill By Part Property. The Job Color Legend report, which contains a separate color key mapping fill colors to part property values, is included automatically.   See Colorized reports for more information.

Nest Plot (Draw Parts Only)

This is identical to the Nest Plot report but doesn't show any plate geometry, crops or skeleton lines.  

Single-Head Nest Detail

This report shows an image of each nest, the plate size, material information, and the cut sequence number for each part. A list of nested parts in cut sequence order is also displayed, with part dimensions and weight shown.  

Single-Head Nest Detail (Color)

Identical to the Single Head Nest Detail report, but parts are always drawn color-filled when using Fill By Part Property. The Job Color Legend report, which contains a separate color key mapping fill colors to part property values, is included automatically.   See Colorized reports for more information.

Single-Head Nest Sequence

This report shows an image of each nest, the plate size and material information, and the cut sequence number for each part. A list of the nested parts in cut sequence order is also displayed. The SingleHead Nest Sequence report can be useful if you have a nest with many parts nested and want to fit everything on a single report page.  

Multi-Head Nest Detail

This report shows an image of each nest, the plate size, material information, and the cut sequence number for each part. A list of the nested parts in cut sequence order showing the number of torches used and the torch spacing for each part is also displayed.  

Job Summary

Provides summaries of the utilizations, plates, and production cost information for each nest in the job  

Part Detail

Provides dimensions, material, weight, quantity, and other part information, as well as a picture of each part. Part costs are calculated using true area.  

Part Detail (Color)

Identical to the Part Detail report, but parts are drawn color-filled when using Fill By Part Property. The Job Color Legend report, which contains a separate color key mapping fill colors to part property val-

- 548 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Standard reports

Description ues, is included automatically.   See Colorized reports for more information.

Allocated Part Detail

This contains the same fields as the Part Detail report, but involves a completely different method for calculating costs, known as allocated costing. To learn more see "What is allocated costing?" on page 600  

Rectangular Part Detail  

Similar to the Part Detail report, except that all calculated values are based on the part's rectangular area (as opposed to its true area).  

Part Summary

Similar to the Part Detail report, except that a picture of the part is not included  

Inventory Plate Detail

Provides the dimensional information for each inventory plate that was used in the job  

Inventory Plate Summary

Accounts for inventory plates used in the job  

Optimization

Displays the utilization and production information for each nest in the job, along with the optimization strategy that was used to create it (if applicable)  

Part List by Customer

The Part List report contains the file names (including file path), quantity required, quantity nested, priority, restriction angle, initial rotation and reference value for each part in a job, sorted by customer.  

Part Label (Avery 5264)

Will print the part information on standard Avery 5264 labels  

Stack Label (Avery 5264)

Similar to Part Label report, except that this label is designed to stick on top of a stack of like parts. Prints on standard Avery 5264 labels.  

HVAC Label (A5164)

Will print labels for HVAC parts on Avery 5164 labels  

Job Color Legend

When color filling by a part property is used, this report shows a legend with a color swatch ( ) and associated part property value for the entire job. This report explains what each color means when reading the other colorized reports.   See Colorized reports for more information.

Tooling Layout  

Used with the Drill Machine Interface to show tooling information by nest. Details each tool that must be loaded into a respective turret station in order to complete all tooling on a nest.

Note: Reports contain different utilization and costing figures, based on report type. For more information on how costs and utilization figures are calculated, refer to "How are costs calculated?" on page 584 and "How are utilization figures calculated?" on page 608

- 549 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Using reports Typically reports are generated after nesting is complete, though you can generate a report at any time in ProNest. You can select which types of reports you want to view and print from the Reports Manager dialog. The list of available reports may vary based on the optional modules that are installed.

In this article... Viewing reports Exporting reports Printing reports

Viewing reports  1. Open the Report Manager dialog (From the main ProNest window, on the Home tab, click Reports

).

A list of standard reports will be displayed in the right-hand section of the screen.  2. Select the reports you want to view by clicking them. Note:

To select multiple individual reports, hold the CTRL key and click the reports that you want to select. To select a range of reports, hold the SHIFT key and click the first and last report in the list of reports that you want to select.

 3. Click the Print Preview toolbar button. You can use the arrows (

) in the preview dialog to scan through your reports.

Exporting reports  1. Open the Report Manager dialog (From the main ProNest window, on the Home tab, click Reports

).

 2. On the left pane, select the folder containing the reports that you want to export.  3. Select the reports that you want to export by clicking them.  4. Click the Export toolbar button. You can choose to export to Adobe PDF, CSV (Comma-Separated Values), XLS or HTML file.

Printing reports  1. Open the Report Manager dialog (From the main ProNest window, on the Home tab, click Reports

).

 2. On the left pane, select the folder containing the reports that you want to print.  3. Select the reports that you want to print by clicking them.  4. Click the Print toolbar button. Tip: You can quickly print a scaled Nest Report (similar to the Nest Plot Report) for your current nest from the main ProNest window.   To print a Nest Report:

- 550 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. On the Nest tab, in the Print group, click Print Current View.  2. Click Print.  3. Set print options.  4. Click OK.

- 551 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Custom reports With custom ProNest reports, you can create reports that fit your specific needs. Unlike standard reports, custom reports are modifiable they can be renamed or edited using the FastReport designer.

In this article... Creating a new custom report Editing a custom report Adding custom reports subfolders Renaming a custom report

Creating a new custom report You can either start a new custom report from scratch or use an existing standard or custom report as a template to build your new report.    To create a new report:  1. Open the Report Manager dialog (From the main ProNest window, on the Home tab, click Report Manager

).

 2. On the File menu, select New, then Report. The New Report dialog will open.  3. Select a template that you want to use as a basis for your report. You can choose from the following templates:  l Blank: creates a new report with no existing data, text, or formatting  l Standard reports: creates a duplicate of a standard report, with existing data, text, and formatting  l Custom reports: creates a duplicate of a custom report, with existing data, text, and formatting  4. Select a report.  5. Click Create. Your new report will be added to your list of custom reports. Tip: You can quickly copy any standard report to your custom reports.  1. On the left pane, select the Standard folder (

).

 2. From the right-hand section of the screen, drag and drop a standard report over the Custom reports folder ( created.

The selected report will be added to the custom reports folder. Once a standard report is copied to a custom reports folder, the report can be edited or renamed,

- 552 -

) that you

ProNest 2019 Manual

Editing a custom report Custom reports can be edited using the built-in FastReport designer.   To edit a custom report:  1. Open the Report Manager dialog (From the main ProNest window, on the Home tab, click Report Manager  2. On the left pane, select the Custom Reports folder (

).

) containing the report you want to edit.

 3. In the right-hand section of the screen, select the report.  4. Click the Edit toolbar button. The FastReport designer will open, where your custom report can be edited.

Adding custom reports subfolders  1. Open the Report Manager dialog (From the main ProNest window, on the Home tab, click Report Manager  2. Right-click the Custom Reports folder (

).

), select New, then Folder.

A subfolder will appear beneath the Custom Reports folder.  3. Enter a name for the subfolder.

Renaming a custom report  1. Open the Report Manager dialog (From the main ProNest window, on the Home tab, click Report Manager  2. On the left pane, select the Custom Reports folder (

) containing the report you want to rename.

 3. In the right-hand section of the screen, right-click the report and select Rename.  4. Enter a new name for the report.

- 553 -

).

ProNest 2019 Manual

Colorized reports ProNest reports can display color-filled parts. You can set the fill color according to a part's property (such as Customer).   The following standard reports are designed to be viewed in color: Nest Plot (Color) Single Head Nest Detail (Color) Part Detail (Color) When they're exported or printed, they include a color key on the last page.

In order to show color-filled parts in these reports:  l In Report Options (File > Options in Report Manager), set Fill to By Part Property (you can choose any property listed). -or 1. In Report Options, set Fill to Same as Application.  2. In the Color Legend, set the Fill scheme to By Part Property (you can choose any property listed).   You can also enable color-filling in many of the other standard reports that include part images. In addition to the options above, set the following:  l In Report Options, on the Nest tab, select Draw with parts filled.Images of parts on nests will be color-filled.  l In Report Options, on the Part tab, select Draw with parts filled. Images of individual parts will be color-filled. Unlike the three color reports listed previously, other standard reports will not include a color key page. You can add that manually by exporting/printing the Job Color Legend standard report. Note:

When Draw with parts filled is enabled and Fill scheme is set to Standard or Highlight Part, parts will be filled in gray in reports.

- 554 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Batches A batch is a user-defined group of standard and/or custom reports. Typically, you would create a batch of commonly used reports that you want to generate on a regular basis.

In this article... Creating a batch Adding reports to a batch Exporting a batch Printing a batch Removing reports from a batch

Creating a batch In the left pane, a root folder named "Batches" (   To create a new batch:

) will already exist. Under this folder, you can add as many batches as you want.

 1. Open Report Manager (on the Home tab, click Reports

).

 2. On the File menu, select New, then Batch.  3. Your new batch will be listed under the Batches root folder (

) in the left pane.

 4. Enter a name for your batch.

Adding reports to a batch  1. On the left pane, select the source of your reports (Standard or Custom).  2. Select the report(s) you want to include in the batch. Tip: To select multiple individual reports, hold the CTRL key and click the reports that you want to select. To select a range of reports, hold the SHIFT key and click the first and last report in the list of reports that you want to select.  3. Drag the selected report over the Batches sub-folder that you created.

The selected reports will be added to the batch.

Exporting a batch  1. On the left pane, select the batch that you want to export.  2. Click the Export toolbar button.

- 555 -

ProNest 2019 Manual You can choose to export to Adobe PDF, CSV (Comma-Separated Values), or HTML file.

Printing a batch  1. On the left pane, select the batch that you want to print.  2. Click the Print toolbar button.

Removing reports from a batch  1. On the left pane, select the batch that you want to modify.  2. From the right-hand section, select the reports you want to remove.  3. Click the Delete toolbar button.

- 556 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Reports options You can adjust how information is displayed in your reports using the Options dialog.   To open the Options dialog:  l From the Report Manager dialog, on the File menu, select Options.  

Format Options Precision The number of places after a decimal point  

Padded When selected, all numbers will be carried out to the specified precision value for decimal places, even if the precision is unnecessary.  

Format according to regional preferences When selected, reports will use the display units (MMKS or IPS) and precision specified on the Regional tab of your preferences.  

Image Options Fill When the Draw with parts filled report option is enabled, you can select a color fill scheme to use for reports. Standard Parts will be filled with a light gray color.

No fill Parts will not be color-filled in ProNest reports.

- 557 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Same as application Parts will be filled according to your current Color Legend fill scheme. Fill by a Part Property This can be used to set a fill scheme that is independent of the scheme used in the Color Legend. Parts can be color-filled according to a particular part property. Parts with different values for that property will be filled with different colors in reports.  

Font The font used for text that appears in nest, part, or plate images. This includes part names, cut sequence numbers, and dimensions.  

Font size The size of text that appears in nest, part, or plate images. This includes part names, cut sequence numbers, and dimensions.  

Line width  The width of the plot lines shown in nest, part, or plate images  

Show cut sequence numbers Display the cut sequence numbers in nest images

Show part names Display part names in nest images  

Show display only Show display-only profiles in part or nest images

- 558 -

ProNest 2019 Manual  

Show cut direction Display the cut direction of parts in nest images

Show pierces Show pierces in part or nest images

Show open profiles Show open profiles in part or nest images  

Show dimensions Display part or plate dimensions in part/plate images

Show plate shadow Display a darkened shadow underneath plate or nest images  

Draw with parts filled When enabled, parts will be color-filled in selected standard reports.   If enabled on the Nest tab, parts in the nest-level reports can be color-filled.

- 559 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

If enabled on the Part tab, parts in the part-level reports can be color-filled.

If this option is turned off, parts will not be color-filled in selected standard reports. See Colorized reports for more information. Note:

This option is ignored by the following standard reports: Nest Plot (Color), Single Head Nest Detail (Color), and Part Detail (Color).

- 560 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Using destinations Report destinations provide a way to pre-define a folder and file name, as well as set various default printer and export properties, so that you don't have to do this each time a report or batch of reports is exported or printed.   Available types of destinations include: Printer, PDF, CSV, XLS, or HTML.

Creating destinations  1. Open Report Manager (on the Home tab, click Reports  2. In the left pane, right-click the

).

Destinations folder.

 3. Select New, then select the type of destination that you want. Choices include Printer, PDF, CSV, XLS, or HTML.  4. Type a name for the destination.  5. Enter destination properties. Each of these destination types has a setup page where you can set folder and file name, as well as properties and document settings. Click a link below for more information on a destination type:  l "Printer report destinations" on page 563  l "PDF report destinations" on page 565  l "CSV report destinations" on page 567  l "XLS report destinations" on page 568  l "HTML report destinations" on page 569

Sending reports to a destination You can send a single report or batch of reports to a destination as follows:  1. Open Report Manager (on the Home tab, click Reports

).

 2. Select a report or batch by clicking it.  3. Click the Send to toolbar button.  4. Select a destination from the list.   -or   1. Open Report Manager (on the Home tab, click Reports

).

 2. Simply click and drag the report or batch onto the destination.   -or- (for batches only)    1. On the Home tab, in the Produce group, click the arrow next to Reports.  2. Click the side arrow

for the batch you want.

 3. Select a destination from the list. Your batch of reports will be sent to the destination specified.

- 561 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Delete a destination  1. Open Report Manager (on the Home tab, click Reports

).

 2. In the left pane, select a destination.  3. Click the Delete toolbar button.

- 562 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Printer report destinations Printer Name Select a printer from the list of installed printers.  

Properties Click this button to change the properties, such as paper type, for the selected printer.  

Where The location of the selected printer or port that the printer is connected to.  

Copies Number of copies In this list, select the number of copies that you want printed.  

Collate Select this check box if you want your print job to be kept in the order that you created in your document when printed. This check box is applicable if you are printing more than one copy.  

Print mode The paper size that the report should be printed on. This will override the page size set in printer properties.

Default The page size defined in the report matches the paper size it will be printed on.  

Split big pages Reports will be split apart (if necessary) to fit on the paper size specified in "Print on sheet".  

Join small pages Reports will be joined together (if necessary) to fit the paper size specified in "Print on sheet".  

Scale Reports will be scaled (up or down) to the paper size specified in "Print on sheet".  

Other Print In this list, click if you want to print all pages, odd pages, or even pages.  

Order The order in which to print the pages of the document. Selecting "Reverse" will print the last page first.  

Duplex Default

- 563 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Uses the settings saved in the report (In FastReport, go to File > Page Settings > Other Options).   Vertical Vertical duplex printing. The bottom of one page is at the same end of the sheet as the top of the next page.   Horizontal Horizontal duplex printing. The tops of both sides of the page are on the same end of the sheet.   Simplex Single sided printing (no duplex).

- 564 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

PDF report destinations File name You can enter text and variables to specify a file path and name where the destination will be saved.   In the File name box, you can click the browse button ( ) to open the Edit Field dialog, where you can customize the file name formula. See "Using variables" on page 921 for more information.    

Export properties Compressed Output file compression. This reduces file size but increases export time.  

Embedded fonts All fonts used in the report will be contained in the PDF output file so that the file will be displayed correctly when opened on a computer where these fonts are absent. This increases output file size.  

Background Export of graphic image will be assigned to a page into PDF file. This increases output file size.  

Print optimized Graphic images are output in high resolution for correct printing. Enabling this option is necessary only when the document contains graphics and printing is necessary. This increases output file size.  

Outline When a report outline is used, this option enables export of the outline to the PDF document.    

Document information This information will be embedded in the PDF document (in Document Properties).  

Authentication and permissions Owner password Entering an owner password will turn on PDF security permissions. The owner password will be required to change PDF document security settings and permissions.  

User password This password will be required to open the PDF document. (The user password is also known as a Document Open Password.) If no user password is specified, the PDF will not require a password to be opened.   The following options control the PDF security settings and permissions, which restricts what can be done to the PDF document:  l Print the document  l Modify the document

- 565 -

ProNest 2019 Manual  l Copy of text and graphics  l Add or modify text annotations Selecting a checkbox will enable the action in the PDF, clearing a checkbox will prohibit the action. Note:

An owner password must be set for these security and permissions options to take effect.

 

Viewer preferences Hide toolbar Hides the toolbar in the PDF viewer.  

Hide menubar Hides the menubar in the PDF viewer.  

Hide window user interface Hides the window controls that are displayed in the background of the PDF viewer.  

Fit window Adjusts the document window to fit snugly around the opening page.  

Center window Positions the window in the center of the screen area.  

Print scaling When selected, in the PDF document print setup screen, Page scaling is set to "Shrink to printable area" by default. When cleared, Page scaling is set to "(None)".  

- 566 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

CSV report destinations File name You can enter text and variables to specify a file path and name where the destination will be saved.   In the File name box, you can click the browse button ( ) to open the Edit Field dialog, where you can customize the file name formula. See "Using variables" on page 921 for more information.  

OEM code page Saves output file in current OEM code page.  

Separator The values separator to use in the output file. The default separator is a semicolon (;).  

- 567 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

XLS report destinations File name You can enter text and variables to specify a file path and name where the destination will be saved.   In the File name box, you can click the browse button ( ) to open the Edit Field dialog, where you can customize the file name formula. See "Using variables" on page 921 for more information.  

Export properties Continuous    

Pictures Graphic images will be included in the XLS worksheet.  

As text All objects are transferred into the worksheet as text objects. This option may be useful when transferring numeric fields with complicated formatting.  

Fast export Usage of optimized fast data transferring to Excel. Disabling this option slows down data transfer but increases export compatibility on any errors during data transfer.  

Grid lines Grid lines will be displayed in the worksheet.  

Merge cells Empty, adjacent cells will be merged together in the worksheet.  

WYSIWYG Full compliance to report appearance. On this option disabling the optimization for reducing the number of lines and columns in resulting table is performed.  

Background Export of filling color assigned to report page.  

Page breaks Page breaks will be included in the worksheet.  

- 568 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

HTML report destinations File name You can enter text and variables to specify a file path and name where the destination will be saved.   In the File name box, you can click the browse button ( ) to open the Edit Field dialog, where you can customize the file name formula. See "Using variables" on page 921 for more information.  

Export properties Styles Transfers text object design styles. Clearing this setting optimizes exporting but worsens document appearance.  

All in one folder When selected, all HTML files and images will be saved the same root folder. When cleared, files will be saved in a tiered subfolder structure.  

Page navigator A special navigator bar (JavaScript) is included in HTML output for paging from one HTML report to the next. This is useful when Multipage is enabled.  

Fixed width Selecting this setting will block automatic width modification when the window is resized.  

Multipage When selected, each report is saved in a separate HTML file. Clearing this setting will save all reports in a single HTML file.  

Background Include graphics from the background of the report page.  

Pictures Select a format for saving pictures.   Choices: JPEG, BMP, GIF, PNG, (None) Selecting "(None)" will omit images from HTML output.

- 569 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

17. OUTPUT Creating NC output After nesting is complete, CNC output can be created for your job. During output, ProNest creates separate CNC files for each nest in your job. Each CNC file contains coded instructions for your cutting machine to cut an entire nest, including any crops or skeleton cuts that may have been added.

Create NC output for nests in the current job

 1. On the Home tab, click the arrow next to Output then click Output NC. The Output dialog will open.  2. In the File name box, type a name for your output file. ProNest will assign a unique file name to each nest in your job, based on the file name that you entered.  3. Make sure the nests that you want to output are selected.  4. Click Output. ProNest will generate a CNC file for each nest in your job. These CNC files would then be sent to your machine controller. To learn about creating CNC output for nests, explore the following the links:  l "The Output dialog" on page 571  l "How does NC file naming work?" on page 574  l "The Output Progress dialog" on page 577  l "Additional machine output" on page 579  l "CNC Output settings" on page 159   You can also create single post CNC output for an individual part. Click the following link to learn more:  l "Single part output" on page 578

- 570 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

The Output dialog Generating output for your nests is done using the Output dialog. 

Open the Output dialog

 l On the Home tab, click the arrow next to Output, then click Output NC.  

The Output dialog   Each nest in your job is listed separately in this dialog, along with the nests's File Name and Action. You can use the checkboxes next to each nest to indicate whether or not that nest should be output. Note: If you are using subroutines, all nests in your job must be output at the same time. Because of this, checkboxes do not appear next to each nest when subroutines are in use.

Output folder By default, this will be set to the location specified in your CNC Output settings.  

File name You can insert a file name for your output files here. If you have more than one nest, ProNest will insert your file name and then append it with a different number for each CNC file. By default this box will contain the name of your current job.   Example: If you have two nests and you entered "TEST" in the File name box, ProNest would create two output files named "TEST01.CNC" and "TEST02.CNC".

- 571 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Note: If the Use long file names option is not selected in your CNC Output settings, ProNest will truncate the file name so that it does not exceed eight characters. To learn more about how output files are named, see "How does NC file naming work?" on page 574  

Program number You can specify a program number to be inserted into the first CNC file output for your job. The exact way that this setting is used (or whether it is even used at all) is determined entirely by the particular CFF being used. This will appear only when Show program number in output dialog is selected in your CNC Output settings.   

Use subroutines to name output files  When selected, CNC output files will be named according to subroutine address. This will appear only when subroutines are in use and Show program number in output dialog is selected in your CNC Output settings.  

Machine The current machine.  

Post processor The CFF file used by the current machine.  

Additional machines You can create NC output files for one or more additional machines at the same time you create output for the current machine. See Additional machine output for more information.  

Tools Output Settings Clicking this link will take you directly to the CNC Output page of your settings. From there, you can make changes to your output settings on the fly and apply those changes to your current job without closing the CNC Output dialog. Note:

Any changes made to these settings will only affect the current machine - it will not have any impact on output for additional machines.

Change Materials You can change the materials used in your job. To learn more, see Changing materials in your job.   Remnants and Skeletons You can save remnants and skeletons of your nests to the Plate Inventory Database for use at a later time. Remnants and skeletons are added to the database once a nest is output.   To learn more, see "About remnants and skeletons" on page 706.  

Browse Folders This will open an explorer view of your output file path.  

- 572 -

ProNest 2019 Manual   The machine (CFG) and post processor (CFF) used to generate output are displayed at the bottom of the CNC Output dialog. Tip: The NC output icon (

) shows the output status of a nest. Nests that have not yet been output have an inactive icon (

Nests that have already been output have an active icon (

).

), which you can click to view the NC code created for that nest.

- 573 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

How does NC file naming work? When you output a job, there are several variables that control how output files will be named. Output file names are assigned from the Output dialog.  

Figure 1: The CNC Output dialog   In the File name box (indicated by the red arrow), you can input a name that should be applied to all of the nests in your job. If your job has only one nest, the value in this box will match the CNC file name (indicated by the green arrow). If there is more than one nest in the job (as shown in Figure 1), each CNC file name will be appended as follows: 01, 02, 03, etc.   Note that you can also edit CNC file names individually by clicking the file name and entering an alphanumeric name.  

Note: If the Use long file names option is not selected in your CNC Output settings, ProNest will truncate the file name so that it does not exceed eight characters.

File extensions - 574 -

ProNest 2019 Manual The default file extension for output files is .cnc. This can be changed to any extension using the CNC file extension setting, found on the CNC Output page of your ProNest settings. If this settings value is left blank and a job has more than one nest, the extension will automatically be added as follows: .N1, .N2, .N3, etc.   Example 1: CNC file extension = cnc Output a single nest with the name: MyJob.cnc Output file: MyJob.cnc   Example 2: CNC file extension = cnc Output three nests with the name: MyJob.cnc Output files: MyJob01.cnc, MyJob02.cnc, MyJob03.cnc   Example 3: Clear the CNC file extension setting Output a single nest with the name: MyJob Output file: MyJob   Example 4: Clear the CNC file extension setting Output three nests with the name: MyJob Output files: MyJob.N1, MyJob.N2, MyJob.N3

Subroutines and file naming If your CFF is set up to use subroutines, output files can be automatically named using the program number as the base file name.  

Figure 2: The CNC Output dialog with Program number and Use subroutines to name output files displayed  

- 575 -

ProNest 2019 Manual When Use subroutines to name output files is selected, the first nest in your job will be named with the program number (as shown in Figure 2). Subsequent nests will be named during output, based on how many subroutines are present in a given nest. Notice that you can modify the program number from this dialog. Note: In order to view Program number and Use subroutines to name output files from the CNC Output dialog, Show program number in output dialog must be selected on the CNC Output page of your settings. If you are using subroutines and/or program number, but do not want to name your output files with subroutines, simply clear the Use subroutines to name output files box. Your output files can be named as normal.

Additional machines and file naming If an additional machine has a different output folder from the current machine, the additional machine's output files will have the same names as the output files for the current machine.   If an additional machine has the same output folder as the current machine, the additional machine's output file names will be appended with the machine name (for example, "MyJob01.cnc" would become "MyJob01 - Conventional plasma.cnc").

- 576 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

The Output Progress dialog The Output Progress dialog, which appears while CNC output is being generated, displays the status of each output file.  

Tip:

You can open any CNC output file directly from the Output Progress dialog by clicking the file name, as shown in the above diagram.

Status The status of your output file will be displayed upon output.   Completed The CNC file was created successfully   Warning

CNC file was created, but there are issues that may require attention.

Error

Conflicts in your job must be addressed before viable output can be created

Cancelled

Output was cancelled

 

 

 

Close this window on successful completion Selecting this box will hide Output Progress dialog when status for all nests is Completed ( ProNest preferences.

- 577 -

). This setting can be changed from your

ProNest 2019 Manual

Single part output You can create machine-ready CNC output for a single part or group of parts using ProNest. Creating single part output for a part is done after the part has been processed and added to the part list.   Single part output works a lot like creating output for a nest. During output, each individual part is coded into a separate CNC file. ProNest takes into account all of your CNC Output and Output Axis settings, as well as other machine and process settings information when writing the NC code for a part.   To create output for one or more parts:  1. In the Edit Part List window, add your parts to the part list.  2. Make any needed adjustments (such as leads positioning) to your part in Advanced Edit, then return to the Edit Part List.  3. In the Part List grid, select all of the parts that you want to output.

To select multiple parts, hold CTRL as you click the parts. To select all parts in the part list, click Select All on the Edit menu.  4. Click the Output Part button in the Part List. The CNC Output dialog will open. All selected parts in your part list will be listed, with a checkbox next to each part. By default, the name of your parts' output file will match the part name. If you want, you can rename parts individually or enter a root file name for all parts using the File name box (for more information, see "How does NC file naming work?" on page 574).  5. Select a Home Position for your part. By default, this will match the Part home from your CNC Output settings.  6. Click Output. Your output file will be created in the specified location. Note: You can also output a single part from Advanced Edit:  1. From the Edit Part List window, add your part to the part list.  2. Make sure that your part is currently selected in the part list.  3. In the Preview, click the Advanced Edit button.  4. Make any needed adjustments (such as leads positioning) to your part in Advanced Edit.  5. From the File menu, select Output.  6. Browse to a folder for your output file.  7. In the File name box, enter a file name for your part. The extension for this file reflects the CNC file extension specified in the CNC Output page of your settings.  8. Click Output.

- 578 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Additional machine output You can create NC output files for one or more additional machines at the same time you create output for the current machine. This is useful in cases where the current machine is down or unavailable but there are other machines in your operation that can cut the nest. You can quickly shift jobs between similar machines to remain agile and maximize production, without having to rebuild the part list and nest again.  

Create NC output for nests in the current job for additional machines

 1. On the Home tab, click the arrow next to Output then click Output NC. The Output dialog will open.  2. In the File name box, type a name for your output file. ProNest will assign a unique file name to each nest in your job, based on the file name that you entered.  3. Make sure the nests that you want to output are selected.  4. In the Additional machines box, click Add and select one or more machines from the list.

- 579 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 5. Click Output. For each nest, ProNest will generate a separate NC file for each machine. These NC files would then be sent to the appropriate machine controller. Note:

You can create a default list of additional machines in CNC Output settings (on the Output Files tab).

Where are output files for additional machines saved? Output files are created in the additional machine's Default output folder, specified in the CNC Output settings for that machine. In the Output dialog, the output folder for an additional machine is shown next to the machine name.   If an additional machine has the same output folder as the current machine, it will say Same as current machine. Tip: You can use the Machines manager to change the default output folder for an additional machine. See Managing machines for more information.

How does file naming work with additional machines? If an additional machine has a different output folder from the current machine, the additional machine's output files will have the same names as the output files for the current machine.   If an additional machine has the same output folder as the current machine, the additional machine's output file names will be appended with the machine name (for example, "MyJob01.cnc" would become "MyJob01 - Conventional plasma.cnc").

Best practices for using additional machine output  l Make the most complex machine in your operation the current machine and pick less complex machines as the additional machines. If the current machine is an oxyfuel table, creating additional output for a high definition plasma table may not yield the best cutting results. Instead, it would be better to create the job with the high definition plasma as the current machine and then add the oxyfuel table as an additional machine during output.

- 580 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 l Pick similar machines with similar processes and capabilities. If the current machine is a fiber laser and the additional machine is a conventional plasma, the leads and spacing may be too different, resulting in poor cutting results.

Which machine's settings are used when an additional machine output file is created? Additional machine output is designed for quickly creating NC output for alternate machines, without changing your job. As a result, nests are not modified for additional machine output files. Cutting parameters and output settings are updated to use settings from the additional machine.

The following table summarizes rules and limitations for output files created for additional machines:   Feature

Where do the settings come from?

Remarks

Cutting parameters

Additional machine

Process parameters such as feedrate, kerf, and so on, come from the additional machine's settings.

Output settings

Additional machine

Most output settings (including output axis, incremental/absolute mode, units, pre-kerfing for non-CLC parts, etc.) come from the additional machine's settings.

Part position and separations

Current machine

The position and spacing of nested parts does not change for additional machine output. Nests are created based on the current machine's settings.

Leads

Current machine

Leads do not change for additional machine output.

Cut sequence Current machine

Cut sequence does not change for additional machine output.

Collision avoidance

Current machine

Collision avoidance does not change for additional machine output.

Skeleton cutup

Current machine

Skeleton cut-up does not change for additional machine output.

Common line Current machine cutting

Common edges of parts are always separated based on kerf width from the current machine and not the additional machine. If the kerf width is different for an additional machine, this may result in oversized or undersized parts.

Bridge cutting Current machine

Dynamic align bridge parts that are separated based on kerf percentage will always use the kerf width from the current machine and not the additional machine. If the kerf width is different for an additional machine, this may cause unexpected results.

Bevel

Current machine

Not recommended. Macro names for leads and loops, bevel spreadsheets, and orientation may be inconsistent from one machine to the next.

Multi-head

Current machine

Not recommended.

- 581 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

cutting True Hole®

Both

True Hole feedrates for additional machines are used, but leads from current machine are used.

Pre-pierces

Current machine

Pre-pierces for the current machine are always used. If pre-pierces are enabled for an additional machine but are disabled in the current machine, they will not be applied.

Drill machines n/a and secondary posts

Not supported.

Plate inventory

n/a

Not affected by additional machine output.

Work orders

n/a

Not affected by additional machine output.

- 582 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Undo output Previously-created output can be undone for nests in the current job. When output is created for nests, inventory plates may be consumed and remnants or skeletons may be produced. If you need to make changes to nests that have already been output, you can undo the output in order to ensure that inventory quantities are correct.

Undo output in the current job  l On the Home tab, in the Produce group, click the arrow next to Output then click Undo Output.   This will undo output for all nests in the current job.

Results of undo output  l  l  l  l

Output files created for the current machine will be deleted. Output files created for additional machines will be deleted. Inventory plates consumed will be returned to the database. Any remnants or skeletons produced will be removed from the inventory database.

- 583 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

18. COSTING How are costs calculated? The ProNest costing system is designed to help you understand the costs of cutting a particular part, nest, or job. ProNest can produce cost estimates with varying degrees of complexity - from simple estimates to extensive production costs.

In this article... Introduction How are costs calculated? Summary of costing formulas

Introduction In ProNest, costs are presented in terms of both time and money. Production Time, which is available for individual parts, nests, or entire jobs, is displayed for your information and is also used to calculate monetary costing figures. The monetary cost for a part, nest, or job is split into two main areas: Material Cost and Production Cost.   Available final costs for parts, nests and jobs include:  l Production Time  l Material Cost  l Production Cost  l Total Cost  

Excerpt of the Part Detail report, which shows final costs for individual parts   These final costs are the end product of a number of different calculations, as detailed in the next section. Tip: Try to get your final ProNest cost figures as close as possible to your real-world costs. The goal in ProNest costing is to accurately reflect your actual costs. If you need to add markups to cover margins or profit, it is recommended that you do this outside of the core costing calculations (this can be done using Quoting).

- 584 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

How are costs calculated? Total Cost Total Cost = Material Cost + Production Cost

Material Cost Material Cost represents the cost of the material required to fabricate a part. This cost is available for parts, nests, and entire jobs. Material Cost is calculated using the following: Area ProNest calculates this using the part's geometry. To learn more, see Part area methods used in costing. Thickness Thickness of the material. Density Density of the material. Unit price This is the price at which the material was purchased. It is important to enter correct Unit Price and Density values for each material in the database. Doing so will ensure that material weight and ultimately Material Cost are accurate. See Setting up costing in ProNest for more information on entering these values.

Production Cost Production Cost represents the cost of running each process needed to fabricate a part plus the baseline machine and labor costs. This cost is available for parts, nests, and entire jobs.

Process Costs On the Costing page of your ProNest settings, there is a tab for each machine process. Each process can have its own spreadsheet and/or default settings values. Activation time The time it takes to activate a particular process, expressed in seconds. The activation time is the total time from the point where the traverse motion stops until the cutting motion begins, which can include pre-heats, pierces, raising/lowering, and so on. See How is production time calculated? for more information. Cost per activation The cost incurred in activating a particular process. For cut processes this can be thought of as the cost per pierce. This should also include the cost of the consumables used during this time, since piercing significantly contributes to consumable wear. Operating cost The cost per minute of using the process. This cost should include the cost of the consumables used while using the process, but not while turning the process on and off during activations. Rapid rate This setting describes the machine's maximum traverse speed while the torch/head is off. Number of activations

- 585 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

ProNest calculates this based on the number of torch/head starts required for a part. For a cut process, this is the number of pierces. For scribing or marking, this is the number of torch on commands. Feedrate This is the cut speed. You typically won't need to edit feedrate values. See How is production time calculated? for more information.

Machine and Labor Costs Machine and labor related costs are entered in the Costing settings page. These values cover anything that would be included in the baseline operation of the machine itself, not taking into consideration any cutting or other processing. Machine cost This represents the baseline hourly cost of running your cutting machine, excluding labor costs. It may include things like facility overhead, electricity costs, repairs and maintenance, and even equipment depreciation. Plate loading cost The cost of loading a single plate of material onto the cutting machine. This is used to calculate nest-level costs, but is not used for individual part costs. Labor rate The hourly rate you pay for labor for the people involved in the running of your cutting machine. Labor cost per weight The amount you pay the people involved in running the cutting machine per unit weight. The weight used in the calculation is the weight of the cut parts as opposed to the weight of the full sheets. (This should not be used if a Labor rate is specified.)   To learn more about where to enter costing inputs, see Setting up costing in ProNest.

Summary of costing formulas ProNest uses the following formulas to calculate cost:

Parts Material Weight

= Area × Thickness × Density

Material Cost

= Material Weight × Unit Price

Feed Time

= Cut Length / Feedrate

Rapid Time

= Rapid Length / Rapid Rate

Total Activation

= [(Number of Activations × Activation Time) / 60]

Time Process Cost

= (Feed Time × Operating Cost Per Minute) + (Number of Activations × Cost per Activation)

Production Time

= Feed Time + Total Activation Time + Rapid Time

- 586 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Machine and Labor Cost

= (Material Weight × Labor Cost per Weight) + (Labor Rate × Production Time) + (Machine Cost per Hour × Production Time)

Production Cost

= Process Cost for all processes + Machine and Labor Cost

Total Cost

= Production Cost + Material Cost

Nests Material Cost

= Material Cost of All Parts on the Nest

Feed Time

= Cut Length / Feedrate

Rapid Time

= Rapid Length / Rapid Rate

Total Activation

= [(Number of Activations × Activation Time) / 60]

Time Process Cost

= (Feed Time × Operating Cost Per Minute) + (Number of Activations × Cost per Activation)

Production

= Feed Time + Total Activation Time + Rapid Time

Time Machine and Labor Cost Production

= Plate Loading Cost + (Material Weight × Labor Cost per Weight) + (Labor Rate × Production Time) + (Machine Cost per Hour × Production Time) = Process Cost for all processes + Machine and Labor Cost

Cost Total Cost

= Production Cost + Material Cost

  Note:

For punch and drill processes, Process Cost is calculated as:   Process Cost = Number of Activations × Cost per Activation Neither Process Production Time nor Operating Cost per Minute are included for drilling or punching.

- 587 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Setting up costing in ProNest When you install a ProNest machine setup (PNCA), all of the machine specific files you need will be installed along with it. All PNCA setups contain some default costing settings. Often, these costing settings will have to be adjusted to match your real-world costs.

Costing inputs The following table summarizes the settings that are used to calculate costs in ProNest. These are the inputs that you can adjust to get more accurate costing figures:  

Setting

Location in ProNest

Used to compute...

Tips

Thickness

Materials editor (Data tab > Materials)

Weight, Material Cost

Required for accurate costing data. You typically won't need to add any thicknesses specifically for costing.

Density

Materials editor (Data tab > Materials)

Weight, Material Cost

Required for accurate costing data. Density is needed to calculate weight and material cost, be sure that all of the materials in the Materials editor have a valid Density.

Unit Price

Materials editor Material (Data tab > Materials) Cost -andPlate Inventory (Data tab > Plate Inventory)

Required for accurate costing data. Unit price is the basis for calculating material cost. Be sure that all of the materials in the Materials editor have a valid Unit Price.   You can also enter Unit Price in the Plate Inventory. This would be the unit price at which a plate was purchased. For nests that use inventory plates, Unit Price will be taken from the Plate Inventory instead of the Materials editor. However, if an inventory plate is in use that has a Unit Price of zero, the Unit Price from the Materials editor will be used instead.  

Labor rate

Costing settings page (Settings > click Costing)

Production Cost

Leave at zero if Labor cost per weight is specified. See Costing settings for details.

Labor cost per weight

Costing settings page (Settings > click Costing)

Production Cost

Leave at zero if Labor rate is specified. See Costing settings for details.

Machine cost

Costing settings page (Settings > click Costing)

Production Cost

Non-process specific cost of running the cutting machine. See Costing settings for details.   Sometimes this field is set to zero if these costs are included in the Operating cost per minute.

Plate loading cost

Costing settings page (Settings > click Costing)

Production Cost

Optional. You can include the loading/unloading cost of a single plate here and it will be added to nest-level production costs (and allocated part costs).   See Costing settings for details.

Rapid rate

Costing settings page (Settings > click Costing)  

Production Time

Required for accurate costing data.   Consult your machine table manufacturer specifications to find out your

- 588 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Setting

Location in ProNest

Used to compute...

Tips machine's rapid traverse speed.   Often there is a discrepancy between the table manufacturer's specification and the actual real-world rapid traverse speed of your machine, due to acceleration and deceleration differences from one machine to another. To get the most accurate value possible, you can use a stopwatch to measure the actual rapid rate of your machine.   See Costing settings for details.

Feedrate

Process Parameters spreadsheet (Settings > [process] > Process Parameters)   (Default value can also be assigned on the Process Parameters settings page.)  

Production Time

Required for accurate costing data. You typically won't need to edit feedrate values. See How is production time calculated? for more information.   Note: For Hypertherm setups, scribe/mark feedrates specified in ProNest Process Parameters aren't used in output code. These scribe feedrates are used for costing purposes only.

Activation time

Costing spreadsheet Production -orTime Enter Full and Partial Raise/Lower Time on Costing settings page AND Pierce Time column in Process Parameters XLS. -orCosting settings page (Settings > click Costing)  

Use a spreadsheet if activation time varies by material thickness or class.   You can use a stopwatch to time different pierces at different material thicknesses to get a rough idea of how long an activation takes.   See How is production time calculated? for more information.

Cost per activation

Costing spreadsheet -orCosting settings page (Settings > click Costing)

Production Cost

Use a spreadsheet if cost per activation varies by material thickness or class. See Costing settings for details.   For Cost per Activation, you may know the life expectancy of your consumable set in terms of number of pierces. Dividing the total cost of the consumables by the total number of pierces you expect will give you a rough idea of the cost per activation.   For Hypertherm plasma setups, a special Phoenix Costing spreadsheet is available that has very accurate Cost per Activation information already built in. Contact Hypertherm for more information.

Operating cost

Costing spreadsheet -orCosting settings page (Settings > click Costing)  

Production Cost

Use a spreadsheet if cost per activation varies by material thickness or class. See Costing settings for details.

- 589 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

The accuracy of any cost estimate is only as good as the settings information that was used to calculate it. Please make sure that the data in your settings is correct prior to utilizing costing.

- 590 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

How is production time calculated? Production time is first calculated at the process level. The following formula is used to calculate production time for a given process:  

 Process

Production Time

Note:

Cut Length  = 

Feedrate

+

Rapid Length Rapid Rate

+

Number of Activations × Activation Time 60

When calculating the production time for a scribe process, the same formula is used except that "Scribe Length" will replace "Cut Length."

When a single process is used, the process production time will equal the total production time. When multiple processes are used, the individual production times for each process are calculated and then added together to produce the total production time for a part, nest, or job.

Parts vs. nests When calculating the production time for parts, the Cut Length doesn't include any additional or reduced cutting from bridging, chaining, common line cutting, edge pierce, crop lines, or skeleton cut-up. Also, the Rapid Length for a part includes rapid motions associated with that part only - traversals between the part home and the start point, as well as any motions between profiles on the part. It doesn't include rapid motions between the machine home and nested parts or rapid motions between nested parts. Note:

Allocated costing provides a way of including nest-level costs (such as plate loading, bridging, skeleton cuts and so on) in individual part costs. See What is allocated costing? to learn more.

Production time for nests does include additional or reduced Cut Length from bridging, chaining, common line cutting, edge pierce, crop lines, and skeleton cut-up. Rapid Length for nests includes all rapid motions on the nest.

Required inputs In order to get a valid production time in ProNest, the following three settings must be accurate: Feedrate This is the cut speed. Feedrate is specified in the Process Parameters page of ProNest settings. ProNest will use the currently active feedrate, based on whether you are using default values on the settings page or using a Process Parameters spreadsheet. If a Process Parameters spreadsheet is in use and contains multiple feedrates based on profile area or type, ProNest will use the applicable feedrates in the calculations.   Virtually all ProNest machine setups (PNCA) come with all the correct feedrates already built in - this means that you typically won't need to enter or change any feedrates for costing. Note:

When Cutting Techniques are in use, cut speed can be ramped up and down within a single profile. If Feedrate or Feedrate% commands are explicitly used in Cutting Techniques, those feedrate reductions are taken into account for ProNest costing. If ramping is controlled using special CFF Section commands, you may need an updated setup in order to see feedrate variations in costing figures. Contact Hypertherm for more information.

Rapid rate

- 591 -

ProNest 2019 Manual This setting describes the machine's maximum traverse speed while the cutting head is off. The rapid rate for a machine is specified on the Costing settings page. The rapid rate in your ProNest settings should match that of your real-world cutting machine. Note that on the Costing settings page, rapid rate can be entered as a single value in the Rapid rate setting or as two separate values in the X rapid rate and Y rapid rate settings. Activation time This setting describes the time it takes to activate a particular process, expressed in seconds. The activation time is the total time from the point where the traverse motion stops until the cutting motion begins, which can include pre-heats, pierces, raising/lowering, etc.   Activation time can be specified in one of three ways in ProNest:  l In a Costing spreadsheet. A column called "Activation Time" lets you specify different activation times based on material thickness. -or l If your machine is capable of doing partial and full raises of the cutting head, ProNest can differentiate between a full and partial raise when calculating activation time. To include full/partial raise times in activation time:  1. Enter a value for Full raise/lower time and Partial raise/lower time on the Collision Avoidance settings page. If you do not have the Collision Avoidance module, enter these values on the Costing settings page.  2. If you are using a Process Parameters spreadsheet, enter a Pierce Time for each material and thickness listed. When ProNest calculates activation time using this method, it will add the full or partial raise/lower time to the pierce time. Note that if you are using a Costing spreadsheet with an Activation Time column (and valid values), activation time will be taken from the spreadsheet and not using the method described above. -or l On the Costing page of your settings. This setting is called Default activation time. This figure should reflect the average activation time for a particular process. Default activation time is only used for costing calculations if you are not using a Costing spreadsheet and you do not have a Full or Partial raise/lower time and Pierce Time specified.   In summary, Activation Time follows this hierarchy:  1. ProNest will try to use the Activation Time from the Costing spreadsheet.  2. If no value can be found, use Raise/Lower Time from the Costing settings page + Pierce Time from Process Parameters XLS.  l For full raises, if the sum of the Full Raise/Lower Time + Pierce Time is greater than zero, it will be used as the Activation Time.  l For partial raises, if the sum of the Partial Raise/Lower Time + Pierce Time is greater than zero, it will be used as the Activation Time.  3. If the sum of Raise/Lower Time and Pierce Time is zero or can't be found, the Default Activation Time from the Costing settings page will be used.

- 592 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Part area methods used in costing In ProNest, a part's area can be accounted for in different ways. Consider the following part, which contains five cut-outs:

ProNest can calculate the area of this part in one of three ways:   True Area

Enclosed Area

Rectangular Area

The actual area of a part, exclud- The area contained within a ing cut-outs part's exterior profile, including cut-outs

The area of the bounding rectangle surrounding a part, including cutouts, leads, extensions, and loops.*

*Note: In allocated scrap area calculations, rectangular area includes cut-outs as well as a small margin surrounding the exterior profile, but does not encompass the part's exterior leads, lead extensions, or loops. See Allocated area for more information.

Parts nested inside of other parts In the case of enclosed area or rectangular area, when a part is nested inside of another part, ProNest subtracts the area of the smaller part when calculating the larger part's area.   Consider the following two parts, where a smaller triangular part is nested inside of a larger circular part:  

- 593 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

  When calculating the enclosed area of the larger part, ProNest excludes the enclosed area of the smaller part:  

Area used in ProNest costing  l True area is used in calculations for the Material Cost that is displayed in:  l ProNest user interface outside of reports and quoting  l Part Detail report  l Job Summary report  l Optimization report  l Rectangular area is used for costing calculations in the Rectangular Part Detail report.  l Enclosed area is used in allocated costing calculations found in the Allocated Part Detail report. See What is allocated costing? to learn more.

Area used in quoting You can choose which area method to use in quotes in the Quoting preferences page. Note:

Quoting preferences controls how costing figures for parts (items) are calculated in quotes. They do not effect area calculations for secondary operations costs (true area is always used for operations).

- 594 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Viewing final costs The ultimate goal of ProNest costing is to provide final costs for parts, nests, materials, and jobs that are as close as possible to your realworld costs.

Available cost figures The following are available final cost figures for parts, nests, jobs, and inventory plates:

Part costs  l Production cost  l Material cost  l Scrap cost (allocated costing only)  l Total cost

Note:

Part costs normally do not take nesting into consideration. The following are typically not included in individual part costs:  l Plate Loading Cost (from Costing settings)  l Additional cutting if parts are bridged or chained  l Additional cutting from crop lines or skeleton cut-up  l Reduced cutting if parts are common line cut  l Rapid motions between the machine home and nested parts  l Rapid motions between nested parts  l Additional cutting from edge pierces  l If one copy of a nested part is edited in Advanced Edit, but the part list is not updated with the changes, the changes will not be shown in costing figures for that part. An exception to this rule is allocated part costs (in the Allocated Part Detail report), which do account for nesting-related costs. Allocated costs also include a separate Scrap Cost field. See What is allocated costing? for details.

Nest costs  l Production cost  l Material cost of parts  l Scrap value  l Total cost

Note:

Nest-level costs take into account individual part costs and additional operations done on the nest. The following are included in nest costs:  l Plate Loading Cost (from Costing settings)  l Additional cutting if parts are bridged or chained  l Additional cutting from crop lines or skeleton cut-up  l Reduced cutting if parts are common line cut  l Rapid motions between the machine home and nested parts  l Rapid motions between nested parts  l Additional cutting from edge pierces

Job-level costs - 595 -

ProNest 2019 Manual  l Total production time  l Production cost  l Material cost of parts  l Scrap value

Inventory plate costs  l Material cost

Where are these costing figures found in ProNest? You can find these costing figures in several different areas in ProNest.

View costs in the ProNest user interface In the ProNest user interface you can easily find part and nest costs.   To view costs for an individual part:  l In the Edit Part List window, select an added part in the part list, then in the Properties section, click the Utilization and Costing tab.

- 596 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

  To view costs for the current nest:  1. From the main ProNest window, navigate to the nest that you want to view costs for.  2. In the status bar (at the bottom), click Nest: n of n.

- 597 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Viewing costs in reports With ProNest reports (Home tab > Reports  

), you can generate the most detailed costing information.

Excerpt of the Part Detail report, which shows final costs for individual parts   Parts Standard reports that show individual part costs:

- 598 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Part Detail Rectangular Part Detail Allocated Part Detail   Nests Standard report showing nest-level costs: Job Summary   Job totals Standard reports that show job-level costs: Job Summary Optimization   Inventory plates Standard report showing plate costs: Plate Inventory Detail

Quotes Quotes use all of the baseline ProNest costs described above. Secondary operations (such as grinding and bending), handling and shipping, quantity discounts, and various markups can be added using quoting. Refer to About quoting for more information.

- 599 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

What is allocated costing? Allocated costing is a way of distributing the cost of cutting one or more nests proportionally across the individual parts on those nests. These costs account for such things as scrap, additional cutting (as with skeleton cut-up lines, crop lines, chaining, or bridging), lessened cutting (as with common line cutting), additional traverse motions (as with collision avoidance), and plate loading costs. Note: Allocated costing is an alternative method of costing used to calculate figures found in the Allocated Part Detail report. All other costing data found throughout ProNest is calculated using the traditional method (non-allocated). For more information on the traditional costing method, see How are costs calculated? When an allocated cost is computed for a given part, ProNest takes the cost of all of the nests that the part appears on and assigns that cost proportionally to the part.   Points to consider with allocated costing:  l Allocated values for an individual part are based on all nests on which that part appears.  l Area is calculated differently for allocated values than it is throughout the rest of ProNest. Refer to Allocated area for more details.  l This method takes into account all additional costs of processing a nest (scrap costs; cutting of skeleton cut-up lines, crop lines, bridges, chains, common lines [CLC], collision avoidance traversals, etc.) and assigns them proportionally to nested parts.  l When calculating allocated values, ProNest automatically subtracts parts nested within other parts and accounts for number of times a nest is cut and number of torches. Important: When using allocated costing for estimating purposes, keep in mind that changes to the number of parts nested, types of parts nested, orientation of parts, and number of nests created will affect allocated part costs.

- 600 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Allocated area There are a few key differences in the way that a part's area is computed with respect to allocated costing. Before describing these differences, let's take a look at some of the different ways that part area is calculated in ProNest.

Area calculations in ProNest Consider the following part, which contains five cut-outs:

ProNest can calculate the area of this part in one of three ways:   True Area

Enclosed Area

Rectangular Area

The actual area of a part, exclud- The area contained within a ing cut-outs part's exterior profile, including cut-outs

The area of the bounding rectangle surrounding a part.   This includes cut-outs as well as the separation area surrounding the exterior profile.   Note that for allocated costing calculations, the bounding rectangle does not encompass the part's exterior leads and lead extensions.   In other areas of ProNest, Rectangular Area does include a part's leads and extensions.

- 601 -

ProNest 2019 Manual   Parts nested inside of other parts In the case of enclosed area or rectangular area, when a part is nested inside of another part, ProNest subtracts the area of the smaller part when calculating the larger part's area.   Consider the following two parts, where a smaller triangular part is nested inside of a larger circular part:  

  When calculating the enclosed area of the larger part, ProNest excludes the enclosed area of the smaller part:  

What type of area is used when calculating allocated values? In the Allocated Part Detail report, which contains all allocated costing data, enclosed area and rectangular area are used for calculations.

Allocated scrap area When calculating allocated area for a part, ProNest uses enclosed area to determine the area of the individual part itself. The other part of this equation involves assigning the area of leftover plate, or scrap area, proportionally to the part. This ensures that the material cost of the scrap created by a nest is included in selected part-level cost figures.   Consider the following nest:  

  The following image shows the total scrap area of this nest (in white):  

- 602 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Scrap area is the area of the plate that is left over after parts are cut. Note that scrap area does not include cut-outs within nested parts. Note: If a plate has a crop line applied, the area of the remnant (the usable portion of plate that is cropped off) is not considered part of the scrap area. When allocated area figures are calculated, the scrap area of a nest is apportioned to all individual parts on that nest. The scrap area apportioned to an individual part is that part's allocated scrap area.

How is allocated scrap area calculated? Some parts account for more or less scrap than others, based on their shape. To adjust for this, ProNest uses a shape-based method of allocating a nest's scrap area to individual parts on that nest. First, ProNest subtracts a part's enclosed area from its rectangular area, giving us its residual area.    

Rectangular Area

 

–

Enclosed Area

=

Residual Area

The residual areas of different parts on the same nest are then compared. Parts with a larger residual area will be assigned a greater portion of the total scrap area than parts with a smaller residual area.   An individual part's allocated scrap area is then calculated as follows:   Allocated Scrap Area

=  Scrap area of nest × (Residual area of part ÷ Residual area of all parts)

  Note that the allocated scrap area of a part is calculated from all nests in the job that the part appears on.   Consider the following two parts:  

- 603 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Circle Radius = 2.821 in. Part separation = 0.50 in. Enclosed area = 25.0 in. 2

Square Length of side = 5.0 in. Part separation = 0.50 in. Enclosed area = 25.0 in. 2

Rectangular area = 37.7 in. 2

Rectangular area = 30.25 in. 2  

  The residual area of these individual parts would be:  

Circle Residual area = 37.7 - 25.0 = 12.70 in.2

Square Residual area = 30.25 - 25.0 = 5.25 in.2

  Though parts have the same enclosed area, Square has a smaller residual area than Circle.   Let's assume that we nest 10 copies of Square and 10 copies of Circle on a 64 in. × 32 in. plate.  

- 604 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

  Total plate area = 64 in. × 32 in. = 2,048 in. 2 Plate area used by parts = 25 in. 2 × 20 parts = 500 in. 2 To get the scrap area of the nest, the total enclosed part area is subtracted from the total plate area:   Total scrap area of nest = 2,048 in. 2 - 500 in. 2 = 1,548 in.2  

After scrap area (1,548 in. 2) is calculated for the nest, ProNest adds up all of the residual areas for all parts on the nest:   Square: 5.25 in. 2 × 10 parts = 52.5 in. 2 Circle: 12.7 in. 2 × 10 parts = 127.0 in. 2   Total residual area of all 20 parts = 52.5 + 127.0 = 179.5 in.2 Once we have total scrap area of the nest , total residual area of all parts on the nest, and an individual part's residual area, we can plug these values into the following formula to get the allocated scrap area of the part:   Allocated scrap area = Scrap area of nest × (Residual area of part ÷ Residual area of all parts)

- 605 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Results:   Allocated scrap area of Square = 1,548 × (5.25 ÷ 179.5) = 45.28 in.2 Allocated scrap area of Circle = 1,548 x (12.70 ÷ 179.5) = 109.52 in.2 Although these two parts have the same enclosed area, the amount of scrap allocated to them differs substantially, due to their differing residual areas. In this scenario, Circle is allocated a much greater portion of the total scrap area of the nest because of its shape.   Note that the sum of all allocated scrap areas for all parts on the nest will always be equal to the total scrap area of that nest.   (45.28 in. 2 × 10) + (109.52 in. 2 × 10) = 1,548 in. 2 

Putting it all together Once the allocated scrap area of the part has been determined, it is added to the part's enclosed area, which gives us the allocated area for the part.   Allocated Area

=  Enclosed Area + Allocated Scrap Area

    In the Allocated Part Detail report, Area reflects the part's allocated area; while Weight is calculated using allocated area.  

  Scrap Cost is calculated using allocated scrap area, and Material Cost is calculated using allocated area.

- 606 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Allocated costing formulas The figures on this page pertain to the fields found in the Allocated Part Detail report only. Keep in mind that allocated figures for an individual part represent a portion of the total cost of processing the nests on which that part appears.   Allocated part figures

Production Time Allocated production time apportions the time to process one or more nests proportionally to the individual part. This accounts for time spent cutting interior/exterior profiles, skeleton lines, crops, bridges, chains, and common lines (CLC); rapid traversal time between parts, including any collision avoidance motions; and activation times.   Production Time

=  Production time for all nests on which the part appears × (Production time for a single copy of the part ÷ Production time for all parts on those nests)

  To learn more about how production time is calculated by ProNest, see "How is production time calculated?" on page 591  

Cut Length ProNest totals the length of all profiles to be cut for all nests that contain the part, accounting for any additional or reduced cutting due to skeleton cuts, crop lines, bridges, chains, and common lines (CLC). Total cut length is then allocated to the individual part.  

Pierces ProNest totals all pierces for all nests that contain the part, accounting for any additional pierces from skeleton cuts and crop lines, and reduced number of pierces due to bridges, chains, or CLC. Total pierces are then allocated to the individual part.  

Area This is the allocated part area. To calculate this, ProNest adds the part's enclosed area and allocated scrap area. For a more information on either enclosed area or allocated scrap area, see "Allocated area" on page 601.   Area

=  Enclosed Area + Allocated Scrap Area

 

Weight This is the allocated weight and is calculated using a material's density and thickness, which are assigned in the Material Database. Area refers to allocated part area (listed above).   Weight

= 

Density × Area × Thickness

 

Production Cost  Allocated production cost apportions the cost to process one or more nests proportionally to the individual part. This is based on production time, process cost, and machine cost. Production cost accounts for: rapid traversals between parts, including collision avoidance motions; all cutting; additional or reduced pierces; activation costs; and plate loading costs. - 607 -

ProNest 2019 Manual   Production Cost

=  Production cost for all nests on which the part appears × (Production cost for a single copy of the part ÷ Production cost for all parts on those nests)

  To learn more about how production cost is calculated in ProNest, see "How are costs calculated?" on page 584  

Scrap Cost This is reflects a portion of the total cost of the nest scrap, and is based on the part's allocated scrap area. Unit price, density, and thickness come from the Material Database.*   Scrap Cost

=  Unit Price × Density × Allocated Scrap Area × Thickness

*Note: If a nest is using an inventory plate, the unit price will be taken from the Plate Inventory Database, and not the Material Database. To learn more about how allocated scrap area is calculated, see "Allocated area" on page 601.  

Material Cost This is the material cost of the enclosed area of the part. Unit price, density, and thickness come from the Material Database.*   Material Cost

=  Unit Price × Density × Enclosed Area × Thickness

*Note: If a nest is using an inventory plate, the unit price will be taken from the Plate Inventory Database, and not the Material Database. To learn more about enclosed area , see "Allocated area" on page 601.  

Total Cost The sum of the allocated material cost, the allocated scrap cost, and the allocated production cost.   Total Cost

=  Production Cost + Material Cost + Scrap Cost

 

How are utilization figures calculated? Four utilization percentages (true, crop, rectangular, and plate used) reflect the ratio of part surface area to total plate surface area. Additional utilization figures detail plate usage; as well as area and weight for individual parts.   Utilization percentages

- 608 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

True utilization This is the ratio of the true area of all nested parts relative to the total plate area. Note that if a part has an interior profile, the surface area of the cut-out will not be considered a portion of that part.   Example:  

 

Figure 1 The nest shown in Figure 1 has a true utilization of 6.58%. For the purposes of this demonstration, the true area of the part is light blue, the plate area is outlined in red.  

Crop utilization If a nest has been cropped, ProNest will calculate the crop utilization as the ratio of the true area of all nested parts relative to the plate area up to the crop line. The section of plate that has been cropped off will not be included in the calculated plate area. If your nest does not contain any cropped nests, this value will be identical to the true utilization percentage.   Example:  

Figure 2

- 609 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

The nest shown in Figure 2 has been cropped. The true area of the part appears light blue, the plate area used for this calculation is outlined in red. The crop utilization for the nest in this job is 48%.  

Plate used utilization  This percentage can be useful for determining how tightly parts are nested. To generate this value, ProNest draws a bounding rectangle around all parts on the nest (including leads), with one corner of the rectangle at the nesting home ( ). The area of this rectangle is the plate used.   The true area of all nested parts is then divided by the plate used area to get the plate used utilization percentage:   Plate used utilization % = (True area of all nested parts ÷ Plate used area) × 100   Example:  

Figure 3   The nest in Figure 3 has a plate used utilization of 30%. The part area is light blue, the plate used area is outlined in red.    

Figure 4

- 610 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

  The nest in Figure 4 has a plate used utilization of 20%. Note that this percentage is lower than the nest in Figure 3 because the parts are more loosely spaced.    

Rectangular utilization  ProNest uses the minimum rectangular space that a part occupies (including part leads and lead extensions) when calculating part area. Rectangular utilization is the ratio of the rectangular area of all parts in a job relative to total plate area.   Example:  

Figure 5   The nest in Figure 5 has a rectangular utilization of 11.1%. The rectangular area of the part is light blue in color, the plate area is outlined in red.     Additional nest utilization figures

Length used This refers to the distance along the X-axis between the nesting home and the furthest nested part.   Example:  

- 611 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Figure 6   The length used for this nest is indicated by the horizontal blue line.  

Width used This refers to the distance along the Y-axis between the nesting home and the furthest nested part.   Example:  

Figure 7   The width used for this nest is indicated by the vertical blue line.   Part utilization figures

True area The 2-D surface area of the part. If a part has an interior profile, the surface area of the cut-out will not be considered a portion of that part.  

- 612 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Example:  

 

True weight The mass of the part. This is calculated using density (from Material Database), true area, and material thickness.  

Rectangular area The minimum rectangular space that a part occupies (including cut-outs, part leads, and lead extensions)   Example:  

 

Rectangular weight The mass of the part, including material within the minimum rectangular space. This is calculated using the density (from Material Database), rectangular area, and material thickness.  

- 613 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Where are utilization figures found? You can find utilization figures in four areas in ProNest: the Edit Part List window, the main window, the File tab, and throughout various ProNest reports.  

Nest utilization figures These include true, crop, rectangular, and plate used percentages, as well as length and width used.

View utilization figures for the current nest  l On the status bar of the main window, click Nest: n of n. Utilization figures for nests can also be found in the following reports: Nest Plot Single Head Nest Detail Single Head Nest Sequence Multi-Head Nest Detail Optimization Nest Zoom View  

Job utilization figures These are average utilization percentages for all of the nests in your job.

View utilization percentages for your job  l On the File tab, click Info. Utilization figures for jobs can also be found in the following report: Job Summary  

Utilization for individual parts Utilization figures for an individual part include true area, true weight, rectangular area, and rectangular weight.

View utilization figures for an individual part  l In the Edit Part List window, select an added part in the part list, then in the Properties section, click the Utilization and Costing tab.

- 614 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

  Utilization figures for individual parts can also be found in the following reports: Part Detail (shows true area and true weight) Rectangular Part Detail (shows rectangular area and rectangular weight)

- 615 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

19. QUOTING About quoting Quoting enables you to easily create itemized quotes for any ProNest job. Using baseline material and production costs that are calculated by ProNest, quotes can account for secondary operations, markups, and discounts to provide itemized (by part) and total prices for a job.   For help getting started with quoting, see:  l Setting up quoting  l Main Quote page  l Creating a new quote  l Working with line items  l Add secondary operations to a line item  l Markups  l Discounts  l Printing quotes

- 616 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Setting up quoting In ProNest, there are several areas that you should confirm are set up properly before you begin generating quotes.

Costing Costing provides basis for the unit cost dollar amounts used in quoting. This involves calculating accurate Material Cost and Production Cost values for a line item.   Before utilizing quoting, it is a good idea to set up ProNest costing as accurately as possible. The goal of costing should be to get the production times and material and production costs as close as possible to your real world figures.   See How are costs calculated? and Setting up costing in ProNest to get started.

Quote preferences

How should area be calculated? You can use True Area, Enclosed Area, or Rectangular Area when computing costing figures used in quoting. You can also choose to account for scrap in quoting costs. See the Costing section of the Quoting preferences page for more information.

How should quote numbers be generated? You can set a naming convention for quote numbers on the Naming preferences page. You can also set whether to use the quote number as the job (.nif) name.

Organization info and logo Add your organization's information and logo to the header of your quotes:  1. Open Quote preferences (File tab > Preferences > click Quoting).  2. In the Company Information section, enter your company's name, address, etc.  3. In the Logo area, click Browse.  4. Select an image file to use in the header.

- 617 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

This information will be used by default whenever a new quote it created. You can always change this information for any quote on the File > Quote > Prepared By page.

Customers If you want to use ProNest customers from the Customers editor (Data tab > Customers) for quoting, you will need to make sure that your customers are entered in the database. Benefits of using the Customers editor include:  l Less data entry - Once a customer is set up in the Customers editor, you won't have to type in all of their information each time you prepare a quote for them.  l Set markup rates and tax rates by customer - You can set Material Markup, Production Markup, and Tax Rates in the Customers editor. When that customer is selected for a quote, these rates will automatically be applied to the quote.

Selecting a quote report template you'd like to use The layout, appearance, and information contained in a quote is controlled using reports. See Quote reports to learn more.

- 618 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Creating a new quote In ProNest, a quote corresponds to a single job (.nif). Follow the instructions below to create a quote for a job. When a job is saved, the quote is saved in that job.

Start a new quote  1. Start a new job or open an existing job that you want to create the quote for.  2. Add the required parts to the part list. If you are using inventory plates to compute material costs or want to include allocated scrap costs for parts, you must nest all of the parts before generating a quote.  3. On the File tab, click Quote.

-orOn the Home tab, click Quote. The main Quote page will open. Note that all parts in your job are already listed as line items.  4. In the Produce section at the top, click the link next to Report. The Quote report page will open, showing several available quote reports or templates to choose from.  5. Click the report that you want to use for the quote.  6. Click Back.  7. On the main Quote page, click Generate quote number. The number is created based on the naming convention set in Naming preferences.  8. Click the link next to Prepared for.  9. Use the Customer page to enter details about the customer you're preparing the quote for. In the Name box, you can type any name that you want or you can click the down arrow to select a customer from the ProNest Customers editor. Note that in the Quote preview on the right, the customer that you entered is shown in the upper left of the quote.

- 619 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

As you enter information for a quote, your changes will be shown in real-time in the Quote preview.  10. Click Back.  11. Click the link next to Prepared by.  12. In the Author section at the top, enter your name and contact information. If you organization's info and logo have been added in Quoting preferences, the rest of the information on this page should already be filled out. You can always change your organization's information for a particular quote from this page. The author information is not found in preferences because it often changes from one quote to another, depending on who is preparing the estimate.  13. Click Back.  14. On the main Quote page, next to Properties, click the Dates, shipping, material costs... link.  15. On this page you can add an expiration date to the quote, add shipping and tax, change the baseline Material Unit Cost used in costing calculations in this quote, and add notes and custom fields. Make any needed changes in this area.  16. Click Back.  17. Save your ProNest job (File tab > Save). Your quote will be saved with the job. At this point, you'll have a basic quote ready, with no secondary operations or discounts. Unless you picked a customer from the Customers database with pre-existing markups, you won't have any markup rates entered.   To read more about entering these things in a quote, see:  l Markups  l Discounts  l Working with line items  l Add secondary operations to a line item

- 620 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Discounts General discounts represent a price reduction for an entire quote. Line items can also have quantity discounts, which are used for informational purposes only in quoting (they aren't used in final calculations).

General discounts for quotes A general discount rate can be applied to an entire quote. With a general discounts, the total price of all line items and their secondary operations in the quote will be reduced by the percentage that is entered.   For display purposes, you can either show the discount rate and price reduction at the bottom of the quote in the subtotal area or simply apply the price reduction to all unit prices listed, without explicitly showing the discount rate.

Apply a general discount to a quote  1. Open the Quote page (File tab > Quote).  2. Click the Properties link.  3. In the Discount box, enter a discount percentage.  4. Select or clear the Show Separately box.  l When selected, Discount will be displayed in a separate line at the bottom of the quote, below the subtotal. Sub total:

$100.00

Discount (2%):

($2.00)

 l When cleared, Discount will not be displayed separately in the quote, even though it is still being used in final price calculations. The displayed unit price of each line item will be shown at the discounted rate. Note:

When tax is applied to a quote with a discount, the tax rate is applied to the discounted subtotal.

Negative markups Entering a negative rate for markups will make them behave as discounts. For example, entering a Production Markup of -10% for a line item is equivalent to taking 10% off the cost of that line item.   When negative markups are used, keep in mind that any general discounts for a quote will be taken off the lower unit price (which has already been discounted by the negative markup).

Quantity discounts for line items An item (part) can have it's own quantity discount. Quantity discounts show the hypothetical cost per unit for a line item if it was ordered at a larger quantity. Unlike general discounts, quantity discounts appear in quotes for informational purposes only; they are not used in unit price or extended price calculations.   If a line item has a starting unit price of $3.00, the quantity discount chart may look like this:   Quantity

Discount

Unit Price

Extended Price

10

10%

$2.70

$27.00

100

12%

$2.64

$264.00

- 621 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

  In the actual quote, the line item will show the Quantity discount amounts below it:   Item

Name

Quantity

1

P135

1

Unit Price

Extended Price

$3.000

$3.00

Quantity discount: 10

$2.70

$27.00

100

$2.64

$264.00

Sub total:

$3.00

  Note that the Extended Price of the quantity discount items isn't included in the subtotal.

Apply quantity discounts for a line item  1. Open the Line Item page (File tab > Quote, double-click a line item).  2. In the Quantity Discounts section, click the Add button.  3. Enter a Quantity and Discount rate.  l Quantity - the quantity at which the item would be charged at the lower unit price  l Discount - the rate that would be applied to the line item's unit price.

Remove quantity discounts for a line item  1. Open the Line Item page (File tab > Quote, double-click a line item).  2. In the Quantity Discounts section, select the discount you want to delete.  3. Click the Remove button.

- 622 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Markups In ProNest quoting, markups represent the difference between the cost of an item or service and the price at which it is sold. The sum of all markups is the amount of profit for a quote, item, or secondary operation.

In this article... Material markups Production markups How are markups assigned? Negative markups Apply default markup rates for a customer Change the markup of a line item Change the production markup of a specific secondary operation

Markups can be specified for Material or Production costs:

Material markups In ProNest quotes, the material costs of line items are calculated based on:  l Material unit cost (on Quote > Properties page).  l Density (from Materials editor)  l Part area (using the method specified in Quoting preferences). Once accurate material costs are being calculated by ProNest, you can easily enter a markup rate to apply to those costs. Material markup rate should reflect the amount of profit you want to make on materials.   Example: If the material cost of a part is $10 and the material markup is set to 10%, the material price of the line item would be $11 [$10 + (10 × 0.10)]. The Unit Price shown in the quote for that part would be calculated using the $11 material price.

Production markups Production costs typically involve cutting, loading/unloading plate, consumable wear, and so on. Like material costs, production costs for parts are also calculated based on ProNest costing settings. Once the production costs are accurate enough, you can add a production markups. This gives you a way to specify the profit you want to make for production-related work.   Example: If the production cost of a part is $10 and the production markup is set to 10%, the production price of the line item would be $11 [$10 + (10 × 0.10)]. The Unit Price shown in the quote for that part would be calculated using the $11 production price.

How are markups assigned? Material markups can be assigned to a customer or line item. Production markups can be assigned to a customer, line item, or secondary operation. Markups follow a hierarchy:  

- 623 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 l

Customer  l

Line Item  l Secondary Operation  l Secondary Operation

 l

Line Item  l Secondary Operation  l Secondary Operation

  By default, all line items inherit the markup rate from their parent customer. All secondary operations inherit the markup rate from their parent line item. For example, if a customer has a production markup of 3%, when you're creating a quote for that customer, all items and secondary processes will also have a 3% production markup by default.   However, you can override the markup value for any customer, item, or secondary process (as described below). Note:

Typically, markups are not seen in the finalized customer-facing quotes.

Negative markups Entering a negative rate for markups will make them behave as discounts. For example, entering a production markup of -10% for a line item is equivalent to taking 10% off the price of that line item.   When negative markups are used, keep in mind that any general discounts for a quote will be taken off the lower unit price (which has already been discounted by the negative markup).

Apply default markup rates for a customer For a customer in the Customers editor:  1. Open the Customers editor (Data tab > Customers

).

 2. Double-click the customer record that you want to edit.  3. Click the Shipping tab.  4. Enter a Production markup or Material markup value.  5. Click OK. By default when a customer from the Customers list is assigned to a quote, these markup rates will be applied to the quote, including all items and secondary processes.   For customers not in the Customers editor:  1. Open the Quote page (File tab > Quote).  2. Click the Prepared for link.  3. In the Material markup or Production markup boxes, enter a markup percentage. These rates will become the defaults for all line items and secondary processes in the quote. Note that you can always override these default markup values, if needed.

Change the markup of a line item  1. Open the Quote page (File tab > Quote).  2. In the Line items section, double-click the item that you want to edit.

- 624 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 3. In the Material markup or Production markup box, enter a markup percentage.

The value that you enter will appear in highlighted in yellow, indicating that it is overriding the default value. Tip:

You can click

and select Clear override to revert to the default value.

Change the production markup of a secondary operation Secondary operations can have a production markup (but not a material markup). When a secondary process is added to a line item, it will inherit the production markup from that line item by default.   To override the inherited production markup of a secondary operation:  1. Open the Line Item page (File tab > Quote > double-click the line item containing the operation).  2. Double-click the secondary operation that you want to edit.  3. In the Production markup box, enter a markup percentage.

The value that you enter will appear in highlighted in yellow, indicating that it is overriding the default value. Tip:

Note:

You can click

and select Clear override to revert to the default value.

Secondary operations in the library do not have their own markup values.

- 625 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Quote customers Customer information

Name You can enter any text here or select a customer from the Customers editor

Note:

.

Using a customer from the Customers editor will automatically bring in that customer's default information into the quote, including contact info, address, markup values, and tax rate.

Material markup Material markup rate to apply to the entire quote. This value will be inherited by all line items in the quote by default. See Markups for more information.   If the quote is assigned to a customer in the Customer editor, this will already match the value for that customer.

Production markup Production markup rate to apply to the entire quote. This value will be inherited by all line items and secondary operations in the quote by default. See Markups for more information.   If the quote is assigned to a customer in the Customer editor, this will already match the value for that customer.

Tax rate Enter a tax percentage to apply to the quote, if desired. Tax rate will be applied to the Extended Price subtotal in the quote, after all secondary operations, markups and discounts have been factored in.   If the quote is assigned to a customer in the Customers editor, this will already match the value for that customer.

Address

Shipping/Billing Select which address you want to use in the header area of the quote. This is used primarily for customers in the Customers editor, who may have both a shipping and a billing address.

- 626 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Contact

Name The primary contact person for the customer.

Email Email address for the customer. The email address that you enter here will be used by default if you send the quote as an email.

Phone Telephone number for the customer that will appear in the quote.

Fax Fax number for the customer that will appear in the quote. How do I get here in ProNest?  n File tab > click Quote > click Prepared for link

- 627 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Entering your organization's information Each time a new quote is started, the Prepared By information comes from your Quoting preferences by default. The exception to this is author information, which is not found in preferences because it often changes from one quote to another, depending on who is preparing the estimate. You can always change Prepared By information for any quote.   To enter or change Prepared By information in a quote:  1. Open the main Quote page (File tab > Quote).  2. Click the link next to Prepared by.  3. Enter your name, company, and contact information. This information will be shown in the upper right area of the quote.

Note that in the standard quote reports, the Email and Phone from the Author section is used. The Phone, Email, and URL fields from the Company Information section do not normally appear in quotes, unless they've been added using custom quote reports.  4. If a logo hasn't been specified yet in preferences, you can click the Browse button and select an image file to add your organization's logo. Allowable image file formats:  l .bmp  l .png  l .gif  l .jpg  l .jpeg  5. Click Back

to return to the main Quote page.

How do I get here in ProNest?  n File tab > click Quote > click the Prepared by link

- 628 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Main Quote page Status Each quote can have a status associated with it. See Quote status to learn more.   Drafting Pending Approval Accepted Rejected

Produce

Print/Create PDF/Send in Email Use this button to print, save to PDF, or send the current quote via email. See Printing quotes to learn more.

Report The currently selected quote report will be shown here. The quote report is used as a basis for creating the quote. It defines the layout, appearance, and information contained in the quote. You can switch back and forth between quote reports using this link. This can be useful if you want to print different versions of the same quote. See Quote reports for more details. Note:

When a job is saved, ProNest will remember which quote report that job is using. The next time the job is opened, the quote report that was in use will be the current report (and not the default report).   If the quote report used by a job was deleted since the job was last saved, when the job is re-opened, the default report will be used.

Quote Information

Quote number You can enter any text here or generate a quote number (see below).

Generate quote number Click this link to generate a quote number, according to the naming convention set up in your Naming preferences.

Prepared for This is the customer that you are preparing the quote for. See Quote customers for more information.

Prepared by Enter your organization's information here. By default, most of this information comes from your Quoting preferences. See Entering your organization's information for more details.

Properties Set the expiration date, add shipping, override material unit costs, and enter notes and custom fields for your quote. See Quote properties to learn more.

Secondary Operations Library - 629 -

ProNest 2019 Manual The secondary operations library should be used for common secondary operations that will be reused on different line items. See Secondary operations library for more information.

Line Items   All of the line items in the quote are listed here. See Working with line items for more information. How do I get here in ProNest?  n File tab > click Quote

- 630 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Quote properties Dates, shipping, and discount

Created The date the quote was created. By default, this is set to today's date, but you can set this to whatever you want.

Expiration If you want to add an expiration date to your quote, pick a date from the list. You can also use the Days control to set this automatically.

Days Enter the number of days after the Created date when the quote will expire. You can also use the Expiration control to set this automatically. A default number of days can be entered in Quoting preferences.

Discount General discount rate to apply to the entire quote. See Discounts for more information.

Show separately When selected, Discount will be displayed in a separate line at the bottom of the quote, below the subtotal.   Sub total: Discount (2%):

$100.00 ($2.00)

  When cleared, Discount will not be displayed separately in the quote, even though it is still being used in final price calculations. The displayed unit price of each line item will be shown at the discounted rate.

Shipping Use this option to apply shipping costs to an entire quote. Shipping is displayed at the bottom of a quote, below the subtotal.   You can enter a flat cost for shipping in the first box:

  In the second box, you can enter a by weight shipping rate:

With by weight shipping, true area is used to calculate part weight. ProNest will add the weights of all line items that are linked to the part list. The total weight will then be multiplied by this rate. Tip: Make sure that all line items have a valid weight before using this option. For parts, this means assigning a material type and thickness with a valid Density in the Materials editor.

- 631 -

ProNest 2019 Manual The final shipping cost shown in the quote is the sum of the flat cost and the cost by weight.

Tax rate Enter a tax percentage to apply to the quote, if desired.   If the quote is assigned to a customer in the Customer editor, this will already match the value for that customer.

Tax shipping When selected, shipping costs will be included in the subtotal that is taxed. When cleared, shipping costs will not be taxed.   Example:   Let's say that the subtotal of all items in a job is $500, shipping costs are $20, and the tax rate is 8%.   When Tax shipping is selected, the total would be ($500 + $25) × 1.08 = $567   When Tax shipping is cleared, the total would be ($500 × 1.08) + $25 = $565

Material unit costs The material unit cost numbers shown here are used to calculate a line item's Material Cost. By default, material unit cost comes from the material's Unit Price in the Materials editor costs from the quote altogether.

. In this section, you can override the default unit cost for any material or exclude material

Include material costs When selected, material costs will be included in quotes.   When cleared, material costs will not be included in quote. A *MATERIAL COST NOT INCLUDED disclaimer will appear at the bottom of the quote. You may want to clear this check box if the customer is supplying the material for the job or it is an in-house job.   To override default material unit costs in a quote:  l In the right-hand column of the grid, enter a new unit cost (by weight) for any material. The new unit cost will be used as a basis for calculating material cost figures in the quote. When you edit a material unit cost, the value that you enter will appear in highlighted in yellow, indicating that it is overriding the default value.

You can click

Note:

to clear the override and revert to the default value.

Overriding a material unit cost will only affect material costs in that specific quote. If you want to permanently change the unit cost of a material, edit the Unit Price value for that material in the Materials editor (Data tab > Materials

).

Notes and other information

Notes Any notes you type here will appear in the quote above the line item list. If nothing is entered, the Notes section will not appear in the quote.

- 632 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Custom fields The other fields listed here provide a place to enter additional details in the quote. Custom fields will only be shown in the quote when there is a Value entered. By default, when a new quote is started, the fields listed here match your Quoting preferences.   To add a new custom field:  1. Click the Add button.  2. Type a caption and value in the newly created row.   To change the order in which fields appear in the quote:  1. Select a custom field to move.  2. Use the arrows to reorder the list.   To remove custom fields from the quote:  1. Select the custom field you want to remove.  2. Click the Remove button. How do I get here in ProNest?  n File tab > click Quote > click the Properties link

- 633 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Printing, saving, and sending quotes Printing a quote  1. Open the job (.nif) containing the quote you want to print.  2. Open the Quote page (File tab > Quote).

 3. In the upper left area, click the arrow on the Print/Create PDF/Send in Email button.  4. Select Print.  5. Select a printer and click OK.

Save quote as PDF  1. Open the job (.nif) containing the quote you want to export to PDF.  2. Open the Quote page (File tab > Quote).

 3. In the upper left area, click the arrow on the Print/Create PDF/Send in Email button.  4. Select Create PDF. Tip: You can set PDF options in the Quoting preferences.  5. Click OK then select a folder.  6. Click Save. Once created, the PDF file can be located by clicking the link on the main Quote page.

Send to email recipient (as PDF attachment) This will open your default email client and create a new email with the quote attached as a PDF. By default, the email is addressed to the email address of the customer (specified in the Prepared for section) and the Subject line is formatted as "Quote: [quote number]".  1. Open the job (.nif) containing the quote you want to send.  2. Open the Quote page (File tab > Quote).

 3. In the upper left area, click the arrow on the Print/Create PDF/Send in Email button.  4. Select Send in Email.

- 634 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Note:

When a quote with a status of Drafting is printed, saved as a PDF, or sent in an email, the status of the quote will be changed to Pending Approval.

- 635 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Quote status Each quote can have a status associated with it. Status helps you track the current state of the quote and prevent unwanted changes from other actions in ProNest.

View the status of a quote Status is displayed in the Quote page (File tab > Quote).   Drafting Pending Approval Accepted Rejected   Status is also displayed from the main screen (Home tab > Quote button).  

Quote is empty (not yet created)

Drafting

Pending Approval

Approved Rejected

  By default, when a new quote is started, the status is automatically set to Drafting.

Change the status of a quote  1. Open the job (.nif) containing the quote you want to edit.  2. Open the Quote page (File tab > Quote).

 3. In the upper right area, select a quote status from the list.   Status

Description

How are changes made?

Drafting

Use this status when you are setting up a quote or doing work in the associated ProNest job.

Any changes made to the ProNest job will also be made in the quote. For instance, if you add or remove parts, change quantities of parts, nest, or change settings or preferences, all of these changes will be carried over into the quote.  

Pending Approval

Indicates that the quote has Once a quote is set to Pending Approval, Accepted, or Rejected, it is not been sent out for approval. affected by any changes made outside the Quote editor. This means that changes made in the ProNest job (such as to the part list, nests, settings,

- 636 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Status

Accepted

Rejected

Description

How are changes made?

etc.) will no longer impact the quote.   Indicates that the quote has You can always make changes to the quote from inside the Quote editor been accepted. (File tab > Quote), regardless of the quote's status.   Indicates that the quote has If you need changes in the job to be carried over into the quote, you'd need been rejected. to set the status back to Drafting.  

  Note:

When a quote with a status of Drafting is printed, saved as a PDF, or sent in an email, the status of the quote will be changed to Pending Approval.

- 637 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Working with line items When you start a quote, each line item corresponds to a part in the part list. You can add secondary operations, markups, and quantity discounts to line items. You can also add custom line items that aren't linked to parts in the part list.

In this article... Add new line items Add new custom line items Edit existing line items Change the order in which line items appear in the quote Remove line items from a quote

Add new line items Add new line items from the part list:  1. Make sure the quote's status is set to Drafting.  2. Add parts to the part list in your job.  3. The added parts will automatically be added as line items to the quote.

Add new custom line items Custom line items can also be added to quotes. Custom line items are flexible items that aren't tied to any specific part in your job.  1. Open the Quote page (File tab > Quote).  2. Click the Add button.  3. Double-click the item and configure as needed. See Line Item properties for more information. Enter details for the custom item just as you would a standard line item. Note that you'll need to enter Production and Material Costs for the custom line item.

Edit existing line items  1. Open the Quote page (File tab > Quote).  2. Double-click a line item.  3. Configure the item as needed. See Line Item properties for more information.

Change the order in which line items appear in the quote  1. Open the Quote page (File tab > Quote).  2. Click a line item to select it.  3. Use the arrows to reorder the list. The order in which line items are listed in the main quote page will match the order used in the quote itself.

Remove line items from a quote

- 638 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Line items linked to parts in the job or custom line items can be deleted from a quote.  1. Open the Quote page (File tab > Quote).  2. Click a line item.  3. Click the Remove button.

Notes:

 l Line items linked to nested parts can't be removed.  l When a quote's status is set to Drafting, removing a line item that is linked to a part in the part list will also delete that part from the job.

- 639 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Line Item properties Name By default, this will match the part name. Changing this name will also change the name of the part in the part list (when Status is set to Drafting).   For custom line items, any name can be entered.  

Description When a description is entered, the description will appear in the quote instead of the name for a line item. This can be useful if you want to change the displayed name of a line item that is linked to the part list without changing the part name in ProNest.  

Quantity By default, this will match the part's quantity. Changing the quantity of a line item that is linked to a part in the part list will update the part's quantity in the job as well (when Status is set to Drafting).  

Material cost This should accurately reflect the cost of material needed to fabricate the part. This is calculated based on:  l Material unit cost (on Quote > Properties page).  l Density (from Materials editor)  l Part area (using the method specified in Quoting preferences). See How are costs calculated? for more information. Note:

By default, material unit costs in a quote match the Unit Price in the Materials editor. However, you can override the base material unit cost for any quote:  1. Open the Properties page for a quote (File tab > Quote > Dates, shipping, material costs, etc.).  2. Enter a new value for Material Unit Cost. Costs in that specific quote will be based on the override value instead of the default values taken from ProNest costing.

Production cost This should accurately reflect the cost of production-related work needed to fabricate the part. This is calculated automatically based on ProNest costing inputs. See How are costs calculated? for more information.

Material markup Material markup rate to apply to the line item. By default, this value is inherited from the Customer selected for the quote. See Markups for more information.

Production markup Production markup rate to apply to the line item. By default, this value is inherited from the Customer selected for the quote. See Markups for more information.

Secondary operations Any secondary operations assigned to the current line item will be listed here. Library

- 640 -

ProNest 2019 Manual = Indicates that the secondary operation is in the library and is using default values. = Indicates that the secondary operation is in the library, but its values differ from the default library values. Unit price The per-unit price of the secondary operation Extended price The per-unit price of the secondary operation multiplied by the item's quantity.

Quantity discounts Any item (part) can have a quantity discount. Use quantity discounts to show hypothetical decreased unit costs for an item if it were ordered at a larger quantity. Quantity The quantity at which the item would be charged at the lower unit price. Discount The discount rate that would be applied to the line item's unit price. Unit Price The adjusted unit price for the line item, taking into account the quantity discount rate. Extended Price The adjusted unit price × the number in the Quantity column.   See Discounts for more information.

Price In quoting, unit price represents the price at which an item will be sold. Price includes all material and production costs, secondary operations, and markups.

Unit price The per item (or per part) price. By default, this is calculated based on the unit cost of the line item (material cost + production cost) as well as any markups and secondary operations.   To override the calculated unit price:  l Simply type a new price in the box.

The value that you enter will appear in highlighted in yellow, indicating that it is overriding the calculated unit price.   To revert back to the calculated unit price:  l Click the

button and select Clear override.

Discounts When a discount is applied to a quote and Show Separately is selected, the unit price (at the bottom of the Line Item page) will show both the non-discounted price and the discounted price.  

- 641 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Unit price: $25.00  

$23.75 (5% discount)

  The discounted unit price is the figure that is used in the quote. If you override the amount in the Unit price box, the discounted amount will automatically be adjusted.

Extended price Unit price × item quantity. How do I get here in ProNest?  n File tab > click Quote > double-click a line item

- 642 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Quote reports The layout, appearance, and information contained in a quote is controlled using reports.

View available standard quote reports  1. Open the main Quote page (File tab > Quote).  2. In the Produce section at the top, click the link next to Report. The Quote Report page will open. ProNest contains three standard quoting reports: Internal Quote Shows itemized secondary operations for each line item. Quote - Portrait Portrait layout that doesn't show itemized secondary operations for each line item. Quote - Landscape Landscape layout that doesn't show itemized secondary operations for each line item.   Any of these reports can be used for a quote.

Change the quote report used by a quote  1. Open the main Quote page (File tab > Quote).  2. In the Produce section at the top, click the link next to Report.  3. Click a different report to select it.  4. Click the Back button. With the different quote report in use, you can edit or print the quote as needed. You can always switch back and forth between quote reports as described above to publish different versions of the same quote. This may be useful if you want to print a customer-facing version of a quote and a different internal-only version as well. Note:

When a job is saved, ProNest will remember which quote report that job is using. The next time that job is opened, the quote report that was in use will be the current report (and not the default report).   If the quote report used by a job was deleted since the job was last saved, when the job is re-opened, the default report will be used.

Set a default report to use for new quotes  1. Open the main Quote page (File tab > Quote).  2. In the Produce section at the top, click the link next to Report.  3. Click a report to select it.  4. Click the Make this my default report link at the top of the Quote report page.

Add custom quoting reports

- 643 -

ProNest 2019 Manual You can use the existing standard or custom reports as a take-off to create a new customized report.  1. Open the main Quote page (File tab > Quote).  2. In the Produce section at the top, click the link next to Report.  3. In the list of Available quote reports, click an existing standard or custom report to select it.  4. Click the Add button.  5. Enter a name for your report and click Make Copy. The quote report will be created. At this point, the contents of the report are identical to its parent report.  6. With the new custom report selected, click the Design button.  7. The FastReport designer will open, where your custom report can be edited. When you're finished, remember to save your changes.

- 644 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Add secondary operations to a line item Costs associated with secondary operations in part fabrication can be accounted for in quotes. This includes things that may occur after cutting - like bending, grinding, welding, and painting.   Secondary operations are applied to the line items in a quote.

Adding a secondary operation to a line item To add an existing secondary operation from the library:  1. Open the main Quote page (File tab > Quote).

 2. In the Line items list, double-click the item that you want to add a secondary operation to.  3. In the Secondary operations section, click the Add button.  4. From the list, select a library operation.  5. If you want to change the properties of the operation, double-click it and configure as needed. Note:

On the Line Item page (Quote > double-click a line item), secondary operations that are already in the library are indicated with a book icon ( different book icon (

). If a library operation is in use but its default values have been changed, this will be indicated with a ).

  To add a new secondary operation to a line item:  1. Open the main Quote page (File tab > Quote).

 2. In the Line items list, double-click the item that you want to add a secondary operation to.  3. In the Secondary operations section, click the Add button.  4. Select Add New Secondary Operation. The new operation will appear in the list.  5. Double-click the newly-created operation. The Secondary Operation page will appear.  6. Configure the operation as needed. See the Secondary Operation properties for a detailed explanation of each item.  7. Click the Back button

to return to the Line Item page.

Tip: You can add the newly-created operation to the library by clicking Add to Library.

Add a secondary operation in the library to all line items in the quote

- 645 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. Open the secondary operations library (File tab > Quote > click Secondary Operations Library).  2. Click the secondary operation that you want to apply.  3. On the Actions button, click Add to all line items.

- 646 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Remove a secondary operation from a line item Remove a secondary operation from a line item  1. Open the main Quote page (File tab > Quote).

 2. In the Line items list, double-click the line item.  3. In the Secondary operations section, click the operation that you want to remove.  4. Click the Remove button.

Remove a secondary operation in the library from all line items that are using it  1. Open the secondary operations library (File tab > Quote > click Secondary Operations Library).  2. Click the secondary operation that you want to remove.  3. On the Actions button, click Delete from all line items. All secondary operations that match the name of the selected library operation will be removed from all items in the quote.

- 647 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Secondary operations properties Secondary operations are set up or edited in the Secondary Operations page.

Edit a secondary operation To open this page for an item-specific secondary operation:  1. Open the Line Item page (File tab > Quote > double-click a line item).  2. Double-click the secondary operation that you want to edit.   To open this page for a library secondary operation:  1. Open the secondary operations library (File tab > Quote > click Secondary Operations Library).  2. Double-click the secondary operation that you want to edit.  

Properties Line Item For item-specific secondary operations, this is the line item to which the operation is assigned. This doesn't apply for library operations.

Name Enter a name for the secondary operation. It is recommended that you use a unique name, to avoid conflicts with other secondary operations in the library.

Production rate The total hourly rate for the secondary operation. This may include things like hourly labor cost per hour, overhead costs, etc.

Production markup By default, this value is inherited from the Production Markup for the item that it belongs to. You can enter an override value if the secondary markup rate should be different from its item's production markup.

Setup cost Flat costs associated with setting up the secondary operation can be entered here.   = Use monetary cost for calculations = Use time for calculations   When time (

) is selected, the Production rate (specified above) is multiplied by the Time entered to get the total setup cost.

Variable cost This would cover the cost of the actual secondary operation.   = Use monetary cost for calculations = Use time for calculations   - 648 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

When time ( ) is selected, the Production rate (specified above) is multiplied by the Time (per Quantity unit) to get the total variable cost.   Quantity unit You can use the following quantity units for calculating variable costs: Part The monetary cost or time will be applied on a per-item basis. Weight The monetary cost or time will be applied based on the weight of the part. Example Let's say a line item requires special handling. There is no setup cost, but handling is charged by weight. Assume that the Production Rate is set to zero for handling. Also assume a Production Markup of 10%.   Part weight: 10 lbs.   Setup cost: 0   Variable cost: Cost = $0.50 Quantity unit = Weight (lb.) Quantity = (set automatically by ProNest based on the material and geometry of the part)   Variable costs would be: 10 lbs. × $0.50/lb. = $5.00 variable cost   Units costs would be: $0.00 + $5.00 = $5.00 unit cost   Then the 10% production markup is taken into account to get the unit price: ($5.00 × 0.10) + $5.00 = $5.50 unit price   Area The monetary cost or time will be applied based on the area of the part. Example Let's say a part requires painting. Setting up painting takes 15 minutes total for a job and painting a single part takes 2 minutes to complete. Production Rate is set at $50/hr. Also assume a Production Markup of 10%.   Because secondary operations are assigned to a single line item, you can either average out the total painting setup costs across all line items or simply add a custom line item covering painting setup. For this example, let's average out the setup costs. Assume there are 10 line items requiring painting. The total painting setup cost of 15 minutes would be divided by 10 line items, giving a per item painting setup cost of 1.5 min.   Setup cost: Time = 1.5 min.   Variable cost: Time = 2 min. Quantity unit = Area ft. 2 - 649 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Quantity = (set automatically by ProNest based on the geometry of the part)   Setup costs would be: $50.00/hr. × 0.025 hrs = $1.25 setup cost   Variable costs would be: 2 min. × 2 ft. 2 = 4 min. (0.066 hrs.) 0.066 hrs. × $50/hr. = $3.33 variable cost   Units costs would be: $1.25 + $3.33 = $4.16 unit cost   Then the 10% production markup is taken into account to get the unit price: ($4.16 × 0.10) + 4.16 = $4.58 unit price   Custom unit If you need multiple units for the secondary operation, use can the Quantity box to enter a custom unit number. The monetary cost or time would then be multiplied by this number to get the total for this secondary operation. Example Let's say a part requires 4 bends. Setting up bending takes 15 minutes and each bend takes 4 minutes to complete. Your production rate is set at $50/hr. Also assume a production markup of 10%.   Setup cost: Time = 15 min.   Variable cost: Time = 4 min. Quantity unit = Custom unit Quantity = 4   Setup costs would be: $50.00/hr. × 0.25 hrs = $12.50 setup cost   Variable costs would be: 4 min. × 4 custom units = 16 min. (0.266 hrs.) 0.266 hrs. × $50/hr. = $13.33 variable cost   Units costs would be: $12.50 + $13.33 = $25.83 unit cost   Then the 10% production markup is taken into account to get the unit price: ($25.83 × 0.10) + 25.83 = $28.41 unit price   Important:

Area and Weight calculations for secondary operations always use the True Area of the part. This is because it is assumed that the operation will be done on parts after they are cut.

Add to Library/Update Library For item-specific secondary operations, you can make changes to the secondary operations library.

- 650 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Add to Library The selected secondary operation will be added to the secondary operations library.

Update Library The matching library operation will be updated with values from the selected secondary operation. Use this if you want to use the values in an individual secondary operation as your defaults.

Price and cost figures For item-specific secondary operations, the cost and price of the operation are shown at the bottom of the page. These are based on the line item in which the operation is used.

Unit cost The cost of the secondary operation for a single line item.

Extended cost Unit cost × line item quantity

Unit price Unit cost + production markup for the secondary operation

Extended price Unit price × line item quantity

- 651 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Secondary operations library The secondary operations library should be used for common secondary operations that will be reused on different line items. Each library operation can have default values.

In this article... Open the secondary operations library The Secondary Operations Library page Add a new secondary operation to the library Edit a library operation Remove an operation from the library

Open the secondary operations library  1. Open the main Quote page (File tab > Quote).

 2. Click the Secondary Operations Library link.

Secondary Operations Library page All operations in the library are listed in this section. In Use Indicates that the library operation is currently in use for at least one line item in the quote.   The Details section contains a summary of the currently-selected library operation.

Actions Add to all line items The selected secondary operation in the library will be added to all line items in the quote. Update line items containing... All secondary operations that are in use and match the name of the selected library operation will be updated with default values from the library. Delete from all line items All secondary operations that match the name of the selected library operation will be removed from all line items in the quote.

Add a new secondary operation to the library To add a new secondary operation to the library:  1. Open the secondary operations library (File tab > Quote > click Secondary Operations Library).  2. Click the Add button.

- 652 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 3. From the list, double-click the newly-created library operation.  4. Configure properties as needed. See Secondary operations properties for more information.   You can also add an existing secondary operation (that is in use) to the library:  1. On the Quote page (File tab > Quote) double-click a line item containing the operation you want to add.  2. On the Line Item page, double-click the secondary operation in the list.  3. Click Add to Library.

Edit a library operation  1. Open the secondary operations library (File tab > Quote > click Secondary Operations Library).  2. In the list, click the operation that you want to modify.  3. Click the Edit button.  4. Configure properties as needed. See Secondary operations properties for more information.

Remove an operation from the library  1. Open the secondary operations library (File tab > Quote > click Secondary Operations Library).  2. In the list, click the operation that you want to remove.  3. Click the Remove button. Removing an operation from the library will not remove it from the line items where it's already in use. To remove the operation from all items, use Delete from all line items (on the Actions button). Then, if desired, you can remove the operation from the library.

- 653 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

20. MATERIALS About materials Explore the links to find out more about materials in ProNest:    l Process Parameters spreadsheets  l Materials database editor  l Assigning materials to parts  l Material aliases  l Material display format preference  l Assigning a material to an inventory plate  l Changing materials in your job

- 654 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Assigning materials to parts In ProNest, setting a material is a very important step. Using settings spreadsheets, ProNest assigns different parameters such as feedrate, kerf, leads, and separation distances on the nest based on material. Setting a material is also essential for getting accurate costing information for your job.

Assign material type and thickness to a part In the Edit Part List window, material can be applied to parts before or after import:  1. Select one or more parts.  a. Hold CTRL + click to select parts individually.  b. Hold SHIFT + click to select a range of parts.  2. On the Nesting Properties tab on the lower right, in the Material box, select a material from the list. Note:

When spreadsheets are used, the list of available materials comes from the materials found in your Process Parameters spreadsheet. When spreadsheets are not used, the list of available materials comes from your material database.

You can also change the material assigned to a part from the main nesting window, as long as the part isn't nested yet:  1. In the Part List pane, right-click a part and select Properties.  2. In the Properties pane, in the Material box, select a material from the list. Important:

Do not change the material assigned to parts that have already been beveled. See Applying beveled edges for more information.

Set a default material for a new job You can select a default Material type and thickness for a new ProNest job. All parts, plates, and nests in your job will use this material, unless otherwise specified.  1. On the File tab, click New.  2. On the right side, in the Material box, select a default material.

- 655 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Materials editor The Materials editor stores a list of all of the different materials that you use. Once this list is created, it will be available within ProNest, enabling you to assign a material type and thickness for each part and plate. Other material-related information such as density, chemical composition, and price is also stored in the database.

Open the Materials editor You can access ProNest database editors internally from the Data tab in the main ProNest window. Database editors can also be run externally as stand-alone applications.   To access the stand-alone Materials database editor:  l

Start > Hypertherm CAM > Materials.

  To open the Materials database editor from within ProNest:  l On the Data tab, click Materials. Once the Materials editor is open, you can add, modify, or remove materials from it.

Add a material  1. On the File menu, select New.  2. Enter the Material and Thickness of the material, as well as any other information you want to include.  3. Click OK. Tip: You can easily add a material type with a range of different thicknesses to the database:  1. On the File menu, select New Material List.  2. Enter a material type in the uppermost box.  3. Use the From and To boxes to specify the lowest and highest values in the set.  4. In the Increment box, enter an appropriate increment value.  5. Add any additional material information, such as density or unit price.  6. Click OK.

Edit material information To edit a single material:  1. Select the material record.  2. Click the Edit toolbar button (

).

 3. Change material information as needed.  4. Click OK.   To edit multiple materials at once:

- 656 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 1. Select multiple materials.  a. To select a range of materials, hold the SHIFT key while clicking the first and last material records in the range.  b. To select multiple materials one at a time, hold CTRL key while clicking the material records.  2. Click the Edit toolbar button (

).

The Properties dialog will open. Note that each field has an unselected checkbox ( has not been edited.

) next to it, indicating that the current value

 3. Change material information as needed. When you edit information in a field, the checkbox next to it becomes selected (

), indicating that the value has been edited.

 4. Click OK. Your changes will be applied to all selected materials.

Delete a material  1. Select the material.  2. On the File menu, select Delete.

The Material Database and Process Parameters spreadsheets In addition to materials added directly to the database, the materials from all current and former Process Parameters spreadsheets will also be saved in the database. ProNest will automatically add materials found in your spreadsheets to your database. Note:

When spreadsheets are used, the list of available materials comes from the materials found in your Process Parameters spreadsheet. When spreadsheets are not used, the list of available materials comes from your material database.

- 657 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Material properties Material Properties Material Material type or name. This is a required field used throughout ProNest.  

Thickness Material thickness in inches or millimeters. This is a required field used throughout ProNest and to calculate part and plate weight for costing purposes.  

Grade Material grade is an optional field that can be used to further differentiate materials beyond type and thickness. Parts of the same material type and thickness but different grades could not be placed on the same nest.   Example:   Let's say you added following two materials to the database:   MS 0.25 A36 MS 0.25 1018 Though these have the same material type and thickness, they would be considered different materials in ProNest, due to their differing grades. Each material could have a unique unit price, scrap value, density, etc.  

Gauge Gauge is an optional field used for display purposes only. This must be used in conjunction with the Thickness field; it can't be used by itself to differentiate materials.  

Density Density of the material in lb/in. 3or kg/m3. This is used for calculating part and plate weight for costing purposes.  

Unit Price The material's unit price in monetary units/lb or monetary units/kg. This is used for calculating material costs for parts and plates.  

Scrap Value The material's scrap value in monetary units/lb or monetary units/kg. This is used to calculate a nest's scrap value (in the Job Summary report).  

- 658 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Importing ProNest materials from a spreadsheet You can import an XLS or XLSX file containing a list of materials into the ProNest Materials database.

Considerations  l This feature is designed specifically for adding a list of new materials to the database. It will not update or delete existing materials.  l When a machine is loaded in ProNest, the any materials found in the Process Parameters spreadsheet that aren't already in the Materials database are automatically added. However, Process Parameters only include the Material and Thickness properties. By importing a separate XLS file, you can quickly bring in a master list of materials that includes costing and other data into ProNest.  l In ProNest, when Process Parameters spreadsheets are in use, the list of available materials in a job is limited by what is found in the Process Parameters XLS.

Required format Units cell (A1) Measurement units are specified in cell A1, located in the upper left corner of the table. Allowable values for this cell are "inch" or "mm". If this cell is blank, inch is assumed.   Column header row cell (B1) The row number of the required column headers must be specified in cell B1, which is located to the right of the units cell. Allowable values for this cell are whole numbers greater than or equal to "2". If this cell is blank, a value of "2" is assumed. It can be useful to modify this number if rows of information must be added above the required column header (for things such as translated column-headings or reference information).   Column headers Column headers are located in the row specified in cell B1. Each cell of this row contains a heading that indicates the data stored in that column. For instance, the column header "Material" specifies a column containing the names of different materials.   The following are allowable column headers:  

Column Header

Maximum Field Size

Valid Values

Units

Column Required?

Blank Allowed?

Material

40

any text string

 

yes

no

Thickness

20

0 - 65535

in. or mm

yes

no

Grade

40

any text string

 

no

yes

Gauge

40

any text string

 

no

yes

Density

20

0.0 - 999.0

lbs./in. 3 or kg/mm3

no

yes

Unit Price

20

0.0 - 999.0

monetary units/lb. or monetary units/kg

no

yes

Scrap Value

20

0.0 - 999.0

monetary units/lb.

no

yes

- 659 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Column Header

Maximum Field Size

Valid Values

Units

Column Required?

Blank Allowed?

or monetary units/kg Group Code

40

any text string

 

no

yes

Chemical Comp

40

any text string

 

no

yes

Remarks

60

any text string

 

no

yes

  Data rows Rows 3 - n would contain records for each material you want to add.

Example table

inch

2

Material Thickness

 

  Grade

 

Gauge Density

 

 

Unit Price

Scrap Value

MS

0.1250

A36

 

0.28

0.500

0.500

MS

0.2500

A36

 

0.28

0.500

0.500

MS

0.5000

A36

 

0.28

0.500

0.500

MS

0.7500

A36

 

0.28

1.000

1.000

  Note:

Material ID is assigned automatically by ProNest during import.

- 660 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

About material aliases In ProNest, a material's alias is an alternate name by which the material can be identified. This can be useful if outside of ProNest, you name and organize materials differently from the format used in the Process Parameters spreadsheets. With aliases set up, material information in a part file (BOM), work order, ERP/MRP import file, or PNL can be automatically identified and matched to the right ProNest material during import.

Why use aliases? In ProNest, most setups use Process Parameters spreadsheets as a means of applying specific settings based on material type and thickness, and optionally, class. However, the format used in the spreadsheet may not match the material naming convention that you use outside of ProNest.   With aliases, you don't have to enter additional material information or adhere to the ProNest material naming convention when creating your BOM parts, work orders, etc.

Why not edit materials directly in the Process Parameters spreadsheet instead?  l Making changes to the Process Parameters spreadsheet is considered an advanced type of action. Many of the cells are calculated based on other cells and it is easy to make mistakes that could result in problems.  l You may have more than one alias for a given material (for example, A36, 1080, and Mild Steel might all map to MS in ProNest). You wouldn't want to enter duplicate rows in the spreadsheet for all of these types.  l Some material name formats are a combination of different material attributes. For instance, a material description used outside of ProNest may be a single concatenated value containing material type, thickness, grade, finish, and even plate size. There is no practical way to enter this into the spreadsheet.

- 661 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Setting up material aliases Initial setup of material aliases can be done from the Aliases list in the Materials editor.

In this article... The Aliases list Adding aliases Deleting aliases Rules for matching materials Quickly add an alias from the Edit Part List window Aliases and Data Sync

The Aliases list To open the Aliases list:  1. Open the ProNest Materials editor (Data tab > Materials

).

 2. On the File menu, click Aliases. The Aliases list will appear, with three tabs at the top.

The Aliases list   Material Name tab Use this tab for aliases that correspond to a ProNest material type (e.g. "MS"). When ProNest encounters a material type in BOM data that matches one of these aliases, it will automatically use the assigned material type instead. Example In this example, the material type SS exists in the ProNest Materials editor. In source files outside of ProNest, there are several variations in how this material is labeled (Stainless Steel, Stainless, HC-1, and so on). Each of these variations would be added to the Aliases list and mapped to SS.  

- 662 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Alias

Material Name

Stainless Steel

SS

Stainless

SS

НС-1

SS

62538016

SS

  When ProNest encounters a material value that matches any of these aliases, it will interpret the type as SS when trying to make a match.   Grade tab   Use this tab for aliases that correspond to a ProNest material grade (e.g. "304"). When ProNest encounters a grade in BOM data that matches one of these aliases, it will automatically use the assigned material grade instead. Example In this example, the grade 304 exists for stainless steel in the ProNest Materials editor. In source files outside of ProNest, there are several variations in how this grade is labeled (SS 304 BA, 304 2B, and so on). Each of these variations would be added to the Aliases list and mapped to 304.   Alias

Grade

SS 304 BA

304

SS 304 #4

304

SS 304-BA PVC 1 SIDE

304

304 BRIGHT ANNEALED

304

304 2B

304

  When ProNest encounters a grade value that matches any of these aliases, it will interpret them as 304 when trying to make a match.   Material tab Use this tab when a single alias corresponds to a full ProNest material type, thickness and, optionally, grade (e.g. "MS 0.25 in. A36"). The alias would correspond to a single row in the Materials editor. Example In this example, the material record SS 0.105 in. 304 exists in the ProNest Materials editor. In source files outside of ProNest, there are several variations in how this material is labeled (12 GA SS 304 BA, 12 GA SS 304 2B PVC, and so on). Each of these variations would be added to the Aliases list and mapped to SS 0.105 in 304.   Alias

Material

12 GA SS 304 AB

SS 0.105 in. 304

12 GA SS 304 BRIGHT ANNEALED

SS 0.105 in. 304

12 GA SS 304 2B PVC

SS 0.105 in. 304

- 663 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

  When ProNest encounters a material value that matches any of these aliases, it will interpret them as SS 0.105 in. 304 when trying to make a match.

Adding aliases  1. Open the ProNest Materials editor (Data tab > Materials

).

 2. On the File menu, click Aliases.  3. The Aliases list will open.  4. Select a tab (Material Name, Grade, or Material) to begin assigning aliases.  5. In the Alias column on the left, type an alias.  6. In the box to the right of that alias, use the drop down arrow to select a value.

This list of available material names, grades, or full materials comes from the Materials editor.  7. When you are finished, click OK. The next time a part or plate that uses an alias is imported, the corresponding ProNest material will automatically be assigned.

Delete aliases  1. Open the ProNest Materials editor (Data tab > Materials

).

 2. On the File menu, click Aliases.  3. Click a row in the Aliases list.  4. Press the Delete key.

Rules for material matching Ultimately, the purpose of using aliases is to match a ProNest material using material information from the import file. The following rules govern how ProNest materials are selected during import:  l Thickness is always required in order to make a match. Note that the stated thickness must be ±0.001 in. (±0.0254 mm) of the thickness listed in the Materials editor.  l When using the Material Name tab:  l Material type is required in the BOM information. If a material record has a Grade in the Materials editor, the grade must also be specified in BOM information in order to make a match.  l When using the Grade tab:  l Material type is not required in the BOM information. A match can be made using Grade and Thickness.  l When using the Material tab:  l Material with an alias that maps to a full material is required in the BOM information. For BOM parts, you'd need to enter this alias in the MATERIAL= field. For Data Sync, see below for more details. If a match to a material is not made during import, you will not have the correct material specified for the item in ProNest. You would then need to change the material after parts have been added.

Quickly add an alias from the Edit Part List window - 664 -

ProNest 2019 Manual When adding parts to the part list, if an alias specified in the part file is not found in the Alias table, you may see a ation in the part file did not match a ProNest material warning.   To quickly assign a ProNest material for this alias:

Material inform-

 1. Click the Warnings box.  2. Click the arrow next to a part.

 3. Click the browse button (

) on the right

 4. Select a material from the list. The alias-to-material assignment will be added to the Aliases list. The next time that alias is encountered, the corresponding ProNest material will automatically be assigned. Note:

The Material information in the part file did not match a ProNest material warning may also appear for the following reasons:  l Grade is use in the Materials editor, but grade is not specified in the BOM information.  l Thickness is not found.

Aliases and Data Sync In Data Sync, the ERP/MRP field that is mapped to Material Description (in the Data Mapping tab of the Data Sync Manager) will be brought in as the ProNest material. During import of a work order or inventory plates, if there are new materials in the work order or list of plates that aren't in the ProNest Materials database, those materials will automatically be added to the Aliases list (on the Material tab).   Material Name

Grade

Material

Alias

Material

PL 0.125

 

PL 0.250

 

PL 0.375

 

  Initially, the right column displaying corresponding ProNest materials is blank, because these aliases haven't been assigned to ProNest materials yet. You would then need to select a full ProNest material (type, thickness, and optionally grade) to each alias, as described above.  n Mapping material names for work orders  n Importing material aliases from a spreadsheet

- 665 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Importing material aliases from a spreadsheet You can import an XLS or XLSX file containing a list of material alias assignments into the ProNest Aliases list:  1. Open the ProNest Materials editor (Data tab > Materials

).

 2. On the File menu, click Aliases. The Aliases list will open.  3. At the bottom of the dialog, click the Import button.  4. Browse to the spreadsheet containing your list of aliases.

Considerations  l This feature is designed specifically for quickly adding a list of new aliases to the Aliases list in ProNest. It will not update existing aliases (except in the case of full Material aliases where the alias is set to "None").  l Material aliases can also be added or edited directly in the ProNest Aliases list grid.  l Be careful to enter the Material Name, Gauge, and/or Material exactly as they appear in the Materials editor.  l You can't have an Alias XLS with Alias, Material, and Grade columns and no Thickness column. Thickness must be included if you want to map an alias to a full ProNest material.

Required format Units cell (A1) Measurement units are specified in cell A1, located in the upper left corner of the table. Allowable values for this cell are "inch" or "mm". If this cell is blank, inch is assumed.   Column header row cell (B1) The row number of the required column headers must be specified in cell B1, which is located to the right of the units cell. Allowable values for this cell are whole numbers greater than or equal to "2". If this cell is blank, a value of "2" is assumed. It can be useful to modify this number if rows of information must be added above the required column header (for things such as translated column-headings or reference information).   Column headers Column headers are located in the row specified in cell B1. Each cell of this row contains a heading that indicates the data stored in that column.   The following are allowable column headers:   Column Header

Description

Maximum Field Size

Valid Values

Blank Allowed?

Alias

Enter the alias used outside of ProNest in this column.

259

any text string

no

Material

Material type from the Materials database.   Material type is required when alias

20

0 - 65535

yes (required when mapping to a full material)

- 666 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Column Header

Description

Maximum Field Size

Valid Values

Blank Allowed?

matches a full material (a single record in the Materials database). Thickness

Material thickness from the Materials database.   Thickness is used only when alias matches a full material (a single record in the Materials database).

40

any text string

yes (required when mapping to a full material)

Grade

Material grade from the Materials database.   Use this column when the alias denotes a material grade.

40

any text string

yes

  Data rows Rows 3 - n would contain records for each alias you want to add.

Example tables Example 1: Aliases only The following import table is used to only bring in aliases with nothing mapped:  

inch

2

 

 

12 GA 304-2B 48 IN X 120 IN LPVC

 

 

12 GA 304-2B SS 48 IN X 144 IN LPVC

 

 

12 GA 304-2B 48 IN X 121 IN LPVC

 

 

12 GA 316-2B 48 IN X 120 IN [L-4]

 

 

Alias

  After import, you would then map the aliases to available materials in the Aliases list.   Example 2: Alias to full material

- 667 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

This import table would be used to match alias to a full material (the Material tab in the Aliases list):  

inch

2 Alias

12 GA 304-2B SS  PVC

 

 

Material Thickness

Grade

SS

0.105

304

12 GA 304-BA SS PVC SS

0.105

304

12 GA 316L-4 SS PVC

SS

0.105

316L

12 GA 316L-2B SS PVC SS

0.105

316L

14 GA 304-2B SS  PVC

SS

0.075

304

14 GA 304-BA SS PVC SS

0.075

304

In this instance, the Materials database must have the following records in order for the alias to match during part import:   SS 0.105 304 SS 0.105 316L SS 0.075 304 Material and Thickness are required columns that can't be blank when mapping to a full material. Grade is an optional column. However, if a Grade column does exist, the grade must not be blank for any row.   Tip: You can easily start a new Material Alias XLS by copying and pasting one of the example tables shown above into Microsoft Excel or other spreadsheet program.

- 668 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Overview of class In ProNest, class is used to apply specific cutting parameters based on the consumables that will be used to cut a part or nest. It is also used to limit parts that require different consumables from being nested together on the same plate. Lastly, it is used to apply performance applications and other technologies to parts.

How does Class work in ProNest? In ProNest settings spreadsheets, each record (or data row) contains a complete set of settings values. A given row or record is selected depending on the keys specified (such as Material, Thickness, Class, Profile Area, etc.) in your job. Class is an optional column in the Process Parameters spreadsheet that is used as a key for record matching.   Consider the following excerpt of a Process Parameters spreadsheet:  

  1

A inch

B 3

C  

2

D  

E  

F  

Keys

G  

Process Parameters

3

Material

Thickness Class

Profile Type

Profile Area

Feedrate

Kerf

4

MS

0.2500

80Amp O2/Air

*

*

110

0.068

5

MS

0.2500

130Amp O2/Air

*

*

150

0.071

6

MS

0.2500

200Amp O2/Air

*

*

200

0.078

7

MS

0.2500

260Amp O2/Air

*

*

245

0.100

This table shows a single material and thickness with four different class values. In this case, the Class column is used to apply specific cutting parameters (Kerf and Feedrate) based on amperage and plasma/shield gas. Note:

In order to use class in ProNest, the Process Parameters spreadsheet must contain a Class column.

When you set a class for a part in ProNest, you are specifying the cutting parameters that will be used in output, which are based on the consumables.   For some plasma machines, class is also used to apply special Hypertherm cutting technology or performance applications to parts in ProNest, including True Hole® and the other Phoenix features discussed in this chapter.

Applying class Class is applied at the part level. After selecting a material type and thickness for a part, there is a list of available classes to choose from based on your selection.  

  Please follow the links below to find out more:  l Using the class selector

- 669 -

ProNest 2019 Manual   Plasma  l Selecting a class for plasma  l Plasma consumables and performance applications   Laser  l Selecting a class for laser  l Vaporize   Waterjet  l Selecting a class for waterjet  

How does class affect nesting? If you had two parts of the same material type and thickness that needed to be cut at different amperages, you'd select different classes for either part. For instance, one part may be MS 0.25 in. 130 Amp O2/Air and a second part may be MS 0.25 in. 80 Amp O2/Air. These parts would each have different cutting parameters (feedrate, kerf, etc.) applied based on their class. They also could not be nested together on the same plate in ProNest. This prevents having to make a consumable change in the middle of cutting a nest.   An exception to this rule is parts that have classes differing only in performance applications. For instance, a True Hole part cut at MS 0.25 in. 130 A could be nested on the same plate as a non-True Hole MS 0.25 in. 130 A part.

Default class You can set a default class for any material type and thickness. With a default class set, when you select a material type and thickness in ProNest, that class will automatically be selected as well. To learn how, see Default Class settings.

- 670 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Using the class selector After selecting a material type and thickness for a part, there is a list of available classes to choose from based on your selection.

  When you click the down arrow ( ) in the Class box, a list of classes will appear. Depending on the cut process and setup you have, this class selector may look different.   A Hypertherm plasma setup shows consumable and cut speed information, as well as special performance applications and other features in the filter at the top:

  Other setups with no special performance applications or other features don't have a class filter, but information about consumables and cut speed is still shown:

  Whatever the configuration, you can use the class selector to help you pick the right class for the part.

- 671 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Refine results using the filter The filter at the top of the class selector displays performance applications and some other items. Clicking a checkbox will limit the list so that only classes containing that item are shown.   For instance, if you only wanted to view classes with True Hole® in them, you would select the True Hole checkbox.

  You can select multiple checkboxes to create a compound filter. Only classes that contain both items would be shown.

Comparing cut speeds of different choices On the right side of the class selector is a speed indicator for each class listed. This shows the relative cut speed for each choice. These cut speeds are based on the Base Feedrate listed in the Process Parameters spreadsheet for a given class.*

The slowest cut speed is always shown as 1.0x. All other speeds shown are relative to the slowest speed. So, 1.5x is one and a half times faster than the 1.0x class, 6.0x is six times faster than 1.0x, and so on.

- 672 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

*Note:

If a Base Feedrate column doesn't exist in the Process Parameters spreadsheet, cut speeds are based on the Feedrate column.

Comparing cut quality of different choices On the right side of the class selector is a cut quality indicator for each class listed. This shows the predicted cut quality for each choice.

= Higher quality: Good choice when edge quality is more important than speed. = Optimized quality: Best overall balance of productivity and cut quality. = Lower quality: Good choice when speed is more important that edge quality.

Note:

Quality indicator only available for certain Hypertherm systems.

- 673 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Viewing technology in use on a nest In the Technology panel, you can view the performance applications (such as True Hole®) or other technologies (Fine Feature, HDi) that are currently in use on a nest. You can also quickly identify nested parts that have been beveled. The Technology panel is an indicator only - it can't be used to apply or remove features or technologies in ProNest.  

The Technology panel (shown in red) Note:

SureCut™ technology is the embedded expertise within Hypertherm CAM/CNC products that maximizes cutting performance for end users.

Highlighting technology on the nest In the Technology panel, you can hover the cursor over certain features to view where that technology is used on the nest. This functionality is available for True Hole, Fine Feature, Bevel Cuts, and Vaporize profiles.

True Hole When a True Hole class is selected for a part, only profiles that meet the size requirements have True Hole technology applied. You can view which profiles actually have True Hole using the Technology panel.   To view the holes with True Hole applied:  l Hover the cursor over True Hole in the Technology panel. True Hole interiors will be drawn in bold on the nest.  

- 674 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

In the nest pictured above, all parts were assigned the "True Hole" class, but only some of the holes qualified for True Hole. Using the Technology panel, you can see exactly which holes have True Hole applied. Fine Feature When the Fine Feature class is selected for a part, it is only applied to profiles that meet the criteria in the Process Parameters spreadsheet. As with True Hole, you can view the specific profiles that have Fine Feature using the Technology panel.   To view Fine Feature profiles on a nest:  l Hover the cursor over Fine Feature in the Technology panel. Fine Feature profiles will be drawn in bold on the nest.  

Bevel Cut You can quickly view beveled edges on nested parts. Note that this applies to parts that have been beveled (the edges will be cut at a non-perpendicular angle) in Advanced Edit or using AutoBevel. This doesn't apply to parts using a Bevel or True Bevel class, which refers to Hypertherm Bevel consumables and True Bevel cut angles.   To view beveled part geometry on a nest:  l Hover the cursor over Bevel Cut in the Technology panel. Beveled edges on parts will be drawn in bold on the nest.  

- 675 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 

Vaporize To view vaporize geometry on a nest:  l Hover the cursor over Vaporize in the Technology panel. Vaporize profiles will be drawn in bold on the nest.  

Fly Cut To view fly cutting on a nest:  l Hover the cursor over Fly Cut in the Technology panel. Fly Cut profiles will be drawn in bold on the nest.  

- 676 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Note:

Because Fly Cutting is applied during output, pierces (View tab > Nest Image Objects > Pierces) drawn on fly cut parts do not reflect the actual pierce locations.

Show or hide the Technology panel To hide the Technology panel:  l Click the Close button on the panel.   To show the Technology panel:  1. On the File tab, click Preferences.  2. On the General page, select Show the technology panel. Note that the Technology panel will appear only when there is a relevant technology applied on the nest.

Open Nest Properties dialog to view technology in use  l On the status bar of the main window, click Nest n of n.

- 677 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Selecting a class for plasma For plasma systems, the amperage and cutting gas/shield gas can be selected in ProNest using class. In selecting an amperage and gas, you are also specifying which consumables (electrode, nozzle, etc.) should be used for a part or nest.

Picking an amperage When selecting an amperage for a nest using class, the list of available amperages is based on the material and thickness that is already selected. These represent the allowable amperages for cutting that material. If there are multiple available amperages, consider the following when making a selection:

How fast do you need the job? Cutting at a higher amperage is generally faster than cutting at a lower amperage. In the Class box, on the right side there is a speed indicator for each class listed. This shows the relative cut speed for each amperage and gas.  

The Class box with MS 0.50 in. (12 mm) selected   The slowest cut speed is shown as 1.0x. All other speeds shown are relative to the slowest speed. So, 1.5x is one and a half times faster than the 1.0x class, 6.0x is six times faster than 1.0x, and so on.

What kind of quality is acceptable? There are several different aspects of cut quality, including cut angularity, top edge sharpness, edge finish, and dross formation.   ProNest Process Parameters spreadsheets contain built-in process expertise; they are designed to include only cut speeds and amperage ranges that provide a reasonable cut quality. However, there are still differences in cut quality within the listed ranges.  l As a general rule, selecting a lower amperage with a slower cut speed will typically result in a better quality cut than cutting at a higher amperage. On the right side of the class selector is a cut quality indicator for each class listed. This shows the predicted cut quality for each choice.

- 678 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

= Higher quality: Good choice when edge quality is more important than speed. = Optimized quality: Best overall balance of productivity and cut quality. = Lower quality: Good choice when speed is more important that edge quality.

Note:

Quality indicator only available for certain Hypertherm systems.

While the quality indicator gives you a good general idea of the edge quality to expect, there are other complicating factors that may come into play.   Cutting too slowly may result in:  l Low speed dross formation  l Excessive top spatter  l Inconsistent edge quality   Cutting too fast can cause:  l High-speed dross  l Too much torch lag   Ultimately, achieving a cut quality that is acceptable for your application involves finding the right cut speed and amperage. You may need to examine test cuts and look at the lag line (10° - 15° is ideal) on the cut edge to determine the correct speed for your job. Tip: For Hypertherm plasma machines and consumables, the Hypertherm Training and Education website (http://www.hypertherm.com/en/) provides a very thorough and in-depth information on achieving good cut quality and maximizing consumable life.

What is the amperage limitation of the power supply? Be sure to select an amperage that is within the allowable range of your physical machine. While most newer ProNest setups will only display amperages that can be cut by your physical machine, some older setups may show a wider range of amperages that is outside the capability of your machine.

What gases and consumables are available? - 679 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Be sure that you have the correct consumable set and plasma/shield gases for the amperage that you are setting in ProNest. Cutting at an amperage that exceeds the maximum rated amperage of a consumable set can lead to faster consumable wear. Please consult your machine documentation for more information.

Plasma gas and shield gas For multi-gas plasma systems, the gas that is used for cutting can have a significant impact on cut quality, speed, consumable wear, and cost of operation. Different cutting parameters (such feedrate, kerf, and cut height) are included in output code, depending on the gas that is selected. It is important to select the correct gas combination that will be used for cutting.   In most instances, when cutting mild steel, there is only one plasma gas/shield gas option at a given amperage. For instance, when cutting at 80 A, you must also select O2/Air; at 50 A only O2/O2 is available. Once an amperage is selected, there is no choice to make for plasma/shield gas.   For stainless steel and aluminum, there are several gas options at a given thickness and amperage. For instance, for aluminum 0.25 in. (6 mm) at 260 A, you can select N2/Air (nitrogen plasma gas with air shield gas) or H35/N2 (argon-hydrogen plasma gas with nitrogen shield gas). In these instances, the decision of what gas to choose will probably be limited by what is in stock or and system's capability. However, if availability is not a limiting factor, there are several other factors to take into account when selecting a gas combination for a given amperage, such as cost or quality. Tip: A good online resource covering plasma gases is the Plasma gas cutting guide (https://www.hypertherm.com/en-US/customersupport/consumables-and-torches/). (Website is available in English only.)

What is the effect of picking an incorrect amperage or gas in ProNest? It is important to select an amperage and gas combination in ProNest that matches what will be used at the machine during cutting. Otherwise, the output code may contain incorrect feedrates, kerf values, cut heights, and pierce heights. This can lead to poor quality parts and damaged consumables.

For further information on selecting a plasma class, including True Hole and Fine Feature, refer to Plasma consumables and performance applications.

- 680 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Plasma consumables and performance applications For Hypertherm plasma setups, you can use Class to apply performance applications and other technologies to parts in ProNest.

In this article... SureCut True Hole Fine Feature HDi Bevel True Bevel Moving Pierce Thick Pierce Underwater Edge Pierce Only

SureCut™ SureCut technology is the embedded expertise within Hypertherm CAM/CNC products that maximizes cutting performance for end users.   Visit http://www.hypertherm.com/SureCut to learn more.

True Hole® Produces bolt hole quality with virtually no hole taper and minimal ding on mild steel. When True Hole is selected, it is applied to a part's holes automatically based on the ratio of material thickness to hole diameter. So in a given part, with the True Hole class selected, some holes may get True Hole while other holes do not.   Material: Mild Steel 0.135 to 1.0 inches (3 to 25 mm) Hole diameter: 1x to 2x material thickness   Pros  l  l  l   Cons  l  l

Automatically delivers "bolt-hole" quality Virtual elimination of hole taper Ding is reduced and biased to the outside of the hole

Slower than a standard cut Slightly longer cut length (due to adjusted leads)

Fine Feature Fine Feature is a technology that is designed for jobs in which the greatest importance is placed on achieving the best possible finish on the cut surface, a sharp top edge, and tight control over angle deviation.  

- 681 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Material: Amperage:

Mild Steel 0.135 to 1.0 inches (3 to 25 mm) 260 A and lower (Not all listed amperages are available for each material thickness.)

  Pros  l  l  l   Cons  l Note:

Best finish on the cut surface Sharp top edge quality Tight control over angle deviation

Slower than a standard cut

Not available with XPR. XPR cut charts are already optimized to provide superior cutting on mild steel, stainless steel, and aluminum throughout all thin and thick processes.

HDi HyDefinition inox (HDi) 60 A cutting process for thin stainless steel that produces high quality cuts with minimal dross.   Material: Stainless Steel 0.135 to 0.20 inches (3 to 6 mm) Amperage: 60 A   Pros  l  l  l  l   Cons

Sharp top edge quality Shiny surface finish Superior angularity with reduced angle variation Less dross

 l Only for thin material  l Only available at 60 A  l Requires F5/N2 gas Note:

Not available with XPR. XPR cut charts are already optimized to provide superior cutting on mild steel, stainless steel, and aluminum throughout all thin and thick processes.

Bevel Use Hypertherm bevel consumables (shield, nozzle, electrode, etc.).   Material:

Mild Steel 0.075 to 3.0 inches (2 to 76 mm) Stainless Steel 0.25 to 6.25 inches (6 to 160 mm)

- 682 -

ProNest 2019 Manual   Pros  l  l   Cons  l  l Notes:

Bevel-capable consumables can be used for both bevel and non-bevel (perpendicular) cutting Better consumable life, even when cutting non-bevel (perpendicular)

Only available at certain amperages and bevel angles Requires extensive user testing  l If parts will have a beveled (non-perpendicular) edge applied in ProNest, a bevel-compatible class must be selected.  l True Bevel uses the exact same consumables as Bevel  l Not available with XPR. For XPR systems, standard consumables (which are all bevel-capable) will be used for all classes, including True Bevel.

True Bevel™ Use Hypertherm bevel consumables (shield, nozzle, electrode, etc.) and True Bevel™ cut charts at factory-tested bevel angles and thicknesses. Note that both True Bevel and Bevel classes require bevel consumables.   Material: Amperage:

Mild Steel 0.25 to 2.0 inches (6 to 50 mm) 80 A and higher (Not all listed amperages are available for each material thickness.) Plasma Gas/Shield Gas: O2/Air Bevel Types: I, V, A and Y Top cuts at selected angles up to 45°   Pros  l  l  l  l  l   Cons  l  l Notes:

Setup time and scrap material are greatly reduced for new job setup due to reduced trial and error. Bevel cut sequence recommendation is provided for improved accuracy and consistent quality. Scalable parameter tables with embedded equations allow you to add new angles with ease. Better consumable life, even when cutting non-bevel (perpendicular). Requires minimal user testing

Only available at certain amperages and bevel angles Not available for K cuts  l If parts will have a beveled (non-perpendicular) edge applied in ProNest, a bevel-compatible class must be selected.  l True Bevel uses the exact same consumables as Bevel  l For XPR systems, standard consumables (which are all bevel-capable) will be used for all classes, including True Bevel.

Moving Pierce A pierce technique that is combined with PowerPierce® technology to extend stainless steel pierce capability for the HPR800XD to 4 inches (100 mm) and for the HPR400XD to 3 inches (75 mm).   - 683 -

ProNest 2019 Manual Moving pierce is a linear motion that uses torch lifter positioning, current ramping and table motion to gouge into the plate, directing molten metal away from the work piece, until the plate is penetrated and standard cutting can begin. The moving pierce is applied on the lead-in on a profile.   Material: Amperage:

Stainless Steel 2 to 4 inches (50 to 200 mm) 400 A, 800 A (Not all listed amperages are available for each material thickness.) Plasma Gas/Shield Gas: H35-N2/N2, H35/N2 System: HPR400XD or HPR800XD is required   Pros  l  l  l  l   Cons  l  l  l

Eliminates need for pre-piercing Ability to pierce thick stainless without an edge pierce Piercing interior profiles with plasma is possible (as long as the hole is large enough and has a linear lead-in) Keeps torch away from molten material

Can only be applied to Linear style lead-ins Leaves molten slag ("rooster tail") that can spatter onto adjacent parts Requires high amperage

Other considerations  l If you are nesting parts with moving pierces, the parts should be oriented so that the lead-ins all follow the same direction. This can be achieved through manual nesting or by using array (Parts tab > Array). In general, automatic nesting is not a good option when using moving pierce.  l When nesting a part with a moving pierce, be sure to leave sufficient space on the nest for the molten slag (or "rooster tail") that is created by the pierce. For this reason, proper manual positioning of parts on the nest or using a large enough part-pierce separation for these parts can prevent slag from spattering onto adjacent parts.  l Moving pierces are applied over relatively long lead-ins. As a result, they cannot be applied to lead-ins on interior profiles that are smaller than the minimum distance needed for the moving pierce. If a part has interiors that can't have moving pierces applied, a standard dwell pierce will be used instead.  l If a profile is edge pierced (or pre-pierced), the moving pierce technique will not be applied to that lead-in. This means that even if you've added a part and set the class to Moving Pierce, if that part is edge pierced the moving pierce will not be applied (as it is no longer necessary). Note:

Not available with XPR. XPR cut charts are already optimized to provide superior cutting on mild steel, stainless steel, and aluminum throughout all thin and thick processes.

Thick Pierce Use special piercing instructions in Phoenix controller for HPRXD Thick Pierce.   Material: Amperage: Plasma Gas/Shield Gas: Hardware:

Mild Steel 1.0 to 2.5 inches (25 mm to 65 mm) 260 A O2/Air HPRXD at 260 A

- 684 -

ProNest 2019 Manual   Pros  l Ability to pierce thick material without an edge pierce   Cons  l Not available for Stainless Steel or Aluminum Note:

Not available with XPR. XPR cut charts are already optimized to provide superior cutting on mild steel, stainless steel, and aluminum throughout all thin and thick processes.

Underwater Underwater cutting can significantly reduce the level of noise and smoke generated by normal plasma cutting, as well as the glare of the plasma arc. Hypertherm has developed underwater cut charts for mild steel at 80 A, 130 A, 200 A, 260 A, and 400 A.   Material: Amperage:

Mild Steel 0.135 to 1.75 inches (3 to 25 mm) 80 A and higher (Not all listed amperages are available for each material thickness.) Plasma Gas/Shield Gas: O2/Air System: Plasma with underwater table Max Depth: Can cut up to 3 inches (75 mm) below the surface of the water   Pros  l  l  l  l   Cons  l  l  l  l

Reduced noise, smoke and glare compared to normal plasma cutting Reduced heat distortion and warping Parts can be handled immediately after they are cut Available at many different amperages

Slower than a standard cut Cut charts do not support Stainless Steel or Aluminum Scribing/marking/centermarking is not supported Not compatible with True Hole®

 

Edge Pierce Only / Edge Start For thicker materials, edge pierces may be required when cutting at specific amperages and with certain gases. This is because a traditional pierce wouldn't physically cut through the plate.   In ProNest, the "Edge Pierce Only" class indicates that when cutting that thickness with the specified amperage and assist gas, you must use edge piercing for parts. For instance, if you are cutting mild steel at 260 A with O2/Air, all available classes would be "Edge Pierce Only".   Pros

- 685 -

ProNest 2019 Manual  l Eliminates need for pre-piercing  l Ability to pierce thick materials   Cons  l Edge pierce can only be applied to exterior profiles  l Parts must be oriented on the nest so that exterior leads are close to the plate edge

- 686 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Selecting a class for laser For Laser setups, class may contain gas information, lens focal length, cut condition. Laser classes are also used to apply vaporize to a plate.   In most cases, there is a single gas or consumable set listed for a given material type and thickness. However, in cases where there are multiple choices, the cut speed indicator can be used to determine how fast one class is relative to the others.

- 687 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Vaporize Some plates come coated with a thin protective film in order to protect the surface of the plate. The coating can negatively affect cut quality on certain machines if it is not burned off prior to cutting, particularly with laser machines. ProNest has the ability to program the cutting head to "vaporize" this film by pre-tracing profiles at low wattage prior to cutting.

How is vaporize applied in ProNest? The Process Parameters spreadsheet uses a class (for instance, "N2 Assist – Vaporize") that is particular to vaporizing. When you set the class for a part, you can select whether or not to apply vaporize to that part.   To apply vaporize to a part:  l When setting the Class for the part, select a class with "Vaporize" in the name. Some examples include:  l Vaporize / N2 / Lens 5.0 / Nozzle 1.4  l N2 Assist - Vaporize When NC output is created for the part, vaporize commands will automatically be included in the code. The cutting head will first pass over a profile at a low wattage, burning off the coating, and then will come back and cut the profile (you can view this using cut simulation in ProNest.)

Viewing vaporize profiles on a nest To view vaporize profiles on a nest:  l Hover the cursor over the Vaporize feature in the Technology panel.

  To view animated vaporize motions:  1. Open Cut Simulation mode (Home tab > Cut Simulation

).

 2. Play the simulation. The cutting head will pass over each profile twice: first with a vaporize pass and then with a cut pass.

Vaporize settings Vaporize commands are applied based on the Process Parameters spreadsheet. A column called "Vaporize" is used to specify whether or not to vaporize a profile that matches a given row.  

- 688 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

  1

A inch

B 3

2

   

C  

Keys

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

D  

E  

Miscellaneous

3

Material

Thickness Class

Profile Type

Diameter Profile Area

Vaporize Feedrate

Kerf

4

SS

0.0360

N2 Assist

*

*

*

0

27.0

0.04

5

SS

0.0360

N2 Assist

I

0.3750

0.1104

0

25.5

0.04

6

SS

0.0360

N2 Assist - Vaporize *

*

*

1

24.0

0.05

7

SS

0.0360

N2 Assist - Vaporize I

0.3750

0.1104

1

16.0

0.09

8

SS

0.0360

N2 Assist - Vaporize V

*

*

1

16.0

0.09

  In the Vaporize column:   0 = Do not vaporize 1 = Vaporize the profile   In the XLS above, "N2-Assist – Vaporize" class rows have Vaporize set to 1.   As with any Process Parameters spreadsheet, you can have more than one row for a given Material, Thickness, and Class, further differentiated by Profile Type and also Profile Area. Multiple rows with differing Profile Areas can be used to vaporize holes of a certain size, for instance, while not vaporizing larger profiles which may not need the same cut quality.   The "Profile Type = V" row For a given material/thickness/class, a special row is inserted with the Profile Type set to "V". This row lets you set a specific Cut Condition (if needed), Feedrate, Kerf, etc. to use for vaporizing.   For the Profile Type = V row, the Vaporize column is ignored (it doesn’t matter if it's set to 0 or 1).

Vaporizing and cut sequence By default, vaporize is applied on a profile by profile basis. This is to say that the vaporizing will be done for a profile and then that profile will be cut, before the cutting head moves on to vaporize the next profile, and so on. Advanced:

If you require a different cutting sequence for nests that will be vaporized, please contact Hypertherm for more information.

- 689 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Selecting a class for Hypertherm waterjet setups For waterjet setups designed for Hypertherm controls, class contains information on the pressure, orifice and nozzle diameter, and abrasive flow. When you select a class for a waterjet machine, a built-in waterjet calculator embedded in the Process Parameters spreadsheet applies the correct cutting parameters (feedrate, kerf, etc.) to the part based on these values and Machinability Index of the material.

Format of waterjet class For the material shown below, class may appear in a Hypertherm waterjet setup as follows:   Material: Class:

MS 0.125 in. P60 O0.012 N0.03 A0.79

  The format of the class name can be explained as follows:  

Code Column

Units (IPS)

Units (MMKS)

 

Description

 

Output pressure for cutting.   For the CNC to send the water pressure setting to the pump, it requires that the pump be equipped with electronic proportional pressure control. If the pump has dual manual pressure control, then the Pressure shows the recommended setting that must be manually set at the pump. Refer to the pump operator manual for more information.   Note that the pressure set here doesn't necessarily mean that the entire part will be cut at this pressure. There are low pressure pierces that may be applied.

P

Pressure psi

bar

O

Orifice inches Diameter

mm

Diameter of the orifice

N

Nozzle inches Diameter

mm

Diameter of the nozzle or focus tube

A

Abrasive lbs/min kg/min Flow Rate

Abrasive flow rate

Picking a class The list of available Class choices is based on the material that is already selected.   For instance, if you select MS 0.25", the following class choices may appear:   P60 O0.010 N0.03 A0.67 P60 O0.011 N0.03 A0.73 P60 O0.012 N0.03 A0.79 P60 O0.014 N0.04 A1.2

- 690 -

ProNest 2019 Manual P60 O0.016 N0.04 A1.3 In this example, the pressure remains constant while the consumable set and abrasive flow rate vary. Note that orifice size is tied to nozzle size and flow rate. In general, the larger the orifice size, larger the nozzle size and the faster the abrasive flow rate.

Orifice or nozzle size and abrasive flow rate These represent the allowable consumables for cutting that material. If there are multiple available nozzle or orifice sizes, consider the following when making a selection:   Larger orifice sizes correlate to a greater the flow of water and faster abrasive flow rates. Picking a larger orifice size can result in:  l Faster cutting speeds  l Increased performance when cutting thicker material HyPrecision waterjet pumps have a maximum orifice size based on the horsepower of that model. For instance, a 50 hp model can accommodate up to 0.014 in. orifice and not larger. Please consult your machine documentation for more information.

Multiple heads Waterjet cutting with multiple jets requires a smaller orifice size compared to cutting with a single jet. A smaller orifice allows the waterjet to maintain the pressure and flow rate needed during multiple head cutting.   For instance, a 60 hp pump with a single head could use a 0.016 in. orifice, but with two heads the maximum orifice size would be 0.012 in. Consult your pump documentation to determine allowable orifice sizes for multi-head cutting.

- 691 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

21. PART LIBRARY About the Part Library The Part Library stores a list of parts that need to be cut more than once. This list can be used to build assemblies or for repeat orders of a given part. Once this list is created, it can be accessed within ProNest when adding parts from the Edit Part List window. 

Open the Part Library database editor  l From the main ProNest window, on the Data tab, click Part Library. From the Part Library database editor, you can view all of the library parts that are available. You can also create new library parts, and modify or delete existing parts from the database.

- 692 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding parts to the Part Library You can add CAD files or token files to the Part Library.

Add a part to the part library  1. Open the Part Library database editor (Data tab > Part Library

).

 2. On the File menu, select New. The Import dialog will appear.  3. Browse to the folder containing the part you want to add.  4. Using Files of type box, specify a file type (CAD files, Token files, or All files).  5. Click the file once to select it.  6. If you are adding a CAD file, click the Properties button (  7. Click the Preview button (

) and assign CAD Import properties.

). A preview of your part will appear in the right screen.

 8. Click OK. The Part Record View will open.  9. In the Quantity box, enter the required quantity of your part.  10. In the Material box, select a material type and thickness for your part.  11. Click Calculate. This will automatically calculate the length, weight, true area, true weight, rectangular area and rectangular weight.  12. Enter any other part properties as necessary.  13. Click OK. The part will be added to the Part Library.

Adding parts to the Part Library (from the Edit Part List window) Each time a CAD file, VSP part, or Pipe part is added to the part list, it is processed as a token file (.tok), which contains the part's geometry as well as any added part properties (such as leads) that have been applied. You can quickly save a token file of this processed part to the Part Library from the Edit Part List window:  1. In the Edit Part List window, apply part properties and add the part to the part list.  2. From the part list, right-click the part and select Add to Part Library. Your part, including any part properties, will be saved to the Part Library.

- 693 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Assemblies An assembly is simply a list of library parts. Assemblies can be accessed by selecting Assemblies

on the Data tab.

Note: Prior to creating an assembly, you should make sure that all the parts that you want to add to it are listed in the part library.

Create an assembly  1. Open the Assemblies database editor (Data tab > Assemblies

).

 2. On the File menu, click New.  3. Enter a name for your assembly.  4. Click OK. Once an assembly is created, library parts can be added to it.

Add parts to an assembly  1. Select the assembly in the Assemblies editor.  2. On the File menu, click Add Parts.  3. Select the inventory parts you want to add.  4. Click Add. Assemblies can be accessed within ProNest through the Edit Part List window as you are adding to your part list. Tip: From the part list, you can quickly add one or more parts to an existing assembly or create a new assembly from them:  1. Select one or more parts in the part list. You can hold CTRL + click to select multiple parts.  2. Right-click and select Add to Assembly.  3. In the Assembly name box, either select an existing assembly or type a name for a new assembly. Selecting an existing assembly will add selected parts to that assembly. Entering a new name will create a new assembly and add selected parts to it.  4. Click Select or Create. The parts in the part list will be added to the Part Library and referenced in the assembly that you specified.

- 694 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

22. PLATE INVENTORY About the Plate Inventory The Plate Inventory stores a list of plates that you have in stock in the ProNest database. Once this list is created, it can be accessed within ProNest so that a user can easily see what is available for nesting. The Plate Inventory also stores remnants and skeletons.

Open the Plate Inventory database editor  l From the main ProNest window, on the Data tab, click Plate Inventory. From the Plate Inventory database editor, you can view all of the inventory plates that are available. You can also create new inventory plates, as well as reserve, modify or delete existing plates in the database. Tip: Number of records per page If you have many plates in the Plate Inventory, you can break the grid up into several pages. This can reduce the time it takes to open the Plate Inventory editor or refresh data (especially with network databases), in addition to making things easier to read.  1. In the Plate Inventory editor, locate the Plates per page box in the lower right corner of the window.  2. Set the desired number of plates per page.  Choices: 25, 50, 100, 200, All (all plates will be shown on a single page)

- 695 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Viewing inventory plate information There are several places from within ProNest where you can find plate inventory information:  l The Plate Inventory database editor  l On the Data tab, select Plate Inventory. Your inventory plates are listed in the grid.  l Reports  l The Plate Inventory Detail and Plate Inventory Summary reports provide the most detailed information about inventory used and created in a job.

The Plate Record View dialog General tab Name The name of your plate  

Type Choices: Rectangular, Circular, Remnant, Skeleton Rectangular The dimensions of a rectangular plate are measured using length and width.   Circular The dimensions of a circular plate are measured using diameter.   Remnant When Remnant is selected you can either import an existing remnant or define a custom remnant.   Skeleton When Skeleton is selected, an existing skeleton must be imported.     Properties

Material The material type and thickness of the plate. This is used to determine which parts can be nested on the plate. Material and thickness information is also used to calculate area, weight, total weight, value and total value for your plate.  

Unit Price Unit price is expressed in monetary units per pound.  

Rotation This describes the initial rotation (in degrees) of your plate. Rotating a plate can be useful if you need to align an irregularly shaped plate (such as a remnant) before nesting.  

Stock Qty The quantity of the plate that is in stock  

Reserved This describes the quantity of plates that is currently reserved. Reserving plates can be useful if you have multiple users who access the

- 696 -

ProNest 2019 Manual same Plate Inventory Database.  

Created The date that your plate was created  

Parent ID For remnant or skeleton plates that were created from inventory plates, this is the ID number of the immediate parent plate. This can be used to track an inventory plate through it's life as it is nested on, cropped, saved, and nested on again.  

Root ID For remnant or skeleton plates that were created from remnant or skeleton inventory plates, this is the ID number of the original, eldest parent plate. This number can be used to track an inventory plate through its life as it is nested on, cropped, saved, and nested on again.   Example:   ID = 101 Parent ID = 0 RootID = 0   ID = 102 Parent ID = 101 RootID = 101   ID = 103 Parent ID = 102 RootID = 101  

- 697 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding plates to the plate inventory You can add a rectangular, circular, remnant, or skeleton plate to the Plate Inventory.

Add a plate to the database  1. Open the Plate Inventory database editor (On the Data tab, click Plate Inventory

).

 2. On the File menu, select New. The Plate Record View dialog will appear.  3. On the General tab, enter a name for your plate.  4. Select the type of plate to add.  5. In the Material box, select a material type and thickness for your plate.  6. Click Calculate. This will automatically calculate the area, weight, total weight, value and total value for your plate.  7. Enter any other plate details as necessary.  8. Click OK.

The Plate Record View dialog When a plate is added to the Plate Inventory, you must define its dimensions and properties. This can be done using the Plate Record View dialog.   Plate Definition

Name The name of your plate  

Type Choices: Rectangular, Circular, Remnant, Skeleton Rectangular The dimensions of a rectangular plate are measured using length and width.   Circular The dimensions of a circular plate are measured using diameter.   Remnant When Remnant is selected you can either import an existing remnant or define a custom remnant.   Skeleton When Skeleton is selected, an existing skeleton must be imported.     Properties

Material You can assign a material type and thickness for your plate. This is used to determine which parts can be nested on the plate. Material and thickness information is also used to calculate area, weight, total weight, value and total value for your plate.  

- 698 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Unit Price Unit price is expressed in monetary units per pound.  

Rotation This describes the initial rotation (in degrees) of your plate. Rotating a plate can be useful if you need to align an irregularly shaped plate (such as a remnant) before nesting.  

Stock Qty The quantity of the plate that is in stock  

Reserved This describes the quantity of plates that should be reserved. Reserving plates can be useful if you have multiple users who access the same Plate Inventory.  

Created The date that your plate was created   Note: Remnants and skeletons that are generated during nesting in ProNest can easily be saved to the Plate Inventory. To learn more, see "Saving remnants and skeletons" on page 707.

- 699 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Creating an inventory plate from a CAD file An alternate way of defining a custom plate size is to create a CAD file of the plate externally, and then import the CAD file into ProNest's Plate Inventory.

Add a CAD file to the Plate Inventory  1. Open the Plate Inventory database editor (On the Data tab, click Plate Inventory

).

 2. On the File menu, select New. The Plate Record View dialog will appear.  3. On the Type tab, select Remnant.  4. Select Create Remnant and then Import Remnant.  5. Navigate to the folder containing your CAD file.  6. Click the Preview button (

). A preview of your plate should appear in the right screen.

Note: If you do not see a preview for your plate, your CAD layers may not be assigned properly. In this case, click the Properties button ( tains the plate's geometry.

) and in the CAD Layers section, assign a process to the CAD layer that con-

 7. Click OK. You will return to the Plate Record View dialog.  8. Enter plate details and properties as you would any other plate.  9. Click OK. Your inventory plate will be added to the plate inventory using the dimensions from the CAD file. This plate can now be modified or added to the plate list and nested on like any other inventory plate.

- 700 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Modifying inventory plates Inventory plates can be modified or deleted at any time from the Plate Inventory database editor (available on the Data tab).   To change plate information:  1. Select the plate.  2. Click the Edit toolbar button (

).

 3. Modify your plate as necessary.  4. Click OK. Your changes will be saved.   To delete an inventory plate:  1. Select the plate.  2. On the File menu, select Delete.  3. Click Yes.

- 701 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Importing a CSV file into the plate inventory You can import a CSV (comma - separated values) file containing a list of plates into the Plate Inventory. Note:

This feature is designed specifically for adding new plates to the database. It will not update or delete existing plates and is not intended as a means of updating the Plate Inventory on a continuous basis, as with an MRP system.

Import a CSV file into the plate inventory  1. Open the Plate Inventory editor (on the Data tab, click Plate Inventory

).

 2. On the File menu, select Import.  3. Using the browser, select the CSV file that you want to import.  4. Click Open. Your plates will be added to inventory.

CSV File Format CSV files are comma delimited and can be created in a spreadsheet program such as Excel. A CSV file must have the .csv extension.

Line 1 : Column Headers The first line of the CSV is reserved for column header names. The first line of the CSV file must contain the following:  

Description,Plate Type,Units,Length,Width,MaterialID,Material,Thickness,Stock Qty,Unit Price,Date Created,Rotation,Heat Num,Stock Num,Misc1,Misc2,Misc3,Location,Reorder limit,Reorder quantity,Supplier,Created by,Plate Path,Grade Lines 2 - n: Plate Records A plate is defined in a single row of the CSV table, beginning at row 2. The following table details the required format for each plate record:   Row/ Line No.

Column

Field

Description

Valid Values

Blank Allowed?

1

(see above)

(see above)

The first line of the CSV is reserved for column header names.

(see above)

no

2

A

Description

The plate name

any text string

no

2

B

Plate type

Plate type expressed as a numerical value:   0 = Rectangular 1 = Circular 2 = Remnant 3 = Skeleton

0, 1, 2, or 3

no

- 702 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Row/ Line No.

Column

2

C

Units

The units used to define/in0 or 1 terpret the material thickness and dimensions.   0 = inch 1 = metric

yes (defaults to inch if blank)

2

D

Length

Plate length (only needed for numerical value rectangular or circular plates).   For circular plates, this is the diameter.

yes (required for rectangular or circular plates)

2

E

Width

Plate width (only needed for rectangular plates).

numerical value

yes (required for rectangular plates)

2

F

Material ID

 

 

yes

2

G

Material

Material type of the plate (must exist in Material Database).

Valid material name

yes (will default to "None" if no match found)

2

H

Thickness

Material thickness of the plate (must exist in Material Database).

Valid thickness

yes

2

I

Stock Qty

The quantity of the plate that numerical value is in stock.

yes

2

J

Unit Price

Unit price is expressed in monetary units per pound.

numerical value

yes

2

K

Date Created

The date and time the plate record was created, in DateTime format (short date)

MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS

yes

2

L

Rotation

The initial rotation angle of the plate.

0.0 - 360.0

yes

2

M

Heat number

 

any text string

yes

2

N

Stock number

 

any text string

yes

2

O

Misc 1

 

any text string

yes

2

P

Misc 2

 

any text string

yes

2

Q

Misc 3

 

any text string

yes

Field

Description

- 703 -

Valid Values

Blank Allowed?

ProNest 2019 Manual

Row/ Line No.

Column

2

R

Location

 

any text string

yes

2

S

Reorder limit

 

any text string

yes

2

T

Reorder quantity

 

any text string

yes

2

U

Supplier

 

any text string

yes

2

V

Created by

The job that created the plate.

any text string

yes

2

W

Plate path  

For remnant or skeleton plates, this is the full path of the CAD file for that plate.

valid file path to CAD file (for example: C:\Program Files\MyPlate.dxf)

yes (required for remnants or skeletons)

2

X

Grade

Material grade of the plate any text string (40 char(must exist in Materials Data- acters maximum) base).

Field

Description

 

- 704 -

Valid Values

Blank Allowed?

yes

ProNest 2019 Manual

Exporting an inventory plate to DXF file You can export a single inventory plate to DXF file. The plate edge geometry will be placed on the 0 (default) layer in the CAD file.

Export an inventory plate to DXF  1. Open the Plate Inventory database editor (Data tab > Plate Inventory  2. In the grid, select the plate that you want to export.  3. On the File menu, select Edit. The Plate Record View dialog will appear.  4. Click the Export to DXF button at the bottom of the dialog.  5. Browse to the folder where you want to save the file.  6. Enter a name for the DXF file. By default, this will match the plate name.  7. Click Save.

 n Creating an inventory plate from a CAD file  n About the Plate Inventory

- 705 -

).

ProNest 2019 Manual

About remnants and skeletons Remnants and skeletons refer to the portions of plate that are left over after a nest is cut.  

 

Remnants

Skeletons

 

  A remnant is the portion of plate that is cropped off after crop lines have been cut (shown in gray). Note that crop lines must be applied to your nest in order to create a remnant.

  A skeleton is the portion of plate that remains after parts have been cut. Note that a plate does not need to have skeleton cutup or crop lines applied in order to become a skeleton.

  Note:

Remnants can also be created from the cut-outs of parts. To learn more, see "Interior remnants" on page 715.

Remnants and skeletons and the Plate Inventory When there is enough viable space remaining on a plate after all of your parts are nested, you may want to catalog and save the skeleton and/or remnant of that nest for use at a later time. After nesting is complete, remnants and skeletons can be saved to the Plate Inventory and used in future nesting.

- 706 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Saving remnants and skeletons You can save skeletons and remnants of nests to the Plate Inventory for use at a later time. Remnants and skeletons are saved during nesting, before a nest is output.

Saving remnants After a plate is cropped, the resulting remnant can be saved to the Plate Inventory.   To save a remnant:  1. On the Nest tab, in the Remnants group, click Save to Inventory. A list of all available remnants for each nest in your job will be listed.  2. Select the nest with the remnant you want to save. By default, remnants are named according to the naming convention specified on the Naming page in Preferences.  3. Click Save Remnants. When the job is output, your remnant will be saved to the Plate Inventory.   Example:   Consider the following nest:

Figure 1   The nest in Figure 1 has been cropped. The remnant created by the crop line appears gray.   Let's say the nest in Figure 1 is ready to be output and you want to save the remnant for later use. You would take the following steps:   Step 1: Save the remnant  1. On the Nest tab, in the Remnants group, click Save to Inventory.  2. Select the nest from the list. If you want, you can rename the remnant.

- 707 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 3. Click Save Remnants.  4. Click OK. Step 2: Generate output  1. On the Home tab, select Output NC.  2. Select your nests and click Output. When you output your nest, the remnant will be saved in the Plate Inventory and will be available for future nesting.

Saving skeletons Once you have nested your parts, you can save the skeleton of that nest in your Plate Inventory for use at a later time.   To save a skeleton:  1. On the Nest tab, in the Remnants group, click Save to Inventory. A list of all available skeletons for each nest in your job will be listed.  2. Select the nest with the skeletons you want to save. By default, skeletons are named according to the naming convention specified on the Naming page in Preferences.  3. Click Save Skeletons. When the job is output, your skeleton will be saved to the Plate Inventory.   Example:   Consider the following nest:

Figure 2   Let's say that you are ready to output the nest in Figure 2 and you want to save the skeleton of this nest for use at a later time. You would take the following steps:   Step 1: Save the skeleton  1. On the Nest tab, in the Remnants group, click Save to Inventory.

- 708 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

 2. Make sure that the appropriate checkboxes are selected. If you want, you can rename the skeleton.  3. Click Save Skeletons.  4. Click OK. Step 2: Generate output  1. On the Home tab, click Output NC.  2. Select your nests and click Output. When you output your nest, the skeleton will be saved in the Plate Inventory and will be available for future nesting.

Note: In your Preferences, on the Miscellaneous tab, an Inventory folder is specified. When you create a skeleton or remnant, a token file of your skeleton or remnant will be stored in the specified Inventory folder. This token file will be brought into the Plate Inventory during output.

- 709 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Nesting on inventory remnants and skeletons You can nest on existing remnant or skeleton plates that have been saved in the Plate Inventory.

Nesting on inventory remnants There are two basic steps to take before you can begin nesting on an inventory remnant plate:    Step 1: Add the remnant to the plate list  1. Open the Edit Plate List window (on the Home tab, click Edit Plate List

).

 2. Click the Inventory tab.  3. Select the remnant from the list of inventory plates.  4. Click Add Plate.  5. Click Return to Nesting to return to the main ProNest window. Step 2: Create a new nest using the remnant as your plate  1. Create a new nest by clicking New Nest in the Home tab.  2. Select Use a plate from the Plate List.  3. Select your remnant plate.  4. Click OK. The remnant will appear in the main nesting area, ready to be nested on. Note: You can also create a new nest that uses your remnant plate by clicking the yellow AutoNest button.

Example: Nesting on an Inventory Remnant   Consider the following nest:

 

- 710 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

  Let's say that you have saved the remnant for this nest to the Plate Inventory and now want to create a new nest using the remnant. Because the remnant is an irregular shape in this case, it will be useful to rotate it before nesting. You would proceed as follows:   Step 1 : Rotate the remnant  1. On the Data tab, click Plate Inventory.  2. Select the remnant from the list and click the Properties button.  3. Change the rotation to 180.  4. Click OK. The initial rotation of the remnant will now be 180°.  5. Close the Plate Inventory Database.  Step 2: Add the remnant to the plate list  1. Open the Edit Plate List window.  2. Click the Inventory tab.  3. Select the remnant from the list of inventory plates.  4. Click Add Plate.  5. Click Return to Nesting to return to the main ProNest window. Step 3: Create a new nest using the remnant as your plate  1. Create a new nest by clicking New Nest in the Home tab.  2. Select Use a plate from the Plate List.  3. Select the remnant.  4. Click OK. Your new nest would appear as follows:  

  The remnant plate can be nested on as you would any other plate.  

- 711 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Nesting on inventory skeletons There are two basic steps to take before you can begin nesting on an inventory skeleton plate:   Step 1: Add the skeleton to the plate list  1. Open the Edit Plate List window (on the Home tab, click Edit Plate List

).

 2. Click the Inventory tab.  3. Select the skeleton from the list of inventory plates.  4. Click Add Plate.  5. Click Return to Nesting to return to the main ProNest window. Step 2: Create a new nest using the skeleton as your plate  1. Create a new nest by clicking New Nest in the Home tab.  2. Select Use a plate from the Plate List.  3. Select your skeleton plate.  4. Click OK. The skeleton will appear in the main nesting area, ready to be nested on. Note: You can also create a new nest that uses your skeleton plate by clicking the yellow AutoNest button. Click here to view example Example: Nesting on an Inventory Skeleton   Consider the following nest:

- 712 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

  Let's say that you have saved the skeleton for this nest to the Plate Inventory Database (as described here) and now want to nest on the skeleton. You would proceed as follows:    Step 1: Add the skeleton to the plate list  1. Open the Edit Plate List window (on the Home tab, click Edit Plate List  2. Click the Inventory tab.  3. Select the skeleton from the list of inventory plates.  4. Click Add Plate.  5. Click Return to Nesting to return to the main ProNest window. Step 2: Create a new nest using the skeleton as your plate  1. Create a new nest by clicking New Nest in the Home tab.  2. Select Use a plate from the Plate List.  3. Select the skeleton.  4. Click OK. Your new nest would appear as follows:  

- 713 -

).

ProNest 2019 Manual

The skeleton plate can be nested on as normal.  

- 714 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Interior remnants Interior remnants are remnants that are created from the cut-outs (or drops) of nested parts. These remnants are then saved to the Plate Inventory, where they are saved for later use.  

The cut-out inside the circular part on this nest can be saved as an interior remnant Select interior remnants on a nest Interior remnants can be manually selected:  1. On the Nest tab, click Interior Remnants. You will enter Interior Remnants mode.  2. Click the cut-outs that you want to save as remnants. Selected interiors will turn gray (or whatever your background color is). To remove the selection from an interior, simply click the cut-out again.  3. When you are finished selecting remnants, click Close.

Automatically select interior remnants You can also automatically select interior remnants on a nest:  1. On the Interior Remnants settings page (Settings > Interior Remnants), make sure that Automatically create interior remnants is selected and that you have entered a minimum area and side length.  2. On the Nest tab, click Interior Remnants. When you enter Interior Remnants mode, all interiors larger than the minimum size specified in settings will be automatically selected as interior remnants.

Save interior remnants  1. On the Nest tab, in the Remnants group, click Save to Inventory. A list of all available remnants for each nest in your job will be listed.  2. Using the check box, select the nests containing the interior remnants you want to save.  3. Click Save Remnants.

- 715 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

The quantity of remnants saved for a given nest is the number of interior remnants plus any remnants that were created by a crop line. When the job is output, your remnant will be saved to the Plate Inventory.

- 716 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

23. PIPE What is a pipe part? The Pipe parametric library is designed for ProNest users who want to automatically generate flat-pattern developments for fabricated, welded, cylindrical pipe joints and transitions used in blowpipe applications. Each fitting is designed with flexibility in mind and includes powerful features like offsets, tilts, extensions and laps. Cylindrical, conical, rectangular boot, elliptical, and rectangle-to-round (take-off) tees can be added to Pipes and Cones.   To view the Pipe library of parts:  l From the Edit Part List window, in the Part Sources explorer, click the Pipe tab.

- 717 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Pipe Shape Reference The Pipe Shape Reference is used to enter required part information for the pipe part you want to add. Using this dialog, you can input part dimensions, add cut-outs to parts, and assign cut processes to part profiles.   To open the Pipe Shape Reference for a part:  l From the Edit Part List window, with a pipe part selected, click the Add Part button. The Pipe Shape Reference is organized as follows: Dimensions grid The upper-left section contains a grid where you can input dimensions for the selected pipe part or added tee.   Reference diagram The upper-right section contains a diagram of the selected pipe part or added tee.   Pipe preview The lower right section contains the pipe preview, which is divided into two perspectives: Layout View and 3D View.   The rest of the Pipe Shape Reference contains areas for adjusting settings, adding tees, assigning cut processes, and opening and saving pipe part developments. You can also enter part name, quantity, and make (With this setting, you can specify whether to include the base part only (Base Part), added tees only (Tees), or include both the base part and tees (Both) in the part that is added to the part list.) using this dialog.

Entering part dimensions  When you click a field in the Dimensions grid, that field will become active and editable. A hint describing the active field will appear at the bottom of the Dimensions grid. The reference diagram to the right will display the pipe part profile in black. The currently active field will be indicated by a blue line. To enter dimensions for a pipe part:  1. In the Pipe Shape Reference, from the Dimensions grid, click the field you want to change.  2. Input a value for that field.  3. Press ENTER. Note: If you enter a numerical value in the dimensions grid that is geometrically impossible, an "Invalid Dimensions" message will appear in the pipe preview. To learn more about using Pipe, explore the following:  l "Using the pipe preview" on page 719  l "Adding a tee" on page 720  l "Pipe settings" on page 723  l "Saving and opening pipe parts" on page 721  l "Assigning cut processes to pipe parts" on page 722 Tip:

You can easily access the online help for a specific pipe part or tee, including a description of that part or tee's dimensions, by pressing the F1 key while the part or tee is selected in the Pipe Shape Reference.

- 718 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Using the pipe preview The pipe preview gives you two different views of your part: Layout View and 3D View. These views will be updated to reflect any changes you make to a pipe development in the Pipe Shape Reference.

Layout View The Layout View displays a 2D flat pattern layout for your pipe part and any added tees.   Layout View functions:  l The arrows (

) in the upper right corner of the Layout View can be used to select either your pipe part or any added tees.  

 l Right-click the part and select Measure to open measurement mode. Click and drag to make a measurement of your part. The selected distance will be displayed at the bottom of the Layout View.  l Right click the part and select Zoom to open area zoom. You can zoom in on an area of your part by dragging a box around the area you want to view.

3D View This gives you a 3D rendering of your pipe part and any added tees. There are also three smaller views of your part on the right side of the 3D View, which show the Top, Front, and Side. You can click anywhere inside these views to reorient the 3D View of your part.   3D View functions:  l To rotate your part, use the arrows in the 3D View (

) or click anywhere on a part and drag it.

 l Right-click the part and select View Wireframe to open a wireframe rendering of the part.  l Rotate the wheel button on your mouse to zoom in or out on your part.  l Right click the part and select Zoom to zoom in or out by a percentage. Tip:

When a pipe part has one or more tees, the currently selected component will appear yellow in the 3D View.

- 719 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Adding a tee Tee branches can be added to the following pipe developments: Tee into Partial Pipe, Straight Pipe, or Offset Cone. To add a tee branch profile to your part:  1. In the Pipe Shape Reference, click the Add Tee button. The Add Tee dialog will appear.  2. Select a shape for your tee.  3. Click OK. Once added, the size, shape, and placement of a tee can be modified using the Dimensions grid. You can view a complete picture of your part and tee in the Pipe preview.   You can use the arrows ( ) above the reference diagram to select either the pipe part profile or any added tees. Note that a part or tee must be selected in order to be modified.   To delete a tee:  1. Select a cut-out using the arrows above the reference diagram.  2. Click the Delete Cut Out button.

- 720 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Saving and opening pipe parts Saving a pipe part You can save pipe parts and open them at a later time. When you save a pipe part, ProNest stores the exact state of your pipe part, including dimensions and added tees, as well as nesting and leads properties that were applied when the part was imported. ProNest pipe part files have a .pjb extension.   To save a pipe part:  1. In the Pipe Shape Reference for your part, click the Save button. The Save Dimension File dialog will appear.  2. Browse to the appropriate folder for your file.  3. In the File name box, type the name for your pipe part file.  4. Click Save. Your pipe part will be saved with the name you specified.

Opening a pipe part You can open a previously saved pipe part using the Pipe Shape Reference.   To open an existing pipe part:  1. Open the Pipe Shape Reference for any pipe part.  2. Click the Open button.  3. Browse to the folder containing the pipe part you want to open.  4. Select the pipe part file.  5. Click Open. Your pipe part will be loaded into the Pipe Shape Reference.

- 721 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Assigning cut processes to pipe parts You can select the type of cut processes to use for the interior and exterior profiles of the part. This can be useful for multi-process machines such as those using plasma and hi-definition plasma. The list of available cut processes comes from the cut processes supported by your current ProNest machine.   To assign cut processes for a pipe part:  1. Open the Pipe Shape Reference for your part.  2. Click the Cut Process button.  3. Select a cut process from the list of available processes for both interior and exterior profiles.  4. Click OK.

- 722 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Pipe settings Using pipe settings, you can control the lay-out and default values used for pipe parts. Pipe settings apply to all pipe parts and tees in ProNest.

Dimension Options Measure dimensions from The dimension option determines whether diameters and rectangular dimensions are calculated from the center line, inside, or outside diameter of the material.   Choices: Center, Inside, Outside  

Outside Up development You can specify if the sheet of material is laying with the outside up or outside down (inside up). If this box is selected, pipe parts will be processed as though the sheet is laying with the outside up.  

Adjust transition height for material thickness When selected, ProNest will take material thickness into account when calculating height for part entities that are not parallel to the center line. Generally, this will result in a more accurate measurement.

Tee Options Measure dimensions from This dimension option determines whether diameters and rectangular dimensions are calculated from the center line, inside, or outside diameter of the material.   Choices: Center, Inside, Outside  

Tee joint location Determines the way the tee fits up with the hole.   Choices: Center, Inside, Outside  

Material thickness The thickness of the material.  

2 stitch Tee size This value represents the minimum diameter hole that would have 2 stitches. Anything less would not have stitches.  

4 stitch Tee size This value represents the minimum diameter hole that would have 4 stitches. Anything smaller would have either 2 stitches or none.  

Stitch lead-in length The desired length of the stitch lead-in.

Bend/Quarter Marks Type This defines the type of mark. - 723 -

ProNest 2019 Manual   Choices: Quarter, Bend, (None), Half Mark Quarter Quarter marks involve a small deviation in the motion of the torch. These are used when aligning pipe transitions that must be welded together.   Bend This allows material to be marked for bending.   (None) When None is selected, no marks will be applied.   Half Mark Half marks are applied just like quarter marks, except that there are fewer marks made. This can be useful for smaller parts.  

Style The style of mark is specified here.   Choices: Circle, Notch, Slot, Dwell, Punch, Scribe Circle

The size of the circle is dependent on the Mark Size entered. Note that this style involves cutting a previously cut kerf.

Notch

The size of the notch is dependent on the Mark Size entered.

Slot

The length of the slot is dependent on the Mark Size entered. Note that this style involves cutting a previously cut kerf.

Dwell

The torch/head will not deviate from the profile. A dwell command will be inserted at the specified mark point along the profile, causing the torch to stall briefly at the bend/mark point.   Note: The dwell mark is not visible in the Layout or 3D views.

Punch

If your machine supports a punch process, the punch will be placed at the mark point.

Scribe

If your machine supports a scribe process, the bend mark can be scribed. The length of the scribe is dependent on the Mark Size entered.

- 724 -

ProNest 2019 Manual  

Mark size Marks are used when aligning pipe transitions that must be welded together. You can input the size of the mark here or leave at 0 for no marks. The mark can either be done with the torch or scribed with a marking tool.  

Bend frequency This is a measurement for how often the bends used to form parts will be marked. A value of 1 indicates a mark at every bend line; a value of 2 would be at every other bend line, etc. This only applies when Type is set to "Bend".  

Default Values Top Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.  

Bottom Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part.  

Left Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part.  

Right Lap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part.  

Max segment size The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature.  

Kerf width The width of the torch. This is used to determine the proper part separation so the common line in pre-nested parts does not infringe on either part.  

Stitch width The width of the stitch cut when cutting the offset as a single piece. (Pre-Nested)  

Material thickness Default thickness of the material.  

Plate X Length of the plate.  

Plate Y Width of the plate.  

Line to Arc Options Convert lines to arcs When selected, Pipe will attempt to convert developed, segmented curves into arcs. In general, this will result in smaller files and a smoother cut.   - 725 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Maximum radius Some CNC controllers have limitations as to the size of an arc motion that they can handle. With Convert lines to arcs selected, Pipe will automatically turn as many line segments as it can into a single arc when viable. You may specify a maximum arc radius if your controller is limited to a certain size. If this value is set to 0, all curvatures will be developed as small straight lines. Note: This setting is only applicable if Convert lines to arcs is selected.

Arc tolerance The maximum allowable distance that arcs can be from the developed curve when replacing line segments. Replacing the lines of a developed curve will smooth the curve and create smaller CNC files but if the arc tolerance is too large, accuracy will be diminished. Note: This setting is only applicable if Convert lines to arcs is selected.

- 726 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Angled Pipe

  Dimension

Description

Max Segment Size

The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature.  

Pipe Diameter

The diameter of the pipe section.  

Pipe Length

The short side length of the pipe section.  

Left Angle

The angle of the cut on the left of the pipe. The angle runs counter-clockwise from the bottom of the pipe.  

Right Angle

The angle of the cut on the right of the pipe. The angle runs counter-clockwise from the bottom of the pipe.  

Left Hand Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part.  

Right Hand Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part.  

Top Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.  

Bottom Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part.  

Weld Gap

Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds.  

Number of Pieces

The number of pieces that will make up the pipe.  

Angle of Weld Seam

The rotation angle of the weld seam (in degrees).  

- 727 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Ellipse in Rectangle

  Dimension

Description

Points per Quarter

The points per quarter defines how many lines will make up a quarter of the ellipse. The higher the number of points, the smoother the opening.  

Rectangle Length

Rectangle length in the X (horizontal) direction.  

Rectangle Width

Rectangle width in the Y (vertical) direction.  

Major Diameter

The larger diameter of the ellipse. This value can be calculated if the minor diameter and angle are provided.  

Minor Diameter

The smaller diameter of the ellipse. This value must be provided.  

X Offset

Offset in inches of the center of the ellipse from the center of the rectangle. A positive value shifts the ellipse to the left.  

Y Offset

Offset in inches of the center of the ellipse from the center of the rectangle. A positive value shifts the ellipse upward.  

Angle

The angle that the ellipse will be tilted. The angle will be used to calculate the major diameter if none is provided. Since this part refers to the diameters, this will be the longer of the 2 cross sectional dimensions.  

- 728 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Flange

  Dimension

Description

Outside Diameter

The outside diameter of the flange.  

Inside Diameter

The inside diameter of the flange.  

Width

The width of the flange, calculated by subtracting the inside radius from the outside radius. If the width is used the OD will not be needed.  

Bolt Circle Diameter

The diameter of a circle running through the center of the bolt holes.  

Bolt Hole Diameter

The diameter of each of the bolt holes.  

Angle Adjustment

An adjustment in the angle at which the bolt holes will be located on the flange. This is an important option for fabrication of split flanges. For instance; if the flange has 6 holes and is to be cut into 4 parts; just use Ang. Adj. = 12 degrees and the cuts will not interfere with the holes.  

Number of Holes

Number of bolt holes or marks required.  

Hole Type

Cut or Punch - If an impact (punch) marker, zinc marker or laser etch function is available, this will enable the machine to locate the holes without actually cutting. An excellent idea for small diameter holes that need a special finish on them. Use the CUT option to cut the hole.  

Pieces per Flange

Number of pieces to make up a single flange. Use with "Angle Adjustment" to avoid cut sections from crossing bolt holes.  

- 729 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

ID OD Ellipse

  Dimension

Description

Points per Quarter

The points per quarter defines how many lines will make up a quarter of the ellipse. The higher the number of points, the smoother the arc.  

Outside Major Diameter

The major (larger) diameter of the outside ellipse. This value can be calculated when using the minor diameter and angle. (Optional)  

Outside Minor Diameter

The minor (smaller) diameter of the outside ellipse. This value must be provided.  

Inside Major Diameter

The larger diameter of the inside ellipse. This value cannot be greater than the outside values.  

Inside Minor Diameter

The smaller diameter of the inside ellipse. This value cannot be greater than the outside values.  

Angle

The angle at which the ellipse will be tilted. The angle will be used to calculate the major diameters of the ellipse if none is provided.  

- 730 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Offset Cone

  Dimension

Description

Max Segment Size

The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature. Parts with higher numbers generally have developed curves that are less "smooth" than those with smaller numbers. For instance, the curve using 1 inch as maximum segment size will be smoother than the same curve using 4 inches as the maximum segment size. The curve with 1 inch segments will have 4 times the number of points as the one using 4 inch segments. More segments yield a smoother curve, but also produce a larger file.  

Cone Top Diameter

The diameter of the cone top.  

Cone Base Diameter

The diameter of the cone base (bottom)  

Cone Height

The vertical height of the cone  

Cone X Offset

The X direction offset of the top center from the base center. Looking at the plan view; positive X is to the left, negative X is to the right.  

Cone Y Offset

The Y direction offset of the top center from the base center. Looking at the plan view; positive Y is up and negative Y is down.  

Base Tilt Angle

The tilt angle for the base of the cone. (Optional - this field is not required to create the offset cone)  

Base Rotation Angle

If the base of the cone is tilted, specify the rotation the tilt should be at in relation to the seam of the cone.  

Top Tilt Angle

The tilt angle for the top of the cone. (Optional)  

Top Rotation Angle

If the top of the cone is tilted, specify what rotation the tilt should be at in relation to the seam of the cone.  

Left Hand Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part.  

Right Hand Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part.  

Top Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.  

- 731 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Dimension

Description

Bottom Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part.  

Weld Gap

Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds.  

Top Collar

This is a separate piece of the cone that extends off of the top. It has the same diameter as the top of the cone.  

Bottom Collar

This is a separate piece of the cone that extends off of the bottom. It has the same diameter as the bottom of the cone.  

Number of Pieces

Number of pieces to make the offset cone.  

Inside Base / Outside Top

If "No" is selected, the part will be measured as designated in the settings, if ‘Measure inside base, outside top dims’ is selected, the part will be measured from inside the base of the part, and outside the top of the cone.  

Angle of Weld Seam

This describes the rotation of the Weld Seam (in degrees)  

- 732 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Offset Pipe

  Dimension

Description

Elbow Diameter

The diameter of the elbow. This value must be no more than half the length of the offset.  

Elbow Radius

The radius of the elbow which will be used for the construction of the offset.  

Length of Offset

The overall length between the two pipe ends, excluding the extensions. This value must be AT LEAST two times the radius of the elbow.  

Horizontal Offset

The horizontal distance between the centers of the two parallel pipes being offset.  

Vertical Offset

The vertical distance between the centers of the two parallel pipes being offset.  

Extension A

The length of the added material to one end gore of the offset.  

Extension B

The length of the added material to the other end gore of the offset.  

Number of Segments

The default is 5 segments. You may change this number to suit your development. This can be any odd number from 3 to 31.  

Pieces per Segment

The number of pieces used to develop each segment.  

Kerf Width

This value is required only when the elbow is cut as Prenested. Since there is a common cut between gores, an accurate kerf value is necessary to ensure the correct gore dimensions. Remember, this is the full kerf diameter.  

Stitch Width

The width of the stitch cut when cutting the off-set as a single piece. (Pre-Nested)  

Separate Parts

Pre-Nest – The parts are nested together, connected by 233 stitches (tabs). Separate Parts – Each segment is treated as an individual part.  

Stitch Cut

Stitch cut can only be answered "YES" if ‘separate parts’ is set to ‘Pre-Nested’.  

- 733 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Dimension

Description

Seam Type

SIDE will put all the weld seams on the side of the offset pipe, alternating from left to right. By forming every other gore inside out, all seams will end up on the right or left. Heel/Throat locates the seam on the short side of the offset pipe.  

Left Hand Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part.  

Right Hand Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part.  

Top Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.  

Bottom Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part.  

Weld Gap

Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds.  

Max Segment Size

The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature.

- 734 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Rectangle to Round

  Dimension

Description

Max Segment Size

The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature.  

Rectangle Length

The length of the rectangular base.  

Rectangle Width

The width of the rectangular base.  

Transition Height

The vertical height of the transition. This height is derived from a plane that passes horizontally through the center of the circular end (no matter what the tilt), to a parallel plane that passes horizontally through the center of the rectangular end (no matter what tilt).  

Exit Diameter

The diameter of the exit. This shape will always be maintained as a circle no matter what the tilt.  

Exit Center X Offset

The offset of the center of the exit in relation to the center of the rectangle. A positive value moves the center to the left, a negative, to the right.  

Exit Center Y Offset

The offset of the circular center from the center of the rectangle in the positive (up) or negative (down) Y direction.  

Exit Tilt Angle

The tilt of the exit from the horizontal plane. When looking at the transition in elevation, with the diameter on top, if the diameter is horizontal then this is zero (0). The right side MUST rotate down (clockwise). This will establish the tilt "Angle". To adjust the position of the angle use the next input field.  

Exit Rotation Angle

The rotation of the low point of the exit tilt, as viewed from the plan view. A zero value locates the low point at the 3 o'clock position. A positive angle rotates this low point in a counter-clockwise direction. (i.e.: 60° rotates the low point to about the 1 o'clock position and 120° rotates the low point to the 11 o'clock etc...)  

Rectangle Tilt Angle

The tilt of the rectangular portion of the transition from the horizontal plane. Looking at the elevation, a tilt of 30° will drop the right side 30° from the center of the rectangle, while the left will rise by the same degree. A negative number will reverse this tilt. In order to tilt the bottom front and back, the entire part will have to be described from the side, thus, reorienting

- 735 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Dimension

Description

all other dimensions.   Joint Type

Side Heel/Corner Specify where you would like the welds/seams: on the corners (in the middle of the bend) or on the flat sides. If you choose 8 pieces, there will be a bend at the corners and the sides.  

Skirt Length 1

A straight extension added to the rectangular base of the transition at point 1. This extension can be used as the continuation of the rectangular end or bent to form a connecting flange. The length of the extension at the remaining corner will be calculated automatically.  

Skirt Length 2

A straight extension added to the rectangular base of the transition at point 2. This extension can be used as the continuation of the rectangular end or bent to form a connecting flange. The length of the extension at the remaining corner will be calculated automatically.  

Skirt Length 3

A straight extension added to the rectangular base of the transition at point 3. This extension can be used as the continuation of the rectangular end or bent to form a connecting flange. The length of the extension at the remaining corner will be calculated automatically.  

Left Hand Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part.  

Right Hand Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part.  

Top Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.  

Weld Gap

Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds.  

Top Collar

This is a separate piece of the cone that extends off of the top. It has the same diameter as the top of the cone.  

Number of Pieces

The rectangle to round can be made from 1, 2, 3, 4, or 8 pieces.  

Inside Base / Outside Top Dimensions

If "No" is selected, the part will be measured as designated in the settings, if "Measure inside base, outside top dimensions" is selected, the part will be measured from inside the base of the part, and outside the top of the cone.  

- 736 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Reducing Elbow

  Dimension

Description

Max Segment Size

The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature.  

Entrance Diameter

The entrance or larger diameter of the reducing elbow.  

Exit Diameter

The exit or smaller diameter of the elbow.  

Elbow Entrance Radius

This measurement is the horizontal distance from the center of the elbow entrance radius to the elbow exit.  

Elbow Exit Radius

This measurement is the vertical distance from the center of the elbow exit radius to the elbow entrance.  

Elbow Angle

From 1 to 359 degrees. Be careful when going beyond 180 degrees.  

Number of Segments

The number of sections (gores) used to make the elbow. This number cannot exceed 12.  

Kerf Width

The width of the torch. This is used to determine the proper part separation so the common line does not infringe on prenested parts.  

Stitch Width

The desired width of the stitch.  

Separate Parts

Pre-Nest – The parts are nested together, connected by stitches (tabs). Separate Parts – Each segment is treated as an individual part.  

Stitch Cut

Stitch cut can only be answered "YES" if ‘separate parts’ is set to ‘Pre-Nested’. The stitches (tabs) hold the segments together.  

Seam Type

SIDE will put all the weld seams on the side of the elbow, alternating from left to right. By forming every other gore inside out, all seams will end up on the right or left. Heel/Throat locates the seam on the short side of the elbow.  

Pieces per Gore

The number of individual pieces used to make a single section (gore). (1,2,4,8)

- 737 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Dimension

Description

  Left Hand Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part.  

Right Hand Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part.  

Top Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.  

Bottom Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part.  

Weld Gap

Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds.  

Top Collar

This is a separate piece of the cone that extends off of the top. It has the same diameter as the top of the cone.  

Bottom Collar

This is a separate piece of the cone that extends off of the bottom. It has the same diameter as the bottom of the cone.  

- 738 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Segmented Elbow

  Dimension

Description

Elbow Diameter

The diameter of the elbow.  

Elbow Radius

The elbow center-line radius. In all cases this radius MUST be greater than one-half of the diameter.  

Extension A

The length of the extensions to be added to the end gores. This can save an extra weld seam at the end of the elbow. The A extension is the lower.  

Extension B

The length of the extensions to be added to the end gores. This can save an extra weld seam at the end of the elbow. The B extension is the higher.  

Elbow Angle

The angle of the elbow. When getting down to very small angles (10° or less) be very careful to look at the flat layout to check for interference with quarter marks and if the part can really be cut. The limit is 180 degrees. If you need more than 180, try the reducing elbow with the same size entrance and exit.  

Number of Gores

The number of sections (gores) used to make the elbow.  

Pieces per Gores

The number of individual pieces used to make a single section (gore).  

Kerf Width

This value is used only when the elbow is cut as a single piece. Since there is a common cut between gores, an accurate kerf value is necessary to ensure the correct gore dimensions.  

Stitch Width

The stitch width is the width of the tab holding the gores together when pre-nested.  

Separate Parts

Pre-Nest – The parts are nested together, connected by stitches (tabs). Separate Parts – Each segment is treated as an individual part.  

Stitch Cut

Stitch cut can only be answered "YES" if ‘separate parts’ is set to ‘Pre-Nested’.  

Seam Type

SIDE will put all the weld seams on the side of the elbow, alternating from left to right. By forming every other gore inside out, all seams will end up on the right or left. HEEL/THROAT

- 739 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Dimension

Description

will develop the seams alternating from the heel to the throat. To get all the seams on the heel (or throat) takes a little more creativity. Call us and we'll be happy to explain.   Left Hand Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part.  

Right Hand Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part.  

Top Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.  

Bottom Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part.  

Weld Gap

Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds.  

Max Segment Size

The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature.  

- 740 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Straight Pipe

  Dimension

Description

Max Segment Size

The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature.  

Pipe Diameter

The diameter of the pipe segment.  

Pipe Length

The length of the pipe segment, measured from end to end.  

Left Hand Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part.  

Right Hand Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part.  

Top Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.  

Weld Gap

Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds.  

Number of Pieces

The number of pieces used to make the straight pipe. (1 - 36)  

Angle of Weld Seam

The rotation angle of the weld seam (in degrees).  

- 741 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Tee into Partial Pipe

  Dimension

Description

Max Segment Size

The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature.  

Pipe Diameter

The diameter of the main pipe section.  

Material at Top

The amount of material on the pipe section extending above the tee opening. This is measured on the flat layout.  

Material at Bottom

The amount of material on the pipe section extending below the tee opening. This is measured on the flat layout.  

Material at Sides

The amount of material on the pipe section extending beyond the tee opening. This is measured on the flat layout.  

Left Hand Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part.  

Right Hand Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part.  

Top Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.  

Bottom Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part.  

Number of Pieces

The number of pieces that will make up the pipe can be 1, 2, 4, 8, or 16.  

- 742 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Trapezoid to Round

  Dimension

Description

Max Segment Size

The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature.  

Trapezoid Width

The width of the trapezoidal base.  

Length of Base 1  

The length of one of the parallel sides of the trapezoidal base.  

Length of Base 2

The length of the other parallel side of the trapezoidal base.  

Left Trapezoid Angle

This describes the angle on the left side of the trapezoid  

Right Trapezoid Angle

This describes the angle on the right side of the trapezoid.  

Transition Height

The vertical height of the transition. This height is derived from a plane that passes horizontally through the center of the circular end (no matter what the tilt), to a parallel plane that passes horizontally through the center of the rectangular end (no matter what tilt).  

Exit Diameter Angle

The diameter of the exit. This shape will always be maintained as a circle no matter what the tilt.  

Exit Center X Offset

The offset of the center of the exit in relation to the center of the rectangle. A positive value moves the center to the left, a negative, to the right.  

Exit Center Y Offset

The offset of the circular center from the center of the rectangle in the positive (up) or negative (down) Y direction.  

Exit Tilt Angle

The tilt of the exit from the horizontal plane. When looking at the transition in elevation, with the diameter on top, if the diameter is horizontal then this is zero (0). The right side MUST rotate down (clockwise). This will establish the tilt "Angle". To adjust the position of the angle use the next input field.  

Exit Rotation Angle

The rotation of the low point of the exit tilt, as viewed from the plan view. A zero value locates the low point at the 3 o'clock position. A positive angle rotates this low point in a

- 743 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Dimension

Description

counter-clockwise direction. (i.e.: 60° rotates the low point to about the 1 o'clock position and 120° rotates the low point to the 11 o'clock etc...)   Rectangle Tilt Angle

The tilt of the rectangular portion of the transition from the horizontal plane. Looking at the elevation, a tilt of 30° will drop the right side 30° from the center of the rectangle, while the left will rise by the same degree. A negative number will reverse this tilt. In order to tilt the bottom front and back, the entire part will have to be described from the side, thus, reorienting all other dimensions.  

Joint Type

Side Heel/Corner Specify where you would like the welds/seams: on the corners (in the middle of the bend) or on the flat sides. If you choose 8 pieces, there will be a bend at the corners and the sides.  

Skirt Length 1

A straight extension added to the rectangular base of the transition at point 1. This extension can be used as the continuation of the rectangular end or bent to form a connecting flange. The length of the extension at the remaining corner will be calculated automatically.  

Skirt Length 2

A straight extension added to the rectangular base of the transition at point 2. This extension can be used as the continuation of the rectangular end or bent to form a connecting flange. The length of the extension at the remaining corner will be calculated automatically.  

Skirt Length 3

A straight extension added to the rectangular base of the transition at point 3. This extension can be used as the continuation of the rectangular end or bent to form a connecting flange. The length of the extension at the remaining corner will be calculated automatically.  

Left Hand Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part.  

Right Hand Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part.  

Top Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.  

Weld Gap

Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds.  

Top Collar

This is a separate piece of the cone that extends off of the top. It has the same diameter as the top of the cone.  

Number of Pieces

The rectangle to round can be made from 1, 2, 3, 4, or 8 pieces.  

Inside Base / Outside Top Dimensions

If "no" is selected, the part will be measured as designated in the settings, if "Measure inside base, outside top dimensions" is selected, the part will be measured from inside the base of

- 744 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Dimension

Description

the part, and outside the top of the cone.  

- 745 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Y Joint

  Dimension

Description

Max Segment Size

The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature.  

Base Diameter

The diameter at the base or waist of the Y-Joint.  

Diameter 1

The diameter to be established at the end (cuff) of the leg. Like the base diameter, this is a true circle and will retain its circular shape no matter what orientation it's in.  

Vertical Dimension 1

The distance from the base line to the center of the leg opening.  

Horizontal Dimension 1

The horizontal distance from the base diameter center line to the center of the leg opening.  

Angle from Base 1

The angle in degrees, from the base line to the centerline of the leg.  

Length of Leg 1

The linear distance measured from the center of the base opening to the center of the leg opening.  

Angle of Left Pipe

The angle of the left leg opening (cuff) with respect to the plane of the base (horizontal). Zero (0) makes the opening parallel to the base. Minus one (-1) makes the angle perpendicular to the center-line of the leg.  

Diameter 2

The diameter to be established at the end (cuff) of the leg. Like the base diameter, this is a true circle and will retain its circular shape no matter what orientation it's in.  

Vertical Dimension 2

The vertical distance from the base diameter center line to the center of the leg opening.  

Horizontal Dimension 2

The horizontal distance from the base diameter center line to the center of the leg opening.  

Angle from Base 2

The angle in degrees, from the base line to the centerline of the leg.  

Length of Leg 2

The linear distance measured from the center of the base opening to the center of the leg opening.  

Angle of Right Pipe

The angle of the right leg opening (cuff) with respect to the plane of the base (horizontal). Zero (0) makes the opening parallel to the base. Minus one (-1) makes the angle perpendicular to the center-line of the leg.

- 746 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Dimension

Description

  Left Hand Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part.  

Right Hand Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part.  

Top Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.  

Bottom Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part.  

Weld Gap

Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds.  

Leg 1 Collar

This describes the rotation of the Weld Seam (in degrees)  

Leg 2 Collar

This is a separate piece of the cone that extends off of Leg 2. Its diameter is the same as Diameter 2 of the Y Joint.  

Bottom Collar

This is a separate piece of the cone that extends off of the bottom. It has the same diameter as the bottom of the cone.  

Number of Pieces

The number of pieces required to make the Y-Joint. (Maximum 36)  

- 747 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Conical Tee

  Dimension

Description

Max Segment Size

The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature.  

Diameter at End

The diameter to be established at the end (cuff) of the tee.  

Diameter at Base

The diameter at the base or waist of the tee. This is where the tee meets the pipe. Like the end diameter, this is a true circle and will retain its circular shape no matter what orientation it's in.  

Elevation at End

The height of the end of the tee. This is the vertical distance from the bottom of the pipe to the end of the tee. This dimension can be used to control the vertical position of the tee along the pipe.  

Distance from CL to End

The horizontal distance from the center line of the pipe to the end of the tee.  

Incline Angle

The angle (in degrees) of the tee relative to the vertical center line of the pipe.  

Angle

This determines the horizontal position of the tee on the base part.  

Offset from Radial

This is the amount that the tee is offset from the radial line of the pipe.   

Saddle Width

The saddle width is defined here.  

Saddle Pieces

The number of saddle pieces. (1, 2, 4, or 8 pieces)  

Copies of Tee

If you want to make copies of the tee, you can specify the number of additional copies to make here.  

Copy of offset angle

This defines the rotational angle (in degrees) for copies of the tee.  

Left Hand Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part.  

Right Hand Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part.  

Top Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.

- 748 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Dimension

Description

  Bottom Side Lap

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part.  

Weld Gap

Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds.  

Number of Pieces

The number of pieces required to make the tee. (1,2,4,8,or 16 pieces)  

Angle of Weld Seam

This describes the rotation angle of the weld seam (in degrees).  

- 749 -

ProNest 2019 Manual

Cylindrical Tee

  Dimension

Description

Max Segment Size

The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature.  

Diameter of Tee

The diameter of the cylinder.  

Elevation at End

The height of the end of the tee. This is the vertical distance from the bottom of the pipe to the end of the tee. This dimension can be used to control the vertical position of the tee along the pipe.  

Distance from CL to End

The horizontal distance from the center line of the pipe to the end of the tee.  

Incline Angle

The angle (in degrees) of the tee relative to the vertical center line of the pipe.  

Angle

This determines the horizontal position of the tee on the base part. (0 - 359 degrees)  

Offset from Radial

This is the amount that the tee is offset from the radial line of the pipe.   

Saddle Width

The saddle width is defined here.  

Saddle Pieces

The number of saddle pieces. (1,